75
Applicator Help pages of Sizing Flow Dimensioning of Flow meters 1 Overview.......................................................................................................................................................... 3 1.1 Basics ....................................................................................................................................................... 4 2 Sizing ................................................................................................................................................................ 5 2.1 General parameters ................................................................................................................................ 5 2.2 Process data ............................................................................................................................................ 9 2.2.1 Process data .................................................................................................................................. 10 2.3 Sensor / Pipe.......................................................................................................................................... 17 2.4 Meter Operating Range ......................................................................................................................... 19 2.5 Calculated Results ................................................................................................................................. 20 2.6 Warnings ............................................................................................................................................... 22 2.7 Button center ........................................................................................................................................ 23 3 Custody transfer ............................................................................................................................................ 25 4 Accessories .................................................................................................................................................... 28 4.1 Accessories page ................................................................................................................................... 28 4.2 Activating a checkbox ............................................................................................................................ 28 4.3 Accessories within the order code ........................................................................................................ 29 5 Fluid Properties page..................................................................................................................................... 31 5.1 General description ............................................................................................................................... 31 5.2 Parameter groups .................................................................................................................................. 35 5.2.1 Fluid information ........................................................................................................................... 35 5.2.2 Fluid Description............................................................................................................................ 35 5.2.3 Basic Fluid Parameters .................................................................................................................. 36 5.2.4 Constants ....................................................................................................................................... 36 5.2.5 Typical Operating Conditions ........................................................................................................ 37 5.2.6 Temperature / Viscosity ................................................................................................................ 37 5.2.7 Temperature / Density .................................................................................................................. 38 5.2.8 Temperature / Heat capacity ........................................................................................................ 38 5.2.9 Temperature / Vapor pressure...................................................................................................... 38 5.2.10 Gas mixture ................................................................................................................................... 38 5.2.11 Fluid properties and results........................................................................................................... 39 5.2.12 Reference values ........................................................................................................................... 40 5.2.13 Measuring task .............................................................................................................................. 40 5.2.14 Restriction on flowmeters ............................................................................................................. 41

Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use

  • Upload
    others

  • View
    3

  • Download
    0

Embed Size (px)

Citation preview

Page 1: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use

Applicator Help pages of

Sizing Flow ndashDimensioning of Flow meters

1 Overview 3

11 Basics 4

2 Sizing 5

21 General parameters 5

22 Process data 9

221 Process data 10

23 Sensor Pipe 17

24 Meter Operating Range 19

25 Calculated Results 20

26 Warnings 22

27 Button center 23

3 Custody transfer 25

4 Accessories 28

41 Accessories page 28

42 Activating a checkbox 28

43 Accessories within the order code 29

5 Fluid Properties page 31

51 General description 31

52 Parameter groups 35

521 Fluid information 35

522 Fluid Description 35

523 Basic Fluid Parameters 36

524 Constants 36

525 Typical Operating Conditions 37

526 Temperature Viscosity 37

527 Temperature Density 38

528 Temperature Heat capacity 38

529 Temperature Vapor pressure 38

5210 Gas mixture 38

5211 Fluid properties and results 39

5212 Reference values 40

5213 Measuring task 40

5214 Restriction on flowmeters 41

53 Setting reference conditions 41

54 Creating a User Defined Fluid 41

55 Import and Export of Fluids 42

56 Fluid Properties report 43

6 Compare size and sensor 44

61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing) 44

62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page) 45

7 Chart page 47

71 Introduction 47

72 General Parameters 47

73 Process data 47

74 Curves 47

75 Flow limits 47

76 Chart 48

8 Order Code 49

81 Order code 50

82 Order code options 51

83 Extended order code 51

831 General 51

832 Device parameter data settings 52

84 Button center 53

9 Conversion Calculator 55

10 Unit Defaults 56

11 Corrosion Check (CorDB) 57

111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB) 57

112 Using Corrosion Check 59

12 Settings (Sizing Flow) 61

13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines 63

131 General 63

132 Fluid engine 63

133 Gas engine 67

14 Print Sizing 68

15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) 70

16 Online Update 75

1 Overview

Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments You will be supported in

many different use cases such as the correct dimensioning selection of materials process connections

accessories and calibrations

The main pages of Sizing Flow

Please note the visible pages can vary according to the application or the selected fluid The display also

depends on whether you have installed the Applicator on your computer or use it in the internet You can

decide which pages you would like to use with the help of the Settings function

Depending on the screen width and the resolution of your monitor or tablet Applicator pages may be

displayed as a continuous list or in two columns

Sizing Flow consists of many different pages which are accessible via the tabs at the top of the sizing window

These pages are

Sizing - Your main working area to dimension a flowmeter

Custody Transfer ndash Check the process parameters within ldquoCustody Transferrdquo

Accessories - Select suitable accessories for a flowmeter

Chart - Graphical check of measured error and pressure loss over flow range

Order code - Complete the full order code and add accessories

Unit Default- Set your preferred units and your referenced values

Corrosion Check - Check the corrosion resistance of the wetted material depending on process

temperature

Special functions and features of Sizing Flow

There are many more features which are accessible on the sizing pages or in the settings menus The exact

means of calling them are described in the manual

Printing ndashCreate reports of instrument sizing immediately

Online Update ndash get the latest version of Applicator ndash only needed when using the offline

version

Fluid Properties page - Check liquids and gas properties and create user defined fluids

Compare - Compare and check up to three different sizes and flowmeters at a glance

Conversion Calculator - Conversion of dimensions in different units

Settings - Set your preferences in Applicator

PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

Fluid and gas property engines ndash Information for calculating fluid properties

11 Basics

Before you start with Sizing Flow you should know the flowmeter family On the pages of Applicator Selection

or Industry Applications you will find recommendations for suitable families

On several pages Sizing Flow Applicator supports the engineering process with useful and necessary functions

to find the most suitable size of the flowmeter to calculate the fluid properties in compliance with process

conditions and to check the meter and process connection according to the requirements of the application

The fluid properties are calculated with the help of the Applicator fluid and gas engine depending on the

selected fluid and process conditions (flow temperature pressure)

Parameter help

Parameter help offers immediate support for understanding the parameters used in Sizing Flow without the

need to open the help pages Parameters for which an explanation exists are indicated by an ldquoirdquo icon When

touched with the mouse pointer the program opens a separate window with an explanation Close the window

by clicking on the OK button

Back to top

2 Sizing

The sizing page is divided into three sections

21 General parameters

Within the general parameters section you can choose the measuring task fluid principlesensor and the

transmitter Additionally the status of the fluid the corresponding calculation standard the selected

flowmeter and the order code appears A Tag field allows the entry of a measuring point tag

Measuring task

Selects the measuring task Several possibilities are available for example the standard measuring task

ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo is used for the normal sizing functionality or ldquoCustody TransferBillingrdquo for sizing with

the appropriate approvals For details please check the measuring task page

Fluid

The fluid selection dropdown list shows possible fluids associated with the selected measuring task

This field displays the default or currently selected fluid Open the dropdown list of available fluids A fluid is

selected either by clicking with the mouse on the fluid in the dropdown list or just by using the key Enter In

the second case the fluid must be indicated by typing in the first letter The list will then only contain fluids

which begin with that letter

Properties

You can view fluid properties with the Properties button For more information about fluids see Fluid

Properties

StandardState

Standard

The first field indicates the calculation standard used for the selected media type

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The overview below shows the assignment of the media types to the

relevant standards and processes used

Media type Standardprocess Fluid properties editable

Fluids no water (example

dummy)

Support points (linear

interpolation)

Yes

Water (drinking water dummy) IAPWS-97 No

Gases user-defined (example

dummy)

Ideal gas Yes

Gases user-defined (example

dummy)

Redlich-Kwong Yes

Gases gas mixtures (example

dummy)

NEL ndash identical to the t-mass Gas

Engine

No

Natural gas NX-19 and other standards (in

preparation)

No

Each calculation standard has different effects on the direct input of medium properties that are already

known to the user The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo and ldquoIdeal Gasrdquo standards (reliable results for gas

properties with operating pressure less than 20 bar ndash easy start with lsquoDummy-Gas (Air) based on Ideal Gasrsquo) -

are therefore open for the manual input of medium properties The data cannot be edited manually if the fluid

properties are calculated with official standards (eg IAWPS) Fluid properties which are calculated with

officially approved standards can be used as reference values (eg on-site density calibration)

State

The second field indicates the physical status of the currently selected fluid liquid gas superheated steam or

saturated steam These four states have been defined for pragmatic reasons Each of them requires its own set

of formulae to calculate the fluid properties This field is not editable

Please note The value of the State field of the fluid you have selected must match the state of your fluid at

the desired operating temperature and pressure If this is not the case Applicator informs you with a warning

message

Example if you select a gas which acts like a liquid at the desired operating temperature and pressure all

calculations and results will be invalid The formulae for liquids and gases are different The program will NOT

automatically switch to the correct set of formulae based on the operating conditions The fluid and flowmeter

state compatibility checking will also be affected

Tag

This field allows the user to enter the measuring point tag of the flowmeter

PrincipleSensor

The first field is used to select the measuring principle and sensor type The types available are dependent on

the previously selected fluid and measuring task Devices marked in magenta are not available because of a

specific exclusion ndash for example low temperature versions are available for cryogenic fluids only

The second field indicates the flowmeter sensor generation

Transmitter

After choosing the sensor type you can select the corresponding transmitter If only one transmitter type is

available then the flowmeter will be indicated immediately

Flowmeter

The first field indicates the selected sensor and transmitter as the complete flowmeter product The second

field indicates the device model These fields are not editable

The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters

Order code

The field indicates the order code of the selected flowmeter

22 Process data

The Process data page is used for the input of the process and installation conditions for the flowmeter After

the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter Applicator starts with default values which can be overwritten later

The possibility of manually editing data depends upon the corresponding calculation standard For more

details go to the Fluid Properties page

This view consists of ldquothree measuring pointsrdquo This means that the process conditions at three different flow

values can be entered minimum nominal and maximum However if only nominal values are entered these

are copied over to minimum and maximum so this feature is not mandatory to use ndash the same values can be

entered instead Using this feature has implications on Calculated resultspage As the density each measuring

points is used the sensor velocity flow velocity pressure loss reynoldsnumber and in some cases

measurement error is influenced

Please note if the option ldquoNo indication of default start data input of data by userrdquo is activated in the

Settings menu for Sizing Flow the most important start data (required flow pressure temperature) have to

be entered before the process data window is opened completely The input window appears after the

selection of the general parameters see Section 21

221 Process data

Reference values

This link opens the Units page where it is possible to change the default settings The page can also be

accessed by clicking on the cogwheel tab at the top of the page

You can for example change the Atmospheric Pressure which is relevant for conversion pressure in gauge and

absolute units

Normal Conditions (SI) refers to DIN 1343 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperature = 27315 K)

Base unit Nm3time

Standard Conditions (US) refers to ISO 2533 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperatue = 28815 K)

Base units SCFH SCFM SCFS Sm3time

Requested Flow

First enter the units of measure then the values for the minimum nominal and maximum flow rate

Applicator uses the nominal value for an initial sizing process and then checks the suggested size by making it

one size bigger or smaller in order to fit to the entered range of minimum to maximum flow rate Each

flowmeter has a default flow rate associated with it When you choose a new meter the associated default

flow rate values are displayed in these fields for initial calculations provided the fields are not locked

If you have chosen ldquogasrdquo and set a volumetric unit (eg m3h lh hellip) an additional button Requested Flow

(FAD) appears Clicking on it opens the lsquoCalculated requested flowrsquo window This allows the input and

calculation of a requested flow rate at deviating process pressures and temperatures Eg Input of ldquoFree air

deliveryrdquo for compressed air

(1 Press the Requested Flow (FAD) button 2 Enter your Requested flow values Press Apply to use the

edited values)

The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page If the selected

flowmeter is a mass flowmeter the default mass flow units are used If the fluid is a liquid the default liquid

volumetric flow units are used In other cases either the default gas volumetric or the mass flow units are

used You can also set the default units on the Units page so that the units that you normally work with are

the ones that are displayed automatically (see the description in Unit Defaults)

Pressure

The fluid operating pressure value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for the

operating pressure (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties When

you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is displayed in the nominal field for initial

calculation provided it is not locked

The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page (Unit Defaults)

You can set the default pressure unit with the help of this page

Temperature

The fluid operating temperature value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for

the operating temperature (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties

When you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is placed and displayed in the nominal

field for initial calculation provided it is not locked

The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page See Unit

Defaults

Pressure minmax

If the nominal pressure has already been entered the minimum and maximum values are set identical to it

but they may be different in their particular application The minimum and maximum pressure indicate the

limits of the process application

The limits are used to

check the pressure rating of the process connection check the current fluid phase check for cavitation

Caution The min and max pressures are not related to the min and max flow rates

Temperature minmax

If the nominal temperature is already entered the minimum and maximum values are identical to the nominal

value but they can be different in their particular adaptation

The minimum and maximum temperature indicates the limits of the process application

The limits are used to

Calculate the min and max vapour pressure Check the process connection Check the current fluid phase Check for cavitation Check for permitted device temperature

Caution The min and max temperatures are not related to the min and max flow ratesa

Units

Operating conditions can be displayed in a wide range of units You can check the units with the help of the

Unit page You can also set the default units on the Unit page so that the units that you normally work with

are the ones that are displayed automatically

You can select different units by clicking on the dropdown list (which shows the current units) and selecting a

unit from the list If you select a new unit all numeric values will be converted into the new unit

Calculated Fluid Properties

After the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter the fluid properties are calculated automatically

Applicator Sizing Flow in version 10 or newer contains a fluid engine and a gas engine for calculating the

necessary properties to size a flowmeter A list of supported gases is shown on the Gas Mixture page All other

fluids are calculated by the standard Fluid Engine Check Fluid and gas property engines for details

Density

The density at the operating conditions (min nominal or max) is calculated for the selected fluid but can be

entered manually as well You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves

differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field

For liquids (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the density of the liquid at two reference

temperatures

For gases (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the standard density (dens_Rhozero) ie the

density at 1013 mbar abs and 0degC

For gases (Gas engine) the calculations of density is based on real gas formulas

The values of the reference temperatures and densities or standard density (dens_Rhozero) can be viewed on

the Fluid Properties page (Properties button)

The default density units which are different for liquids and gases are taken from preferences which you have

indicated on the Units page

Please note that for steam (superheated and saturated) there are special formulae which calculate the density

in compliance with the standard IAPWS

Caution other unlocked fields which depend on density (eg flowrate and viscosity) are recalculated when

you change the density value (Recalculations based on temperature or pressure are generally taken for

granted whereas recalculations based on density are often overseen)

Density normal (Gas applications)

The normal density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The

reference conditions are defined on the Units page

When manually entering the normal density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip) Normal

density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the Settings menu

Density standard (Gas applications)

The standard density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The

reference conditions are defined on the Units page

When manually entering the standard density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip)

Standard density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the settings menu

Molar mass

Molar mass is the sum of all atomic masses of all atoms within a molecule The unit is kgkmol (lbkmol)

Z-factor

The Z-factor is only displayed if the selected fluid is a gas It represents the compressibility for real gases The

factor has different impacts on the fluid and gas engine

Fluid Engine

The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes as long as the field is not locked

Changing the Z-Factor causes a recalculation of Density and Viscosity (depending on the unit) if Density and

Viscosity were not locked before

Gas engine

The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes The Z-factor is only an output value

and cannot influence any dimension if it is changed manually

Viscosity

Viscosity at the operating temperature (nominal) is calculated for the selected fluid but it can also be entered

manually You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the

system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct viscosity at the operating temperature in

this input field

The liquid viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is based on the viscosity of a liquid at two reference

temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)

The gas viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is calculated based on the viscosity of the gas at two reference

temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)

The gas viscosity viscosity (Gas engine) is based on real gas formulas

The default viscosity units are taken from the Units page

Vapor pressure

The Vapor pressure field is displayed only if you calculate a liquid It indicates the absolute pressure which is

necessary to transform the liquid into a gas at the minimum nominal and maximum operating temperatures

You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the system fluid

chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field If the selected fluid is a gas

these fields are irrelevant and the compressibility factor Z for operating temperature (nominal) appears

instead

The units used for Vapor Pressure are related to the units selected for pressure Since this is a pressure

difference the concepts of relative gauge pressure do not apply

Sound Velocity

The Sound Velocity is only displayed for flowmeters if this dimension is important especially for calculating the

permitted measuring range of Coriolis mass flowmeters and for calculating the distance between the sensors

of an ultrasonic flowmeter This value can be changed and is recalculated whenever the temperature is

changed as long as the field is not locked You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid

behaves differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this

input field

Caution Please click on the Reset-button on the Sizing page if you have changed fluid properties (eg

density vapor pressure viscosity) before you start a new sizing

How to lock applicator data

When setting the fluid properties it is important to understand the concept of locking Initially all fluid

properties are unlocked and Applicator attempts to make a reasonable guess for the operating conditions

using default values for some conditions and calculating others When you set a value it will be locked

automatically The program uses your value from then on ignoring its defaults and suspending its calculations

All values which you have generated yourself are marked in blue

If you change the determined intermediate values like density viscosity eg or the results they will be printed

in italics so that you can easily recognize them

Data locking examples

Immediately after the selection of a medium and a measuring instrument Applicator starts the calculation of

the meter by using the information about operating conditions entered Usually the user herhimself adjusts

the process conditions ndash eg flow pressure and temperature- to the application The density viscosity sound

velocity vapor pressure and Z-factor are calculated by Applicator

If for example you change the temperature Applicator will recalculate the gas density value if you have not

locked the respective field However if you set the density (thereby locking it) and then change the

temperature the density will not be recalculated The program uses the density value which you have entered

independent of the temperature

Any unlocked field changes automatically if you change other operating conditions upon which it depends

Any locked field remains fixed even if you change other operating conditions Selecting a new fluid unlocks all

operating conditions except requested flow

Caution If you make a new fluid selection and lock it the fluid data will be overwritten with the default fluid

data If you make a new flowmeter selection the locked fluid data and the sensor data remain unchanged

provided this is technically reasonable

23 Sensor Pipe

This section specifies the requirements regarding the pipe into which the flowmeter is to be built

Depending on the flowmeter different inputs are necessary to describe the existing pipe location or the

requested sensor requirements Different possibilities to select the pipe material or sensor pipe material to

input pipe thickness liner thickness sound velocity of material outer diameter circumference or the input of

the inner diameter help to specify the pipe geometry Additionally rectangular ducts which are described

with the inner duct height duct width and duct thickness are available for thermal and differential pressure

flowmeters

After entering the internal diameter Applicator calculates the nearest available meter size according to the

selected connection standard Your specified inner diameter is used for further calculations

Caution Applicator takes the internal diameter and equates it with the meter or pipe size The checkbox for

Pipe size ne meter size offers the possibility of an indication and sizing of products with integrated reducers in

addition to common Prowirl flowmeters

Pipe dimension table for DP-Flow Clamp-On and Insertion meters

There is the possibility to choose between different pipe standards in order to select the correct pipe

dimension which enables a proper sizing There are 36 default values for several pipe standards available

including

bull DIN (EN 10220 24581 2462 2440 etc)

bull ASME (B3610B3619)

bull AWWA Cast Iron Class A- H AWWA Ductile Iron Class 50-56

bull One standard for free input select Applicator default valuesmanual input

After choosing the desired pipe standard the pipe dimension window opens Depending on the preferred pipe

size and pressure rating possible pipe dimensions are offered

Connection standard

Shows all available connection standards for the selected flowmeter (eg ENDIN) By choosing a category the

corresponding process connections will be listed below

Material (sensor)

Depending on the flowmeter Applicator offers different sensor materials The available materials can depend

on the diameter and process connection Material compatibility of the sensor material will be checked against

the integrated corrosion database A warning message will be displayed if compatibility issues exist between

the fluid and sensor material

Process connection

Applicator also selects the required minimum pressure rating according to the operating pressure and

temperature values This field is displayed as a dropdown list which offers all available pressure ratings for the

selected flowmeter and meter size You can change the suggested pressure rating or process connection but

if you select a lower pressure rating than the suggested one a warning will be displayed

Below Process connection you can find the Pressure rating button Clicking on it will open a window which

displays a diagram for the selected process connection the temperature-pressure derating curve of a selected

process connection and also operation points (max pressure at min and max temperature and the nominal

temperaturepressure point)

Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If

additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case

whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will

automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to

make the user aware of the change

24 Meter Operating Range

The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values

If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The

measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range

For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible

For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow

Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is

possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly

differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour

25 Calculated Results

This section shows the calculated results of sizing

Requested flow

Indicates the values used for the calculation

Flow velocity

Flow velocity max

Pressure Loss

An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss

calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This

group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be

marginal and without any influence on your process

Velocity (meas tube)

This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation

refers to the nominal density

Measured Error Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the

flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

Measured Error spec Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding

requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration

Measured Error Mass

These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for

Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the

corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead

of a value

Measured Error spec Mass

Reynolds No

The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further

sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions

Frequency

This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is

proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity

PED results

Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please

note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window

Meter size

This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually

adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have

done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is

locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal

button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This

means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are

saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter

The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters

Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will

also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements

26 Warnings

Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the

green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is

pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or

expanded using the arrow on the right

Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next

Endress+Hauser Sales Centre

27 Button center

A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of

the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process

Print Sizing

Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports

Sizing Energy

Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the

Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow

Configurator

Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code

Add to shop basket

Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This

button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the

Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline

version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when

Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Reset

This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results

Back to top

3 Custody transfer

Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of

among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals

If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection

- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out

According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different

process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature

are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task

page

In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the

approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum

turn down is also checked

Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your

entries

The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval

As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB

7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the

max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated

With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature

The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the

ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit

values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter

measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures

the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the

warning messages

Back to top

4 Accessories

There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories

page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)

In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg

mounting set 41) are executed

41 Accessories page

Example mounting set

Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations

Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)

42 Activating a checkbox

Example Flow conditioner

For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are

automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and

process connection can be selected

43 Accessories within the order code

The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving

process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed

Applicator versions)

Back to top

5 Fluid Properties page

51 General description

Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page

This view supports the following types of fluids

Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under

ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page

The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases

Liquids

Media type Standardprocess

Fluids not 100 water (example 0

Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)

Support points (linear interpolation)

Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97

Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-

Gas (Air) UDG)

Redlich-Kwong

Gases

Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas

engine

Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine

Air Ozone O3

Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)

Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr

Butane Nitric Oxide NO3

Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0

Carbon monoxide

Chlorine

Ethane

Ethylene

Helium

Hydrogen

Hydrogen chloride

Hydrogen sulphide

Krypton

Methane

Neon

Nitrogen

Oxygen

Propane

Xenon

0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User

Defined Gas Mixture 0

Oxygen

The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for

example density or viscosity

The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information

classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of

the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They

are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are

important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new

medium

The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The

parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll

to the group header you see on your screen

When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page

A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details

Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page

52 Parameter groups

521 Fluid information

In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible

Fluid name contains the name of the fluid

Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In

many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available

State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many

purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the

steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account

Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made

522 Fluid Description

The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid

Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian

Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid

Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and

syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or

measurement principle

Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is

flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals

Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive

Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for

conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to

50 microScm and more than 50 microScm

Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to

67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo

Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details

Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid

The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user

defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

523 Basic Fluid Parameters

The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be

created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages

Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid

Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid

Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point

Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid

Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas

The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has

an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also

depend on density and viscosity

In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and

sound velocity

524 Constants

This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas

type selected

Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken

from the Unit Defaults page

Molar mass molecular weight of the gas

Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)

Heating value calorific value of the gas

The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine

For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is

used to calculate the sound velocity

525 Typical Operating Conditions

The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions

Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the

mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of

the typical operating conditions are editable

526 Temperature Viscosity

This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description

The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function

of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve

for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range

527 Temperature Density

This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Density density at the support point

The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of

operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for

fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range

528 Temperature Heat capacity

This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point

The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

529 Temperature Vapor pressure

This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid

Temperature temperature at the support point

Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point

The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

5210 Gas mixture

The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture

Gas name of the gas (first field)

Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture

Unit unit for mass fraction

A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are

given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas

Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report

The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is

displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine

only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100

5211 Fluid properties and results

This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed

differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help

function

Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom

display ldquonardquo

The calculated constants are eg

Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions

Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions

Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions

Heating value the calorific value of the fluid

For liquids

Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data

displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page

AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

For solids

a viscosity coefficient for the gas

n viscosity coefficient for gases

5212 Reference values

This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters

displayed differ according to the fluid selected

Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation

Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780

Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780

Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533

Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533

5213 Measuring task

The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of

the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details

opens a window with more information about the approval

5214 Restriction on flowmeters

This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates

that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details

opens a window with more information about the restrictions

53 Setting reference conditions

Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu

There are two possibilities

SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are

- pressure 10132 bar absolute

- temperature 0deg Celsius

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter

US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are

- pressure 14696 psi absolute

- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter

54 Creating a User Defined Fluid

Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the

world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids

1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field

Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid

at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam

2 Now click on the Properties button

3 When the page has opened click on New

4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate

fields which are now open for editing

When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database

Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system

fluids

If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields

will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General

parameters list and you can start again

If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit

button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close

button exits the page without saving the changes

55 Import and Export of Fluids

In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this

the import and export function of the fluid database can be used

In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information

are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want

to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export

button

Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database

To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file

56 Fluid Properties report

The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing

page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results

and reference values

Back to top

6 Compare size and sensor

61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)

When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose

Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the

ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function

When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The

displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter

The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by

clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the

corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table

will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can

be reapplied

The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you

click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed

as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator

can be reapplied

62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)

The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement

principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are

selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator

versions

Back to top

7 Chart page

71 Introduction

The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case

of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available

The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections

72 General Parameters

In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a

repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on

the sizing page

73 Process data

Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference

74 Curves

The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if

offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter

In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be

automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be

activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner

If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report

75 Flow limits

The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range

and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are

different

76 Chart

The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the

pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using

the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional

information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different

curves within the chart

The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons

The content of the printout depends on the options selected

Back to top

8 Order Code

Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order

information

In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring

principle and flowmeter These are as follows

Feature Description Order codeSizing

Definition of ideal

diameter

Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter

relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure

loss

Diameter (Order code

option)

Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and

installation data

Mounting set (Order code

option)

Determination of

insertion depth

Calculation of insertion depth depending on

the selected accessory (t-mass)

Pipe length (Order code

option)

Selection of Material

(Sensor)

Selection and verification of corrosion

consistency

Sensor material Liner

material (Order code

option)

Selection of Process

connection

Selection and verification of pressure and

temperature curve

Process connection (Order

code option)

Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order

code option)

Pressure equipment

directive (PED)

Definition of PED-category depending on the

application and verification of the offered

process connections

Additional approval (Order

code option)

Custody transfer Verification or specification of application

data definition of measuring range

Custody transfer (Order

code option)

Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow

conditioner)

Accessory enclosed or extra

position (Order code

option)

Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow

splitter

Sensor Options (Order code

option)

Evaluation of

measuring range

Calculation of measuring range Calculation

datachart

Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and

accessory where required

Calculation

datachart

Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation

datachart

Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion

database with relevant data

The Order code page consists of different frames

81 Order code

Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically

by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and

Configurator for the valid order codes

82 Order code options

Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration

options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the

order code

The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection

on the Sizing page

The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page

The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options

Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed

these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still

feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning

message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change

83 Extended order code

831 General

Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen

In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables

for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and

activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the

Extended order code feature is used

With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order

code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the

order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator

832 Device parameter data settings

To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is

not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the

ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator

The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo

84 Button center

The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to

proceed with your Sizing process

Configurator

Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order

code

Print Sizing

Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product can be pasted into a project

Back to top

9 Conversion Calculator

Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity

All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by

selecting one out of the drop down lists

The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another

The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all

common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be

recalculated automatically

Back to top

10 Unit Defaults

Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings

menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored

whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session

Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily

for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button

Back to top

11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)

111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)

Disclaimer

The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from

publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and

assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a

minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion

fatigue life

The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different

process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined

Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check

Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled

The content of the database was sourced from

bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)

bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG

bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta

bull Various Internet Links

bull Various Corrosion data bases

The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application

and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process

temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows

Metal

Class Description depth of corrosion per surface

A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)

B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)

C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)

NR not recommended

U unknown

Plastics

Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength

A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear

B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year

lt=30 loss of tensile strength year

C not resistant lt= 50year

lt=50 loss of tensile strength year

NR not recommended

U unknown

Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used

112 Using Corrosion Check

Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion

information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability

of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not

appear at the top of the page

Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the

corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table

The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid

The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion

database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message

is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning

message

The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project

module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing

Back to top

12 Settings (Sizing Flow)

The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the

button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select

Sizing Flow

The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this

function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings

saved are loaded with the Load Default button

Setting Impact when activated

Basic functions

Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply

Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order

classification PED device check code page and printouts

Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits

The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits

No indication of default start data input of data by user

By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually

Advanced functions

Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)

The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles

Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates

My View

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

DP Flow

Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters

Activates said functions

Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP

flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

Back to top

13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines

131 General

Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation

Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)

Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures

132 Fluid engine

General Information

The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the

fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor

Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both

liquids and for gases

Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data

Liquid Calculation

Calculation of the acentric factor Omega

Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure

Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby

bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC

bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database

bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms

bull

The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs

Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature

bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3

bull Alpha in 1K

bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K

bull Toper in K

bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3

The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs

Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature

bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3

bull AL (Viscosity factor)

bull BL (Viscosity factor)

bull Toper in K

bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt

Gas calculation

The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and

pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and

temperature

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull Zoper (Compressibility)

Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)

Toper in K

bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3

Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull c Kappa

Steam Calculation

Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard

The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard

(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use

The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from

bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and

bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa

This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only

That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms

Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator

133 Gas engine

The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the

fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine

The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of

the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted

process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine

Back to top

14 Print Sizing

The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured

and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page

The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens

bull Page format size margins orientation and format

bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter

bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report

Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed

bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo

bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout

Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered

Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page

Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are

possible Please check the help manual of the Project module

Back to top

15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by

manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002

The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection

options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator

takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable

flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and

Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can

switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator

1 Categorisation of the application

2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests

bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this

option

PED Categories

Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered

during the sizing and ordering process They include

bull All ultrasonic flowmeters

bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo

bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water

bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the

static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure

bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume

The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data

danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)

Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements

have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen

device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and

nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case

a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet

All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout

Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)

Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and

temperature are the main parameters

If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required

data in the min nom and max columns

If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the

necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating

Danger posed by the fluid

The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the

case of gases the stability of the gas is also important

The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo

according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)

All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations

belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is

above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture

bull H200-H205 (explosive)

bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)

bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)

bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)

bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)

bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)

bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)

In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in

Danger Symbols below

In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED

fluid groups

rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids

Order code

If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option

this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page

With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family

nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration

If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center

Danger Symbols

Danger symbol Explanation H-rates

C corrosive H 314

Cl chemical instable

E explosive H200-H205

F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223

F flammable H 225-H228

N environmental

dangerous

O oxidizing H271-H272

T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330

H372

T poisonous

Xi irritating

Xn injurious to health

Back to top

16 Online Update

The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator

Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes

and updated system databases with the latest products

The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator

newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the

Settings menu

Page 2: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use

53 Setting reference conditions 41

54 Creating a User Defined Fluid 41

55 Import and Export of Fluids 42

56 Fluid Properties report 43

6 Compare size and sensor 44

61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing) 44

62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page) 45

7 Chart page 47

71 Introduction 47

72 General Parameters 47

73 Process data 47

74 Curves 47

75 Flow limits 47

76 Chart 48

8 Order Code 49

81 Order code 50

82 Order code options 51

83 Extended order code 51

831 General 51

832 Device parameter data settings 52

84 Button center 53

9 Conversion Calculator 55

10 Unit Defaults 56

11 Corrosion Check (CorDB) 57

111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB) 57

112 Using Corrosion Check 59

12 Settings (Sizing Flow) 61

13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines 63

131 General 63

132 Fluid engine 63

133 Gas engine 67

14 Print Sizing 68

15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) 70

16 Online Update 75

1 Overview

Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments You will be supported in

many different use cases such as the correct dimensioning selection of materials process connections

accessories and calibrations

The main pages of Sizing Flow

Please note the visible pages can vary according to the application or the selected fluid The display also

depends on whether you have installed the Applicator on your computer or use it in the internet You can

decide which pages you would like to use with the help of the Settings function

Depending on the screen width and the resolution of your monitor or tablet Applicator pages may be

displayed as a continuous list or in two columns

Sizing Flow consists of many different pages which are accessible via the tabs at the top of the sizing window

These pages are

Sizing - Your main working area to dimension a flowmeter

Custody Transfer ndash Check the process parameters within ldquoCustody Transferrdquo

Accessories - Select suitable accessories for a flowmeter

Chart - Graphical check of measured error and pressure loss over flow range

Order code - Complete the full order code and add accessories

Unit Default- Set your preferred units and your referenced values

Corrosion Check - Check the corrosion resistance of the wetted material depending on process

temperature

Special functions and features of Sizing Flow

There are many more features which are accessible on the sizing pages or in the settings menus The exact

means of calling them are described in the manual

Printing ndashCreate reports of instrument sizing immediately

Online Update ndash get the latest version of Applicator ndash only needed when using the offline

version

Fluid Properties page - Check liquids and gas properties and create user defined fluids

Compare - Compare and check up to three different sizes and flowmeters at a glance

Conversion Calculator - Conversion of dimensions in different units

Settings - Set your preferences in Applicator

PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

Fluid and gas property engines ndash Information for calculating fluid properties

11 Basics

Before you start with Sizing Flow you should know the flowmeter family On the pages of Applicator Selection

or Industry Applications you will find recommendations for suitable families

On several pages Sizing Flow Applicator supports the engineering process with useful and necessary functions

to find the most suitable size of the flowmeter to calculate the fluid properties in compliance with process

conditions and to check the meter and process connection according to the requirements of the application

The fluid properties are calculated with the help of the Applicator fluid and gas engine depending on the

selected fluid and process conditions (flow temperature pressure)

Parameter help

Parameter help offers immediate support for understanding the parameters used in Sizing Flow without the

need to open the help pages Parameters for which an explanation exists are indicated by an ldquoirdquo icon When

touched with the mouse pointer the program opens a separate window with an explanation Close the window

by clicking on the OK button

Back to top

2 Sizing

The sizing page is divided into three sections

21 General parameters

Within the general parameters section you can choose the measuring task fluid principlesensor and the

transmitter Additionally the status of the fluid the corresponding calculation standard the selected

flowmeter and the order code appears A Tag field allows the entry of a measuring point tag

Measuring task

Selects the measuring task Several possibilities are available for example the standard measuring task

ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo is used for the normal sizing functionality or ldquoCustody TransferBillingrdquo for sizing with

the appropriate approvals For details please check the measuring task page

Fluid

The fluid selection dropdown list shows possible fluids associated with the selected measuring task

This field displays the default or currently selected fluid Open the dropdown list of available fluids A fluid is

selected either by clicking with the mouse on the fluid in the dropdown list or just by using the key Enter In

the second case the fluid must be indicated by typing in the first letter The list will then only contain fluids

which begin with that letter

Properties

You can view fluid properties with the Properties button For more information about fluids see Fluid

Properties

StandardState

Standard

The first field indicates the calculation standard used for the selected media type

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The overview below shows the assignment of the media types to the

relevant standards and processes used

Media type Standardprocess Fluid properties editable

Fluids no water (example

dummy)

Support points (linear

interpolation)

Yes

Water (drinking water dummy) IAPWS-97 No

Gases user-defined (example

dummy)

Ideal gas Yes

Gases user-defined (example

dummy)

Redlich-Kwong Yes

Gases gas mixtures (example

dummy)

NEL ndash identical to the t-mass Gas

Engine

No

Natural gas NX-19 and other standards (in

preparation)

No

Each calculation standard has different effects on the direct input of medium properties that are already

known to the user The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo and ldquoIdeal Gasrdquo standards (reliable results for gas

properties with operating pressure less than 20 bar ndash easy start with lsquoDummy-Gas (Air) based on Ideal Gasrsquo) -

are therefore open for the manual input of medium properties The data cannot be edited manually if the fluid

properties are calculated with official standards (eg IAWPS) Fluid properties which are calculated with

officially approved standards can be used as reference values (eg on-site density calibration)

State

The second field indicates the physical status of the currently selected fluid liquid gas superheated steam or

saturated steam These four states have been defined for pragmatic reasons Each of them requires its own set

of formulae to calculate the fluid properties This field is not editable

Please note The value of the State field of the fluid you have selected must match the state of your fluid at

the desired operating temperature and pressure If this is not the case Applicator informs you with a warning

message

Example if you select a gas which acts like a liquid at the desired operating temperature and pressure all

calculations and results will be invalid The formulae for liquids and gases are different The program will NOT

automatically switch to the correct set of formulae based on the operating conditions The fluid and flowmeter

state compatibility checking will also be affected

Tag

This field allows the user to enter the measuring point tag of the flowmeter

PrincipleSensor

The first field is used to select the measuring principle and sensor type The types available are dependent on

the previously selected fluid and measuring task Devices marked in magenta are not available because of a

specific exclusion ndash for example low temperature versions are available for cryogenic fluids only

The second field indicates the flowmeter sensor generation

Transmitter

After choosing the sensor type you can select the corresponding transmitter If only one transmitter type is

available then the flowmeter will be indicated immediately

Flowmeter

The first field indicates the selected sensor and transmitter as the complete flowmeter product The second

field indicates the device model These fields are not editable

The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters

Order code

The field indicates the order code of the selected flowmeter

22 Process data

The Process data page is used for the input of the process and installation conditions for the flowmeter After

the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter Applicator starts with default values which can be overwritten later

The possibility of manually editing data depends upon the corresponding calculation standard For more

details go to the Fluid Properties page

This view consists of ldquothree measuring pointsrdquo This means that the process conditions at three different flow

values can be entered minimum nominal and maximum However if only nominal values are entered these

are copied over to minimum and maximum so this feature is not mandatory to use ndash the same values can be

entered instead Using this feature has implications on Calculated resultspage As the density each measuring

points is used the sensor velocity flow velocity pressure loss reynoldsnumber and in some cases

measurement error is influenced

Please note if the option ldquoNo indication of default start data input of data by userrdquo is activated in the

Settings menu for Sizing Flow the most important start data (required flow pressure temperature) have to

be entered before the process data window is opened completely The input window appears after the

selection of the general parameters see Section 21

221 Process data

Reference values

This link opens the Units page where it is possible to change the default settings The page can also be

accessed by clicking on the cogwheel tab at the top of the page

You can for example change the Atmospheric Pressure which is relevant for conversion pressure in gauge and

absolute units

Normal Conditions (SI) refers to DIN 1343 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperature = 27315 K)

Base unit Nm3time

Standard Conditions (US) refers to ISO 2533 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperatue = 28815 K)

Base units SCFH SCFM SCFS Sm3time

Requested Flow

First enter the units of measure then the values for the minimum nominal and maximum flow rate

Applicator uses the nominal value for an initial sizing process and then checks the suggested size by making it

one size bigger or smaller in order to fit to the entered range of minimum to maximum flow rate Each

flowmeter has a default flow rate associated with it When you choose a new meter the associated default

flow rate values are displayed in these fields for initial calculations provided the fields are not locked

If you have chosen ldquogasrdquo and set a volumetric unit (eg m3h lh hellip) an additional button Requested Flow

(FAD) appears Clicking on it opens the lsquoCalculated requested flowrsquo window This allows the input and

calculation of a requested flow rate at deviating process pressures and temperatures Eg Input of ldquoFree air

deliveryrdquo for compressed air

(1 Press the Requested Flow (FAD) button 2 Enter your Requested flow values Press Apply to use the

edited values)

The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page If the selected

flowmeter is a mass flowmeter the default mass flow units are used If the fluid is a liquid the default liquid

volumetric flow units are used In other cases either the default gas volumetric or the mass flow units are

used You can also set the default units on the Units page so that the units that you normally work with are

the ones that are displayed automatically (see the description in Unit Defaults)

Pressure

The fluid operating pressure value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for the

operating pressure (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties When

you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is displayed in the nominal field for initial

calculation provided it is not locked

The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page (Unit Defaults)

You can set the default pressure unit with the help of this page

Temperature

The fluid operating temperature value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for

the operating temperature (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties

When you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is placed and displayed in the nominal

field for initial calculation provided it is not locked

The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page See Unit

Defaults

Pressure minmax

If the nominal pressure has already been entered the minimum and maximum values are set identical to it

but they may be different in their particular application The minimum and maximum pressure indicate the

limits of the process application

The limits are used to

check the pressure rating of the process connection check the current fluid phase check for cavitation

Caution The min and max pressures are not related to the min and max flow rates

Temperature minmax

If the nominal temperature is already entered the minimum and maximum values are identical to the nominal

value but they can be different in their particular adaptation

The minimum and maximum temperature indicates the limits of the process application

The limits are used to

Calculate the min and max vapour pressure Check the process connection Check the current fluid phase Check for cavitation Check for permitted device temperature

Caution The min and max temperatures are not related to the min and max flow ratesa

Units

Operating conditions can be displayed in a wide range of units You can check the units with the help of the

Unit page You can also set the default units on the Unit page so that the units that you normally work with

are the ones that are displayed automatically

You can select different units by clicking on the dropdown list (which shows the current units) and selecting a

unit from the list If you select a new unit all numeric values will be converted into the new unit

Calculated Fluid Properties

After the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter the fluid properties are calculated automatically

Applicator Sizing Flow in version 10 or newer contains a fluid engine and a gas engine for calculating the

necessary properties to size a flowmeter A list of supported gases is shown on the Gas Mixture page All other

fluids are calculated by the standard Fluid Engine Check Fluid and gas property engines for details

Density

The density at the operating conditions (min nominal or max) is calculated for the selected fluid but can be

entered manually as well You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves

differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field

For liquids (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the density of the liquid at two reference

temperatures

For gases (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the standard density (dens_Rhozero) ie the

density at 1013 mbar abs and 0degC

For gases (Gas engine) the calculations of density is based on real gas formulas

The values of the reference temperatures and densities or standard density (dens_Rhozero) can be viewed on

the Fluid Properties page (Properties button)

The default density units which are different for liquids and gases are taken from preferences which you have

indicated on the Units page

Please note that for steam (superheated and saturated) there are special formulae which calculate the density

in compliance with the standard IAPWS

Caution other unlocked fields which depend on density (eg flowrate and viscosity) are recalculated when

you change the density value (Recalculations based on temperature or pressure are generally taken for

granted whereas recalculations based on density are often overseen)

Density normal (Gas applications)

The normal density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The

reference conditions are defined on the Units page

When manually entering the normal density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip) Normal

density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the Settings menu

Density standard (Gas applications)

The standard density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The

reference conditions are defined on the Units page

When manually entering the standard density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip)

Standard density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the settings menu

Molar mass

Molar mass is the sum of all atomic masses of all atoms within a molecule The unit is kgkmol (lbkmol)

Z-factor

The Z-factor is only displayed if the selected fluid is a gas It represents the compressibility for real gases The

factor has different impacts on the fluid and gas engine

Fluid Engine

The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes as long as the field is not locked

Changing the Z-Factor causes a recalculation of Density and Viscosity (depending on the unit) if Density and

Viscosity were not locked before

Gas engine

The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes The Z-factor is only an output value

and cannot influence any dimension if it is changed manually

Viscosity

Viscosity at the operating temperature (nominal) is calculated for the selected fluid but it can also be entered

manually You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the

system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct viscosity at the operating temperature in

this input field

The liquid viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is based on the viscosity of a liquid at two reference

temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)

The gas viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is calculated based on the viscosity of the gas at two reference

temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)

The gas viscosity viscosity (Gas engine) is based on real gas formulas

The default viscosity units are taken from the Units page

Vapor pressure

The Vapor pressure field is displayed only if you calculate a liquid It indicates the absolute pressure which is

necessary to transform the liquid into a gas at the minimum nominal and maximum operating temperatures

You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the system fluid

chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field If the selected fluid is a gas

these fields are irrelevant and the compressibility factor Z for operating temperature (nominal) appears

instead

The units used for Vapor Pressure are related to the units selected for pressure Since this is a pressure

difference the concepts of relative gauge pressure do not apply

Sound Velocity

The Sound Velocity is only displayed for flowmeters if this dimension is important especially for calculating the

permitted measuring range of Coriolis mass flowmeters and for calculating the distance between the sensors

of an ultrasonic flowmeter This value can be changed and is recalculated whenever the temperature is

changed as long as the field is not locked You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid

behaves differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this

input field

Caution Please click on the Reset-button on the Sizing page if you have changed fluid properties (eg

density vapor pressure viscosity) before you start a new sizing

How to lock applicator data

When setting the fluid properties it is important to understand the concept of locking Initially all fluid

properties are unlocked and Applicator attempts to make a reasonable guess for the operating conditions

using default values for some conditions and calculating others When you set a value it will be locked

automatically The program uses your value from then on ignoring its defaults and suspending its calculations

All values which you have generated yourself are marked in blue

If you change the determined intermediate values like density viscosity eg or the results they will be printed

in italics so that you can easily recognize them

Data locking examples

Immediately after the selection of a medium and a measuring instrument Applicator starts the calculation of

the meter by using the information about operating conditions entered Usually the user herhimself adjusts

the process conditions ndash eg flow pressure and temperature- to the application The density viscosity sound

velocity vapor pressure and Z-factor are calculated by Applicator

If for example you change the temperature Applicator will recalculate the gas density value if you have not

locked the respective field However if you set the density (thereby locking it) and then change the

temperature the density will not be recalculated The program uses the density value which you have entered

independent of the temperature

Any unlocked field changes automatically if you change other operating conditions upon which it depends

Any locked field remains fixed even if you change other operating conditions Selecting a new fluid unlocks all

operating conditions except requested flow

Caution If you make a new fluid selection and lock it the fluid data will be overwritten with the default fluid

data If you make a new flowmeter selection the locked fluid data and the sensor data remain unchanged

provided this is technically reasonable

23 Sensor Pipe

This section specifies the requirements regarding the pipe into which the flowmeter is to be built

Depending on the flowmeter different inputs are necessary to describe the existing pipe location or the

requested sensor requirements Different possibilities to select the pipe material or sensor pipe material to

input pipe thickness liner thickness sound velocity of material outer diameter circumference or the input of

the inner diameter help to specify the pipe geometry Additionally rectangular ducts which are described

with the inner duct height duct width and duct thickness are available for thermal and differential pressure

flowmeters

After entering the internal diameter Applicator calculates the nearest available meter size according to the

selected connection standard Your specified inner diameter is used for further calculations

Caution Applicator takes the internal diameter and equates it with the meter or pipe size The checkbox for

Pipe size ne meter size offers the possibility of an indication and sizing of products with integrated reducers in

addition to common Prowirl flowmeters

Pipe dimension table for DP-Flow Clamp-On and Insertion meters

There is the possibility to choose between different pipe standards in order to select the correct pipe

dimension which enables a proper sizing There are 36 default values for several pipe standards available

including

bull DIN (EN 10220 24581 2462 2440 etc)

bull ASME (B3610B3619)

bull AWWA Cast Iron Class A- H AWWA Ductile Iron Class 50-56

bull One standard for free input select Applicator default valuesmanual input

After choosing the desired pipe standard the pipe dimension window opens Depending on the preferred pipe

size and pressure rating possible pipe dimensions are offered

Connection standard

Shows all available connection standards for the selected flowmeter (eg ENDIN) By choosing a category the

corresponding process connections will be listed below

Material (sensor)

Depending on the flowmeter Applicator offers different sensor materials The available materials can depend

on the diameter and process connection Material compatibility of the sensor material will be checked against

the integrated corrosion database A warning message will be displayed if compatibility issues exist between

the fluid and sensor material

Process connection

Applicator also selects the required minimum pressure rating according to the operating pressure and

temperature values This field is displayed as a dropdown list which offers all available pressure ratings for the

selected flowmeter and meter size You can change the suggested pressure rating or process connection but

if you select a lower pressure rating than the suggested one a warning will be displayed

Below Process connection you can find the Pressure rating button Clicking on it will open a window which

displays a diagram for the selected process connection the temperature-pressure derating curve of a selected

process connection and also operation points (max pressure at min and max temperature and the nominal

temperaturepressure point)

Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If

additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case

whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will

automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to

make the user aware of the change

24 Meter Operating Range

The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values

If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The

measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range

For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible

For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow

Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is

possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly

differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour

25 Calculated Results

This section shows the calculated results of sizing

Requested flow

Indicates the values used for the calculation

Flow velocity

Flow velocity max

Pressure Loss

An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss

calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This

group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be

marginal and without any influence on your process

Velocity (meas tube)

This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation

refers to the nominal density

Measured Error Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the

flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

Measured Error spec Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding

requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration

Measured Error Mass

These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for

Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the

corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead

of a value

Measured Error spec Mass

Reynolds No

The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further

sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions

Frequency

This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is

proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity

PED results

Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please

note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window

Meter size

This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually

adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have

done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is

locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal

button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This

means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are

saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter

The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters

Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will

also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements

26 Warnings

Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the

green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is

pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or

expanded using the arrow on the right

Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next

Endress+Hauser Sales Centre

27 Button center

A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of

the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process

Print Sizing

Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports

Sizing Energy

Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the

Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow

Configurator

Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code

Add to shop basket

Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This

button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the

Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline

version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when

Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Reset

This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results

Back to top

3 Custody transfer

Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of

among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals

If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection

- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out

According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different

process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature

are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task

page

In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the

approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum

turn down is also checked

Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your

entries

The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval

As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB

7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the

max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated

With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature

The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the

ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit

values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter

measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures

the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the

warning messages

Back to top

4 Accessories

There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories

page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)

In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg

mounting set 41) are executed

41 Accessories page

Example mounting set

Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations

Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)

42 Activating a checkbox

Example Flow conditioner

For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are

automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and

process connection can be selected

43 Accessories within the order code

The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving

process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed

Applicator versions)

Back to top

5 Fluid Properties page

51 General description

Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page

This view supports the following types of fluids

Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under

ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page

The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases

Liquids

Media type Standardprocess

Fluids not 100 water (example 0

Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)

Support points (linear interpolation)

Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97

Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-

Gas (Air) UDG)

Redlich-Kwong

Gases

Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas

engine

Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine

Air Ozone O3

Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)

Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr

Butane Nitric Oxide NO3

Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0

Carbon monoxide

Chlorine

Ethane

Ethylene

Helium

Hydrogen

Hydrogen chloride

Hydrogen sulphide

Krypton

Methane

Neon

Nitrogen

Oxygen

Propane

Xenon

0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User

Defined Gas Mixture 0

Oxygen

The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for

example density or viscosity

The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information

classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of

the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They

are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are

important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new

medium

The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The

parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll

to the group header you see on your screen

When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page

A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details

Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page

52 Parameter groups

521 Fluid information

In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible

Fluid name contains the name of the fluid

Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In

many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available

State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many

purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the

steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account

Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made

522 Fluid Description

The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid

Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian

Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid

Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and

syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or

measurement principle

Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is

flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals

Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive

Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for

conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to

50 microScm and more than 50 microScm

Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to

67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo

Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details

Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid

The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user

defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

523 Basic Fluid Parameters

The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be

created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages

Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid

Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid

Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point

Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid

Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas

The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has

an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also

depend on density and viscosity

In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and

sound velocity

524 Constants

This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas

type selected

Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken

from the Unit Defaults page

Molar mass molecular weight of the gas

Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)

Heating value calorific value of the gas

The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine

For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is

used to calculate the sound velocity

525 Typical Operating Conditions

The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions

Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the

mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of

the typical operating conditions are editable

526 Temperature Viscosity

This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description

The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function

of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve

for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range

527 Temperature Density

This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Density density at the support point

The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of

operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for

fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range

528 Temperature Heat capacity

This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point

The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

529 Temperature Vapor pressure

This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid

Temperature temperature at the support point

Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point

The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

5210 Gas mixture

The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture

Gas name of the gas (first field)

Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture

Unit unit for mass fraction

A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are

given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas

Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report

The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is

displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine

only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100

5211 Fluid properties and results

This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed

differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help

function

Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom

display ldquonardquo

The calculated constants are eg

Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions

Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions

Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions

Heating value the calorific value of the fluid

For liquids

Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data

displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page

AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

For solids

a viscosity coefficient for the gas

n viscosity coefficient for gases

5212 Reference values

This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters

displayed differ according to the fluid selected

Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation

Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780

Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780

Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533

Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533

5213 Measuring task

The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of

the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details

opens a window with more information about the approval

5214 Restriction on flowmeters

This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates

that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details

opens a window with more information about the restrictions

53 Setting reference conditions

Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu

There are two possibilities

SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are

- pressure 10132 bar absolute

- temperature 0deg Celsius

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter

US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are

- pressure 14696 psi absolute

- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter

54 Creating a User Defined Fluid

Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the

world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids

1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field

Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid

at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam

2 Now click on the Properties button

3 When the page has opened click on New

4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate

fields which are now open for editing

When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database

Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system

fluids

If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields

will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General

parameters list and you can start again

If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit

button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close

button exits the page without saving the changes

55 Import and Export of Fluids

In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this

the import and export function of the fluid database can be used

In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information

are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want

to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export

button

Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database

To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file

56 Fluid Properties report

The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing

page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results

and reference values

Back to top

6 Compare size and sensor

61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)

When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose

Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the

ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function

When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The

displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter

The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by

clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the

corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table

will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can

be reapplied

The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you

click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed

as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator

can be reapplied

62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)

The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement

principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are

selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator

versions

Back to top

7 Chart page

71 Introduction

The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case

of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available

The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections

72 General Parameters

In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a

repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on

the sizing page

73 Process data

Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference

74 Curves

The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if

offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter

In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be

automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be

activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner

If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report

75 Flow limits

The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range

and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are

different

76 Chart

The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the

pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using

the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional

information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different

curves within the chart

The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons

The content of the printout depends on the options selected

Back to top

8 Order Code

Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order

information

In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring

principle and flowmeter These are as follows

Feature Description Order codeSizing

Definition of ideal

diameter

Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter

relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure

loss

Diameter (Order code

option)

Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and

installation data

Mounting set (Order code

option)

Determination of

insertion depth

Calculation of insertion depth depending on

the selected accessory (t-mass)

Pipe length (Order code

option)

Selection of Material

(Sensor)

Selection and verification of corrosion

consistency

Sensor material Liner

material (Order code

option)

Selection of Process

connection

Selection and verification of pressure and

temperature curve

Process connection (Order

code option)

Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order

code option)

Pressure equipment

directive (PED)

Definition of PED-category depending on the

application and verification of the offered

process connections

Additional approval (Order

code option)

Custody transfer Verification or specification of application

data definition of measuring range

Custody transfer (Order

code option)

Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow

conditioner)

Accessory enclosed or extra

position (Order code

option)

Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow

splitter

Sensor Options (Order code

option)

Evaluation of

measuring range

Calculation of measuring range Calculation

datachart

Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and

accessory where required

Calculation

datachart

Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation

datachart

Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion

database with relevant data

The Order code page consists of different frames

81 Order code

Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically

by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and

Configurator for the valid order codes

82 Order code options

Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration

options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the

order code

The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection

on the Sizing page

The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page

The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options

Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed

these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still

feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning

message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change

83 Extended order code

831 General

Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen

In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables

for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and

activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the

Extended order code feature is used

With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order

code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the

order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator

832 Device parameter data settings

To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is

not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the

ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator

The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo

84 Button center

The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to

proceed with your Sizing process

Configurator

Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order

code

Print Sizing

Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product can be pasted into a project

Back to top

9 Conversion Calculator

Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity

All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by

selecting one out of the drop down lists

The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another

The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all

common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be

recalculated automatically

Back to top

10 Unit Defaults

Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings

menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored

whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session

Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily

for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button

Back to top

11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)

111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)

Disclaimer

The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from

publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and

assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a

minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion

fatigue life

The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different

process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined

Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check

Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled

The content of the database was sourced from

bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)

bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG

bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta

bull Various Internet Links

bull Various Corrosion data bases

The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application

and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process

temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows

Metal

Class Description depth of corrosion per surface

A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)

B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)

C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)

NR not recommended

U unknown

Plastics

Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength

A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear

B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year

lt=30 loss of tensile strength year

C not resistant lt= 50year

lt=50 loss of tensile strength year

NR not recommended

U unknown

Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used

112 Using Corrosion Check

Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion

information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability

of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not

appear at the top of the page

Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the

corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table

The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid

The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion

database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message

is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning

message

The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project

module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing

Back to top

12 Settings (Sizing Flow)

The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the

button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select

Sizing Flow

The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this

function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings

saved are loaded with the Load Default button

Setting Impact when activated

Basic functions

Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply

Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order

classification PED device check code page and printouts

Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits

The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits

No indication of default start data input of data by user

By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually

Advanced functions

Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)

The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles

Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates

My View

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

DP Flow

Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters

Activates said functions

Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP

flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

Back to top

13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines

131 General

Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation

Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)

Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures

132 Fluid engine

General Information

The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the

fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor

Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both

liquids and for gases

Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data

Liquid Calculation

Calculation of the acentric factor Omega

Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure

Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby

bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC

bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database

bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms

bull

The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs

Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature

bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3

bull Alpha in 1K

bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K

bull Toper in K

bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3

The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs

Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature

bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3

bull AL (Viscosity factor)

bull BL (Viscosity factor)

bull Toper in K

bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt

Gas calculation

The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and

pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and

temperature

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull Zoper (Compressibility)

Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)

Toper in K

bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3

Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull c Kappa

Steam Calculation

Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard

The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard

(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use

The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from

bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and

bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa

This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only

That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms

Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator

133 Gas engine

The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the

fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine

The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of

the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted

process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine

Back to top

14 Print Sizing

The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured

and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page

The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens

bull Page format size margins orientation and format

bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter

bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report

Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed

bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo

bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout

Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered

Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page

Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are

possible Please check the help manual of the Project module

Back to top

15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by

manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002

The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection

options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator

takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable

flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and

Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can

switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator

1 Categorisation of the application

2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests

bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this

option

PED Categories

Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered

during the sizing and ordering process They include

bull All ultrasonic flowmeters

bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo

bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water

bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the

static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure

bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume

The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data

danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)

Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements

have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen

device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and

nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case

a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet

All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout

Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)

Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and

temperature are the main parameters

If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required

data in the min nom and max columns

If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the

necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating

Danger posed by the fluid

The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the

case of gases the stability of the gas is also important

The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo

according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)

All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations

belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is

above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture

bull H200-H205 (explosive)

bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)

bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)

bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)

bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)

bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)

bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)

In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in

Danger Symbols below

In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED

fluid groups

rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids

Order code

If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option

this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page

With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family

nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration

If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center

Danger Symbols

Danger symbol Explanation H-rates

C corrosive H 314

Cl chemical instable

E explosive H200-H205

F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223

F flammable H 225-H228

N environmental

dangerous

O oxidizing H271-H272

T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330

H372

T poisonous

Xi irritating

Xn injurious to health

Back to top

16 Online Update

The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator

Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes

and updated system databases with the latest products

The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator

newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the

Settings menu

Page 3: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use

16 Online Update 75

1 Overview

Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments You will be supported in

many different use cases such as the correct dimensioning selection of materials process connections

accessories and calibrations

The main pages of Sizing Flow

Please note the visible pages can vary according to the application or the selected fluid The display also

depends on whether you have installed the Applicator on your computer or use it in the internet You can

decide which pages you would like to use with the help of the Settings function

Depending on the screen width and the resolution of your monitor or tablet Applicator pages may be

displayed as a continuous list or in two columns

Sizing Flow consists of many different pages which are accessible via the tabs at the top of the sizing window

These pages are

Sizing - Your main working area to dimension a flowmeter

Custody Transfer ndash Check the process parameters within ldquoCustody Transferrdquo

Accessories - Select suitable accessories for a flowmeter

Chart - Graphical check of measured error and pressure loss over flow range

Order code - Complete the full order code and add accessories

Unit Default- Set your preferred units and your referenced values

Corrosion Check - Check the corrosion resistance of the wetted material depending on process

temperature

Special functions and features of Sizing Flow

There are many more features which are accessible on the sizing pages or in the settings menus The exact

means of calling them are described in the manual

Printing ndashCreate reports of instrument sizing immediately

Online Update ndash get the latest version of Applicator ndash only needed when using the offline

version

Fluid Properties page - Check liquids and gas properties and create user defined fluids

Compare - Compare and check up to three different sizes and flowmeters at a glance

Conversion Calculator - Conversion of dimensions in different units

Settings - Set your preferences in Applicator

PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

Fluid and gas property engines ndash Information for calculating fluid properties

11 Basics

Before you start with Sizing Flow you should know the flowmeter family On the pages of Applicator Selection

or Industry Applications you will find recommendations for suitable families

On several pages Sizing Flow Applicator supports the engineering process with useful and necessary functions

to find the most suitable size of the flowmeter to calculate the fluid properties in compliance with process

conditions and to check the meter and process connection according to the requirements of the application

The fluid properties are calculated with the help of the Applicator fluid and gas engine depending on the

selected fluid and process conditions (flow temperature pressure)

Parameter help

Parameter help offers immediate support for understanding the parameters used in Sizing Flow without the

need to open the help pages Parameters for which an explanation exists are indicated by an ldquoirdquo icon When

touched with the mouse pointer the program opens a separate window with an explanation Close the window

by clicking on the OK button

Back to top

2 Sizing

The sizing page is divided into three sections

21 General parameters

Within the general parameters section you can choose the measuring task fluid principlesensor and the

transmitter Additionally the status of the fluid the corresponding calculation standard the selected

flowmeter and the order code appears A Tag field allows the entry of a measuring point tag

Measuring task

Selects the measuring task Several possibilities are available for example the standard measuring task

ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo is used for the normal sizing functionality or ldquoCustody TransferBillingrdquo for sizing with

the appropriate approvals For details please check the measuring task page

Fluid

The fluid selection dropdown list shows possible fluids associated with the selected measuring task

This field displays the default or currently selected fluid Open the dropdown list of available fluids A fluid is

selected either by clicking with the mouse on the fluid in the dropdown list or just by using the key Enter In

the second case the fluid must be indicated by typing in the first letter The list will then only contain fluids

which begin with that letter

Properties

You can view fluid properties with the Properties button For more information about fluids see Fluid

Properties

StandardState

Standard

The first field indicates the calculation standard used for the selected media type

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The overview below shows the assignment of the media types to the

relevant standards and processes used

Media type Standardprocess Fluid properties editable

Fluids no water (example

dummy)

Support points (linear

interpolation)

Yes

Water (drinking water dummy) IAPWS-97 No

Gases user-defined (example

dummy)

Ideal gas Yes

Gases user-defined (example

dummy)

Redlich-Kwong Yes

Gases gas mixtures (example

dummy)

NEL ndash identical to the t-mass Gas

Engine

No

Natural gas NX-19 and other standards (in

preparation)

No

Each calculation standard has different effects on the direct input of medium properties that are already

known to the user The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo and ldquoIdeal Gasrdquo standards (reliable results for gas

properties with operating pressure less than 20 bar ndash easy start with lsquoDummy-Gas (Air) based on Ideal Gasrsquo) -

are therefore open for the manual input of medium properties The data cannot be edited manually if the fluid

properties are calculated with official standards (eg IAWPS) Fluid properties which are calculated with

officially approved standards can be used as reference values (eg on-site density calibration)

State

The second field indicates the physical status of the currently selected fluid liquid gas superheated steam or

saturated steam These four states have been defined for pragmatic reasons Each of them requires its own set

of formulae to calculate the fluid properties This field is not editable

Please note The value of the State field of the fluid you have selected must match the state of your fluid at

the desired operating temperature and pressure If this is not the case Applicator informs you with a warning

message

Example if you select a gas which acts like a liquid at the desired operating temperature and pressure all

calculations and results will be invalid The formulae for liquids and gases are different The program will NOT

automatically switch to the correct set of formulae based on the operating conditions The fluid and flowmeter

state compatibility checking will also be affected

Tag

This field allows the user to enter the measuring point tag of the flowmeter

PrincipleSensor

The first field is used to select the measuring principle and sensor type The types available are dependent on

the previously selected fluid and measuring task Devices marked in magenta are not available because of a

specific exclusion ndash for example low temperature versions are available for cryogenic fluids only

The second field indicates the flowmeter sensor generation

Transmitter

After choosing the sensor type you can select the corresponding transmitter If only one transmitter type is

available then the flowmeter will be indicated immediately

Flowmeter

The first field indicates the selected sensor and transmitter as the complete flowmeter product The second

field indicates the device model These fields are not editable

The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters

Order code

The field indicates the order code of the selected flowmeter

22 Process data

The Process data page is used for the input of the process and installation conditions for the flowmeter After

the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter Applicator starts with default values which can be overwritten later

The possibility of manually editing data depends upon the corresponding calculation standard For more

details go to the Fluid Properties page

This view consists of ldquothree measuring pointsrdquo This means that the process conditions at three different flow

values can be entered minimum nominal and maximum However if only nominal values are entered these

are copied over to minimum and maximum so this feature is not mandatory to use ndash the same values can be

entered instead Using this feature has implications on Calculated resultspage As the density each measuring

points is used the sensor velocity flow velocity pressure loss reynoldsnumber and in some cases

measurement error is influenced

Please note if the option ldquoNo indication of default start data input of data by userrdquo is activated in the

Settings menu for Sizing Flow the most important start data (required flow pressure temperature) have to

be entered before the process data window is opened completely The input window appears after the

selection of the general parameters see Section 21

221 Process data

Reference values

This link opens the Units page where it is possible to change the default settings The page can also be

accessed by clicking on the cogwheel tab at the top of the page

You can for example change the Atmospheric Pressure which is relevant for conversion pressure in gauge and

absolute units

Normal Conditions (SI) refers to DIN 1343 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperature = 27315 K)

Base unit Nm3time

Standard Conditions (US) refers to ISO 2533 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperatue = 28815 K)

Base units SCFH SCFM SCFS Sm3time

Requested Flow

First enter the units of measure then the values for the minimum nominal and maximum flow rate

Applicator uses the nominal value for an initial sizing process and then checks the suggested size by making it

one size bigger or smaller in order to fit to the entered range of minimum to maximum flow rate Each

flowmeter has a default flow rate associated with it When you choose a new meter the associated default

flow rate values are displayed in these fields for initial calculations provided the fields are not locked

If you have chosen ldquogasrdquo and set a volumetric unit (eg m3h lh hellip) an additional button Requested Flow

(FAD) appears Clicking on it opens the lsquoCalculated requested flowrsquo window This allows the input and

calculation of a requested flow rate at deviating process pressures and temperatures Eg Input of ldquoFree air

deliveryrdquo for compressed air

(1 Press the Requested Flow (FAD) button 2 Enter your Requested flow values Press Apply to use the

edited values)

The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page If the selected

flowmeter is a mass flowmeter the default mass flow units are used If the fluid is a liquid the default liquid

volumetric flow units are used In other cases either the default gas volumetric or the mass flow units are

used You can also set the default units on the Units page so that the units that you normally work with are

the ones that are displayed automatically (see the description in Unit Defaults)

Pressure

The fluid operating pressure value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for the

operating pressure (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties When

you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is displayed in the nominal field for initial

calculation provided it is not locked

The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page (Unit Defaults)

You can set the default pressure unit with the help of this page

Temperature

The fluid operating temperature value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for

the operating temperature (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties

When you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is placed and displayed in the nominal

field for initial calculation provided it is not locked

The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page See Unit

Defaults

Pressure minmax

If the nominal pressure has already been entered the minimum and maximum values are set identical to it

but they may be different in their particular application The minimum and maximum pressure indicate the

limits of the process application

The limits are used to

check the pressure rating of the process connection check the current fluid phase check for cavitation

Caution The min and max pressures are not related to the min and max flow rates

Temperature minmax

If the nominal temperature is already entered the minimum and maximum values are identical to the nominal

value but they can be different in their particular adaptation

The minimum and maximum temperature indicates the limits of the process application

The limits are used to

Calculate the min and max vapour pressure Check the process connection Check the current fluid phase Check for cavitation Check for permitted device temperature

Caution The min and max temperatures are not related to the min and max flow ratesa

Units

Operating conditions can be displayed in a wide range of units You can check the units with the help of the

Unit page You can also set the default units on the Unit page so that the units that you normally work with

are the ones that are displayed automatically

You can select different units by clicking on the dropdown list (which shows the current units) and selecting a

unit from the list If you select a new unit all numeric values will be converted into the new unit

Calculated Fluid Properties

After the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter the fluid properties are calculated automatically

Applicator Sizing Flow in version 10 or newer contains a fluid engine and a gas engine for calculating the

necessary properties to size a flowmeter A list of supported gases is shown on the Gas Mixture page All other

fluids are calculated by the standard Fluid Engine Check Fluid and gas property engines for details

Density

The density at the operating conditions (min nominal or max) is calculated for the selected fluid but can be

entered manually as well You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves

differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field

For liquids (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the density of the liquid at two reference

temperatures

For gases (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the standard density (dens_Rhozero) ie the

density at 1013 mbar abs and 0degC

For gases (Gas engine) the calculations of density is based on real gas formulas

The values of the reference temperatures and densities or standard density (dens_Rhozero) can be viewed on

the Fluid Properties page (Properties button)

The default density units which are different for liquids and gases are taken from preferences which you have

indicated on the Units page

Please note that for steam (superheated and saturated) there are special formulae which calculate the density

in compliance with the standard IAPWS

Caution other unlocked fields which depend on density (eg flowrate and viscosity) are recalculated when

you change the density value (Recalculations based on temperature or pressure are generally taken for

granted whereas recalculations based on density are often overseen)

Density normal (Gas applications)

The normal density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The

reference conditions are defined on the Units page

When manually entering the normal density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip) Normal

density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the Settings menu

Density standard (Gas applications)

The standard density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The

reference conditions are defined on the Units page

When manually entering the standard density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip)

Standard density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the settings menu

Molar mass

Molar mass is the sum of all atomic masses of all atoms within a molecule The unit is kgkmol (lbkmol)

Z-factor

The Z-factor is only displayed if the selected fluid is a gas It represents the compressibility for real gases The

factor has different impacts on the fluid and gas engine

Fluid Engine

The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes as long as the field is not locked

Changing the Z-Factor causes a recalculation of Density and Viscosity (depending on the unit) if Density and

Viscosity were not locked before

Gas engine

The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes The Z-factor is only an output value

and cannot influence any dimension if it is changed manually

Viscosity

Viscosity at the operating temperature (nominal) is calculated for the selected fluid but it can also be entered

manually You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the

system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct viscosity at the operating temperature in

this input field

The liquid viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is based on the viscosity of a liquid at two reference

temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)

The gas viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is calculated based on the viscosity of the gas at two reference

temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)

The gas viscosity viscosity (Gas engine) is based on real gas formulas

The default viscosity units are taken from the Units page

Vapor pressure

The Vapor pressure field is displayed only if you calculate a liquid It indicates the absolute pressure which is

necessary to transform the liquid into a gas at the minimum nominal and maximum operating temperatures

You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the system fluid

chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field If the selected fluid is a gas

these fields are irrelevant and the compressibility factor Z for operating temperature (nominal) appears

instead

The units used for Vapor Pressure are related to the units selected for pressure Since this is a pressure

difference the concepts of relative gauge pressure do not apply

Sound Velocity

The Sound Velocity is only displayed for flowmeters if this dimension is important especially for calculating the

permitted measuring range of Coriolis mass flowmeters and for calculating the distance between the sensors

of an ultrasonic flowmeter This value can be changed and is recalculated whenever the temperature is

changed as long as the field is not locked You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid

behaves differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this

input field

Caution Please click on the Reset-button on the Sizing page if you have changed fluid properties (eg

density vapor pressure viscosity) before you start a new sizing

How to lock applicator data

When setting the fluid properties it is important to understand the concept of locking Initially all fluid

properties are unlocked and Applicator attempts to make a reasonable guess for the operating conditions

using default values for some conditions and calculating others When you set a value it will be locked

automatically The program uses your value from then on ignoring its defaults and suspending its calculations

All values which you have generated yourself are marked in blue

If you change the determined intermediate values like density viscosity eg or the results they will be printed

in italics so that you can easily recognize them

Data locking examples

Immediately after the selection of a medium and a measuring instrument Applicator starts the calculation of

the meter by using the information about operating conditions entered Usually the user herhimself adjusts

the process conditions ndash eg flow pressure and temperature- to the application The density viscosity sound

velocity vapor pressure and Z-factor are calculated by Applicator

If for example you change the temperature Applicator will recalculate the gas density value if you have not

locked the respective field However if you set the density (thereby locking it) and then change the

temperature the density will not be recalculated The program uses the density value which you have entered

independent of the temperature

Any unlocked field changes automatically if you change other operating conditions upon which it depends

Any locked field remains fixed even if you change other operating conditions Selecting a new fluid unlocks all

operating conditions except requested flow

Caution If you make a new fluid selection and lock it the fluid data will be overwritten with the default fluid

data If you make a new flowmeter selection the locked fluid data and the sensor data remain unchanged

provided this is technically reasonable

23 Sensor Pipe

This section specifies the requirements regarding the pipe into which the flowmeter is to be built

Depending on the flowmeter different inputs are necessary to describe the existing pipe location or the

requested sensor requirements Different possibilities to select the pipe material or sensor pipe material to

input pipe thickness liner thickness sound velocity of material outer diameter circumference or the input of

the inner diameter help to specify the pipe geometry Additionally rectangular ducts which are described

with the inner duct height duct width and duct thickness are available for thermal and differential pressure

flowmeters

After entering the internal diameter Applicator calculates the nearest available meter size according to the

selected connection standard Your specified inner diameter is used for further calculations

Caution Applicator takes the internal diameter and equates it with the meter or pipe size The checkbox for

Pipe size ne meter size offers the possibility of an indication and sizing of products with integrated reducers in

addition to common Prowirl flowmeters

Pipe dimension table for DP-Flow Clamp-On and Insertion meters

There is the possibility to choose between different pipe standards in order to select the correct pipe

dimension which enables a proper sizing There are 36 default values for several pipe standards available

including

bull DIN (EN 10220 24581 2462 2440 etc)

bull ASME (B3610B3619)

bull AWWA Cast Iron Class A- H AWWA Ductile Iron Class 50-56

bull One standard for free input select Applicator default valuesmanual input

After choosing the desired pipe standard the pipe dimension window opens Depending on the preferred pipe

size and pressure rating possible pipe dimensions are offered

Connection standard

Shows all available connection standards for the selected flowmeter (eg ENDIN) By choosing a category the

corresponding process connections will be listed below

Material (sensor)

Depending on the flowmeter Applicator offers different sensor materials The available materials can depend

on the diameter and process connection Material compatibility of the sensor material will be checked against

the integrated corrosion database A warning message will be displayed if compatibility issues exist between

the fluid and sensor material

Process connection

Applicator also selects the required minimum pressure rating according to the operating pressure and

temperature values This field is displayed as a dropdown list which offers all available pressure ratings for the

selected flowmeter and meter size You can change the suggested pressure rating or process connection but

if you select a lower pressure rating than the suggested one a warning will be displayed

Below Process connection you can find the Pressure rating button Clicking on it will open a window which

displays a diagram for the selected process connection the temperature-pressure derating curve of a selected

process connection and also operation points (max pressure at min and max temperature and the nominal

temperaturepressure point)

Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If

additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case

whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will

automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to

make the user aware of the change

24 Meter Operating Range

The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values

If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The

measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range

For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible

For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow

Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is

possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly

differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour

25 Calculated Results

This section shows the calculated results of sizing

Requested flow

Indicates the values used for the calculation

Flow velocity

Flow velocity max

Pressure Loss

An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss

calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This

group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be

marginal and without any influence on your process

Velocity (meas tube)

This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation

refers to the nominal density

Measured Error Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the

flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

Measured Error spec Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding

requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration

Measured Error Mass

These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for

Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the

corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead

of a value

Measured Error spec Mass

Reynolds No

The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further

sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions

Frequency

This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is

proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity

PED results

Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please

note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window

Meter size

This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually

adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have

done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is

locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal

button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This

means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are

saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter

The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters

Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will

also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements

26 Warnings

Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the

green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is

pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or

expanded using the arrow on the right

Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next

Endress+Hauser Sales Centre

27 Button center

A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of

the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process

Print Sizing

Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports

Sizing Energy

Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the

Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow

Configurator

Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code

Add to shop basket

Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This

button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the

Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline

version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when

Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Reset

This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results

Back to top

3 Custody transfer

Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of

among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals

If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection

- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out

According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different

process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature

are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task

page

In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the

approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum

turn down is also checked

Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your

entries

The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval

As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB

7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the

max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated

With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature

The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the

ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit

values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter

measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures

the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the

warning messages

Back to top

4 Accessories

There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories

page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)

In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg

mounting set 41) are executed

41 Accessories page

Example mounting set

Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations

Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)

42 Activating a checkbox

Example Flow conditioner

For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are

automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and

process connection can be selected

43 Accessories within the order code

The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving

process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed

Applicator versions)

Back to top

5 Fluid Properties page

51 General description

Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page

This view supports the following types of fluids

Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under

ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page

The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases

Liquids

Media type Standardprocess

Fluids not 100 water (example 0

Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)

Support points (linear interpolation)

Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97

Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-

Gas (Air) UDG)

Redlich-Kwong

Gases

Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas

engine

Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine

Air Ozone O3

Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)

Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr

Butane Nitric Oxide NO3

Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0

Carbon monoxide

Chlorine

Ethane

Ethylene

Helium

Hydrogen

Hydrogen chloride

Hydrogen sulphide

Krypton

Methane

Neon

Nitrogen

Oxygen

Propane

Xenon

0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User

Defined Gas Mixture 0

Oxygen

The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for

example density or viscosity

The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information

classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of

the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They

are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are

important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new

medium

The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The

parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll

to the group header you see on your screen

When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page

A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details

Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page

52 Parameter groups

521 Fluid information

In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible

Fluid name contains the name of the fluid

Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In

many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available

State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many

purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the

steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account

Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made

522 Fluid Description

The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid

Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian

Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid

Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and

syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or

measurement principle

Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is

flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals

Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive

Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for

conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to

50 microScm and more than 50 microScm

Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to

67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo

Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details

Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid

The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user

defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

523 Basic Fluid Parameters

The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be

created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages

Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid

Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid

Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point

Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid

Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas

The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has

an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also

depend on density and viscosity

In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and

sound velocity

524 Constants

This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas

type selected

Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken

from the Unit Defaults page

Molar mass molecular weight of the gas

Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)

Heating value calorific value of the gas

The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine

For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is

used to calculate the sound velocity

525 Typical Operating Conditions

The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions

Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the

mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of

the typical operating conditions are editable

526 Temperature Viscosity

This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description

The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function

of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve

for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range

527 Temperature Density

This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Density density at the support point

The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of

operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for

fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range

528 Temperature Heat capacity

This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point

The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

529 Temperature Vapor pressure

This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid

Temperature temperature at the support point

Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point

The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

5210 Gas mixture

The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture

Gas name of the gas (first field)

Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture

Unit unit for mass fraction

A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are

given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas

Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report

The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is

displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine

only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100

5211 Fluid properties and results

This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed

differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help

function

Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom

display ldquonardquo

The calculated constants are eg

Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions

Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions

Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions

Heating value the calorific value of the fluid

For liquids

Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data

displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page

AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

For solids

a viscosity coefficient for the gas

n viscosity coefficient for gases

5212 Reference values

This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters

displayed differ according to the fluid selected

Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation

Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780

Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780

Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533

Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533

5213 Measuring task

The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of

the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details

opens a window with more information about the approval

5214 Restriction on flowmeters

This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates

that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details

opens a window with more information about the restrictions

53 Setting reference conditions

Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu

There are two possibilities

SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are

- pressure 10132 bar absolute

- temperature 0deg Celsius

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter

US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are

- pressure 14696 psi absolute

- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter

54 Creating a User Defined Fluid

Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the

world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids

1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field

Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid

at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam

2 Now click on the Properties button

3 When the page has opened click on New

4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate

fields which are now open for editing

When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database

Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system

fluids

If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields

will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General

parameters list and you can start again

If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit

button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close

button exits the page without saving the changes

55 Import and Export of Fluids

In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this

the import and export function of the fluid database can be used

In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information

are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want

to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export

button

Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database

To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file

56 Fluid Properties report

The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing

page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results

and reference values

Back to top

6 Compare size and sensor

61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)

When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose

Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the

ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function

When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The

displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter

The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by

clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the

corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table

will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can

be reapplied

The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you

click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed

as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator

can be reapplied

62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)

The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement

principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are

selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator

versions

Back to top

7 Chart page

71 Introduction

The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case

of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available

The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections

72 General Parameters

In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a

repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on

the sizing page

73 Process data

Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference

74 Curves

The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if

offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter

In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be

automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be

activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner

If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report

75 Flow limits

The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range

and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are

different

76 Chart

The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the

pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using

the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional

information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different

curves within the chart

The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons

The content of the printout depends on the options selected

Back to top

8 Order Code

Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order

information

In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring

principle and flowmeter These are as follows

Feature Description Order codeSizing

Definition of ideal

diameter

Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter

relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure

loss

Diameter (Order code

option)

Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and

installation data

Mounting set (Order code

option)

Determination of

insertion depth

Calculation of insertion depth depending on

the selected accessory (t-mass)

Pipe length (Order code

option)

Selection of Material

(Sensor)

Selection and verification of corrosion

consistency

Sensor material Liner

material (Order code

option)

Selection of Process

connection

Selection and verification of pressure and

temperature curve

Process connection (Order

code option)

Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order

code option)

Pressure equipment

directive (PED)

Definition of PED-category depending on the

application and verification of the offered

process connections

Additional approval (Order

code option)

Custody transfer Verification or specification of application

data definition of measuring range

Custody transfer (Order

code option)

Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow

conditioner)

Accessory enclosed or extra

position (Order code

option)

Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow

splitter

Sensor Options (Order code

option)

Evaluation of

measuring range

Calculation of measuring range Calculation

datachart

Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and

accessory where required

Calculation

datachart

Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation

datachart

Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion

database with relevant data

The Order code page consists of different frames

81 Order code

Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically

by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and

Configurator for the valid order codes

82 Order code options

Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration

options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the

order code

The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection

on the Sizing page

The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page

The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options

Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed

these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still

feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning

message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change

83 Extended order code

831 General

Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen

In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables

for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and

activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the

Extended order code feature is used

With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order

code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the

order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator

832 Device parameter data settings

To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is

not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the

ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator

The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo

84 Button center

The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to

proceed with your Sizing process

Configurator

Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order

code

Print Sizing

Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product can be pasted into a project

Back to top

9 Conversion Calculator

Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity

All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by

selecting one out of the drop down lists

The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another

The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all

common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be

recalculated automatically

Back to top

10 Unit Defaults

Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings

menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored

whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session

Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily

for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button

Back to top

11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)

111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)

Disclaimer

The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from

publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and

assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a

minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion

fatigue life

The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different

process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined

Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check

Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled

The content of the database was sourced from

bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)

bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG

bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta

bull Various Internet Links

bull Various Corrosion data bases

The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application

and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process

temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows

Metal

Class Description depth of corrosion per surface

A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)

B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)

C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)

NR not recommended

U unknown

Plastics

Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength

A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear

B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year

lt=30 loss of tensile strength year

C not resistant lt= 50year

lt=50 loss of tensile strength year

NR not recommended

U unknown

Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used

112 Using Corrosion Check

Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion

information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability

of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not

appear at the top of the page

Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the

corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table

The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid

The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion

database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message

is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning

message

The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project

module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing

Back to top

12 Settings (Sizing Flow)

The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the

button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select

Sizing Flow

The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this

function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings

saved are loaded with the Load Default button

Setting Impact when activated

Basic functions

Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply

Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order

classification PED device check code page and printouts

Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits

The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits

No indication of default start data input of data by user

By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually

Advanced functions

Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)

The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles

Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates

My View

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

DP Flow

Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters

Activates said functions

Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP

flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

Back to top

13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines

131 General

Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation

Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)

Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures

132 Fluid engine

General Information

The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the

fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor

Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both

liquids and for gases

Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data

Liquid Calculation

Calculation of the acentric factor Omega

Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure

Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby

bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC

bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database

bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms

bull

The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs

Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature

bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3

bull Alpha in 1K

bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K

bull Toper in K

bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3

The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs

Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature

bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3

bull AL (Viscosity factor)

bull BL (Viscosity factor)

bull Toper in K

bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt

Gas calculation

The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and

pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and

temperature

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull Zoper (Compressibility)

Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)

Toper in K

bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3

Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull c Kappa

Steam Calculation

Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard

The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard

(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use

The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from

bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and

bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa

This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only

That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms

Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator

133 Gas engine

The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the

fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine

The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of

the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted

process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine

Back to top

14 Print Sizing

The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured

and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page

The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens

bull Page format size margins orientation and format

bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter

bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report

Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed

bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo

bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout

Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered

Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page

Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are

possible Please check the help manual of the Project module

Back to top

15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by

manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002

The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection

options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator

takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable

flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and

Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can

switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator

1 Categorisation of the application

2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests

bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this

option

PED Categories

Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered

during the sizing and ordering process They include

bull All ultrasonic flowmeters

bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo

bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water

bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the

static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure

bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume

The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data

danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)

Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements

have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen

device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and

nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case

a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet

All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout

Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)

Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and

temperature are the main parameters

If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required

data in the min nom and max columns

If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the

necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating

Danger posed by the fluid

The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the

case of gases the stability of the gas is also important

The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo

according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)

All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations

belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is

above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture

bull H200-H205 (explosive)

bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)

bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)

bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)

bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)

bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)

bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)

In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in

Danger Symbols below

In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED

fluid groups

rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids

Order code

If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option

this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page

With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family

nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration

If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center

Danger Symbols

Danger symbol Explanation H-rates

C corrosive H 314

Cl chemical instable

E explosive H200-H205

F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223

F flammable H 225-H228

N environmental

dangerous

O oxidizing H271-H272

T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330

H372

T poisonous

Xi irritating

Xn injurious to health

Back to top

16 Online Update

The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator

Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes

and updated system databases with the latest products

The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator

newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the

Settings menu

Page 4: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use

Online Update ndash get the latest version of Applicator ndash only needed when using the offline

version

Fluid Properties page - Check liquids and gas properties and create user defined fluids

Compare - Compare and check up to three different sizes and flowmeters at a glance

Conversion Calculator - Conversion of dimensions in different units

Settings - Set your preferences in Applicator

PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

Fluid and gas property engines ndash Information for calculating fluid properties

11 Basics

Before you start with Sizing Flow you should know the flowmeter family On the pages of Applicator Selection

or Industry Applications you will find recommendations for suitable families

On several pages Sizing Flow Applicator supports the engineering process with useful and necessary functions

to find the most suitable size of the flowmeter to calculate the fluid properties in compliance with process

conditions and to check the meter and process connection according to the requirements of the application

The fluid properties are calculated with the help of the Applicator fluid and gas engine depending on the

selected fluid and process conditions (flow temperature pressure)

Parameter help

Parameter help offers immediate support for understanding the parameters used in Sizing Flow without the

need to open the help pages Parameters for which an explanation exists are indicated by an ldquoirdquo icon When

touched with the mouse pointer the program opens a separate window with an explanation Close the window

by clicking on the OK button

Back to top

2 Sizing

The sizing page is divided into three sections

21 General parameters

Within the general parameters section you can choose the measuring task fluid principlesensor and the

transmitter Additionally the status of the fluid the corresponding calculation standard the selected

flowmeter and the order code appears A Tag field allows the entry of a measuring point tag

Measuring task

Selects the measuring task Several possibilities are available for example the standard measuring task

ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo is used for the normal sizing functionality or ldquoCustody TransferBillingrdquo for sizing with

the appropriate approvals For details please check the measuring task page

Fluid

The fluid selection dropdown list shows possible fluids associated with the selected measuring task

This field displays the default or currently selected fluid Open the dropdown list of available fluids A fluid is

selected either by clicking with the mouse on the fluid in the dropdown list or just by using the key Enter In

the second case the fluid must be indicated by typing in the first letter The list will then only contain fluids

which begin with that letter

Properties

You can view fluid properties with the Properties button For more information about fluids see Fluid

Properties

StandardState

Standard

The first field indicates the calculation standard used for the selected media type

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The overview below shows the assignment of the media types to the

relevant standards and processes used

Media type Standardprocess Fluid properties editable

Fluids no water (example

dummy)

Support points (linear

interpolation)

Yes

Water (drinking water dummy) IAPWS-97 No

Gases user-defined (example

dummy)

Ideal gas Yes

Gases user-defined (example

dummy)

Redlich-Kwong Yes

Gases gas mixtures (example

dummy)

NEL ndash identical to the t-mass Gas

Engine

No

Natural gas NX-19 and other standards (in

preparation)

No

Each calculation standard has different effects on the direct input of medium properties that are already

known to the user The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo and ldquoIdeal Gasrdquo standards (reliable results for gas

properties with operating pressure less than 20 bar ndash easy start with lsquoDummy-Gas (Air) based on Ideal Gasrsquo) -

are therefore open for the manual input of medium properties The data cannot be edited manually if the fluid

properties are calculated with official standards (eg IAWPS) Fluid properties which are calculated with

officially approved standards can be used as reference values (eg on-site density calibration)

State

The second field indicates the physical status of the currently selected fluid liquid gas superheated steam or

saturated steam These four states have been defined for pragmatic reasons Each of them requires its own set

of formulae to calculate the fluid properties This field is not editable

Please note The value of the State field of the fluid you have selected must match the state of your fluid at

the desired operating temperature and pressure If this is not the case Applicator informs you with a warning

message

Example if you select a gas which acts like a liquid at the desired operating temperature and pressure all

calculations and results will be invalid The formulae for liquids and gases are different The program will NOT

automatically switch to the correct set of formulae based on the operating conditions The fluid and flowmeter

state compatibility checking will also be affected

Tag

This field allows the user to enter the measuring point tag of the flowmeter

PrincipleSensor

The first field is used to select the measuring principle and sensor type The types available are dependent on

the previously selected fluid and measuring task Devices marked in magenta are not available because of a

specific exclusion ndash for example low temperature versions are available for cryogenic fluids only

The second field indicates the flowmeter sensor generation

Transmitter

After choosing the sensor type you can select the corresponding transmitter If only one transmitter type is

available then the flowmeter will be indicated immediately

Flowmeter

The first field indicates the selected sensor and transmitter as the complete flowmeter product The second

field indicates the device model These fields are not editable

The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters

Order code

The field indicates the order code of the selected flowmeter

22 Process data

The Process data page is used for the input of the process and installation conditions for the flowmeter After

the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter Applicator starts with default values which can be overwritten later

The possibility of manually editing data depends upon the corresponding calculation standard For more

details go to the Fluid Properties page

This view consists of ldquothree measuring pointsrdquo This means that the process conditions at three different flow

values can be entered minimum nominal and maximum However if only nominal values are entered these

are copied over to minimum and maximum so this feature is not mandatory to use ndash the same values can be

entered instead Using this feature has implications on Calculated resultspage As the density each measuring

points is used the sensor velocity flow velocity pressure loss reynoldsnumber and in some cases

measurement error is influenced

Please note if the option ldquoNo indication of default start data input of data by userrdquo is activated in the

Settings menu for Sizing Flow the most important start data (required flow pressure temperature) have to

be entered before the process data window is opened completely The input window appears after the

selection of the general parameters see Section 21

221 Process data

Reference values

This link opens the Units page where it is possible to change the default settings The page can also be

accessed by clicking on the cogwheel tab at the top of the page

You can for example change the Atmospheric Pressure which is relevant for conversion pressure in gauge and

absolute units

Normal Conditions (SI) refers to DIN 1343 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperature = 27315 K)

Base unit Nm3time

Standard Conditions (US) refers to ISO 2533 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperatue = 28815 K)

Base units SCFH SCFM SCFS Sm3time

Requested Flow

First enter the units of measure then the values for the minimum nominal and maximum flow rate

Applicator uses the nominal value for an initial sizing process and then checks the suggested size by making it

one size bigger or smaller in order to fit to the entered range of minimum to maximum flow rate Each

flowmeter has a default flow rate associated with it When you choose a new meter the associated default

flow rate values are displayed in these fields for initial calculations provided the fields are not locked

If you have chosen ldquogasrdquo and set a volumetric unit (eg m3h lh hellip) an additional button Requested Flow

(FAD) appears Clicking on it opens the lsquoCalculated requested flowrsquo window This allows the input and

calculation of a requested flow rate at deviating process pressures and temperatures Eg Input of ldquoFree air

deliveryrdquo for compressed air

(1 Press the Requested Flow (FAD) button 2 Enter your Requested flow values Press Apply to use the

edited values)

The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page If the selected

flowmeter is a mass flowmeter the default mass flow units are used If the fluid is a liquid the default liquid

volumetric flow units are used In other cases either the default gas volumetric or the mass flow units are

used You can also set the default units on the Units page so that the units that you normally work with are

the ones that are displayed automatically (see the description in Unit Defaults)

Pressure

The fluid operating pressure value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for the

operating pressure (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties When

you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is displayed in the nominal field for initial

calculation provided it is not locked

The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page (Unit Defaults)

You can set the default pressure unit with the help of this page

Temperature

The fluid operating temperature value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for

the operating temperature (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties

When you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is placed and displayed in the nominal

field for initial calculation provided it is not locked

The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page See Unit

Defaults

Pressure minmax

If the nominal pressure has already been entered the minimum and maximum values are set identical to it

but they may be different in their particular application The minimum and maximum pressure indicate the

limits of the process application

The limits are used to

check the pressure rating of the process connection check the current fluid phase check for cavitation

Caution The min and max pressures are not related to the min and max flow rates

Temperature minmax

If the nominal temperature is already entered the minimum and maximum values are identical to the nominal

value but they can be different in their particular adaptation

The minimum and maximum temperature indicates the limits of the process application

The limits are used to

Calculate the min and max vapour pressure Check the process connection Check the current fluid phase Check for cavitation Check for permitted device temperature

Caution The min and max temperatures are not related to the min and max flow ratesa

Units

Operating conditions can be displayed in a wide range of units You can check the units with the help of the

Unit page You can also set the default units on the Unit page so that the units that you normally work with

are the ones that are displayed automatically

You can select different units by clicking on the dropdown list (which shows the current units) and selecting a

unit from the list If you select a new unit all numeric values will be converted into the new unit

Calculated Fluid Properties

After the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter the fluid properties are calculated automatically

Applicator Sizing Flow in version 10 or newer contains a fluid engine and a gas engine for calculating the

necessary properties to size a flowmeter A list of supported gases is shown on the Gas Mixture page All other

fluids are calculated by the standard Fluid Engine Check Fluid and gas property engines for details

Density

The density at the operating conditions (min nominal or max) is calculated for the selected fluid but can be

entered manually as well You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves

differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field

For liquids (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the density of the liquid at two reference

temperatures

For gases (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the standard density (dens_Rhozero) ie the

density at 1013 mbar abs and 0degC

For gases (Gas engine) the calculations of density is based on real gas formulas

The values of the reference temperatures and densities or standard density (dens_Rhozero) can be viewed on

the Fluid Properties page (Properties button)

The default density units which are different for liquids and gases are taken from preferences which you have

indicated on the Units page

Please note that for steam (superheated and saturated) there are special formulae which calculate the density

in compliance with the standard IAPWS

Caution other unlocked fields which depend on density (eg flowrate and viscosity) are recalculated when

you change the density value (Recalculations based on temperature or pressure are generally taken for

granted whereas recalculations based on density are often overseen)

Density normal (Gas applications)

The normal density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The

reference conditions are defined on the Units page

When manually entering the normal density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip) Normal

density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the Settings menu

Density standard (Gas applications)

The standard density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The

reference conditions are defined on the Units page

When manually entering the standard density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip)

Standard density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the settings menu

Molar mass

Molar mass is the sum of all atomic masses of all atoms within a molecule The unit is kgkmol (lbkmol)

Z-factor

The Z-factor is only displayed if the selected fluid is a gas It represents the compressibility for real gases The

factor has different impacts on the fluid and gas engine

Fluid Engine

The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes as long as the field is not locked

Changing the Z-Factor causes a recalculation of Density and Viscosity (depending on the unit) if Density and

Viscosity were not locked before

Gas engine

The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes The Z-factor is only an output value

and cannot influence any dimension if it is changed manually

Viscosity

Viscosity at the operating temperature (nominal) is calculated for the selected fluid but it can also be entered

manually You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the

system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct viscosity at the operating temperature in

this input field

The liquid viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is based on the viscosity of a liquid at two reference

temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)

The gas viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is calculated based on the viscosity of the gas at two reference

temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)

The gas viscosity viscosity (Gas engine) is based on real gas formulas

The default viscosity units are taken from the Units page

Vapor pressure

The Vapor pressure field is displayed only if you calculate a liquid It indicates the absolute pressure which is

necessary to transform the liquid into a gas at the minimum nominal and maximum operating temperatures

You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the system fluid

chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field If the selected fluid is a gas

these fields are irrelevant and the compressibility factor Z for operating temperature (nominal) appears

instead

The units used for Vapor Pressure are related to the units selected for pressure Since this is a pressure

difference the concepts of relative gauge pressure do not apply

Sound Velocity

The Sound Velocity is only displayed for flowmeters if this dimension is important especially for calculating the

permitted measuring range of Coriolis mass flowmeters and for calculating the distance between the sensors

of an ultrasonic flowmeter This value can be changed and is recalculated whenever the temperature is

changed as long as the field is not locked You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid

behaves differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this

input field

Caution Please click on the Reset-button on the Sizing page if you have changed fluid properties (eg

density vapor pressure viscosity) before you start a new sizing

How to lock applicator data

When setting the fluid properties it is important to understand the concept of locking Initially all fluid

properties are unlocked and Applicator attempts to make a reasonable guess for the operating conditions

using default values for some conditions and calculating others When you set a value it will be locked

automatically The program uses your value from then on ignoring its defaults and suspending its calculations

All values which you have generated yourself are marked in blue

If you change the determined intermediate values like density viscosity eg or the results they will be printed

in italics so that you can easily recognize them

Data locking examples

Immediately after the selection of a medium and a measuring instrument Applicator starts the calculation of

the meter by using the information about operating conditions entered Usually the user herhimself adjusts

the process conditions ndash eg flow pressure and temperature- to the application The density viscosity sound

velocity vapor pressure and Z-factor are calculated by Applicator

If for example you change the temperature Applicator will recalculate the gas density value if you have not

locked the respective field However if you set the density (thereby locking it) and then change the

temperature the density will not be recalculated The program uses the density value which you have entered

independent of the temperature

Any unlocked field changes automatically if you change other operating conditions upon which it depends

Any locked field remains fixed even if you change other operating conditions Selecting a new fluid unlocks all

operating conditions except requested flow

Caution If you make a new fluid selection and lock it the fluid data will be overwritten with the default fluid

data If you make a new flowmeter selection the locked fluid data and the sensor data remain unchanged

provided this is technically reasonable

23 Sensor Pipe

This section specifies the requirements regarding the pipe into which the flowmeter is to be built

Depending on the flowmeter different inputs are necessary to describe the existing pipe location or the

requested sensor requirements Different possibilities to select the pipe material or sensor pipe material to

input pipe thickness liner thickness sound velocity of material outer diameter circumference or the input of

the inner diameter help to specify the pipe geometry Additionally rectangular ducts which are described

with the inner duct height duct width and duct thickness are available for thermal and differential pressure

flowmeters

After entering the internal diameter Applicator calculates the nearest available meter size according to the

selected connection standard Your specified inner diameter is used for further calculations

Caution Applicator takes the internal diameter and equates it with the meter or pipe size The checkbox for

Pipe size ne meter size offers the possibility of an indication and sizing of products with integrated reducers in

addition to common Prowirl flowmeters

Pipe dimension table for DP-Flow Clamp-On and Insertion meters

There is the possibility to choose between different pipe standards in order to select the correct pipe

dimension which enables a proper sizing There are 36 default values for several pipe standards available

including

bull DIN (EN 10220 24581 2462 2440 etc)

bull ASME (B3610B3619)

bull AWWA Cast Iron Class A- H AWWA Ductile Iron Class 50-56

bull One standard for free input select Applicator default valuesmanual input

After choosing the desired pipe standard the pipe dimension window opens Depending on the preferred pipe

size and pressure rating possible pipe dimensions are offered

Connection standard

Shows all available connection standards for the selected flowmeter (eg ENDIN) By choosing a category the

corresponding process connections will be listed below

Material (sensor)

Depending on the flowmeter Applicator offers different sensor materials The available materials can depend

on the diameter and process connection Material compatibility of the sensor material will be checked against

the integrated corrosion database A warning message will be displayed if compatibility issues exist between

the fluid and sensor material

Process connection

Applicator also selects the required minimum pressure rating according to the operating pressure and

temperature values This field is displayed as a dropdown list which offers all available pressure ratings for the

selected flowmeter and meter size You can change the suggested pressure rating or process connection but

if you select a lower pressure rating than the suggested one a warning will be displayed

Below Process connection you can find the Pressure rating button Clicking on it will open a window which

displays a diagram for the selected process connection the temperature-pressure derating curve of a selected

process connection and also operation points (max pressure at min and max temperature and the nominal

temperaturepressure point)

Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If

additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case

whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will

automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to

make the user aware of the change

24 Meter Operating Range

The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values

If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The

measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range

For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible

For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow

Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is

possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly

differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour

25 Calculated Results

This section shows the calculated results of sizing

Requested flow

Indicates the values used for the calculation

Flow velocity

Flow velocity max

Pressure Loss

An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss

calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This

group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be

marginal and without any influence on your process

Velocity (meas tube)

This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation

refers to the nominal density

Measured Error Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the

flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

Measured Error spec Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding

requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration

Measured Error Mass

These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for

Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the

corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead

of a value

Measured Error spec Mass

Reynolds No

The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further

sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions

Frequency

This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is

proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity

PED results

Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please

note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window

Meter size

This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually

adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have

done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is

locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal

button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This

means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are

saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter

The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters

Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will

also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements

26 Warnings

Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the

green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is

pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or

expanded using the arrow on the right

Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next

Endress+Hauser Sales Centre

27 Button center

A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of

the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process

Print Sizing

Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports

Sizing Energy

Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the

Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow

Configurator

Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code

Add to shop basket

Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This

button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the

Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline

version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when

Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Reset

This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results

Back to top

3 Custody transfer

Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of

among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals

If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection

- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out

According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different

process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature

are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task

page

In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the

approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum

turn down is also checked

Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your

entries

The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval

As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB

7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the

max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated

With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature

The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the

ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit

values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter

measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures

the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the

warning messages

Back to top

4 Accessories

There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories

page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)

In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg

mounting set 41) are executed

41 Accessories page

Example mounting set

Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations

Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)

42 Activating a checkbox

Example Flow conditioner

For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are

automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and

process connection can be selected

43 Accessories within the order code

The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving

process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed

Applicator versions)

Back to top

5 Fluid Properties page

51 General description

Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page

This view supports the following types of fluids

Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under

ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page

The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases

Liquids

Media type Standardprocess

Fluids not 100 water (example 0

Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)

Support points (linear interpolation)

Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97

Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-

Gas (Air) UDG)

Redlich-Kwong

Gases

Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas

engine

Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine

Air Ozone O3

Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)

Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr

Butane Nitric Oxide NO3

Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0

Carbon monoxide

Chlorine

Ethane

Ethylene

Helium

Hydrogen

Hydrogen chloride

Hydrogen sulphide

Krypton

Methane

Neon

Nitrogen

Oxygen

Propane

Xenon

0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User

Defined Gas Mixture 0

Oxygen

The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for

example density or viscosity

The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information

classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of

the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They

are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are

important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new

medium

The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The

parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll

to the group header you see on your screen

When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page

A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details

Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page

52 Parameter groups

521 Fluid information

In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible

Fluid name contains the name of the fluid

Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In

many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available

State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many

purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the

steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account

Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made

522 Fluid Description

The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid

Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian

Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid

Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and

syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or

measurement principle

Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is

flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals

Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive

Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for

conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to

50 microScm and more than 50 microScm

Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to

67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo

Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details

Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid

The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user

defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

523 Basic Fluid Parameters

The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be

created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages

Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid

Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid

Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point

Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid

Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas

The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has

an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also

depend on density and viscosity

In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and

sound velocity

524 Constants

This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas

type selected

Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken

from the Unit Defaults page

Molar mass molecular weight of the gas

Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)

Heating value calorific value of the gas

The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine

For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is

used to calculate the sound velocity

525 Typical Operating Conditions

The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions

Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the

mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of

the typical operating conditions are editable

526 Temperature Viscosity

This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description

The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function

of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve

for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range

527 Temperature Density

This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Density density at the support point

The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of

operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for

fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range

528 Temperature Heat capacity

This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point

The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

529 Temperature Vapor pressure

This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid

Temperature temperature at the support point

Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point

The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

5210 Gas mixture

The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture

Gas name of the gas (first field)

Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture

Unit unit for mass fraction

A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are

given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas

Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report

The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is

displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine

only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100

5211 Fluid properties and results

This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed

differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help

function

Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom

display ldquonardquo

The calculated constants are eg

Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions

Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions

Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions

Heating value the calorific value of the fluid

For liquids

Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data

displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page

AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

For solids

a viscosity coefficient for the gas

n viscosity coefficient for gases

5212 Reference values

This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters

displayed differ according to the fluid selected

Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation

Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780

Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780

Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533

Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533

5213 Measuring task

The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of

the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details

opens a window with more information about the approval

5214 Restriction on flowmeters

This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates

that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details

opens a window with more information about the restrictions

53 Setting reference conditions

Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu

There are two possibilities

SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are

- pressure 10132 bar absolute

- temperature 0deg Celsius

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter

US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are

- pressure 14696 psi absolute

- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter

54 Creating a User Defined Fluid

Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the

world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids

1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field

Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid

at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam

2 Now click on the Properties button

3 When the page has opened click on New

4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate

fields which are now open for editing

When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database

Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system

fluids

If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields

will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General

parameters list and you can start again

If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit

button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close

button exits the page without saving the changes

55 Import and Export of Fluids

In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this

the import and export function of the fluid database can be used

In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information

are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want

to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export

button

Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database

To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file

56 Fluid Properties report

The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing

page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results

and reference values

Back to top

6 Compare size and sensor

61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)

When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose

Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the

ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function

When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The

displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter

The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by

clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the

corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table

will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can

be reapplied

The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you

click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed

as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator

can be reapplied

62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)

The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement

principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are

selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator

versions

Back to top

7 Chart page

71 Introduction

The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case

of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available

The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections

72 General Parameters

In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a

repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on

the sizing page

73 Process data

Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference

74 Curves

The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if

offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter

In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be

automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be

activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner

If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report

75 Flow limits

The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range

and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are

different

76 Chart

The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the

pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using

the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional

information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different

curves within the chart

The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons

The content of the printout depends on the options selected

Back to top

8 Order Code

Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order

information

In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring

principle and flowmeter These are as follows

Feature Description Order codeSizing

Definition of ideal

diameter

Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter

relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure

loss

Diameter (Order code

option)

Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and

installation data

Mounting set (Order code

option)

Determination of

insertion depth

Calculation of insertion depth depending on

the selected accessory (t-mass)

Pipe length (Order code

option)

Selection of Material

(Sensor)

Selection and verification of corrosion

consistency

Sensor material Liner

material (Order code

option)

Selection of Process

connection

Selection and verification of pressure and

temperature curve

Process connection (Order

code option)

Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order

code option)

Pressure equipment

directive (PED)

Definition of PED-category depending on the

application and verification of the offered

process connections

Additional approval (Order

code option)

Custody transfer Verification or specification of application

data definition of measuring range

Custody transfer (Order

code option)

Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow

conditioner)

Accessory enclosed or extra

position (Order code

option)

Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow

splitter

Sensor Options (Order code

option)

Evaluation of

measuring range

Calculation of measuring range Calculation

datachart

Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and

accessory where required

Calculation

datachart

Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation

datachart

Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion

database with relevant data

The Order code page consists of different frames

81 Order code

Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically

by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and

Configurator for the valid order codes

82 Order code options

Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration

options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the

order code

The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection

on the Sizing page

The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page

The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options

Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed

these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still

feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning

message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change

83 Extended order code

831 General

Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen

In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables

for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and

activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the

Extended order code feature is used

With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order

code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the

order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator

832 Device parameter data settings

To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is

not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the

ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator

The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo

84 Button center

The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to

proceed with your Sizing process

Configurator

Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order

code

Print Sizing

Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product can be pasted into a project

Back to top

9 Conversion Calculator

Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity

All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by

selecting one out of the drop down lists

The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another

The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all

common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be

recalculated automatically

Back to top

10 Unit Defaults

Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings

menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored

whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session

Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily

for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button

Back to top

11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)

111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)

Disclaimer

The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from

publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and

assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a

minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion

fatigue life

The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different

process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined

Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check

Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled

The content of the database was sourced from

bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)

bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG

bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta

bull Various Internet Links

bull Various Corrosion data bases

The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application

and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process

temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows

Metal

Class Description depth of corrosion per surface

A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)

B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)

C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)

NR not recommended

U unknown

Plastics

Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength

A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear

B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year

lt=30 loss of tensile strength year

C not resistant lt= 50year

lt=50 loss of tensile strength year

NR not recommended

U unknown

Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used

112 Using Corrosion Check

Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion

information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability

of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not

appear at the top of the page

Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the

corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table

The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid

The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion

database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message

is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning

message

The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project

module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing

Back to top

12 Settings (Sizing Flow)

The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the

button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select

Sizing Flow

The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this

function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings

saved are loaded with the Load Default button

Setting Impact when activated

Basic functions

Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply

Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order

classification PED device check code page and printouts

Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits

The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits

No indication of default start data input of data by user

By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually

Advanced functions

Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)

The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles

Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates

My View

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

DP Flow

Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters

Activates said functions

Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP

flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

Back to top

13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines

131 General

Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation

Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)

Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures

132 Fluid engine

General Information

The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the

fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor

Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both

liquids and for gases

Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data

Liquid Calculation

Calculation of the acentric factor Omega

Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure

Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby

bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC

bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database

bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms

bull

The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs

Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature

bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3

bull Alpha in 1K

bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K

bull Toper in K

bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3

The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs

Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature

bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3

bull AL (Viscosity factor)

bull BL (Viscosity factor)

bull Toper in K

bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt

Gas calculation

The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and

pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and

temperature

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull Zoper (Compressibility)

Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)

Toper in K

bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3

Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull c Kappa

Steam Calculation

Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard

The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard

(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use

The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from

bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and

bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa

This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only

That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms

Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator

133 Gas engine

The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the

fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine

The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of

the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted

process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine

Back to top

14 Print Sizing

The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured

and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page

The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens

bull Page format size margins orientation and format

bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter

bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report

Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed

bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo

bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout

Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered

Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page

Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are

possible Please check the help manual of the Project module

Back to top

15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by

manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002

The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection

options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator

takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable

flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and

Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can

switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator

1 Categorisation of the application

2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests

bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this

option

PED Categories

Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered

during the sizing and ordering process They include

bull All ultrasonic flowmeters

bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo

bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water

bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the

static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure

bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume

The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data

danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)

Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements

have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen

device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and

nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case

a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet

All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout

Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)

Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and

temperature are the main parameters

If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required

data in the min nom and max columns

If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the

necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating

Danger posed by the fluid

The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the

case of gases the stability of the gas is also important

The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo

according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)

All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations

belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is

above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture

bull H200-H205 (explosive)

bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)

bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)

bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)

bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)

bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)

bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)

In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in

Danger Symbols below

In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED

fluid groups

rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids

Order code

If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option

this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page

With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family

nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration

If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center

Danger Symbols

Danger symbol Explanation H-rates

C corrosive H 314

Cl chemical instable

E explosive H200-H205

F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223

F flammable H 225-H228

N environmental

dangerous

O oxidizing H271-H272

T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330

H372

T poisonous

Xi irritating

Xn injurious to health

Back to top

16 Online Update

The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator

Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes

and updated system databases with the latest products

The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator

newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the

Settings menu

Page 5: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use

2 Sizing

The sizing page is divided into three sections

21 General parameters

Within the general parameters section you can choose the measuring task fluid principlesensor and the

transmitter Additionally the status of the fluid the corresponding calculation standard the selected

flowmeter and the order code appears A Tag field allows the entry of a measuring point tag

Measuring task

Selects the measuring task Several possibilities are available for example the standard measuring task

ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo is used for the normal sizing functionality or ldquoCustody TransferBillingrdquo for sizing with

the appropriate approvals For details please check the measuring task page

Fluid

The fluid selection dropdown list shows possible fluids associated with the selected measuring task

This field displays the default or currently selected fluid Open the dropdown list of available fluids A fluid is

selected either by clicking with the mouse on the fluid in the dropdown list or just by using the key Enter In

the second case the fluid must be indicated by typing in the first letter The list will then only contain fluids

which begin with that letter

Properties

You can view fluid properties with the Properties button For more information about fluids see Fluid

Properties

StandardState

Standard

The first field indicates the calculation standard used for the selected media type

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The overview below shows the assignment of the media types to the

relevant standards and processes used

Media type Standardprocess Fluid properties editable

Fluids no water (example

dummy)

Support points (linear

interpolation)

Yes

Water (drinking water dummy) IAPWS-97 No

Gases user-defined (example

dummy)

Ideal gas Yes

Gases user-defined (example

dummy)

Redlich-Kwong Yes

Gases gas mixtures (example

dummy)

NEL ndash identical to the t-mass Gas

Engine

No

Natural gas NX-19 and other standards (in

preparation)

No

Each calculation standard has different effects on the direct input of medium properties that are already

known to the user The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo and ldquoIdeal Gasrdquo standards (reliable results for gas

properties with operating pressure less than 20 bar ndash easy start with lsquoDummy-Gas (Air) based on Ideal Gasrsquo) -

are therefore open for the manual input of medium properties The data cannot be edited manually if the fluid

properties are calculated with official standards (eg IAWPS) Fluid properties which are calculated with

officially approved standards can be used as reference values (eg on-site density calibration)

State

The second field indicates the physical status of the currently selected fluid liquid gas superheated steam or

saturated steam These four states have been defined for pragmatic reasons Each of them requires its own set

of formulae to calculate the fluid properties This field is not editable

Please note The value of the State field of the fluid you have selected must match the state of your fluid at

the desired operating temperature and pressure If this is not the case Applicator informs you with a warning

message

Example if you select a gas which acts like a liquid at the desired operating temperature and pressure all

calculations and results will be invalid The formulae for liquids and gases are different The program will NOT

automatically switch to the correct set of formulae based on the operating conditions The fluid and flowmeter

state compatibility checking will also be affected

Tag

This field allows the user to enter the measuring point tag of the flowmeter

PrincipleSensor

The first field is used to select the measuring principle and sensor type The types available are dependent on

the previously selected fluid and measuring task Devices marked in magenta are not available because of a

specific exclusion ndash for example low temperature versions are available for cryogenic fluids only

The second field indicates the flowmeter sensor generation

Transmitter

After choosing the sensor type you can select the corresponding transmitter If only one transmitter type is

available then the flowmeter will be indicated immediately

Flowmeter

The first field indicates the selected sensor and transmitter as the complete flowmeter product The second

field indicates the device model These fields are not editable

The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters

Order code

The field indicates the order code of the selected flowmeter

22 Process data

The Process data page is used for the input of the process and installation conditions for the flowmeter After

the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter Applicator starts with default values which can be overwritten later

The possibility of manually editing data depends upon the corresponding calculation standard For more

details go to the Fluid Properties page

This view consists of ldquothree measuring pointsrdquo This means that the process conditions at three different flow

values can be entered minimum nominal and maximum However if only nominal values are entered these

are copied over to minimum and maximum so this feature is not mandatory to use ndash the same values can be

entered instead Using this feature has implications on Calculated resultspage As the density each measuring

points is used the sensor velocity flow velocity pressure loss reynoldsnumber and in some cases

measurement error is influenced

Please note if the option ldquoNo indication of default start data input of data by userrdquo is activated in the

Settings menu for Sizing Flow the most important start data (required flow pressure temperature) have to

be entered before the process data window is opened completely The input window appears after the

selection of the general parameters see Section 21

221 Process data

Reference values

This link opens the Units page where it is possible to change the default settings The page can also be

accessed by clicking on the cogwheel tab at the top of the page

You can for example change the Atmospheric Pressure which is relevant for conversion pressure in gauge and

absolute units

Normal Conditions (SI) refers to DIN 1343 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperature = 27315 K)

Base unit Nm3time

Standard Conditions (US) refers to ISO 2533 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperatue = 28815 K)

Base units SCFH SCFM SCFS Sm3time

Requested Flow

First enter the units of measure then the values for the minimum nominal and maximum flow rate

Applicator uses the nominal value for an initial sizing process and then checks the suggested size by making it

one size bigger or smaller in order to fit to the entered range of minimum to maximum flow rate Each

flowmeter has a default flow rate associated with it When you choose a new meter the associated default

flow rate values are displayed in these fields for initial calculations provided the fields are not locked

If you have chosen ldquogasrdquo and set a volumetric unit (eg m3h lh hellip) an additional button Requested Flow

(FAD) appears Clicking on it opens the lsquoCalculated requested flowrsquo window This allows the input and

calculation of a requested flow rate at deviating process pressures and temperatures Eg Input of ldquoFree air

deliveryrdquo for compressed air

(1 Press the Requested Flow (FAD) button 2 Enter your Requested flow values Press Apply to use the

edited values)

The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page If the selected

flowmeter is a mass flowmeter the default mass flow units are used If the fluid is a liquid the default liquid

volumetric flow units are used In other cases either the default gas volumetric or the mass flow units are

used You can also set the default units on the Units page so that the units that you normally work with are

the ones that are displayed automatically (see the description in Unit Defaults)

Pressure

The fluid operating pressure value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for the

operating pressure (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties When

you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is displayed in the nominal field for initial

calculation provided it is not locked

The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page (Unit Defaults)

You can set the default pressure unit with the help of this page

Temperature

The fluid operating temperature value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for

the operating temperature (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties

When you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is placed and displayed in the nominal

field for initial calculation provided it is not locked

The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page See Unit

Defaults

Pressure minmax

If the nominal pressure has already been entered the minimum and maximum values are set identical to it

but they may be different in their particular application The minimum and maximum pressure indicate the

limits of the process application

The limits are used to

check the pressure rating of the process connection check the current fluid phase check for cavitation

Caution The min and max pressures are not related to the min and max flow rates

Temperature minmax

If the nominal temperature is already entered the minimum and maximum values are identical to the nominal

value but they can be different in their particular adaptation

The minimum and maximum temperature indicates the limits of the process application

The limits are used to

Calculate the min and max vapour pressure Check the process connection Check the current fluid phase Check for cavitation Check for permitted device temperature

Caution The min and max temperatures are not related to the min and max flow ratesa

Units

Operating conditions can be displayed in a wide range of units You can check the units with the help of the

Unit page You can also set the default units on the Unit page so that the units that you normally work with

are the ones that are displayed automatically

You can select different units by clicking on the dropdown list (which shows the current units) and selecting a

unit from the list If you select a new unit all numeric values will be converted into the new unit

Calculated Fluid Properties

After the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter the fluid properties are calculated automatically

Applicator Sizing Flow in version 10 or newer contains a fluid engine and a gas engine for calculating the

necessary properties to size a flowmeter A list of supported gases is shown on the Gas Mixture page All other

fluids are calculated by the standard Fluid Engine Check Fluid and gas property engines for details

Density

The density at the operating conditions (min nominal or max) is calculated for the selected fluid but can be

entered manually as well You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves

differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field

For liquids (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the density of the liquid at two reference

temperatures

For gases (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the standard density (dens_Rhozero) ie the

density at 1013 mbar abs and 0degC

For gases (Gas engine) the calculations of density is based on real gas formulas

The values of the reference temperatures and densities or standard density (dens_Rhozero) can be viewed on

the Fluid Properties page (Properties button)

The default density units which are different for liquids and gases are taken from preferences which you have

indicated on the Units page

Please note that for steam (superheated and saturated) there are special formulae which calculate the density

in compliance with the standard IAPWS

Caution other unlocked fields which depend on density (eg flowrate and viscosity) are recalculated when

you change the density value (Recalculations based on temperature or pressure are generally taken for

granted whereas recalculations based on density are often overseen)

Density normal (Gas applications)

The normal density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The

reference conditions are defined on the Units page

When manually entering the normal density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip) Normal

density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the Settings menu

Density standard (Gas applications)

The standard density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The

reference conditions are defined on the Units page

When manually entering the standard density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip)

Standard density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the settings menu

Molar mass

Molar mass is the sum of all atomic masses of all atoms within a molecule The unit is kgkmol (lbkmol)

Z-factor

The Z-factor is only displayed if the selected fluid is a gas It represents the compressibility for real gases The

factor has different impacts on the fluid and gas engine

Fluid Engine

The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes as long as the field is not locked

Changing the Z-Factor causes a recalculation of Density and Viscosity (depending on the unit) if Density and

Viscosity were not locked before

Gas engine

The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes The Z-factor is only an output value

and cannot influence any dimension if it is changed manually

Viscosity

Viscosity at the operating temperature (nominal) is calculated for the selected fluid but it can also be entered

manually You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the

system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct viscosity at the operating temperature in

this input field

The liquid viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is based on the viscosity of a liquid at two reference

temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)

The gas viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is calculated based on the viscosity of the gas at two reference

temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)

The gas viscosity viscosity (Gas engine) is based on real gas formulas

The default viscosity units are taken from the Units page

Vapor pressure

The Vapor pressure field is displayed only if you calculate a liquid It indicates the absolute pressure which is

necessary to transform the liquid into a gas at the minimum nominal and maximum operating temperatures

You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the system fluid

chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field If the selected fluid is a gas

these fields are irrelevant and the compressibility factor Z for operating temperature (nominal) appears

instead

The units used for Vapor Pressure are related to the units selected for pressure Since this is a pressure

difference the concepts of relative gauge pressure do not apply

Sound Velocity

The Sound Velocity is only displayed for flowmeters if this dimension is important especially for calculating the

permitted measuring range of Coriolis mass flowmeters and for calculating the distance between the sensors

of an ultrasonic flowmeter This value can be changed and is recalculated whenever the temperature is

changed as long as the field is not locked You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid

behaves differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this

input field

Caution Please click on the Reset-button on the Sizing page if you have changed fluid properties (eg

density vapor pressure viscosity) before you start a new sizing

How to lock applicator data

When setting the fluid properties it is important to understand the concept of locking Initially all fluid

properties are unlocked and Applicator attempts to make a reasonable guess for the operating conditions

using default values for some conditions and calculating others When you set a value it will be locked

automatically The program uses your value from then on ignoring its defaults and suspending its calculations

All values which you have generated yourself are marked in blue

If you change the determined intermediate values like density viscosity eg or the results they will be printed

in italics so that you can easily recognize them

Data locking examples

Immediately after the selection of a medium and a measuring instrument Applicator starts the calculation of

the meter by using the information about operating conditions entered Usually the user herhimself adjusts

the process conditions ndash eg flow pressure and temperature- to the application The density viscosity sound

velocity vapor pressure and Z-factor are calculated by Applicator

If for example you change the temperature Applicator will recalculate the gas density value if you have not

locked the respective field However if you set the density (thereby locking it) and then change the

temperature the density will not be recalculated The program uses the density value which you have entered

independent of the temperature

Any unlocked field changes automatically if you change other operating conditions upon which it depends

Any locked field remains fixed even if you change other operating conditions Selecting a new fluid unlocks all

operating conditions except requested flow

Caution If you make a new fluid selection and lock it the fluid data will be overwritten with the default fluid

data If you make a new flowmeter selection the locked fluid data and the sensor data remain unchanged

provided this is technically reasonable

23 Sensor Pipe

This section specifies the requirements regarding the pipe into which the flowmeter is to be built

Depending on the flowmeter different inputs are necessary to describe the existing pipe location or the

requested sensor requirements Different possibilities to select the pipe material or sensor pipe material to

input pipe thickness liner thickness sound velocity of material outer diameter circumference or the input of

the inner diameter help to specify the pipe geometry Additionally rectangular ducts which are described

with the inner duct height duct width and duct thickness are available for thermal and differential pressure

flowmeters

After entering the internal diameter Applicator calculates the nearest available meter size according to the

selected connection standard Your specified inner diameter is used for further calculations

Caution Applicator takes the internal diameter and equates it with the meter or pipe size The checkbox for

Pipe size ne meter size offers the possibility of an indication and sizing of products with integrated reducers in

addition to common Prowirl flowmeters

Pipe dimension table for DP-Flow Clamp-On and Insertion meters

There is the possibility to choose between different pipe standards in order to select the correct pipe

dimension which enables a proper sizing There are 36 default values for several pipe standards available

including

bull DIN (EN 10220 24581 2462 2440 etc)

bull ASME (B3610B3619)

bull AWWA Cast Iron Class A- H AWWA Ductile Iron Class 50-56

bull One standard for free input select Applicator default valuesmanual input

After choosing the desired pipe standard the pipe dimension window opens Depending on the preferred pipe

size and pressure rating possible pipe dimensions are offered

Connection standard

Shows all available connection standards for the selected flowmeter (eg ENDIN) By choosing a category the

corresponding process connections will be listed below

Material (sensor)

Depending on the flowmeter Applicator offers different sensor materials The available materials can depend

on the diameter and process connection Material compatibility of the sensor material will be checked against

the integrated corrosion database A warning message will be displayed if compatibility issues exist between

the fluid and sensor material

Process connection

Applicator also selects the required minimum pressure rating according to the operating pressure and

temperature values This field is displayed as a dropdown list which offers all available pressure ratings for the

selected flowmeter and meter size You can change the suggested pressure rating or process connection but

if you select a lower pressure rating than the suggested one a warning will be displayed

Below Process connection you can find the Pressure rating button Clicking on it will open a window which

displays a diagram for the selected process connection the temperature-pressure derating curve of a selected

process connection and also operation points (max pressure at min and max temperature and the nominal

temperaturepressure point)

Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If

additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case

whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will

automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to

make the user aware of the change

24 Meter Operating Range

The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values

If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The

measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range

For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible

For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow

Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is

possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly

differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour

25 Calculated Results

This section shows the calculated results of sizing

Requested flow

Indicates the values used for the calculation

Flow velocity

Flow velocity max

Pressure Loss

An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss

calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This

group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be

marginal and without any influence on your process

Velocity (meas tube)

This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation

refers to the nominal density

Measured Error Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the

flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

Measured Error spec Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding

requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration

Measured Error Mass

These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for

Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the

corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead

of a value

Measured Error spec Mass

Reynolds No

The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further

sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions

Frequency

This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is

proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity

PED results

Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please

note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window

Meter size

This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually

adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have

done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is

locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal

button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This

means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are

saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter

The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters

Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will

also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements

26 Warnings

Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the

green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is

pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or

expanded using the arrow on the right

Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next

Endress+Hauser Sales Centre

27 Button center

A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of

the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process

Print Sizing

Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports

Sizing Energy

Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the

Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow

Configurator

Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code

Add to shop basket

Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This

button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the

Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline

version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when

Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Reset

This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results

Back to top

3 Custody transfer

Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of

among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals

If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection

- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out

According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different

process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature

are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task

page

In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the

approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum

turn down is also checked

Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your

entries

The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval

As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB

7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the

max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated

With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature

The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the

ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit

values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter

measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures

the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the

warning messages

Back to top

4 Accessories

There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories

page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)

In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg

mounting set 41) are executed

41 Accessories page

Example mounting set

Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations

Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)

42 Activating a checkbox

Example Flow conditioner

For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are

automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and

process connection can be selected

43 Accessories within the order code

The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving

process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed

Applicator versions)

Back to top

5 Fluid Properties page

51 General description

Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page

This view supports the following types of fluids

Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under

ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page

The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases

Liquids

Media type Standardprocess

Fluids not 100 water (example 0

Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)

Support points (linear interpolation)

Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97

Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-

Gas (Air) UDG)

Redlich-Kwong

Gases

Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas

engine

Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine

Air Ozone O3

Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)

Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr

Butane Nitric Oxide NO3

Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0

Carbon monoxide

Chlorine

Ethane

Ethylene

Helium

Hydrogen

Hydrogen chloride

Hydrogen sulphide

Krypton

Methane

Neon

Nitrogen

Oxygen

Propane

Xenon

0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User

Defined Gas Mixture 0

Oxygen

The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for

example density or viscosity

The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information

classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of

the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They

are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are

important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new

medium

The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The

parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll

to the group header you see on your screen

When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page

A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details

Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page

52 Parameter groups

521 Fluid information

In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible

Fluid name contains the name of the fluid

Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In

many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available

State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many

purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the

steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account

Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made

522 Fluid Description

The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid

Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian

Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid

Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and

syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or

measurement principle

Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is

flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals

Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive

Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for

conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to

50 microScm and more than 50 microScm

Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to

67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo

Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details

Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid

The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user

defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

523 Basic Fluid Parameters

The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be

created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages

Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid

Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid

Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point

Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid

Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas

The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has

an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also

depend on density and viscosity

In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and

sound velocity

524 Constants

This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas

type selected

Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken

from the Unit Defaults page

Molar mass molecular weight of the gas

Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)

Heating value calorific value of the gas

The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine

For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is

used to calculate the sound velocity

525 Typical Operating Conditions

The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions

Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the

mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of

the typical operating conditions are editable

526 Temperature Viscosity

This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description

The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function

of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve

for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range

527 Temperature Density

This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Density density at the support point

The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of

operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for

fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range

528 Temperature Heat capacity

This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point

The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

529 Temperature Vapor pressure

This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid

Temperature temperature at the support point

Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point

The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

5210 Gas mixture

The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture

Gas name of the gas (first field)

Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture

Unit unit for mass fraction

A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are

given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas

Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report

The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is

displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine

only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100

5211 Fluid properties and results

This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed

differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help

function

Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom

display ldquonardquo

The calculated constants are eg

Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions

Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions

Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions

Heating value the calorific value of the fluid

For liquids

Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data

displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page

AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

For solids

a viscosity coefficient for the gas

n viscosity coefficient for gases

5212 Reference values

This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters

displayed differ according to the fluid selected

Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation

Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780

Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780

Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533

Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533

5213 Measuring task

The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of

the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details

opens a window with more information about the approval

5214 Restriction on flowmeters

This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates

that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details

opens a window with more information about the restrictions

53 Setting reference conditions

Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu

There are two possibilities

SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are

- pressure 10132 bar absolute

- temperature 0deg Celsius

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter

US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are

- pressure 14696 psi absolute

- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter

54 Creating a User Defined Fluid

Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the

world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids

1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field

Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid

at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam

2 Now click on the Properties button

3 When the page has opened click on New

4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate

fields which are now open for editing

When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database

Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system

fluids

If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields

will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General

parameters list and you can start again

If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit

button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close

button exits the page without saving the changes

55 Import and Export of Fluids

In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this

the import and export function of the fluid database can be used

In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information

are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want

to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export

button

Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database

To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file

56 Fluid Properties report

The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing

page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results

and reference values

Back to top

6 Compare size and sensor

61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)

When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose

Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the

ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function

When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The

displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter

The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by

clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the

corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table

will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can

be reapplied

The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you

click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed

as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator

can be reapplied

62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)

The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement

principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are

selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator

versions

Back to top

7 Chart page

71 Introduction

The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case

of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available

The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections

72 General Parameters

In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a

repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on

the sizing page

73 Process data

Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference

74 Curves

The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if

offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter

In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be

automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be

activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner

If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report

75 Flow limits

The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range

and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are

different

76 Chart

The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the

pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using

the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional

information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different

curves within the chart

The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons

The content of the printout depends on the options selected

Back to top

8 Order Code

Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order

information

In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring

principle and flowmeter These are as follows

Feature Description Order codeSizing

Definition of ideal

diameter

Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter

relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure

loss

Diameter (Order code

option)

Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and

installation data

Mounting set (Order code

option)

Determination of

insertion depth

Calculation of insertion depth depending on

the selected accessory (t-mass)

Pipe length (Order code

option)

Selection of Material

(Sensor)

Selection and verification of corrosion

consistency

Sensor material Liner

material (Order code

option)

Selection of Process

connection

Selection and verification of pressure and

temperature curve

Process connection (Order

code option)

Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order

code option)

Pressure equipment

directive (PED)

Definition of PED-category depending on the

application and verification of the offered

process connections

Additional approval (Order

code option)

Custody transfer Verification or specification of application

data definition of measuring range

Custody transfer (Order

code option)

Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow

conditioner)

Accessory enclosed or extra

position (Order code

option)

Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow

splitter

Sensor Options (Order code

option)

Evaluation of

measuring range

Calculation of measuring range Calculation

datachart

Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and

accessory where required

Calculation

datachart

Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation

datachart

Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion

database with relevant data

The Order code page consists of different frames

81 Order code

Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically

by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and

Configurator for the valid order codes

82 Order code options

Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration

options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the

order code

The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection

on the Sizing page

The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page

The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options

Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed

these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still

feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning

message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change

83 Extended order code

831 General

Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen

In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables

for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and

activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the

Extended order code feature is used

With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order

code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the

order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator

832 Device parameter data settings

To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is

not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the

ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator

The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo

84 Button center

The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to

proceed with your Sizing process

Configurator

Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order

code

Print Sizing

Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product can be pasted into a project

Back to top

9 Conversion Calculator

Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity

All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by

selecting one out of the drop down lists

The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another

The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all

common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be

recalculated automatically

Back to top

10 Unit Defaults

Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings

menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored

whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session

Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily

for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button

Back to top

11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)

111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)

Disclaimer

The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from

publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and

assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a

minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion

fatigue life

The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different

process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined

Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check

Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled

The content of the database was sourced from

bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)

bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG

bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta

bull Various Internet Links

bull Various Corrosion data bases

The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application

and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process

temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows

Metal

Class Description depth of corrosion per surface

A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)

B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)

C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)

NR not recommended

U unknown

Plastics

Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength

A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear

B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year

lt=30 loss of tensile strength year

C not resistant lt= 50year

lt=50 loss of tensile strength year

NR not recommended

U unknown

Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used

112 Using Corrosion Check

Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion

information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability

of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not

appear at the top of the page

Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the

corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table

The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid

The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion

database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message

is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning

message

The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project

module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing

Back to top

12 Settings (Sizing Flow)

The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the

button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select

Sizing Flow

The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this

function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings

saved are loaded with the Load Default button

Setting Impact when activated

Basic functions

Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply

Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order

classification PED device check code page and printouts

Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits

The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits

No indication of default start data input of data by user

By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually

Advanced functions

Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)

The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles

Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates

My View

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

DP Flow

Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters

Activates said functions

Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP

flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

Back to top

13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines

131 General

Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation

Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)

Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures

132 Fluid engine

General Information

The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the

fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor

Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both

liquids and for gases

Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data

Liquid Calculation

Calculation of the acentric factor Omega

Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure

Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby

bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC

bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database

bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms

bull

The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs

Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature

bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3

bull Alpha in 1K

bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K

bull Toper in K

bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3

The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs

Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature

bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3

bull AL (Viscosity factor)

bull BL (Viscosity factor)

bull Toper in K

bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt

Gas calculation

The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and

pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and

temperature

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull Zoper (Compressibility)

Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)

Toper in K

bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3

Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull c Kappa

Steam Calculation

Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard

The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard

(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use

The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from

bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and

bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa

This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only

That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms

Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator

133 Gas engine

The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the

fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine

The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of

the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted

process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine

Back to top

14 Print Sizing

The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured

and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page

The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens

bull Page format size margins orientation and format

bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter

bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report

Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed

bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo

bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout

Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered

Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page

Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are

possible Please check the help manual of the Project module

Back to top

15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by

manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002

The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection

options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator

takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable

flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and

Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can

switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator

1 Categorisation of the application

2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests

bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this

option

PED Categories

Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered

during the sizing and ordering process They include

bull All ultrasonic flowmeters

bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo

bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water

bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the

static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure

bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume

The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data

danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)

Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements

have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen

device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and

nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case

a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet

All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout

Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)

Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and

temperature are the main parameters

If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required

data in the min nom and max columns

If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the

necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating

Danger posed by the fluid

The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the

case of gases the stability of the gas is also important

The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo

according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)

All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations

belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is

above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture

bull H200-H205 (explosive)

bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)

bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)

bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)

bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)

bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)

bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)

In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in

Danger Symbols below

In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED

fluid groups

rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids

Order code

If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option

this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page

With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family

nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration

If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center

Danger Symbols

Danger symbol Explanation H-rates

C corrosive H 314

Cl chemical instable

E explosive H200-H205

F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223

F flammable H 225-H228

N environmental

dangerous

O oxidizing H271-H272

T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330

H372

T poisonous

Xi irritating

Xn injurious to health

Back to top

16 Online Update

The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator

Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes

and updated system databases with the latest products

The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator

newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the

Settings menu

Page 6: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use

The fluid selection dropdown list shows possible fluids associated with the selected measuring task

This field displays the default or currently selected fluid Open the dropdown list of available fluids A fluid is

selected either by clicking with the mouse on the fluid in the dropdown list or just by using the key Enter In

the second case the fluid must be indicated by typing in the first letter The list will then only contain fluids

which begin with that letter

Properties

You can view fluid properties with the Properties button For more information about fluids see Fluid

Properties

StandardState

Standard

The first field indicates the calculation standard used for the selected media type

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The overview below shows the assignment of the media types to the

relevant standards and processes used

Media type Standardprocess Fluid properties editable

Fluids no water (example

dummy)

Support points (linear

interpolation)

Yes

Water (drinking water dummy) IAPWS-97 No

Gases user-defined (example

dummy)

Ideal gas Yes

Gases user-defined (example

dummy)

Redlich-Kwong Yes

Gases gas mixtures (example

dummy)

NEL ndash identical to the t-mass Gas

Engine

No

Natural gas NX-19 and other standards (in

preparation)

No

Each calculation standard has different effects on the direct input of medium properties that are already

known to the user The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo and ldquoIdeal Gasrdquo standards (reliable results for gas

properties with operating pressure less than 20 bar ndash easy start with lsquoDummy-Gas (Air) based on Ideal Gasrsquo) -

are therefore open for the manual input of medium properties The data cannot be edited manually if the fluid

properties are calculated with official standards (eg IAWPS) Fluid properties which are calculated with

officially approved standards can be used as reference values (eg on-site density calibration)

State

The second field indicates the physical status of the currently selected fluid liquid gas superheated steam or

saturated steam These four states have been defined for pragmatic reasons Each of them requires its own set

of formulae to calculate the fluid properties This field is not editable

Please note The value of the State field of the fluid you have selected must match the state of your fluid at

the desired operating temperature and pressure If this is not the case Applicator informs you with a warning

message

Example if you select a gas which acts like a liquid at the desired operating temperature and pressure all

calculations and results will be invalid The formulae for liquids and gases are different The program will NOT

automatically switch to the correct set of formulae based on the operating conditions The fluid and flowmeter

state compatibility checking will also be affected

Tag

This field allows the user to enter the measuring point tag of the flowmeter

PrincipleSensor

The first field is used to select the measuring principle and sensor type The types available are dependent on

the previously selected fluid and measuring task Devices marked in magenta are not available because of a

specific exclusion ndash for example low temperature versions are available for cryogenic fluids only

The second field indicates the flowmeter sensor generation

Transmitter

After choosing the sensor type you can select the corresponding transmitter If only one transmitter type is

available then the flowmeter will be indicated immediately

Flowmeter

The first field indicates the selected sensor and transmitter as the complete flowmeter product The second

field indicates the device model These fields are not editable

The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters

Order code

The field indicates the order code of the selected flowmeter

22 Process data

The Process data page is used for the input of the process and installation conditions for the flowmeter After

the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter Applicator starts with default values which can be overwritten later

The possibility of manually editing data depends upon the corresponding calculation standard For more

details go to the Fluid Properties page

This view consists of ldquothree measuring pointsrdquo This means that the process conditions at three different flow

values can be entered minimum nominal and maximum However if only nominal values are entered these

are copied over to minimum and maximum so this feature is not mandatory to use ndash the same values can be

entered instead Using this feature has implications on Calculated resultspage As the density each measuring

points is used the sensor velocity flow velocity pressure loss reynoldsnumber and in some cases

measurement error is influenced

Please note if the option ldquoNo indication of default start data input of data by userrdquo is activated in the

Settings menu for Sizing Flow the most important start data (required flow pressure temperature) have to

be entered before the process data window is opened completely The input window appears after the

selection of the general parameters see Section 21

221 Process data

Reference values

This link opens the Units page where it is possible to change the default settings The page can also be

accessed by clicking on the cogwheel tab at the top of the page

You can for example change the Atmospheric Pressure which is relevant for conversion pressure in gauge and

absolute units

Normal Conditions (SI) refers to DIN 1343 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperature = 27315 K)

Base unit Nm3time

Standard Conditions (US) refers to ISO 2533 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperatue = 28815 K)

Base units SCFH SCFM SCFS Sm3time

Requested Flow

First enter the units of measure then the values for the minimum nominal and maximum flow rate

Applicator uses the nominal value for an initial sizing process and then checks the suggested size by making it

one size bigger or smaller in order to fit to the entered range of minimum to maximum flow rate Each

flowmeter has a default flow rate associated with it When you choose a new meter the associated default

flow rate values are displayed in these fields for initial calculations provided the fields are not locked

If you have chosen ldquogasrdquo and set a volumetric unit (eg m3h lh hellip) an additional button Requested Flow

(FAD) appears Clicking on it opens the lsquoCalculated requested flowrsquo window This allows the input and

calculation of a requested flow rate at deviating process pressures and temperatures Eg Input of ldquoFree air

deliveryrdquo for compressed air

(1 Press the Requested Flow (FAD) button 2 Enter your Requested flow values Press Apply to use the

edited values)

The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page If the selected

flowmeter is a mass flowmeter the default mass flow units are used If the fluid is a liquid the default liquid

volumetric flow units are used In other cases either the default gas volumetric or the mass flow units are

used You can also set the default units on the Units page so that the units that you normally work with are

the ones that are displayed automatically (see the description in Unit Defaults)

Pressure

The fluid operating pressure value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for the

operating pressure (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties When

you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is displayed in the nominal field for initial

calculation provided it is not locked

The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page (Unit Defaults)

You can set the default pressure unit with the help of this page

Temperature

The fluid operating temperature value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for

the operating temperature (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties

When you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is placed and displayed in the nominal

field for initial calculation provided it is not locked

The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page See Unit

Defaults

Pressure minmax

If the nominal pressure has already been entered the minimum and maximum values are set identical to it

but they may be different in their particular application The minimum and maximum pressure indicate the

limits of the process application

The limits are used to

check the pressure rating of the process connection check the current fluid phase check for cavitation

Caution The min and max pressures are not related to the min and max flow rates

Temperature minmax

If the nominal temperature is already entered the minimum and maximum values are identical to the nominal

value but they can be different in their particular adaptation

The minimum and maximum temperature indicates the limits of the process application

The limits are used to

Calculate the min and max vapour pressure Check the process connection Check the current fluid phase Check for cavitation Check for permitted device temperature

Caution The min and max temperatures are not related to the min and max flow ratesa

Units

Operating conditions can be displayed in a wide range of units You can check the units with the help of the

Unit page You can also set the default units on the Unit page so that the units that you normally work with

are the ones that are displayed automatically

You can select different units by clicking on the dropdown list (which shows the current units) and selecting a

unit from the list If you select a new unit all numeric values will be converted into the new unit

Calculated Fluid Properties

After the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter the fluid properties are calculated automatically

Applicator Sizing Flow in version 10 or newer contains a fluid engine and a gas engine for calculating the

necessary properties to size a flowmeter A list of supported gases is shown on the Gas Mixture page All other

fluids are calculated by the standard Fluid Engine Check Fluid and gas property engines for details

Density

The density at the operating conditions (min nominal or max) is calculated for the selected fluid but can be

entered manually as well You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves

differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field

For liquids (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the density of the liquid at two reference

temperatures

For gases (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the standard density (dens_Rhozero) ie the

density at 1013 mbar abs and 0degC

For gases (Gas engine) the calculations of density is based on real gas formulas

The values of the reference temperatures and densities or standard density (dens_Rhozero) can be viewed on

the Fluid Properties page (Properties button)

The default density units which are different for liquids and gases are taken from preferences which you have

indicated on the Units page

Please note that for steam (superheated and saturated) there are special formulae which calculate the density

in compliance with the standard IAPWS

Caution other unlocked fields which depend on density (eg flowrate and viscosity) are recalculated when

you change the density value (Recalculations based on temperature or pressure are generally taken for

granted whereas recalculations based on density are often overseen)

Density normal (Gas applications)

The normal density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The

reference conditions are defined on the Units page

When manually entering the normal density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip) Normal

density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the Settings menu

Density standard (Gas applications)

The standard density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The

reference conditions are defined on the Units page

When manually entering the standard density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip)

Standard density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the settings menu

Molar mass

Molar mass is the sum of all atomic masses of all atoms within a molecule The unit is kgkmol (lbkmol)

Z-factor

The Z-factor is only displayed if the selected fluid is a gas It represents the compressibility for real gases The

factor has different impacts on the fluid and gas engine

Fluid Engine

The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes as long as the field is not locked

Changing the Z-Factor causes a recalculation of Density and Viscosity (depending on the unit) if Density and

Viscosity were not locked before

Gas engine

The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes The Z-factor is only an output value

and cannot influence any dimension if it is changed manually

Viscosity

Viscosity at the operating temperature (nominal) is calculated for the selected fluid but it can also be entered

manually You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the

system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct viscosity at the operating temperature in

this input field

The liquid viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is based on the viscosity of a liquid at two reference

temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)

The gas viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is calculated based on the viscosity of the gas at two reference

temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)

The gas viscosity viscosity (Gas engine) is based on real gas formulas

The default viscosity units are taken from the Units page

Vapor pressure

The Vapor pressure field is displayed only if you calculate a liquid It indicates the absolute pressure which is

necessary to transform the liquid into a gas at the minimum nominal and maximum operating temperatures

You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the system fluid

chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field If the selected fluid is a gas

these fields are irrelevant and the compressibility factor Z for operating temperature (nominal) appears

instead

The units used for Vapor Pressure are related to the units selected for pressure Since this is a pressure

difference the concepts of relative gauge pressure do not apply

Sound Velocity

The Sound Velocity is only displayed for flowmeters if this dimension is important especially for calculating the

permitted measuring range of Coriolis mass flowmeters and for calculating the distance between the sensors

of an ultrasonic flowmeter This value can be changed and is recalculated whenever the temperature is

changed as long as the field is not locked You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid

behaves differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this

input field

Caution Please click on the Reset-button on the Sizing page if you have changed fluid properties (eg

density vapor pressure viscosity) before you start a new sizing

How to lock applicator data

When setting the fluid properties it is important to understand the concept of locking Initially all fluid

properties are unlocked and Applicator attempts to make a reasonable guess for the operating conditions

using default values for some conditions and calculating others When you set a value it will be locked

automatically The program uses your value from then on ignoring its defaults and suspending its calculations

All values which you have generated yourself are marked in blue

If you change the determined intermediate values like density viscosity eg or the results they will be printed

in italics so that you can easily recognize them

Data locking examples

Immediately after the selection of a medium and a measuring instrument Applicator starts the calculation of

the meter by using the information about operating conditions entered Usually the user herhimself adjusts

the process conditions ndash eg flow pressure and temperature- to the application The density viscosity sound

velocity vapor pressure and Z-factor are calculated by Applicator

If for example you change the temperature Applicator will recalculate the gas density value if you have not

locked the respective field However if you set the density (thereby locking it) and then change the

temperature the density will not be recalculated The program uses the density value which you have entered

independent of the temperature

Any unlocked field changes automatically if you change other operating conditions upon which it depends

Any locked field remains fixed even if you change other operating conditions Selecting a new fluid unlocks all

operating conditions except requested flow

Caution If you make a new fluid selection and lock it the fluid data will be overwritten with the default fluid

data If you make a new flowmeter selection the locked fluid data and the sensor data remain unchanged

provided this is technically reasonable

23 Sensor Pipe

This section specifies the requirements regarding the pipe into which the flowmeter is to be built

Depending on the flowmeter different inputs are necessary to describe the existing pipe location or the

requested sensor requirements Different possibilities to select the pipe material or sensor pipe material to

input pipe thickness liner thickness sound velocity of material outer diameter circumference or the input of

the inner diameter help to specify the pipe geometry Additionally rectangular ducts which are described

with the inner duct height duct width and duct thickness are available for thermal and differential pressure

flowmeters

After entering the internal diameter Applicator calculates the nearest available meter size according to the

selected connection standard Your specified inner diameter is used for further calculations

Caution Applicator takes the internal diameter and equates it with the meter or pipe size The checkbox for

Pipe size ne meter size offers the possibility of an indication and sizing of products with integrated reducers in

addition to common Prowirl flowmeters

Pipe dimension table for DP-Flow Clamp-On and Insertion meters

There is the possibility to choose between different pipe standards in order to select the correct pipe

dimension which enables a proper sizing There are 36 default values for several pipe standards available

including

bull DIN (EN 10220 24581 2462 2440 etc)

bull ASME (B3610B3619)

bull AWWA Cast Iron Class A- H AWWA Ductile Iron Class 50-56

bull One standard for free input select Applicator default valuesmanual input

After choosing the desired pipe standard the pipe dimension window opens Depending on the preferred pipe

size and pressure rating possible pipe dimensions are offered

Connection standard

Shows all available connection standards for the selected flowmeter (eg ENDIN) By choosing a category the

corresponding process connections will be listed below

Material (sensor)

Depending on the flowmeter Applicator offers different sensor materials The available materials can depend

on the diameter and process connection Material compatibility of the sensor material will be checked against

the integrated corrosion database A warning message will be displayed if compatibility issues exist between

the fluid and sensor material

Process connection

Applicator also selects the required minimum pressure rating according to the operating pressure and

temperature values This field is displayed as a dropdown list which offers all available pressure ratings for the

selected flowmeter and meter size You can change the suggested pressure rating or process connection but

if you select a lower pressure rating than the suggested one a warning will be displayed

Below Process connection you can find the Pressure rating button Clicking on it will open a window which

displays a diagram for the selected process connection the temperature-pressure derating curve of a selected

process connection and also operation points (max pressure at min and max temperature and the nominal

temperaturepressure point)

Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If

additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case

whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will

automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to

make the user aware of the change

24 Meter Operating Range

The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values

If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The

measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range

For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible

For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow

Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is

possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly

differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour

25 Calculated Results

This section shows the calculated results of sizing

Requested flow

Indicates the values used for the calculation

Flow velocity

Flow velocity max

Pressure Loss

An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss

calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This

group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be

marginal and without any influence on your process

Velocity (meas tube)

This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation

refers to the nominal density

Measured Error Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the

flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

Measured Error spec Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding

requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration

Measured Error Mass

These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for

Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the

corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead

of a value

Measured Error spec Mass

Reynolds No

The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further

sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions

Frequency

This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is

proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity

PED results

Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please

note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window

Meter size

This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually

adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have

done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is

locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal

button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This

means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are

saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter

The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters

Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will

also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements

26 Warnings

Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the

green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is

pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or

expanded using the arrow on the right

Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next

Endress+Hauser Sales Centre

27 Button center

A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of

the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process

Print Sizing

Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports

Sizing Energy

Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the

Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow

Configurator

Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code

Add to shop basket

Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This

button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the

Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline

version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when

Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Reset

This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results

Back to top

3 Custody transfer

Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of

among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals

If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection

- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out

According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different

process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature

are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task

page

In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the

approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum

turn down is also checked

Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your

entries

The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval

As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB

7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the

max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated

With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature

The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the

ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit

values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter

measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures

the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the

warning messages

Back to top

4 Accessories

There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories

page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)

In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg

mounting set 41) are executed

41 Accessories page

Example mounting set

Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations

Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)

42 Activating a checkbox

Example Flow conditioner

For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are

automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and

process connection can be selected

43 Accessories within the order code

The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving

process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed

Applicator versions)

Back to top

5 Fluid Properties page

51 General description

Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page

This view supports the following types of fluids

Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under

ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page

The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases

Liquids

Media type Standardprocess

Fluids not 100 water (example 0

Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)

Support points (linear interpolation)

Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97

Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-

Gas (Air) UDG)

Redlich-Kwong

Gases

Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas

engine

Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine

Air Ozone O3

Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)

Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr

Butane Nitric Oxide NO3

Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0

Carbon monoxide

Chlorine

Ethane

Ethylene

Helium

Hydrogen

Hydrogen chloride

Hydrogen sulphide

Krypton

Methane

Neon

Nitrogen

Oxygen

Propane

Xenon

0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User

Defined Gas Mixture 0

Oxygen

The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for

example density or viscosity

The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information

classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of

the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They

are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are

important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new

medium

The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The

parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll

to the group header you see on your screen

When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page

A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details

Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page

52 Parameter groups

521 Fluid information

In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible

Fluid name contains the name of the fluid

Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In

many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available

State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many

purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the

steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account

Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made

522 Fluid Description

The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid

Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian

Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid

Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and

syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or

measurement principle

Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is

flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals

Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive

Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for

conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to

50 microScm and more than 50 microScm

Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to

67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo

Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details

Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid

The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user

defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

523 Basic Fluid Parameters

The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be

created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages

Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid

Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid

Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point

Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid

Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas

The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has

an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also

depend on density and viscosity

In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and

sound velocity

524 Constants

This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas

type selected

Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken

from the Unit Defaults page

Molar mass molecular weight of the gas

Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)

Heating value calorific value of the gas

The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine

For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is

used to calculate the sound velocity

525 Typical Operating Conditions

The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions

Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the

mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of

the typical operating conditions are editable

526 Temperature Viscosity

This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description

The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function

of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve

for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range

527 Temperature Density

This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Density density at the support point

The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of

operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for

fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range

528 Temperature Heat capacity

This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point

The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

529 Temperature Vapor pressure

This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid

Temperature temperature at the support point

Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point

The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

5210 Gas mixture

The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture

Gas name of the gas (first field)

Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture

Unit unit for mass fraction

A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are

given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas

Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report

The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is

displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine

only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100

5211 Fluid properties and results

This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed

differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help

function

Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom

display ldquonardquo

The calculated constants are eg

Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions

Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions

Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions

Heating value the calorific value of the fluid

For liquids

Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data

displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page

AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

For solids

a viscosity coefficient for the gas

n viscosity coefficient for gases

5212 Reference values

This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters

displayed differ according to the fluid selected

Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation

Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780

Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780

Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533

Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533

5213 Measuring task

The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of

the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details

opens a window with more information about the approval

5214 Restriction on flowmeters

This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates

that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details

opens a window with more information about the restrictions

53 Setting reference conditions

Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu

There are two possibilities

SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are

- pressure 10132 bar absolute

- temperature 0deg Celsius

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter

US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are

- pressure 14696 psi absolute

- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter

54 Creating a User Defined Fluid

Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the

world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids

1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field

Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid

at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam

2 Now click on the Properties button

3 When the page has opened click on New

4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate

fields which are now open for editing

When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database

Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system

fluids

If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields

will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General

parameters list and you can start again

If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit

button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close

button exits the page without saving the changes

55 Import and Export of Fluids

In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this

the import and export function of the fluid database can be used

In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information

are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want

to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export

button

Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database

To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file

56 Fluid Properties report

The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing

page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results

and reference values

Back to top

6 Compare size and sensor

61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)

When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose

Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the

ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function

When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The

displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter

The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by

clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the

corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table

will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can

be reapplied

The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you

click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed

as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator

can be reapplied

62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)

The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement

principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are

selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator

versions

Back to top

7 Chart page

71 Introduction

The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case

of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available

The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections

72 General Parameters

In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a

repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on

the sizing page

73 Process data

Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference

74 Curves

The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if

offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter

In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be

automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be

activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner

If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report

75 Flow limits

The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range

and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are

different

76 Chart

The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the

pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using

the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional

information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different

curves within the chart

The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons

The content of the printout depends on the options selected

Back to top

8 Order Code

Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order

information

In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring

principle and flowmeter These are as follows

Feature Description Order codeSizing

Definition of ideal

diameter

Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter

relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure

loss

Diameter (Order code

option)

Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and

installation data

Mounting set (Order code

option)

Determination of

insertion depth

Calculation of insertion depth depending on

the selected accessory (t-mass)

Pipe length (Order code

option)

Selection of Material

(Sensor)

Selection and verification of corrosion

consistency

Sensor material Liner

material (Order code

option)

Selection of Process

connection

Selection and verification of pressure and

temperature curve

Process connection (Order

code option)

Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order

code option)

Pressure equipment

directive (PED)

Definition of PED-category depending on the

application and verification of the offered

process connections

Additional approval (Order

code option)

Custody transfer Verification or specification of application

data definition of measuring range

Custody transfer (Order

code option)

Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow

conditioner)

Accessory enclosed or extra

position (Order code

option)

Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow

splitter

Sensor Options (Order code

option)

Evaluation of

measuring range

Calculation of measuring range Calculation

datachart

Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and

accessory where required

Calculation

datachart

Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation

datachart

Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion

database with relevant data

The Order code page consists of different frames

81 Order code

Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically

by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and

Configurator for the valid order codes

82 Order code options

Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration

options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the

order code

The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection

on the Sizing page

The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page

The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options

Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed

these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still

feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning

message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change

83 Extended order code

831 General

Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen

In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables

for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and

activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the

Extended order code feature is used

With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order

code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the

order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator

832 Device parameter data settings

To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is

not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the

ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator

The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo

84 Button center

The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to

proceed with your Sizing process

Configurator

Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order

code

Print Sizing

Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product can be pasted into a project

Back to top

9 Conversion Calculator

Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity

All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by

selecting one out of the drop down lists

The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another

The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all

common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be

recalculated automatically

Back to top

10 Unit Defaults

Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings

menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored

whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session

Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily

for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button

Back to top

11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)

111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)

Disclaimer

The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from

publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and

assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a

minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion

fatigue life

The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different

process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined

Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check

Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled

The content of the database was sourced from

bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)

bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG

bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta

bull Various Internet Links

bull Various Corrosion data bases

The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application

and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process

temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows

Metal

Class Description depth of corrosion per surface

A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)

B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)

C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)

NR not recommended

U unknown

Plastics

Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength

A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear

B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year

lt=30 loss of tensile strength year

C not resistant lt= 50year

lt=50 loss of tensile strength year

NR not recommended

U unknown

Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used

112 Using Corrosion Check

Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion

information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability

of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not

appear at the top of the page

Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the

corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table

The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid

The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion

database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message

is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning

message

The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project

module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing

Back to top

12 Settings (Sizing Flow)

The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the

button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select

Sizing Flow

The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this

function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings

saved are loaded with the Load Default button

Setting Impact when activated

Basic functions

Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply

Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order

classification PED device check code page and printouts

Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits

The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits

No indication of default start data input of data by user

By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually

Advanced functions

Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)

The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles

Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates

My View

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

DP Flow

Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters

Activates said functions

Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP

flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

Back to top

13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines

131 General

Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation

Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)

Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures

132 Fluid engine

General Information

The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the

fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor

Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both

liquids and for gases

Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data

Liquid Calculation

Calculation of the acentric factor Omega

Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure

Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby

bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC

bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database

bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms

bull

The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs

Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature

bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3

bull Alpha in 1K

bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K

bull Toper in K

bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3

The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs

Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature

bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3

bull AL (Viscosity factor)

bull BL (Viscosity factor)

bull Toper in K

bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt

Gas calculation

The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and

pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and

temperature

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull Zoper (Compressibility)

Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)

Toper in K

bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3

Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull c Kappa

Steam Calculation

Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard

The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard

(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use

The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from

bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and

bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa

This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only

That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms

Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator

133 Gas engine

The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the

fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine

The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of

the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted

process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine

Back to top

14 Print Sizing

The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured

and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page

The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens

bull Page format size margins orientation and format

bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter

bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report

Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed

bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo

bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout

Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered

Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page

Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are

possible Please check the help manual of the Project module

Back to top

15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by

manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002

The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection

options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator

takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable

flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and

Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can

switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator

1 Categorisation of the application

2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests

bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this

option

PED Categories

Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered

during the sizing and ordering process They include

bull All ultrasonic flowmeters

bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo

bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water

bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the

static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure

bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume

The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data

danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)

Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements

have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen

device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and

nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case

a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet

All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout

Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)

Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and

temperature are the main parameters

If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required

data in the min nom and max columns

If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the

necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating

Danger posed by the fluid

The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the

case of gases the stability of the gas is also important

The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo

according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)

All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations

belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is

above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture

bull H200-H205 (explosive)

bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)

bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)

bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)

bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)

bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)

bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)

In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in

Danger Symbols below

In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED

fluid groups

rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids

Order code

If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option

this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page

With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family

nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration

If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center

Danger Symbols

Danger symbol Explanation H-rates

C corrosive H 314

Cl chemical instable

E explosive H200-H205

F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223

F flammable H 225-H228

N environmental

dangerous

O oxidizing H271-H272

T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330

H372

T poisonous

Xi irritating

Xn injurious to health

Back to top

16 Online Update

The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator

Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes

and updated system databases with the latest products

The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator

newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the

Settings menu

Page 7: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use

Each calculation standard has different effects on the direct input of medium properties that are already

known to the user The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo and ldquoIdeal Gasrdquo standards (reliable results for gas

properties with operating pressure less than 20 bar ndash easy start with lsquoDummy-Gas (Air) based on Ideal Gasrsquo) -

are therefore open for the manual input of medium properties The data cannot be edited manually if the fluid

properties are calculated with official standards (eg IAWPS) Fluid properties which are calculated with

officially approved standards can be used as reference values (eg on-site density calibration)

State

The second field indicates the physical status of the currently selected fluid liquid gas superheated steam or

saturated steam These four states have been defined for pragmatic reasons Each of them requires its own set

of formulae to calculate the fluid properties This field is not editable

Please note The value of the State field of the fluid you have selected must match the state of your fluid at

the desired operating temperature and pressure If this is not the case Applicator informs you with a warning

message

Example if you select a gas which acts like a liquid at the desired operating temperature and pressure all

calculations and results will be invalid The formulae for liquids and gases are different The program will NOT

automatically switch to the correct set of formulae based on the operating conditions The fluid and flowmeter

state compatibility checking will also be affected

Tag

This field allows the user to enter the measuring point tag of the flowmeter

PrincipleSensor

The first field is used to select the measuring principle and sensor type The types available are dependent on

the previously selected fluid and measuring task Devices marked in magenta are not available because of a

specific exclusion ndash for example low temperature versions are available for cryogenic fluids only

The second field indicates the flowmeter sensor generation

Transmitter

After choosing the sensor type you can select the corresponding transmitter If only one transmitter type is

available then the flowmeter will be indicated immediately

Flowmeter

The first field indicates the selected sensor and transmitter as the complete flowmeter product The second

field indicates the device model These fields are not editable

The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters

Order code

The field indicates the order code of the selected flowmeter

22 Process data

The Process data page is used for the input of the process and installation conditions for the flowmeter After

the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter Applicator starts with default values which can be overwritten later

The possibility of manually editing data depends upon the corresponding calculation standard For more

details go to the Fluid Properties page

This view consists of ldquothree measuring pointsrdquo This means that the process conditions at three different flow

values can be entered minimum nominal and maximum However if only nominal values are entered these

are copied over to minimum and maximum so this feature is not mandatory to use ndash the same values can be

entered instead Using this feature has implications on Calculated resultspage As the density each measuring

points is used the sensor velocity flow velocity pressure loss reynoldsnumber and in some cases

measurement error is influenced

Please note if the option ldquoNo indication of default start data input of data by userrdquo is activated in the

Settings menu for Sizing Flow the most important start data (required flow pressure temperature) have to

be entered before the process data window is opened completely The input window appears after the

selection of the general parameters see Section 21

221 Process data

Reference values

This link opens the Units page where it is possible to change the default settings The page can also be

accessed by clicking on the cogwheel tab at the top of the page

You can for example change the Atmospheric Pressure which is relevant for conversion pressure in gauge and

absolute units

Normal Conditions (SI) refers to DIN 1343 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperature = 27315 K)

Base unit Nm3time

Standard Conditions (US) refers to ISO 2533 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperatue = 28815 K)

Base units SCFH SCFM SCFS Sm3time

Requested Flow

First enter the units of measure then the values for the minimum nominal and maximum flow rate

Applicator uses the nominal value for an initial sizing process and then checks the suggested size by making it

one size bigger or smaller in order to fit to the entered range of minimum to maximum flow rate Each

flowmeter has a default flow rate associated with it When you choose a new meter the associated default

flow rate values are displayed in these fields for initial calculations provided the fields are not locked

If you have chosen ldquogasrdquo and set a volumetric unit (eg m3h lh hellip) an additional button Requested Flow

(FAD) appears Clicking on it opens the lsquoCalculated requested flowrsquo window This allows the input and

calculation of a requested flow rate at deviating process pressures and temperatures Eg Input of ldquoFree air

deliveryrdquo for compressed air

(1 Press the Requested Flow (FAD) button 2 Enter your Requested flow values Press Apply to use the

edited values)

The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page If the selected

flowmeter is a mass flowmeter the default mass flow units are used If the fluid is a liquid the default liquid

volumetric flow units are used In other cases either the default gas volumetric or the mass flow units are

used You can also set the default units on the Units page so that the units that you normally work with are

the ones that are displayed automatically (see the description in Unit Defaults)

Pressure

The fluid operating pressure value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for the

operating pressure (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties When

you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is displayed in the nominal field for initial

calculation provided it is not locked

The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page (Unit Defaults)

You can set the default pressure unit with the help of this page

Temperature

The fluid operating temperature value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for

the operating temperature (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties

When you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is placed and displayed in the nominal

field for initial calculation provided it is not locked

The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page See Unit

Defaults

Pressure minmax

If the nominal pressure has already been entered the minimum and maximum values are set identical to it

but they may be different in their particular application The minimum and maximum pressure indicate the

limits of the process application

The limits are used to

check the pressure rating of the process connection check the current fluid phase check for cavitation

Caution The min and max pressures are not related to the min and max flow rates

Temperature minmax

If the nominal temperature is already entered the minimum and maximum values are identical to the nominal

value but they can be different in their particular adaptation

The minimum and maximum temperature indicates the limits of the process application

The limits are used to

Calculate the min and max vapour pressure Check the process connection Check the current fluid phase Check for cavitation Check for permitted device temperature

Caution The min and max temperatures are not related to the min and max flow ratesa

Units

Operating conditions can be displayed in a wide range of units You can check the units with the help of the

Unit page You can also set the default units on the Unit page so that the units that you normally work with

are the ones that are displayed automatically

You can select different units by clicking on the dropdown list (which shows the current units) and selecting a

unit from the list If you select a new unit all numeric values will be converted into the new unit

Calculated Fluid Properties

After the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter the fluid properties are calculated automatically

Applicator Sizing Flow in version 10 or newer contains a fluid engine and a gas engine for calculating the

necessary properties to size a flowmeter A list of supported gases is shown on the Gas Mixture page All other

fluids are calculated by the standard Fluid Engine Check Fluid and gas property engines for details

Density

The density at the operating conditions (min nominal or max) is calculated for the selected fluid but can be

entered manually as well You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves

differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field

For liquids (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the density of the liquid at two reference

temperatures

For gases (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the standard density (dens_Rhozero) ie the

density at 1013 mbar abs and 0degC

For gases (Gas engine) the calculations of density is based on real gas formulas

The values of the reference temperatures and densities or standard density (dens_Rhozero) can be viewed on

the Fluid Properties page (Properties button)

The default density units which are different for liquids and gases are taken from preferences which you have

indicated on the Units page

Please note that for steam (superheated and saturated) there are special formulae which calculate the density

in compliance with the standard IAPWS

Caution other unlocked fields which depend on density (eg flowrate and viscosity) are recalculated when

you change the density value (Recalculations based on temperature or pressure are generally taken for

granted whereas recalculations based on density are often overseen)

Density normal (Gas applications)

The normal density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The

reference conditions are defined on the Units page

When manually entering the normal density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip) Normal

density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the Settings menu

Density standard (Gas applications)

The standard density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The

reference conditions are defined on the Units page

When manually entering the standard density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip)

Standard density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the settings menu

Molar mass

Molar mass is the sum of all atomic masses of all atoms within a molecule The unit is kgkmol (lbkmol)

Z-factor

The Z-factor is only displayed if the selected fluid is a gas It represents the compressibility for real gases The

factor has different impacts on the fluid and gas engine

Fluid Engine

The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes as long as the field is not locked

Changing the Z-Factor causes a recalculation of Density and Viscosity (depending on the unit) if Density and

Viscosity were not locked before

Gas engine

The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes The Z-factor is only an output value

and cannot influence any dimension if it is changed manually

Viscosity

Viscosity at the operating temperature (nominal) is calculated for the selected fluid but it can also be entered

manually You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the

system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct viscosity at the operating temperature in

this input field

The liquid viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is based on the viscosity of a liquid at two reference

temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)

The gas viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is calculated based on the viscosity of the gas at two reference

temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)

The gas viscosity viscosity (Gas engine) is based on real gas formulas

The default viscosity units are taken from the Units page

Vapor pressure

The Vapor pressure field is displayed only if you calculate a liquid It indicates the absolute pressure which is

necessary to transform the liquid into a gas at the minimum nominal and maximum operating temperatures

You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the system fluid

chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field If the selected fluid is a gas

these fields are irrelevant and the compressibility factor Z for operating temperature (nominal) appears

instead

The units used for Vapor Pressure are related to the units selected for pressure Since this is a pressure

difference the concepts of relative gauge pressure do not apply

Sound Velocity

The Sound Velocity is only displayed for flowmeters if this dimension is important especially for calculating the

permitted measuring range of Coriolis mass flowmeters and for calculating the distance between the sensors

of an ultrasonic flowmeter This value can be changed and is recalculated whenever the temperature is

changed as long as the field is not locked You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid

behaves differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this

input field

Caution Please click on the Reset-button on the Sizing page if you have changed fluid properties (eg

density vapor pressure viscosity) before you start a new sizing

How to lock applicator data

When setting the fluid properties it is important to understand the concept of locking Initially all fluid

properties are unlocked and Applicator attempts to make a reasonable guess for the operating conditions

using default values for some conditions and calculating others When you set a value it will be locked

automatically The program uses your value from then on ignoring its defaults and suspending its calculations

All values which you have generated yourself are marked in blue

If you change the determined intermediate values like density viscosity eg or the results they will be printed

in italics so that you can easily recognize them

Data locking examples

Immediately after the selection of a medium and a measuring instrument Applicator starts the calculation of

the meter by using the information about operating conditions entered Usually the user herhimself adjusts

the process conditions ndash eg flow pressure and temperature- to the application The density viscosity sound

velocity vapor pressure and Z-factor are calculated by Applicator

If for example you change the temperature Applicator will recalculate the gas density value if you have not

locked the respective field However if you set the density (thereby locking it) and then change the

temperature the density will not be recalculated The program uses the density value which you have entered

independent of the temperature

Any unlocked field changes automatically if you change other operating conditions upon which it depends

Any locked field remains fixed even if you change other operating conditions Selecting a new fluid unlocks all

operating conditions except requested flow

Caution If you make a new fluid selection and lock it the fluid data will be overwritten with the default fluid

data If you make a new flowmeter selection the locked fluid data and the sensor data remain unchanged

provided this is technically reasonable

23 Sensor Pipe

This section specifies the requirements regarding the pipe into which the flowmeter is to be built

Depending on the flowmeter different inputs are necessary to describe the existing pipe location or the

requested sensor requirements Different possibilities to select the pipe material or sensor pipe material to

input pipe thickness liner thickness sound velocity of material outer diameter circumference or the input of

the inner diameter help to specify the pipe geometry Additionally rectangular ducts which are described

with the inner duct height duct width and duct thickness are available for thermal and differential pressure

flowmeters

After entering the internal diameter Applicator calculates the nearest available meter size according to the

selected connection standard Your specified inner diameter is used for further calculations

Caution Applicator takes the internal diameter and equates it with the meter or pipe size The checkbox for

Pipe size ne meter size offers the possibility of an indication and sizing of products with integrated reducers in

addition to common Prowirl flowmeters

Pipe dimension table for DP-Flow Clamp-On and Insertion meters

There is the possibility to choose between different pipe standards in order to select the correct pipe

dimension which enables a proper sizing There are 36 default values for several pipe standards available

including

bull DIN (EN 10220 24581 2462 2440 etc)

bull ASME (B3610B3619)

bull AWWA Cast Iron Class A- H AWWA Ductile Iron Class 50-56

bull One standard for free input select Applicator default valuesmanual input

After choosing the desired pipe standard the pipe dimension window opens Depending on the preferred pipe

size and pressure rating possible pipe dimensions are offered

Connection standard

Shows all available connection standards for the selected flowmeter (eg ENDIN) By choosing a category the

corresponding process connections will be listed below

Material (sensor)

Depending on the flowmeter Applicator offers different sensor materials The available materials can depend

on the diameter and process connection Material compatibility of the sensor material will be checked against

the integrated corrosion database A warning message will be displayed if compatibility issues exist between

the fluid and sensor material

Process connection

Applicator also selects the required minimum pressure rating according to the operating pressure and

temperature values This field is displayed as a dropdown list which offers all available pressure ratings for the

selected flowmeter and meter size You can change the suggested pressure rating or process connection but

if you select a lower pressure rating than the suggested one a warning will be displayed

Below Process connection you can find the Pressure rating button Clicking on it will open a window which

displays a diagram for the selected process connection the temperature-pressure derating curve of a selected

process connection and also operation points (max pressure at min and max temperature and the nominal

temperaturepressure point)

Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If

additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case

whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will

automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to

make the user aware of the change

24 Meter Operating Range

The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values

If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The

measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range

For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible

For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow

Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is

possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly

differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour

25 Calculated Results

This section shows the calculated results of sizing

Requested flow

Indicates the values used for the calculation

Flow velocity

Flow velocity max

Pressure Loss

An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss

calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This

group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be

marginal and without any influence on your process

Velocity (meas tube)

This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation

refers to the nominal density

Measured Error Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the

flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

Measured Error spec Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding

requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration

Measured Error Mass

These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for

Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the

corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead

of a value

Measured Error spec Mass

Reynolds No

The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further

sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions

Frequency

This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is

proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity

PED results

Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please

note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window

Meter size

This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually

adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have

done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is

locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal

button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This

means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are

saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter

The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters

Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will

also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements

26 Warnings

Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the

green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is

pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or

expanded using the arrow on the right

Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next

Endress+Hauser Sales Centre

27 Button center

A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of

the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process

Print Sizing

Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports

Sizing Energy

Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the

Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow

Configurator

Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code

Add to shop basket

Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This

button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the

Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline

version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when

Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Reset

This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results

Back to top

3 Custody transfer

Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of

among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals

If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection

- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out

According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different

process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature

are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task

page

In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the

approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum

turn down is also checked

Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your

entries

The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval

As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB

7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the

max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated

With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature

The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the

ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit

values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter

measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures

the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the

warning messages

Back to top

4 Accessories

There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories

page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)

In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg

mounting set 41) are executed

41 Accessories page

Example mounting set

Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations

Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)

42 Activating a checkbox

Example Flow conditioner

For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are

automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and

process connection can be selected

43 Accessories within the order code

The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving

process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed

Applicator versions)

Back to top

5 Fluid Properties page

51 General description

Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page

This view supports the following types of fluids

Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under

ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page

The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases

Liquids

Media type Standardprocess

Fluids not 100 water (example 0

Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)

Support points (linear interpolation)

Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97

Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-

Gas (Air) UDG)

Redlich-Kwong

Gases

Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas

engine

Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine

Air Ozone O3

Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)

Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr

Butane Nitric Oxide NO3

Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0

Carbon monoxide

Chlorine

Ethane

Ethylene

Helium

Hydrogen

Hydrogen chloride

Hydrogen sulphide

Krypton

Methane

Neon

Nitrogen

Oxygen

Propane

Xenon

0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User

Defined Gas Mixture 0

Oxygen

The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for

example density or viscosity

The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information

classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of

the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They

are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are

important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new

medium

The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The

parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll

to the group header you see on your screen

When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page

A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details

Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page

52 Parameter groups

521 Fluid information

In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible

Fluid name contains the name of the fluid

Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In

many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available

State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many

purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the

steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account

Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made

522 Fluid Description

The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid

Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian

Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid

Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and

syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or

measurement principle

Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is

flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals

Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive

Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for

conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to

50 microScm and more than 50 microScm

Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to

67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo

Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details

Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid

The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user

defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

523 Basic Fluid Parameters

The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be

created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages

Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid

Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid

Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point

Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid

Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas

The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has

an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also

depend on density and viscosity

In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and

sound velocity

524 Constants

This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas

type selected

Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken

from the Unit Defaults page

Molar mass molecular weight of the gas

Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)

Heating value calorific value of the gas

The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine

For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is

used to calculate the sound velocity

525 Typical Operating Conditions

The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions

Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the

mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of

the typical operating conditions are editable

526 Temperature Viscosity

This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description

The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function

of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve

for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range

527 Temperature Density

This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Density density at the support point

The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of

operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for

fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range

528 Temperature Heat capacity

This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point

The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

529 Temperature Vapor pressure

This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid

Temperature temperature at the support point

Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point

The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

5210 Gas mixture

The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture

Gas name of the gas (first field)

Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture

Unit unit for mass fraction

A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are

given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas

Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report

The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is

displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine

only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100

5211 Fluid properties and results

This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed

differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help

function

Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom

display ldquonardquo

The calculated constants are eg

Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions

Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions

Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions

Heating value the calorific value of the fluid

For liquids

Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data

displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page

AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

For solids

a viscosity coefficient for the gas

n viscosity coefficient for gases

5212 Reference values

This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters

displayed differ according to the fluid selected

Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation

Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780

Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780

Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533

Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533

5213 Measuring task

The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of

the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details

opens a window with more information about the approval

5214 Restriction on flowmeters

This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates

that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details

opens a window with more information about the restrictions

53 Setting reference conditions

Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu

There are two possibilities

SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are

- pressure 10132 bar absolute

- temperature 0deg Celsius

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter

US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are

- pressure 14696 psi absolute

- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter

54 Creating a User Defined Fluid

Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the

world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids

1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field

Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid

at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam

2 Now click on the Properties button

3 When the page has opened click on New

4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate

fields which are now open for editing

When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database

Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system

fluids

If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields

will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General

parameters list and you can start again

If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit

button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close

button exits the page without saving the changes

55 Import and Export of Fluids

In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this

the import and export function of the fluid database can be used

In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information

are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want

to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export

button

Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database

To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file

56 Fluid Properties report

The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing

page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results

and reference values

Back to top

6 Compare size and sensor

61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)

When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose

Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the

ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function

When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The

displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter

The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by

clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the

corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table

will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can

be reapplied

The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you

click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed

as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator

can be reapplied

62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)

The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement

principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are

selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator

versions

Back to top

7 Chart page

71 Introduction

The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case

of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available

The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections

72 General Parameters

In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a

repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on

the sizing page

73 Process data

Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference

74 Curves

The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if

offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter

In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be

automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be

activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner

If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report

75 Flow limits

The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range

and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are

different

76 Chart

The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the

pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using

the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional

information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different

curves within the chart

The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons

The content of the printout depends on the options selected

Back to top

8 Order Code

Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order

information

In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring

principle and flowmeter These are as follows

Feature Description Order codeSizing

Definition of ideal

diameter

Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter

relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure

loss

Diameter (Order code

option)

Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and

installation data

Mounting set (Order code

option)

Determination of

insertion depth

Calculation of insertion depth depending on

the selected accessory (t-mass)

Pipe length (Order code

option)

Selection of Material

(Sensor)

Selection and verification of corrosion

consistency

Sensor material Liner

material (Order code

option)

Selection of Process

connection

Selection and verification of pressure and

temperature curve

Process connection (Order

code option)

Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order

code option)

Pressure equipment

directive (PED)

Definition of PED-category depending on the

application and verification of the offered

process connections

Additional approval (Order

code option)

Custody transfer Verification or specification of application

data definition of measuring range

Custody transfer (Order

code option)

Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow

conditioner)

Accessory enclosed or extra

position (Order code

option)

Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow

splitter

Sensor Options (Order code

option)

Evaluation of

measuring range

Calculation of measuring range Calculation

datachart

Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and

accessory where required

Calculation

datachart

Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation

datachart

Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion

database with relevant data

The Order code page consists of different frames

81 Order code

Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically

by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and

Configurator for the valid order codes

82 Order code options

Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration

options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the

order code

The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection

on the Sizing page

The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page

The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options

Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed

these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still

feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning

message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change

83 Extended order code

831 General

Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen

In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables

for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and

activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the

Extended order code feature is used

With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order

code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the

order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator

832 Device parameter data settings

To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is

not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the

ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator

The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo

84 Button center

The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to

proceed with your Sizing process

Configurator

Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order

code

Print Sizing

Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product can be pasted into a project

Back to top

9 Conversion Calculator

Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity

All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by

selecting one out of the drop down lists

The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another

The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all

common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be

recalculated automatically

Back to top

10 Unit Defaults

Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings

menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored

whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session

Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily

for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button

Back to top

11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)

111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)

Disclaimer

The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from

publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and

assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a

minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion

fatigue life

The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different

process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined

Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check

Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled

The content of the database was sourced from

bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)

bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG

bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta

bull Various Internet Links

bull Various Corrosion data bases

The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application

and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process

temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows

Metal

Class Description depth of corrosion per surface

A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)

B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)

C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)

NR not recommended

U unknown

Plastics

Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength

A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear

B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year

lt=30 loss of tensile strength year

C not resistant lt= 50year

lt=50 loss of tensile strength year

NR not recommended

U unknown

Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used

112 Using Corrosion Check

Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion

information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability

of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not

appear at the top of the page

Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the

corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table

The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid

The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion

database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message

is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning

message

The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project

module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing

Back to top

12 Settings (Sizing Flow)

The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the

button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select

Sizing Flow

The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this

function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings

saved are loaded with the Load Default button

Setting Impact when activated

Basic functions

Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply

Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order

classification PED device check code page and printouts

Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits

The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits

No indication of default start data input of data by user

By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually

Advanced functions

Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)

The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles

Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates

My View

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

DP Flow

Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters

Activates said functions

Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP

flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

Back to top

13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines

131 General

Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation

Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)

Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures

132 Fluid engine

General Information

The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the

fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor

Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both

liquids and for gases

Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data

Liquid Calculation

Calculation of the acentric factor Omega

Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure

Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby

bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC

bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database

bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms

bull

The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs

Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature

bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3

bull Alpha in 1K

bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K

bull Toper in K

bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3

The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs

Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature

bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3

bull AL (Viscosity factor)

bull BL (Viscosity factor)

bull Toper in K

bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt

Gas calculation

The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and

pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and

temperature

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull Zoper (Compressibility)

Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)

Toper in K

bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3

Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull c Kappa

Steam Calculation

Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard

The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard

(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use

The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from

bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and

bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa

This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only

That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms

Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator

133 Gas engine

The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the

fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine

The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of

the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted

process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine

Back to top

14 Print Sizing

The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured

and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page

The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens

bull Page format size margins orientation and format

bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter

bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report

Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed

bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo

bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout

Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered

Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page

Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are

possible Please check the help manual of the Project module

Back to top

15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by

manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002

The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection

options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator

takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable

flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and

Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can

switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator

1 Categorisation of the application

2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests

bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this

option

PED Categories

Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered

during the sizing and ordering process They include

bull All ultrasonic flowmeters

bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo

bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water

bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the

static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure

bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume

The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data

danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)

Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements

have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen

device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and

nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case

a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet

All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout

Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)

Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and

temperature are the main parameters

If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required

data in the min nom and max columns

If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the

necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating

Danger posed by the fluid

The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the

case of gases the stability of the gas is also important

The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo

according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)

All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations

belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is

above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture

bull H200-H205 (explosive)

bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)

bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)

bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)

bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)

bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)

bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)

In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in

Danger Symbols below

In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED

fluid groups

rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids

Order code

If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option

this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page

With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family

nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration

If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center

Danger Symbols

Danger symbol Explanation H-rates

C corrosive H 314

Cl chemical instable

E explosive H200-H205

F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223

F flammable H 225-H228

N environmental

dangerous

O oxidizing H271-H272

T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330

H372

T poisonous

Xi irritating

Xn injurious to health

Back to top

16 Online Update

The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator

Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes

and updated system databases with the latest products

The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator

newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the

Settings menu

Page 8: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use

Flowmeter

The first field indicates the selected sensor and transmitter as the complete flowmeter product The second

field indicates the device model These fields are not editable

The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters

Order code

The field indicates the order code of the selected flowmeter

22 Process data

The Process data page is used for the input of the process and installation conditions for the flowmeter After

the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter Applicator starts with default values which can be overwritten later

The possibility of manually editing data depends upon the corresponding calculation standard For more

details go to the Fluid Properties page

This view consists of ldquothree measuring pointsrdquo This means that the process conditions at three different flow

values can be entered minimum nominal and maximum However if only nominal values are entered these

are copied over to minimum and maximum so this feature is not mandatory to use ndash the same values can be

entered instead Using this feature has implications on Calculated resultspage As the density each measuring

points is used the sensor velocity flow velocity pressure loss reynoldsnumber and in some cases

measurement error is influenced

Please note if the option ldquoNo indication of default start data input of data by userrdquo is activated in the

Settings menu for Sizing Flow the most important start data (required flow pressure temperature) have to

be entered before the process data window is opened completely The input window appears after the

selection of the general parameters see Section 21

221 Process data

Reference values

This link opens the Units page where it is possible to change the default settings The page can also be

accessed by clicking on the cogwheel tab at the top of the page

You can for example change the Atmospheric Pressure which is relevant for conversion pressure in gauge and

absolute units

Normal Conditions (SI) refers to DIN 1343 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperature = 27315 K)

Base unit Nm3time

Standard Conditions (US) refers to ISO 2533 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperatue = 28815 K)

Base units SCFH SCFM SCFS Sm3time

Requested Flow

First enter the units of measure then the values for the minimum nominal and maximum flow rate

Applicator uses the nominal value for an initial sizing process and then checks the suggested size by making it

one size bigger or smaller in order to fit to the entered range of minimum to maximum flow rate Each

flowmeter has a default flow rate associated with it When you choose a new meter the associated default

flow rate values are displayed in these fields for initial calculations provided the fields are not locked

If you have chosen ldquogasrdquo and set a volumetric unit (eg m3h lh hellip) an additional button Requested Flow

(FAD) appears Clicking on it opens the lsquoCalculated requested flowrsquo window This allows the input and

calculation of a requested flow rate at deviating process pressures and temperatures Eg Input of ldquoFree air

deliveryrdquo for compressed air

(1 Press the Requested Flow (FAD) button 2 Enter your Requested flow values Press Apply to use the

edited values)

The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page If the selected

flowmeter is a mass flowmeter the default mass flow units are used If the fluid is a liquid the default liquid

volumetric flow units are used In other cases either the default gas volumetric or the mass flow units are

used You can also set the default units on the Units page so that the units that you normally work with are

the ones that are displayed automatically (see the description in Unit Defaults)

Pressure

The fluid operating pressure value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for the

operating pressure (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties When

you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is displayed in the nominal field for initial

calculation provided it is not locked

The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page (Unit Defaults)

You can set the default pressure unit with the help of this page

Temperature

The fluid operating temperature value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for

the operating temperature (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties

When you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is placed and displayed in the nominal

field for initial calculation provided it is not locked

The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page See Unit

Defaults

Pressure minmax

If the nominal pressure has already been entered the minimum and maximum values are set identical to it

but they may be different in their particular application The minimum and maximum pressure indicate the

limits of the process application

The limits are used to

check the pressure rating of the process connection check the current fluid phase check for cavitation

Caution The min and max pressures are not related to the min and max flow rates

Temperature minmax

If the nominal temperature is already entered the minimum and maximum values are identical to the nominal

value but they can be different in their particular adaptation

The minimum and maximum temperature indicates the limits of the process application

The limits are used to

Calculate the min and max vapour pressure Check the process connection Check the current fluid phase Check for cavitation Check for permitted device temperature

Caution The min and max temperatures are not related to the min and max flow ratesa

Units

Operating conditions can be displayed in a wide range of units You can check the units with the help of the

Unit page You can also set the default units on the Unit page so that the units that you normally work with

are the ones that are displayed automatically

You can select different units by clicking on the dropdown list (which shows the current units) and selecting a

unit from the list If you select a new unit all numeric values will be converted into the new unit

Calculated Fluid Properties

After the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter the fluid properties are calculated automatically

Applicator Sizing Flow in version 10 or newer contains a fluid engine and a gas engine for calculating the

necessary properties to size a flowmeter A list of supported gases is shown on the Gas Mixture page All other

fluids are calculated by the standard Fluid Engine Check Fluid and gas property engines for details

Density

The density at the operating conditions (min nominal or max) is calculated for the selected fluid but can be

entered manually as well You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves

differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field

For liquids (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the density of the liquid at two reference

temperatures

For gases (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the standard density (dens_Rhozero) ie the

density at 1013 mbar abs and 0degC

For gases (Gas engine) the calculations of density is based on real gas formulas

The values of the reference temperatures and densities or standard density (dens_Rhozero) can be viewed on

the Fluid Properties page (Properties button)

The default density units which are different for liquids and gases are taken from preferences which you have

indicated on the Units page

Please note that for steam (superheated and saturated) there are special formulae which calculate the density

in compliance with the standard IAPWS

Caution other unlocked fields which depend on density (eg flowrate and viscosity) are recalculated when

you change the density value (Recalculations based on temperature or pressure are generally taken for

granted whereas recalculations based on density are often overseen)

Density normal (Gas applications)

The normal density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The

reference conditions are defined on the Units page

When manually entering the normal density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip) Normal

density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the Settings menu

Density standard (Gas applications)

The standard density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The

reference conditions are defined on the Units page

When manually entering the standard density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip)

Standard density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the settings menu

Molar mass

Molar mass is the sum of all atomic masses of all atoms within a molecule The unit is kgkmol (lbkmol)

Z-factor

The Z-factor is only displayed if the selected fluid is a gas It represents the compressibility for real gases The

factor has different impacts on the fluid and gas engine

Fluid Engine

The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes as long as the field is not locked

Changing the Z-Factor causes a recalculation of Density and Viscosity (depending on the unit) if Density and

Viscosity were not locked before

Gas engine

The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes The Z-factor is only an output value

and cannot influence any dimension if it is changed manually

Viscosity

Viscosity at the operating temperature (nominal) is calculated for the selected fluid but it can also be entered

manually You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the

system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct viscosity at the operating temperature in

this input field

The liquid viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is based on the viscosity of a liquid at two reference

temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)

The gas viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is calculated based on the viscosity of the gas at two reference

temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)

The gas viscosity viscosity (Gas engine) is based on real gas formulas

The default viscosity units are taken from the Units page

Vapor pressure

The Vapor pressure field is displayed only if you calculate a liquid It indicates the absolute pressure which is

necessary to transform the liquid into a gas at the minimum nominal and maximum operating temperatures

You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the system fluid

chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field If the selected fluid is a gas

these fields are irrelevant and the compressibility factor Z for operating temperature (nominal) appears

instead

The units used for Vapor Pressure are related to the units selected for pressure Since this is a pressure

difference the concepts of relative gauge pressure do not apply

Sound Velocity

The Sound Velocity is only displayed for flowmeters if this dimension is important especially for calculating the

permitted measuring range of Coriolis mass flowmeters and for calculating the distance between the sensors

of an ultrasonic flowmeter This value can be changed and is recalculated whenever the temperature is

changed as long as the field is not locked You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid

behaves differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this

input field

Caution Please click on the Reset-button on the Sizing page if you have changed fluid properties (eg

density vapor pressure viscosity) before you start a new sizing

How to lock applicator data

When setting the fluid properties it is important to understand the concept of locking Initially all fluid

properties are unlocked and Applicator attempts to make a reasonable guess for the operating conditions

using default values for some conditions and calculating others When you set a value it will be locked

automatically The program uses your value from then on ignoring its defaults and suspending its calculations

All values which you have generated yourself are marked in blue

If you change the determined intermediate values like density viscosity eg or the results they will be printed

in italics so that you can easily recognize them

Data locking examples

Immediately after the selection of a medium and a measuring instrument Applicator starts the calculation of

the meter by using the information about operating conditions entered Usually the user herhimself adjusts

the process conditions ndash eg flow pressure and temperature- to the application The density viscosity sound

velocity vapor pressure and Z-factor are calculated by Applicator

If for example you change the temperature Applicator will recalculate the gas density value if you have not

locked the respective field However if you set the density (thereby locking it) and then change the

temperature the density will not be recalculated The program uses the density value which you have entered

independent of the temperature

Any unlocked field changes automatically if you change other operating conditions upon which it depends

Any locked field remains fixed even if you change other operating conditions Selecting a new fluid unlocks all

operating conditions except requested flow

Caution If you make a new fluid selection and lock it the fluid data will be overwritten with the default fluid

data If you make a new flowmeter selection the locked fluid data and the sensor data remain unchanged

provided this is technically reasonable

23 Sensor Pipe

This section specifies the requirements regarding the pipe into which the flowmeter is to be built

Depending on the flowmeter different inputs are necessary to describe the existing pipe location or the

requested sensor requirements Different possibilities to select the pipe material or sensor pipe material to

input pipe thickness liner thickness sound velocity of material outer diameter circumference or the input of

the inner diameter help to specify the pipe geometry Additionally rectangular ducts which are described

with the inner duct height duct width and duct thickness are available for thermal and differential pressure

flowmeters

After entering the internal diameter Applicator calculates the nearest available meter size according to the

selected connection standard Your specified inner diameter is used for further calculations

Caution Applicator takes the internal diameter and equates it with the meter or pipe size The checkbox for

Pipe size ne meter size offers the possibility of an indication and sizing of products with integrated reducers in

addition to common Prowirl flowmeters

Pipe dimension table for DP-Flow Clamp-On and Insertion meters

There is the possibility to choose between different pipe standards in order to select the correct pipe

dimension which enables a proper sizing There are 36 default values for several pipe standards available

including

bull DIN (EN 10220 24581 2462 2440 etc)

bull ASME (B3610B3619)

bull AWWA Cast Iron Class A- H AWWA Ductile Iron Class 50-56

bull One standard for free input select Applicator default valuesmanual input

After choosing the desired pipe standard the pipe dimension window opens Depending on the preferred pipe

size and pressure rating possible pipe dimensions are offered

Connection standard

Shows all available connection standards for the selected flowmeter (eg ENDIN) By choosing a category the

corresponding process connections will be listed below

Material (sensor)

Depending on the flowmeter Applicator offers different sensor materials The available materials can depend

on the diameter and process connection Material compatibility of the sensor material will be checked against

the integrated corrosion database A warning message will be displayed if compatibility issues exist between

the fluid and sensor material

Process connection

Applicator also selects the required minimum pressure rating according to the operating pressure and

temperature values This field is displayed as a dropdown list which offers all available pressure ratings for the

selected flowmeter and meter size You can change the suggested pressure rating or process connection but

if you select a lower pressure rating than the suggested one a warning will be displayed

Below Process connection you can find the Pressure rating button Clicking on it will open a window which

displays a diagram for the selected process connection the temperature-pressure derating curve of a selected

process connection and also operation points (max pressure at min and max temperature and the nominal

temperaturepressure point)

Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If

additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case

whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will

automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to

make the user aware of the change

24 Meter Operating Range

The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values

If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The

measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range

For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible

For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow

Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is

possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly

differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour

25 Calculated Results

This section shows the calculated results of sizing

Requested flow

Indicates the values used for the calculation

Flow velocity

Flow velocity max

Pressure Loss

An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss

calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This

group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be

marginal and without any influence on your process

Velocity (meas tube)

This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation

refers to the nominal density

Measured Error Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the

flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

Measured Error spec Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding

requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration

Measured Error Mass

These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for

Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the

corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead

of a value

Measured Error spec Mass

Reynolds No

The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further

sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions

Frequency

This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is

proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity

PED results

Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please

note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window

Meter size

This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually

adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have

done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is

locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal

button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This

means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are

saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter

The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters

Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will

also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements

26 Warnings

Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the

green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is

pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or

expanded using the arrow on the right

Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next

Endress+Hauser Sales Centre

27 Button center

A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of

the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process

Print Sizing

Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports

Sizing Energy

Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the

Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow

Configurator

Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code

Add to shop basket

Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This

button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the

Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline

version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when

Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Reset

This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results

Back to top

3 Custody transfer

Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of

among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals

If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection

- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out

According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different

process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature

are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task

page

In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the

approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum

turn down is also checked

Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your

entries

The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval

As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB

7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the

max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated

With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature

The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the

ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit

values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter

measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures

the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the

warning messages

Back to top

4 Accessories

There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories

page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)

In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg

mounting set 41) are executed

41 Accessories page

Example mounting set

Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations

Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)

42 Activating a checkbox

Example Flow conditioner

For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are

automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and

process connection can be selected

43 Accessories within the order code

The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving

process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed

Applicator versions)

Back to top

5 Fluid Properties page

51 General description

Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page

This view supports the following types of fluids

Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under

ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page

The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases

Liquids

Media type Standardprocess

Fluids not 100 water (example 0

Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)

Support points (linear interpolation)

Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97

Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-

Gas (Air) UDG)

Redlich-Kwong

Gases

Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas

engine

Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine

Air Ozone O3

Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)

Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr

Butane Nitric Oxide NO3

Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0

Carbon monoxide

Chlorine

Ethane

Ethylene

Helium

Hydrogen

Hydrogen chloride

Hydrogen sulphide

Krypton

Methane

Neon

Nitrogen

Oxygen

Propane

Xenon

0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User

Defined Gas Mixture 0

Oxygen

The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for

example density or viscosity

The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information

classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of

the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They

are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are

important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new

medium

The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The

parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll

to the group header you see on your screen

When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page

A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details

Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page

52 Parameter groups

521 Fluid information

In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible

Fluid name contains the name of the fluid

Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In

many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available

State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many

purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the

steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account

Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made

522 Fluid Description

The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid

Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian

Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid

Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and

syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or

measurement principle

Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is

flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals

Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive

Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for

conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to

50 microScm and more than 50 microScm

Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to

67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo

Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details

Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid

The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user

defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

523 Basic Fluid Parameters

The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be

created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages

Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid

Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid

Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point

Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid

Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas

The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has

an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also

depend on density and viscosity

In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and

sound velocity

524 Constants

This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas

type selected

Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken

from the Unit Defaults page

Molar mass molecular weight of the gas

Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)

Heating value calorific value of the gas

The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine

For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is

used to calculate the sound velocity

525 Typical Operating Conditions

The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions

Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the

mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of

the typical operating conditions are editable

526 Temperature Viscosity

This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description

The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function

of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve

for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range

527 Temperature Density

This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Density density at the support point

The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of

operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for

fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range

528 Temperature Heat capacity

This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point

The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

529 Temperature Vapor pressure

This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid

Temperature temperature at the support point

Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point

The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

5210 Gas mixture

The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture

Gas name of the gas (first field)

Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture

Unit unit for mass fraction

A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are

given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas

Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report

The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is

displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine

only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100

5211 Fluid properties and results

This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed

differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help

function

Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom

display ldquonardquo

The calculated constants are eg

Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions

Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions

Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions

Heating value the calorific value of the fluid

For liquids

Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data

displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page

AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

For solids

a viscosity coefficient for the gas

n viscosity coefficient for gases

5212 Reference values

This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters

displayed differ according to the fluid selected

Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation

Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780

Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780

Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533

Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533

5213 Measuring task

The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of

the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details

opens a window with more information about the approval

5214 Restriction on flowmeters

This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates

that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details

opens a window with more information about the restrictions

53 Setting reference conditions

Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu

There are two possibilities

SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are

- pressure 10132 bar absolute

- temperature 0deg Celsius

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter

US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are

- pressure 14696 psi absolute

- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter

54 Creating a User Defined Fluid

Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the

world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids

1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field

Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid

at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam

2 Now click on the Properties button

3 When the page has opened click on New

4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate

fields which are now open for editing

When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database

Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system

fluids

If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields

will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General

parameters list and you can start again

If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit

button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close

button exits the page without saving the changes

55 Import and Export of Fluids

In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this

the import and export function of the fluid database can be used

In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information

are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want

to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export

button

Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database

To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file

56 Fluid Properties report

The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing

page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results

and reference values

Back to top

6 Compare size and sensor

61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)

When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose

Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the

ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function

When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The

displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter

The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by

clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the

corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table

will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can

be reapplied

The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you

click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed

as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator

can be reapplied

62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)

The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement

principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are

selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator

versions

Back to top

7 Chart page

71 Introduction

The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case

of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available

The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections

72 General Parameters

In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a

repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on

the sizing page

73 Process data

Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference

74 Curves

The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if

offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter

In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be

automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be

activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner

If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report

75 Flow limits

The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range

and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are

different

76 Chart

The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the

pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using

the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional

information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different

curves within the chart

The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons

The content of the printout depends on the options selected

Back to top

8 Order Code

Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order

information

In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring

principle and flowmeter These are as follows

Feature Description Order codeSizing

Definition of ideal

diameter

Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter

relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure

loss

Diameter (Order code

option)

Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and

installation data

Mounting set (Order code

option)

Determination of

insertion depth

Calculation of insertion depth depending on

the selected accessory (t-mass)

Pipe length (Order code

option)

Selection of Material

(Sensor)

Selection and verification of corrosion

consistency

Sensor material Liner

material (Order code

option)

Selection of Process

connection

Selection and verification of pressure and

temperature curve

Process connection (Order

code option)

Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order

code option)

Pressure equipment

directive (PED)

Definition of PED-category depending on the

application and verification of the offered

process connections

Additional approval (Order

code option)

Custody transfer Verification or specification of application

data definition of measuring range

Custody transfer (Order

code option)

Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow

conditioner)

Accessory enclosed or extra

position (Order code

option)

Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow

splitter

Sensor Options (Order code

option)

Evaluation of

measuring range

Calculation of measuring range Calculation

datachart

Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and

accessory where required

Calculation

datachart

Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation

datachart

Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion

database with relevant data

The Order code page consists of different frames

81 Order code

Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically

by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and

Configurator for the valid order codes

82 Order code options

Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration

options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the

order code

The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection

on the Sizing page

The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page

The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options

Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed

these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still

feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning

message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change

83 Extended order code

831 General

Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen

In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables

for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and

activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the

Extended order code feature is used

With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order

code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the

order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator

832 Device parameter data settings

To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is

not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the

ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator

The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo

84 Button center

The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to

proceed with your Sizing process

Configurator

Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order

code

Print Sizing

Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product can be pasted into a project

Back to top

9 Conversion Calculator

Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity

All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by

selecting one out of the drop down lists

The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another

The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all

common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be

recalculated automatically

Back to top

10 Unit Defaults

Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings

menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored

whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session

Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily

for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button

Back to top

11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)

111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)

Disclaimer

The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from

publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and

assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a

minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion

fatigue life

The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different

process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined

Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check

Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled

The content of the database was sourced from

bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)

bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG

bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta

bull Various Internet Links

bull Various Corrosion data bases

The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application

and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process

temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows

Metal

Class Description depth of corrosion per surface

A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)

B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)

C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)

NR not recommended

U unknown

Plastics

Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength

A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear

B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year

lt=30 loss of tensile strength year

C not resistant lt= 50year

lt=50 loss of tensile strength year

NR not recommended

U unknown

Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used

112 Using Corrosion Check

Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion

information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability

of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not

appear at the top of the page

Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the

corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table

The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid

The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion

database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message

is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning

message

The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project

module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing

Back to top

12 Settings (Sizing Flow)

The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the

button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select

Sizing Flow

The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this

function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings

saved are loaded with the Load Default button

Setting Impact when activated

Basic functions

Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply

Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order

classification PED device check code page and printouts

Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits

The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits

No indication of default start data input of data by user

By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually

Advanced functions

Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)

The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles

Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates

My View

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

DP Flow

Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters

Activates said functions

Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP

flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

Back to top

13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines

131 General

Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation

Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)

Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures

132 Fluid engine

General Information

The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the

fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor

Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both

liquids and for gases

Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data

Liquid Calculation

Calculation of the acentric factor Omega

Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure

Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby

bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC

bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database

bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms

bull

The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs

Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature

bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3

bull Alpha in 1K

bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K

bull Toper in K

bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3

The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs

Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature

bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3

bull AL (Viscosity factor)

bull BL (Viscosity factor)

bull Toper in K

bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt

Gas calculation

The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and

pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and

temperature

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull Zoper (Compressibility)

Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)

Toper in K

bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3

Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull c Kappa

Steam Calculation

Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard

The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard

(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use

The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from

bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and

bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa

This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only

That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms

Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator

133 Gas engine

The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the

fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine

The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of

the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted

process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine

Back to top

14 Print Sizing

The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured

and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page

The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens

bull Page format size margins orientation and format

bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter

bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report

Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed

bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo

bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout

Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered

Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page

Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are

possible Please check the help manual of the Project module

Back to top

15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by

manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002

The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection

options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator

takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable

flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and

Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can

switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator

1 Categorisation of the application

2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests

bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this

option

PED Categories

Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered

during the sizing and ordering process They include

bull All ultrasonic flowmeters

bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo

bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water

bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the

static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure

bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume

The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data

danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)

Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements

have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen

device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and

nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case

a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet

All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout

Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)

Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and

temperature are the main parameters

If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required

data in the min nom and max columns

If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the

necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating

Danger posed by the fluid

The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the

case of gases the stability of the gas is also important

The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo

according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)

All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations

belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is

above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture

bull H200-H205 (explosive)

bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)

bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)

bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)

bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)

bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)

bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)

In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in

Danger Symbols below

In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED

fluid groups

rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids

Order code

If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option

this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page

With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family

nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration

If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center

Danger Symbols

Danger symbol Explanation H-rates

C corrosive H 314

Cl chemical instable

E explosive H200-H205

F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223

F flammable H 225-H228

N environmental

dangerous

O oxidizing H271-H272

T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330

H372

T poisonous

Xi irritating

Xn injurious to health

Back to top

16 Online Update

The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator

Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes

and updated system databases with the latest products

The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator

newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the

Settings menu

Page 9: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use

22 Process data

The Process data page is used for the input of the process and installation conditions for the flowmeter After

the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter Applicator starts with default values which can be overwritten later

The possibility of manually editing data depends upon the corresponding calculation standard For more

details go to the Fluid Properties page

This view consists of ldquothree measuring pointsrdquo This means that the process conditions at three different flow

values can be entered minimum nominal and maximum However if only nominal values are entered these

are copied over to minimum and maximum so this feature is not mandatory to use ndash the same values can be

entered instead Using this feature has implications on Calculated resultspage As the density each measuring

points is used the sensor velocity flow velocity pressure loss reynoldsnumber and in some cases

measurement error is influenced

Please note if the option ldquoNo indication of default start data input of data by userrdquo is activated in the

Settings menu for Sizing Flow the most important start data (required flow pressure temperature) have to

be entered before the process data window is opened completely The input window appears after the

selection of the general parameters see Section 21

221 Process data

Reference values

This link opens the Units page where it is possible to change the default settings The page can also be

accessed by clicking on the cogwheel tab at the top of the page

You can for example change the Atmospheric Pressure which is relevant for conversion pressure in gauge and

absolute units

Normal Conditions (SI) refers to DIN 1343 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperature = 27315 K)

Base unit Nm3time

Standard Conditions (US) refers to ISO 2533 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperatue = 28815 K)

Base units SCFH SCFM SCFS Sm3time

Requested Flow

First enter the units of measure then the values for the minimum nominal and maximum flow rate

Applicator uses the nominal value for an initial sizing process and then checks the suggested size by making it

one size bigger or smaller in order to fit to the entered range of minimum to maximum flow rate Each

flowmeter has a default flow rate associated with it When you choose a new meter the associated default

flow rate values are displayed in these fields for initial calculations provided the fields are not locked

If you have chosen ldquogasrdquo and set a volumetric unit (eg m3h lh hellip) an additional button Requested Flow

(FAD) appears Clicking on it opens the lsquoCalculated requested flowrsquo window This allows the input and

calculation of a requested flow rate at deviating process pressures and temperatures Eg Input of ldquoFree air

deliveryrdquo for compressed air

(1 Press the Requested Flow (FAD) button 2 Enter your Requested flow values Press Apply to use the

edited values)

The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page If the selected

flowmeter is a mass flowmeter the default mass flow units are used If the fluid is a liquid the default liquid

volumetric flow units are used In other cases either the default gas volumetric or the mass flow units are

used You can also set the default units on the Units page so that the units that you normally work with are

the ones that are displayed automatically (see the description in Unit Defaults)

Pressure

The fluid operating pressure value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for the

operating pressure (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties When

you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is displayed in the nominal field for initial

calculation provided it is not locked

The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page (Unit Defaults)

You can set the default pressure unit with the help of this page

Temperature

The fluid operating temperature value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for

the operating temperature (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties

When you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is placed and displayed in the nominal

field for initial calculation provided it is not locked

The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page See Unit

Defaults

Pressure minmax

If the nominal pressure has already been entered the minimum and maximum values are set identical to it

but they may be different in their particular application The minimum and maximum pressure indicate the

limits of the process application

The limits are used to

check the pressure rating of the process connection check the current fluid phase check for cavitation

Caution The min and max pressures are not related to the min and max flow rates

Temperature minmax

If the nominal temperature is already entered the minimum and maximum values are identical to the nominal

value but they can be different in their particular adaptation

The minimum and maximum temperature indicates the limits of the process application

The limits are used to

Calculate the min and max vapour pressure Check the process connection Check the current fluid phase Check for cavitation Check for permitted device temperature

Caution The min and max temperatures are not related to the min and max flow ratesa

Units

Operating conditions can be displayed in a wide range of units You can check the units with the help of the

Unit page You can also set the default units on the Unit page so that the units that you normally work with

are the ones that are displayed automatically

You can select different units by clicking on the dropdown list (which shows the current units) and selecting a

unit from the list If you select a new unit all numeric values will be converted into the new unit

Calculated Fluid Properties

After the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter the fluid properties are calculated automatically

Applicator Sizing Flow in version 10 or newer contains a fluid engine and a gas engine for calculating the

necessary properties to size a flowmeter A list of supported gases is shown on the Gas Mixture page All other

fluids are calculated by the standard Fluid Engine Check Fluid and gas property engines for details

Density

The density at the operating conditions (min nominal or max) is calculated for the selected fluid but can be

entered manually as well You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves

differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field

For liquids (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the density of the liquid at two reference

temperatures

For gases (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the standard density (dens_Rhozero) ie the

density at 1013 mbar abs and 0degC

For gases (Gas engine) the calculations of density is based on real gas formulas

The values of the reference temperatures and densities or standard density (dens_Rhozero) can be viewed on

the Fluid Properties page (Properties button)

The default density units which are different for liquids and gases are taken from preferences which you have

indicated on the Units page

Please note that for steam (superheated and saturated) there are special formulae which calculate the density

in compliance with the standard IAPWS

Caution other unlocked fields which depend on density (eg flowrate and viscosity) are recalculated when

you change the density value (Recalculations based on temperature or pressure are generally taken for

granted whereas recalculations based on density are often overseen)

Density normal (Gas applications)

The normal density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The

reference conditions are defined on the Units page

When manually entering the normal density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip) Normal

density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the Settings menu

Density standard (Gas applications)

The standard density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The

reference conditions are defined on the Units page

When manually entering the standard density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip)

Standard density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the settings menu

Molar mass

Molar mass is the sum of all atomic masses of all atoms within a molecule The unit is kgkmol (lbkmol)

Z-factor

The Z-factor is only displayed if the selected fluid is a gas It represents the compressibility for real gases The

factor has different impacts on the fluid and gas engine

Fluid Engine

The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes as long as the field is not locked

Changing the Z-Factor causes a recalculation of Density and Viscosity (depending on the unit) if Density and

Viscosity were not locked before

Gas engine

The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes The Z-factor is only an output value

and cannot influence any dimension if it is changed manually

Viscosity

Viscosity at the operating temperature (nominal) is calculated for the selected fluid but it can also be entered

manually You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the

system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct viscosity at the operating temperature in

this input field

The liquid viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is based on the viscosity of a liquid at two reference

temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)

The gas viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is calculated based on the viscosity of the gas at two reference

temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)

The gas viscosity viscosity (Gas engine) is based on real gas formulas

The default viscosity units are taken from the Units page

Vapor pressure

The Vapor pressure field is displayed only if you calculate a liquid It indicates the absolute pressure which is

necessary to transform the liquid into a gas at the minimum nominal and maximum operating temperatures

You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the system fluid

chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field If the selected fluid is a gas

these fields are irrelevant and the compressibility factor Z for operating temperature (nominal) appears

instead

The units used for Vapor Pressure are related to the units selected for pressure Since this is a pressure

difference the concepts of relative gauge pressure do not apply

Sound Velocity

The Sound Velocity is only displayed for flowmeters if this dimension is important especially for calculating the

permitted measuring range of Coriolis mass flowmeters and for calculating the distance between the sensors

of an ultrasonic flowmeter This value can be changed and is recalculated whenever the temperature is

changed as long as the field is not locked You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid

behaves differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this

input field

Caution Please click on the Reset-button on the Sizing page if you have changed fluid properties (eg

density vapor pressure viscosity) before you start a new sizing

How to lock applicator data

When setting the fluid properties it is important to understand the concept of locking Initially all fluid

properties are unlocked and Applicator attempts to make a reasonable guess for the operating conditions

using default values for some conditions and calculating others When you set a value it will be locked

automatically The program uses your value from then on ignoring its defaults and suspending its calculations

All values which you have generated yourself are marked in blue

If you change the determined intermediate values like density viscosity eg or the results they will be printed

in italics so that you can easily recognize them

Data locking examples

Immediately after the selection of a medium and a measuring instrument Applicator starts the calculation of

the meter by using the information about operating conditions entered Usually the user herhimself adjusts

the process conditions ndash eg flow pressure and temperature- to the application The density viscosity sound

velocity vapor pressure and Z-factor are calculated by Applicator

If for example you change the temperature Applicator will recalculate the gas density value if you have not

locked the respective field However if you set the density (thereby locking it) and then change the

temperature the density will not be recalculated The program uses the density value which you have entered

independent of the temperature

Any unlocked field changes automatically if you change other operating conditions upon which it depends

Any locked field remains fixed even if you change other operating conditions Selecting a new fluid unlocks all

operating conditions except requested flow

Caution If you make a new fluid selection and lock it the fluid data will be overwritten with the default fluid

data If you make a new flowmeter selection the locked fluid data and the sensor data remain unchanged

provided this is technically reasonable

23 Sensor Pipe

This section specifies the requirements regarding the pipe into which the flowmeter is to be built

Depending on the flowmeter different inputs are necessary to describe the existing pipe location or the

requested sensor requirements Different possibilities to select the pipe material or sensor pipe material to

input pipe thickness liner thickness sound velocity of material outer diameter circumference or the input of

the inner diameter help to specify the pipe geometry Additionally rectangular ducts which are described

with the inner duct height duct width and duct thickness are available for thermal and differential pressure

flowmeters

After entering the internal diameter Applicator calculates the nearest available meter size according to the

selected connection standard Your specified inner diameter is used for further calculations

Caution Applicator takes the internal diameter and equates it with the meter or pipe size The checkbox for

Pipe size ne meter size offers the possibility of an indication and sizing of products with integrated reducers in

addition to common Prowirl flowmeters

Pipe dimension table for DP-Flow Clamp-On and Insertion meters

There is the possibility to choose between different pipe standards in order to select the correct pipe

dimension which enables a proper sizing There are 36 default values for several pipe standards available

including

bull DIN (EN 10220 24581 2462 2440 etc)

bull ASME (B3610B3619)

bull AWWA Cast Iron Class A- H AWWA Ductile Iron Class 50-56

bull One standard for free input select Applicator default valuesmanual input

After choosing the desired pipe standard the pipe dimension window opens Depending on the preferred pipe

size and pressure rating possible pipe dimensions are offered

Connection standard

Shows all available connection standards for the selected flowmeter (eg ENDIN) By choosing a category the

corresponding process connections will be listed below

Material (sensor)

Depending on the flowmeter Applicator offers different sensor materials The available materials can depend

on the diameter and process connection Material compatibility of the sensor material will be checked against

the integrated corrosion database A warning message will be displayed if compatibility issues exist between

the fluid and sensor material

Process connection

Applicator also selects the required minimum pressure rating according to the operating pressure and

temperature values This field is displayed as a dropdown list which offers all available pressure ratings for the

selected flowmeter and meter size You can change the suggested pressure rating or process connection but

if you select a lower pressure rating than the suggested one a warning will be displayed

Below Process connection you can find the Pressure rating button Clicking on it will open a window which

displays a diagram for the selected process connection the temperature-pressure derating curve of a selected

process connection and also operation points (max pressure at min and max temperature and the nominal

temperaturepressure point)

Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If

additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case

whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will

automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to

make the user aware of the change

24 Meter Operating Range

The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values

If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The

measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range

For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible

For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow

Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is

possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly

differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour

25 Calculated Results

This section shows the calculated results of sizing

Requested flow

Indicates the values used for the calculation

Flow velocity

Flow velocity max

Pressure Loss

An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss

calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This

group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be

marginal and without any influence on your process

Velocity (meas tube)

This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation

refers to the nominal density

Measured Error Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the

flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

Measured Error spec Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding

requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration

Measured Error Mass

These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for

Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the

corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead

of a value

Measured Error spec Mass

Reynolds No

The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further

sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions

Frequency

This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is

proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity

PED results

Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please

note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window

Meter size

This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually

adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have

done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is

locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal

button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This

means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are

saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter

The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters

Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will

also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements

26 Warnings

Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the

green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is

pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or

expanded using the arrow on the right

Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next

Endress+Hauser Sales Centre

27 Button center

A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of

the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process

Print Sizing

Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports

Sizing Energy

Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the

Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow

Configurator

Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code

Add to shop basket

Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This

button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the

Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline

version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when

Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Reset

This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results

Back to top

3 Custody transfer

Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of

among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals

If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection

- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out

According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different

process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature

are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task

page

In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the

approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum

turn down is also checked

Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your

entries

The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval

As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB

7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the

max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated

With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature

The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the

ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit

values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter

measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures

the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the

warning messages

Back to top

4 Accessories

There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories

page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)

In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg

mounting set 41) are executed

41 Accessories page

Example mounting set

Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations

Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)

42 Activating a checkbox

Example Flow conditioner

For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are

automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and

process connection can be selected

43 Accessories within the order code

The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving

process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed

Applicator versions)

Back to top

5 Fluid Properties page

51 General description

Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page

This view supports the following types of fluids

Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under

ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page

The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases

Liquids

Media type Standardprocess

Fluids not 100 water (example 0

Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)

Support points (linear interpolation)

Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97

Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-

Gas (Air) UDG)

Redlich-Kwong

Gases

Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas

engine

Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine

Air Ozone O3

Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)

Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr

Butane Nitric Oxide NO3

Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0

Carbon monoxide

Chlorine

Ethane

Ethylene

Helium

Hydrogen

Hydrogen chloride

Hydrogen sulphide

Krypton

Methane

Neon

Nitrogen

Oxygen

Propane

Xenon

0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User

Defined Gas Mixture 0

Oxygen

The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for

example density or viscosity

The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information

classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of

the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They

are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are

important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new

medium

The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The

parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll

to the group header you see on your screen

When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page

A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details

Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page

52 Parameter groups

521 Fluid information

In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible

Fluid name contains the name of the fluid

Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In

many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available

State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many

purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the

steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account

Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made

522 Fluid Description

The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid

Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian

Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid

Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and

syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or

measurement principle

Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is

flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals

Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive

Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for

conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to

50 microScm and more than 50 microScm

Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to

67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo

Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details

Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid

The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user

defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

523 Basic Fluid Parameters

The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be

created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages

Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid

Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid

Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point

Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid

Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas

The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has

an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also

depend on density and viscosity

In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and

sound velocity

524 Constants

This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas

type selected

Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken

from the Unit Defaults page

Molar mass molecular weight of the gas

Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)

Heating value calorific value of the gas

The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine

For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is

used to calculate the sound velocity

525 Typical Operating Conditions

The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions

Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the

mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of

the typical operating conditions are editable

526 Temperature Viscosity

This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description

The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function

of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve

for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range

527 Temperature Density

This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Density density at the support point

The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of

operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for

fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range

528 Temperature Heat capacity

This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point

The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

529 Temperature Vapor pressure

This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid

Temperature temperature at the support point

Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point

The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

5210 Gas mixture

The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture

Gas name of the gas (first field)

Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture

Unit unit for mass fraction

A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are

given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas

Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report

The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is

displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine

only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100

5211 Fluid properties and results

This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed

differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help

function

Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom

display ldquonardquo

The calculated constants are eg

Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions

Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions

Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions

Heating value the calorific value of the fluid

For liquids

Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data

displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page

AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

For solids

a viscosity coefficient for the gas

n viscosity coefficient for gases

5212 Reference values

This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters

displayed differ according to the fluid selected

Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation

Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780

Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780

Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533

Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533

5213 Measuring task

The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of

the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details

opens a window with more information about the approval

5214 Restriction on flowmeters

This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates

that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details

opens a window with more information about the restrictions

53 Setting reference conditions

Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu

There are two possibilities

SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are

- pressure 10132 bar absolute

- temperature 0deg Celsius

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter

US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are

- pressure 14696 psi absolute

- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter

54 Creating a User Defined Fluid

Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the

world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids

1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field

Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid

at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam

2 Now click on the Properties button

3 When the page has opened click on New

4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate

fields which are now open for editing

When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database

Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system

fluids

If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields

will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General

parameters list and you can start again

If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit

button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close

button exits the page without saving the changes

55 Import and Export of Fluids

In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this

the import and export function of the fluid database can be used

In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information

are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want

to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export

button

Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database

To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file

56 Fluid Properties report

The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing

page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results

and reference values

Back to top

6 Compare size and sensor

61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)

When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose

Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the

ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function

When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The

displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter

The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by

clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the

corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table

will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can

be reapplied

The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you

click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed

as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator

can be reapplied

62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)

The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement

principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are

selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator

versions

Back to top

7 Chart page

71 Introduction

The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case

of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available

The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections

72 General Parameters

In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a

repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on

the sizing page

73 Process data

Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference

74 Curves

The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if

offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter

In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be

automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be

activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner

If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report

75 Flow limits

The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range

and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are

different

76 Chart

The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the

pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using

the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional

information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different

curves within the chart

The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons

The content of the printout depends on the options selected

Back to top

8 Order Code

Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order

information

In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring

principle and flowmeter These are as follows

Feature Description Order codeSizing

Definition of ideal

diameter

Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter

relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure

loss

Diameter (Order code

option)

Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and

installation data

Mounting set (Order code

option)

Determination of

insertion depth

Calculation of insertion depth depending on

the selected accessory (t-mass)

Pipe length (Order code

option)

Selection of Material

(Sensor)

Selection and verification of corrosion

consistency

Sensor material Liner

material (Order code

option)

Selection of Process

connection

Selection and verification of pressure and

temperature curve

Process connection (Order

code option)

Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order

code option)

Pressure equipment

directive (PED)

Definition of PED-category depending on the

application and verification of the offered

process connections

Additional approval (Order

code option)

Custody transfer Verification or specification of application

data definition of measuring range

Custody transfer (Order

code option)

Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow

conditioner)

Accessory enclosed or extra

position (Order code

option)

Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow

splitter

Sensor Options (Order code

option)

Evaluation of

measuring range

Calculation of measuring range Calculation

datachart

Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and

accessory where required

Calculation

datachart

Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation

datachart

Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion

database with relevant data

The Order code page consists of different frames

81 Order code

Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically

by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and

Configurator for the valid order codes

82 Order code options

Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration

options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the

order code

The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection

on the Sizing page

The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page

The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options

Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed

these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still

feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning

message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change

83 Extended order code

831 General

Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen

In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables

for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and

activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the

Extended order code feature is used

With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order

code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the

order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator

832 Device parameter data settings

To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is

not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the

ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator

The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo

84 Button center

The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to

proceed with your Sizing process

Configurator

Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order

code

Print Sizing

Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product can be pasted into a project

Back to top

9 Conversion Calculator

Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity

All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by

selecting one out of the drop down lists

The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another

The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all

common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be

recalculated automatically

Back to top

10 Unit Defaults

Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings

menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored

whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session

Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily

for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button

Back to top

11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)

111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)

Disclaimer

The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from

publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and

assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a

minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion

fatigue life

The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different

process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined

Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check

Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled

The content of the database was sourced from

bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)

bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG

bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta

bull Various Internet Links

bull Various Corrosion data bases

The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application

and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process

temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows

Metal

Class Description depth of corrosion per surface

A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)

B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)

C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)

NR not recommended

U unknown

Plastics

Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength

A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear

B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year

lt=30 loss of tensile strength year

C not resistant lt= 50year

lt=50 loss of tensile strength year

NR not recommended

U unknown

Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used

112 Using Corrosion Check

Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion

information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability

of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not

appear at the top of the page

Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the

corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table

The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid

The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion

database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message

is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning

message

The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project

module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing

Back to top

12 Settings (Sizing Flow)

The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the

button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select

Sizing Flow

The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this

function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings

saved are loaded with the Load Default button

Setting Impact when activated

Basic functions

Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply

Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order

classification PED device check code page and printouts

Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits

The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits

No indication of default start data input of data by user

By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually

Advanced functions

Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)

The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles

Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates

My View

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

DP Flow

Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters

Activates said functions

Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP

flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

Back to top

13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines

131 General

Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation

Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)

Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures

132 Fluid engine

General Information

The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the

fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor

Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both

liquids and for gases

Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data

Liquid Calculation

Calculation of the acentric factor Omega

Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure

Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby

bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC

bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database

bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms

bull

The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs

Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature

bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3

bull Alpha in 1K

bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K

bull Toper in K

bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3

The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs

Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature

bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3

bull AL (Viscosity factor)

bull BL (Viscosity factor)

bull Toper in K

bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt

Gas calculation

The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and

pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and

temperature

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull Zoper (Compressibility)

Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)

Toper in K

bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3

Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull c Kappa

Steam Calculation

Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard

The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard

(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use

The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from

bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and

bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa

This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only

That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms

Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator

133 Gas engine

The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the

fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine

The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of

the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted

process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine

Back to top

14 Print Sizing

The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured

and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page

The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens

bull Page format size margins orientation and format

bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter

bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report

Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed

bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo

bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout

Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered

Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page

Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are

possible Please check the help manual of the Project module

Back to top

15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by

manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002

The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection

options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator

takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable

flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and

Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can

switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator

1 Categorisation of the application

2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests

bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this

option

PED Categories

Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered

during the sizing and ordering process They include

bull All ultrasonic flowmeters

bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo

bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water

bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the

static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure

bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume

The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data

danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)

Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements

have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen

device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and

nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case

a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet

All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout

Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)

Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and

temperature are the main parameters

If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required

data in the min nom and max columns

If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the

necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating

Danger posed by the fluid

The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the

case of gases the stability of the gas is also important

The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo

according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)

All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations

belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is

above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture

bull H200-H205 (explosive)

bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)

bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)

bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)

bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)

bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)

bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)

In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in

Danger Symbols below

In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED

fluid groups

rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids

Order code

If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option

this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page

With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family

nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration

If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center

Danger Symbols

Danger symbol Explanation H-rates

C corrosive H 314

Cl chemical instable

E explosive H200-H205

F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223

F flammable H 225-H228

N environmental

dangerous

O oxidizing H271-H272

T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330

H372

T poisonous

Xi irritating

Xn injurious to health

Back to top

16 Online Update

The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator

Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes

and updated system databases with the latest products

The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator

newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the

Settings menu

Page 10: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use

221 Process data

Reference values

This link opens the Units page where it is possible to change the default settings The page can also be

accessed by clicking on the cogwheel tab at the top of the page

You can for example change the Atmospheric Pressure which is relevant for conversion pressure in gauge and

absolute units

Normal Conditions (SI) refers to DIN 1343 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperature = 27315 K)

Base unit Nm3time

Standard Conditions (US) refers to ISO 2533 (Pressure=101325 kPa Temperatue = 28815 K)

Base units SCFH SCFM SCFS Sm3time

Requested Flow

First enter the units of measure then the values for the minimum nominal and maximum flow rate

Applicator uses the nominal value for an initial sizing process and then checks the suggested size by making it

one size bigger or smaller in order to fit to the entered range of minimum to maximum flow rate Each

flowmeter has a default flow rate associated with it When you choose a new meter the associated default

flow rate values are displayed in these fields for initial calculations provided the fields are not locked

If you have chosen ldquogasrdquo and set a volumetric unit (eg m3h lh hellip) an additional button Requested Flow

(FAD) appears Clicking on it opens the lsquoCalculated requested flowrsquo window This allows the input and

calculation of a requested flow rate at deviating process pressures and temperatures Eg Input of ldquoFree air

deliveryrdquo for compressed air

(1 Press the Requested Flow (FAD) button 2 Enter your Requested flow values Press Apply to use the

edited values)

The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page If the selected

flowmeter is a mass flowmeter the default mass flow units are used If the fluid is a liquid the default liquid

volumetric flow units are used In other cases either the default gas volumetric or the mass flow units are

used You can also set the default units on the Units page so that the units that you normally work with are

the ones that are displayed automatically (see the description in Unit Defaults)

Pressure

The fluid operating pressure value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for the

operating pressure (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties When

you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is displayed in the nominal field for initial

calculation provided it is not locked

The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page (Unit Defaults)

You can set the default pressure unit with the help of this page

Temperature

The fluid operating temperature value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for

the operating temperature (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties

When you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is placed and displayed in the nominal

field for initial calculation provided it is not locked

The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page See Unit

Defaults

Pressure minmax

If the nominal pressure has already been entered the minimum and maximum values are set identical to it

but they may be different in their particular application The minimum and maximum pressure indicate the

limits of the process application

The limits are used to

check the pressure rating of the process connection check the current fluid phase check for cavitation

Caution The min and max pressures are not related to the min and max flow rates

Temperature minmax

If the nominal temperature is already entered the minimum and maximum values are identical to the nominal

value but they can be different in their particular adaptation

The minimum and maximum temperature indicates the limits of the process application

The limits are used to

Calculate the min and max vapour pressure Check the process connection Check the current fluid phase Check for cavitation Check for permitted device temperature

Caution The min and max temperatures are not related to the min and max flow ratesa

Units

Operating conditions can be displayed in a wide range of units You can check the units with the help of the

Unit page You can also set the default units on the Unit page so that the units that you normally work with

are the ones that are displayed automatically

You can select different units by clicking on the dropdown list (which shows the current units) and selecting a

unit from the list If you select a new unit all numeric values will be converted into the new unit

Calculated Fluid Properties

After the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter the fluid properties are calculated automatically

Applicator Sizing Flow in version 10 or newer contains a fluid engine and a gas engine for calculating the

necessary properties to size a flowmeter A list of supported gases is shown on the Gas Mixture page All other

fluids are calculated by the standard Fluid Engine Check Fluid and gas property engines for details

Density

The density at the operating conditions (min nominal or max) is calculated for the selected fluid but can be

entered manually as well You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves

differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field

For liquids (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the density of the liquid at two reference

temperatures

For gases (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the standard density (dens_Rhozero) ie the

density at 1013 mbar abs and 0degC

For gases (Gas engine) the calculations of density is based on real gas formulas

The values of the reference temperatures and densities or standard density (dens_Rhozero) can be viewed on

the Fluid Properties page (Properties button)

The default density units which are different for liquids and gases are taken from preferences which you have

indicated on the Units page

Please note that for steam (superheated and saturated) there are special formulae which calculate the density

in compliance with the standard IAPWS

Caution other unlocked fields which depend on density (eg flowrate and viscosity) are recalculated when

you change the density value (Recalculations based on temperature or pressure are generally taken for

granted whereas recalculations based on density are often overseen)

Density normal (Gas applications)

The normal density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The

reference conditions are defined on the Units page

When manually entering the normal density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip) Normal

density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the Settings menu

Density standard (Gas applications)

The standard density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The

reference conditions are defined on the Units page

When manually entering the standard density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip)

Standard density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the settings menu

Molar mass

Molar mass is the sum of all atomic masses of all atoms within a molecule The unit is kgkmol (lbkmol)

Z-factor

The Z-factor is only displayed if the selected fluid is a gas It represents the compressibility for real gases The

factor has different impacts on the fluid and gas engine

Fluid Engine

The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes as long as the field is not locked

Changing the Z-Factor causes a recalculation of Density and Viscosity (depending on the unit) if Density and

Viscosity were not locked before

Gas engine

The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes The Z-factor is only an output value

and cannot influence any dimension if it is changed manually

Viscosity

Viscosity at the operating temperature (nominal) is calculated for the selected fluid but it can also be entered

manually You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the

system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct viscosity at the operating temperature in

this input field

The liquid viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is based on the viscosity of a liquid at two reference

temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)

The gas viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is calculated based on the viscosity of the gas at two reference

temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)

The gas viscosity viscosity (Gas engine) is based on real gas formulas

The default viscosity units are taken from the Units page

Vapor pressure

The Vapor pressure field is displayed only if you calculate a liquid It indicates the absolute pressure which is

necessary to transform the liquid into a gas at the minimum nominal and maximum operating temperatures

You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the system fluid

chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field If the selected fluid is a gas

these fields are irrelevant and the compressibility factor Z for operating temperature (nominal) appears

instead

The units used for Vapor Pressure are related to the units selected for pressure Since this is a pressure

difference the concepts of relative gauge pressure do not apply

Sound Velocity

The Sound Velocity is only displayed for flowmeters if this dimension is important especially for calculating the

permitted measuring range of Coriolis mass flowmeters and for calculating the distance between the sensors

of an ultrasonic flowmeter This value can be changed and is recalculated whenever the temperature is

changed as long as the field is not locked You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid

behaves differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this

input field

Caution Please click on the Reset-button on the Sizing page if you have changed fluid properties (eg

density vapor pressure viscosity) before you start a new sizing

How to lock applicator data

When setting the fluid properties it is important to understand the concept of locking Initially all fluid

properties are unlocked and Applicator attempts to make a reasonable guess for the operating conditions

using default values for some conditions and calculating others When you set a value it will be locked

automatically The program uses your value from then on ignoring its defaults and suspending its calculations

All values which you have generated yourself are marked in blue

If you change the determined intermediate values like density viscosity eg or the results they will be printed

in italics so that you can easily recognize them

Data locking examples

Immediately after the selection of a medium and a measuring instrument Applicator starts the calculation of

the meter by using the information about operating conditions entered Usually the user herhimself adjusts

the process conditions ndash eg flow pressure and temperature- to the application The density viscosity sound

velocity vapor pressure and Z-factor are calculated by Applicator

If for example you change the temperature Applicator will recalculate the gas density value if you have not

locked the respective field However if you set the density (thereby locking it) and then change the

temperature the density will not be recalculated The program uses the density value which you have entered

independent of the temperature

Any unlocked field changes automatically if you change other operating conditions upon which it depends

Any locked field remains fixed even if you change other operating conditions Selecting a new fluid unlocks all

operating conditions except requested flow

Caution If you make a new fluid selection and lock it the fluid data will be overwritten with the default fluid

data If you make a new flowmeter selection the locked fluid data and the sensor data remain unchanged

provided this is technically reasonable

23 Sensor Pipe

This section specifies the requirements regarding the pipe into which the flowmeter is to be built

Depending on the flowmeter different inputs are necessary to describe the existing pipe location or the

requested sensor requirements Different possibilities to select the pipe material or sensor pipe material to

input pipe thickness liner thickness sound velocity of material outer diameter circumference or the input of

the inner diameter help to specify the pipe geometry Additionally rectangular ducts which are described

with the inner duct height duct width and duct thickness are available for thermal and differential pressure

flowmeters

After entering the internal diameter Applicator calculates the nearest available meter size according to the

selected connection standard Your specified inner diameter is used for further calculations

Caution Applicator takes the internal diameter and equates it with the meter or pipe size The checkbox for

Pipe size ne meter size offers the possibility of an indication and sizing of products with integrated reducers in

addition to common Prowirl flowmeters

Pipe dimension table for DP-Flow Clamp-On and Insertion meters

There is the possibility to choose between different pipe standards in order to select the correct pipe

dimension which enables a proper sizing There are 36 default values for several pipe standards available

including

bull DIN (EN 10220 24581 2462 2440 etc)

bull ASME (B3610B3619)

bull AWWA Cast Iron Class A- H AWWA Ductile Iron Class 50-56

bull One standard for free input select Applicator default valuesmanual input

After choosing the desired pipe standard the pipe dimension window opens Depending on the preferred pipe

size and pressure rating possible pipe dimensions are offered

Connection standard

Shows all available connection standards for the selected flowmeter (eg ENDIN) By choosing a category the

corresponding process connections will be listed below

Material (sensor)

Depending on the flowmeter Applicator offers different sensor materials The available materials can depend

on the diameter and process connection Material compatibility of the sensor material will be checked against

the integrated corrosion database A warning message will be displayed if compatibility issues exist between

the fluid and sensor material

Process connection

Applicator also selects the required minimum pressure rating according to the operating pressure and

temperature values This field is displayed as a dropdown list which offers all available pressure ratings for the

selected flowmeter and meter size You can change the suggested pressure rating or process connection but

if you select a lower pressure rating than the suggested one a warning will be displayed

Below Process connection you can find the Pressure rating button Clicking on it will open a window which

displays a diagram for the selected process connection the temperature-pressure derating curve of a selected

process connection and also operation points (max pressure at min and max temperature and the nominal

temperaturepressure point)

Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If

additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case

whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will

automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to

make the user aware of the change

24 Meter Operating Range

The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values

If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The

measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range

For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible

For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow

Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is

possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly

differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour

25 Calculated Results

This section shows the calculated results of sizing

Requested flow

Indicates the values used for the calculation

Flow velocity

Flow velocity max

Pressure Loss

An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss

calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This

group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be

marginal and without any influence on your process

Velocity (meas tube)

This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation

refers to the nominal density

Measured Error Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the

flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

Measured Error spec Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding

requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration

Measured Error Mass

These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for

Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the

corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead

of a value

Measured Error spec Mass

Reynolds No

The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further

sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions

Frequency

This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is

proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity

PED results

Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please

note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window

Meter size

This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually

adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have

done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is

locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal

button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This

means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are

saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter

The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters

Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will

also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements

26 Warnings

Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the

green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is

pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or

expanded using the arrow on the right

Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next

Endress+Hauser Sales Centre

27 Button center

A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of

the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process

Print Sizing

Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports

Sizing Energy

Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the

Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow

Configurator

Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code

Add to shop basket

Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This

button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the

Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline

version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when

Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Reset

This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results

Back to top

3 Custody transfer

Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of

among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals

If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection

- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out

According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different

process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature

are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task

page

In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the

approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum

turn down is also checked

Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your

entries

The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval

As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB

7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the

max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated

With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature

The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the

ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit

values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter

measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures

the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the

warning messages

Back to top

4 Accessories

There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories

page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)

In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg

mounting set 41) are executed

41 Accessories page

Example mounting set

Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations

Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)

42 Activating a checkbox

Example Flow conditioner

For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are

automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and

process connection can be selected

43 Accessories within the order code

The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving

process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed

Applicator versions)

Back to top

5 Fluid Properties page

51 General description

Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page

This view supports the following types of fluids

Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under

ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page

The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases

Liquids

Media type Standardprocess

Fluids not 100 water (example 0

Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)

Support points (linear interpolation)

Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97

Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-

Gas (Air) UDG)

Redlich-Kwong

Gases

Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas

engine

Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine

Air Ozone O3

Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)

Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr

Butane Nitric Oxide NO3

Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0

Carbon monoxide

Chlorine

Ethane

Ethylene

Helium

Hydrogen

Hydrogen chloride

Hydrogen sulphide

Krypton

Methane

Neon

Nitrogen

Oxygen

Propane

Xenon

0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User

Defined Gas Mixture 0

Oxygen

The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for

example density or viscosity

The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information

classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of

the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They

are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are

important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new

medium

The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The

parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll

to the group header you see on your screen

When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page

A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details

Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page

52 Parameter groups

521 Fluid information

In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible

Fluid name contains the name of the fluid

Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In

many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available

State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many

purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the

steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account

Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made

522 Fluid Description

The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid

Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian

Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid

Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and

syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or

measurement principle

Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is

flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals

Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive

Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for

conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to

50 microScm and more than 50 microScm

Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to

67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo

Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details

Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid

The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user

defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

523 Basic Fluid Parameters

The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be

created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages

Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid

Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid

Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point

Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid

Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas

The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has

an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also

depend on density and viscosity

In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and

sound velocity

524 Constants

This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas

type selected

Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken

from the Unit Defaults page

Molar mass molecular weight of the gas

Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)

Heating value calorific value of the gas

The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine

For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is

used to calculate the sound velocity

525 Typical Operating Conditions

The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions

Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the

mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of

the typical operating conditions are editable

526 Temperature Viscosity

This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description

The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function

of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve

for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range

527 Temperature Density

This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Density density at the support point

The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of

operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for

fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range

528 Temperature Heat capacity

This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point

The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

529 Temperature Vapor pressure

This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid

Temperature temperature at the support point

Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point

The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

5210 Gas mixture

The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture

Gas name of the gas (first field)

Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture

Unit unit for mass fraction

A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are

given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas

Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report

The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is

displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine

only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100

5211 Fluid properties and results

This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed

differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help

function

Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom

display ldquonardquo

The calculated constants are eg

Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions

Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions

Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions

Heating value the calorific value of the fluid

For liquids

Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data

displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page

AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

For solids

a viscosity coefficient for the gas

n viscosity coefficient for gases

5212 Reference values

This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters

displayed differ according to the fluid selected

Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation

Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780

Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780

Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533

Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533

5213 Measuring task

The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of

the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details

opens a window with more information about the approval

5214 Restriction on flowmeters

This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates

that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details

opens a window with more information about the restrictions

53 Setting reference conditions

Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu

There are two possibilities

SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are

- pressure 10132 bar absolute

- temperature 0deg Celsius

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter

US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are

- pressure 14696 psi absolute

- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter

54 Creating a User Defined Fluid

Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the

world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids

1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field

Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid

at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam

2 Now click on the Properties button

3 When the page has opened click on New

4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate

fields which are now open for editing

When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database

Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system

fluids

If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields

will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General

parameters list and you can start again

If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit

button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close

button exits the page without saving the changes

55 Import and Export of Fluids

In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this

the import and export function of the fluid database can be used

In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information

are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want

to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export

button

Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database

To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file

56 Fluid Properties report

The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing

page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results

and reference values

Back to top

6 Compare size and sensor

61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)

When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose

Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the

ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function

When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The

displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter

The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by

clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the

corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table

will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can

be reapplied

The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you

click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed

as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator

can be reapplied

62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)

The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement

principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are

selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator

versions

Back to top

7 Chart page

71 Introduction

The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case

of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available

The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections

72 General Parameters

In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a

repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on

the sizing page

73 Process data

Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference

74 Curves

The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if

offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter

In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be

automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be

activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner

If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report

75 Flow limits

The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range

and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are

different

76 Chart

The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the

pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using

the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional

information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different

curves within the chart

The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons

The content of the printout depends on the options selected

Back to top

8 Order Code

Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order

information

In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring

principle and flowmeter These are as follows

Feature Description Order codeSizing

Definition of ideal

diameter

Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter

relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure

loss

Diameter (Order code

option)

Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and

installation data

Mounting set (Order code

option)

Determination of

insertion depth

Calculation of insertion depth depending on

the selected accessory (t-mass)

Pipe length (Order code

option)

Selection of Material

(Sensor)

Selection and verification of corrosion

consistency

Sensor material Liner

material (Order code

option)

Selection of Process

connection

Selection and verification of pressure and

temperature curve

Process connection (Order

code option)

Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order

code option)

Pressure equipment

directive (PED)

Definition of PED-category depending on the

application and verification of the offered

process connections

Additional approval (Order

code option)

Custody transfer Verification or specification of application

data definition of measuring range

Custody transfer (Order

code option)

Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow

conditioner)

Accessory enclosed or extra

position (Order code

option)

Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow

splitter

Sensor Options (Order code

option)

Evaluation of

measuring range

Calculation of measuring range Calculation

datachart

Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and

accessory where required

Calculation

datachart

Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation

datachart

Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion

database with relevant data

The Order code page consists of different frames

81 Order code

Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically

by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and

Configurator for the valid order codes

82 Order code options

Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration

options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the

order code

The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection

on the Sizing page

The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page

The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options

Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed

these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still

feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning

message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change

83 Extended order code

831 General

Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen

In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables

for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and

activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the

Extended order code feature is used

With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order

code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the

order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator

832 Device parameter data settings

To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is

not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the

ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator

The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo

84 Button center

The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to

proceed with your Sizing process

Configurator

Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order

code

Print Sizing

Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product can be pasted into a project

Back to top

9 Conversion Calculator

Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity

All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by

selecting one out of the drop down lists

The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another

The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all

common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be

recalculated automatically

Back to top

10 Unit Defaults

Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings

menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored

whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session

Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily

for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button

Back to top

11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)

111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)

Disclaimer

The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from

publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and

assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a

minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion

fatigue life

The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different

process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined

Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check

Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled

The content of the database was sourced from

bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)

bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG

bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta

bull Various Internet Links

bull Various Corrosion data bases

The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application

and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process

temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows

Metal

Class Description depth of corrosion per surface

A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)

B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)

C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)

NR not recommended

U unknown

Plastics

Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength

A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear

B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year

lt=30 loss of tensile strength year

C not resistant lt= 50year

lt=50 loss of tensile strength year

NR not recommended

U unknown

Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used

112 Using Corrosion Check

Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion

information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability

of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not

appear at the top of the page

Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the

corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table

The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid

The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion

database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message

is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning

message

The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project

module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing

Back to top

12 Settings (Sizing Flow)

The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the

button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select

Sizing Flow

The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this

function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings

saved are loaded with the Load Default button

Setting Impact when activated

Basic functions

Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply

Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order

classification PED device check code page and printouts

Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits

The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits

No indication of default start data input of data by user

By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually

Advanced functions

Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)

The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles

Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates

My View

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

DP Flow

Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters

Activates said functions

Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP

flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

Back to top

13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines

131 General

Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation

Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)

Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures

132 Fluid engine

General Information

The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the

fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor

Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both

liquids and for gases

Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data

Liquid Calculation

Calculation of the acentric factor Omega

Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure

Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby

bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC

bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database

bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms

bull

The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs

Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature

bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3

bull Alpha in 1K

bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K

bull Toper in K

bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3

The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs

Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature

bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3

bull AL (Viscosity factor)

bull BL (Viscosity factor)

bull Toper in K

bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt

Gas calculation

The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and

pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and

temperature

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull Zoper (Compressibility)

Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)

Toper in K

bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3

Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull c Kappa

Steam Calculation

Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard

The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard

(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use

The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from

bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and

bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa

This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only

That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms

Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator

133 Gas engine

The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the

fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine

The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of

the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted

process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine

Back to top

14 Print Sizing

The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured

and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page

The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens

bull Page format size margins orientation and format

bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter

bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report

Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed

bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo

bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout

Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered

Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page

Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are

possible Please check the help manual of the Project module

Back to top

15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by

manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002

The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection

options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator

takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable

flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and

Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can

switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator

1 Categorisation of the application

2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests

bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this

option

PED Categories

Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered

during the sizing and ordering process They include

bull All ultrasonic flowmeters

bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo

bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water

bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the

static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure

bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume

The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data

danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)

Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements

have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen

device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and

nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case

a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet

All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout

Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)

Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and

temperature are the main parameters

If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required

data in the min nom and max columns

If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the

necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating

Danger posed by the fluid

The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the

case of gases the stability of the gas is also important

The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo

according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)

All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations

belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is

above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture

bull H200-H205 (explosive)

bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)

bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)

bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)

bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)

bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)

bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)

In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in

Danger Symbols below

In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED

fluid groups

rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids

Order code

If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option

this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page

With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family

nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration

If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center

Danger Symbols

Danger symbol Explanation H-rates

C corrosive H 314

Cl chemical instable

E explosive H200-H205

F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223

F flammable H 225-H228

N environmental

dangerous

O oxidizing H271-H272

T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330

H372

T poisonous

Xi irritating

Xn injurious to health

Back to top

16 Online Update

The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator

Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes

and updated system databases with the latest products

The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator

newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the

Settings menu

Page 11: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use

flowmeter has a default flow rate associated with it When you choose a new meter the associated default

flow rate values are displayed in these fields for initial calculations provided the fields are not locked

If you have chosen ldquogasrdquo and set a volumetric unit (eg m3h lh hellip) an additional button Requested Flow

(FAD) appears Clicking on it opens the lsquoCalculated requested flowrsquo window This allows the input and

calculation of a requested flow rate at deviating process pressures and temperatures Eg Input of ldquoFree air

deliveryrdquo for compressed air

(1 Press the Requested Flow (FAD) button 2 Enter your Requested flow values Press Apply to use the

edited values)

The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page If the selected

flowmeter is a mass flowmeter the default mass flow units are used If the fluid is a liquid the default liquid

volumetric flow units are used In other cases either the default gas volumetric or the mass flow units are

used You can also set the default units on the Units page so that the units that you normally work with are

the ones that are displayed automatically (see the description in Unit Defaults)

Pressure

The fluid operating pressure value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for the

operating pressure (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties When

you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is displayed in the nominal field for initial

calculation provided it is not locked

The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page (Unit Defaults)

You can set the default pressure unit with the help of this page

Temperature

The fluid operating temperature value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for

the operating temperature (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties

When you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is placed and displayed in the nominal

field for initial calculation provided it is not locked

The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page See Unit

Defaults

Pressure minmax

If the nominal pressure has already been entered the minimum and maximum values are set identical to it

but they may be different in their particular application The minimum and maximum pressure indicate the

limits of the process application

The limits are used to

check the pressure rating of the process connection check the current fluid phase check for cavitation

Caution The min and max pressures are not related to the min and max flow rates

Temperature minmax

If the nominal temperature is already entered the minimum and maximum values are identical to the nominal

value but they can be different in their particular adaptation

The minimum and maximum temperature indicates the limits of the process application

The limits are used to

Calculate the min and max vapour pressure Check the process connection Check the current fluid phase Check for cavitation Check for permitted device temperature

Caution The min and max temperatures are not related to the min and max flow ratesa

Units

Operating conditions can be displayed in a wide range of units You can check the units with the help of the

Unit page You can also set the default units on the Unit page so that the units that you normally work with

are the ones that are displayed automatically

You can select different units by clicking on the dropdown list (which shows the current units) and selecting a

unit from the list If you select a new unit all numeric values will be converted into the new unit

Calculated Fluid Properties

After the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter the fluid properties are calculated automatically

Applicator Sizing Flow in version 10 or newer contains a fluid engine and a gas engine for calculating the

necessary properties to size a flowmeter A list of supported gases is shown on the Gas Mixture page All other

fluids are calculated by the standard Fluid Engine Check Fluid and gas property engines for details

Density

The density at the operating conditions (min nominal or max) is calculated for the selected fluid but can be

entered manually as well You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves

differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field

For liquids (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the density of the liquid at two reference

temperatures

For gases (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the standard density (dens_Rhozero) ie the

density at 1013 mbar abs and 0degC

For gases (Gas engine) the calculations of density is based on real gas formulas

The values of the reference temperatures and densities or standard density (dens_Rhozero) can be viewed on

the Fluid Properties page (Properties button)

The default density units which are different for liquids and gases are taken from preferences which you have

indicated on the Units page

Please note that for steam (superheated and saturated) there are special formulae which calculate the density

in compliance with the standard IAPWS

Caution other unlocked fields which depend on density (eg flowrate and viscosity) are recalculated when

you change the density value (Recalculations based on temperature or pressure are generally taken for

granted whereas recalculations based on density are often overseen)

Density normal (Gas applications)

The normal density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The

reference conditions are defined on the Units page

When manually entering the normal density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip) Normal

density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the Settings menu

Density standard (Gas applications)

The standard density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The

reference conditions are defined on the Units page

When manually entering the standard density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip)

Standard density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the settings menu

Molar mass

Molar mass is the sum of all atomic masses of all atoms within a molecule The unit is kgkmol (lbkmol)

Z-factor

The Z-factor is only displayed if the selected fluid is a gas It represents the compressibility for real gases The

factor has different impacts on the fluid and gas engine

Fluid Engine

The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes as long as the field is not locked

Changing the Z-Factor causes a recalculation of Density and Viscosity (depending on the unit) if Density and

Viscosity were not locked before

Gas engine

The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes The Z-factor is only an output value

and cannot influence any dimension if it is changed manually

Viscosity

Viscosity at the operating temperature (nominal) is calculated for the selected fluid but it can also be entered

manually You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the

system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct viscosity at the operating temperature in

this input field

The liquid viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is based on the viscosity of a liquid at two reference

temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)

The gas viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is calculated based on the viscosity of the gas at two reference

temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)

The gas viscosity viscosity (Gas engine) is based on real gas formulas

The default viscosity units are taken from the Units page

Vapor pressure

The Vapor pressure field is displayed only if you calculate a liquid It indicates the absolute pressure which is

necessary to transform the liquid into a gas at the minimum nominal and maximum operating temperatures

You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the system fluid

chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field If the selected fluid is a gas

these fields are irrelevant and the compressibility factor Z for operating temperature (nominal) appears

instead

The units used for Vapor Pressure are related to the units selected for pressure Since this is a pressure

difference the concepts of relative gauge pressure do not apply

Sound Velocity

The Sound Velocity is only displayed for flowmeters if this dimension is important especially for calculating the

permitted measuring range of Coriolis mass flowmeters and for calculating the distance between the sensors

of an ultrasonic flowmeter This value can be changed and is recalculated whenever the temperature is

changed as long as the field is not locked You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid

behaves differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this

input field

Caution Please click on the Reset-button on the Sizing page if you have changed fluid properties (eg

density vapor pressure viscosity) before you start a new sizing

How to lock applicator data

When setting the fluid properties it is important to understand the concept of locking Initially all fluid

properties are unlocked and Applicator attempts to make a reasonable guess for the operating conditions

using default values for some conditions and calculating others When you set a value it will be locked

automatically The program uses your value from then on ignoring its defaults and suspending its calculations

All values which you have generated yourself are marked in blue

If you change the determined intermediate values like density viscosity eg or the results they will be printed

in italics so that you can easily recognize them

Data locking examples

Immediately after the selection of a medium and a measuring instrument Applicator starts the calculation of

the meter by using the information about operating conditions entered Usually the user herhimself adjusts

the process conditions ndash eg flow pressure and temperature- to the application The density viscosity sound

velocity vapor pressure and Z-factor are calculated by Applicator

If for example you change the temperature Applicator will recalculate the gas density value if you have not

locked the respective field However if you set the density (thereby locking it) and then change the

temperature the density will not be recalculated The program uses the density value which you have entered

independent of the temperature

Any unlocked field changes automatically if you change other operating conditions upon which it depends

Any locked field remains fixed even if you change other operating conditions Selecting a new fluid unlocks all

operating conditions except requested flow

Caution If you make a new fluid selection and lock it the fluid data will be overwritten with the default fluid

data If you make a new flowmeter selection the locked fluid data and the sensor data remain unchanged

provided this is technically reasonable

23 Sensor Pipe

This section specifies the requirements regarding the pipe into which the flowmeter is to be built

Depending on the flowmeter different inputs are necessary to describe the existing pipe location or the

requested sensor requirements Different possibilities to select the pipe material or sensor pipe material to

input pipe thickness liner thickness sound velocity of material outer diameter circumference or the input of

the inner diameter help to specify the pipe geometry Additionally rectangular ducts which are described

with the inner duct height duct width and duct thickness are available for thermal and differential pressure

flowmeters

After entering the internal diameter Applicator calculates the nearest available meter size according to the

selected connection standard Your specified inner diameter is used for further calculations

Caution Applicator takes the internal diameter and equates it with the meter or pipe size The checkbox for

Pipe size ne meter size offers the possibility of an indication and sizing of products with integrated reducers in

addition to common Prowirl flowmeters

Pipe dimension table for DP-Flow Clamp-On and Insertion meters

There is the possibility to choose between different pipe standards in order to select the correct pipe

dimension which enables a proper sizing There are 36 default values for several pipe standards available

including

bull DIN (EN 10220 24581 2462 2440 etc)

bull ASME (B3610B3619)

bull AWWA Cast Iron Class A- H AWWA Ductile Iron Class 50-56

bull One standard for free input select Applicator default valuesmanual input

After choosing the desired pipe standard the pipe dimension window opens Depending on the preferred pipe

size and pressure rating possible pipe dimensions are offered

Connection standard

Shows all available connection standards for the selected flowmeter (eg ENDIN) By choosing a category the

corresponding process connections will be listed below

Material (sensor)

Depending on the flowmeter Applicator offers different sensor materials The available materials can depend

on the diameter and process connection Material compatibility of the sensor material will be checked against

the integrated corrosion database A warning message will be displayed if compatibility issues exist between

the fluid and sensor material

Process connection

Applicator also selects the required minimum pressure rating according to the operating pressure and

temperature values This field is displayed as a dropdown list which offers all available pressure ratings for the

selected flowmeter and meter size You can change the suggested pressure rating or process connection but

if you select a lower pressure rating than the suggested one a warning will be displayed

Below Process connection you can find the Pressure rating button Clicking on it will open a window which

displays a diagram for the selected process connection the temperature-pressure derating curve of a selected

process connection and also operation points (max pressure at min and max temperature and the nominal

temperaturepressure point)

Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If

additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case

whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will

automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to

make the user aware of the change

24 Meter Operating Range

The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values

If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The

measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range

For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible

For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow

Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is

possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly

differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour

25 Calculated Results

This section shows the calculated results of sizing

Requested flow

Indicates the values used for the calculation

Flow velocity

Flow velocity max

Pressure Loss

An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss

calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This

group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be

marginal and without any influence on your process

Velocity (meas tube)

This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation

refers to the nominal density

Measured Error Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the

flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

Measured Error spec Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding

requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration

Measured Error Mass

These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for

Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the

corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead

of a value

Measured Error spec Mass

Reynolds No

The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further

sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions

Frequency

This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is

proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity

PED results

Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please

note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window

Meter size

This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually

adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have

done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is

locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal

button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This

means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are

saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter

The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters

Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will

also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements

26 Warnings

Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the

green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is

pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or

expanded using the arrow on the right

Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next

Endress+Hauser Sales Centre

27 Button center

A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of

the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process

Print Sizing

Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports

Sizing Energy

Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the

Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow

Configurator

Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code

Add to shop basket

Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This

button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the

Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline

version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when

Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Reset

This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results

Back to top

3 Custody transfer

Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of

among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals

If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection

- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out

According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different

process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature

are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task

page

In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the

approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum

turn down is also checked

Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your

entries

The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval

As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB

7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the

max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated

With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature

The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the

ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit

values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter

measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures

the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the

warning messages

Back to top

4 Accessories

There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories

page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)

In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg

mounting set 41) are executed

41 Accessories page

Example mounting set

Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations

Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)

42 Activating a checkbox

Example Flow conditioner

For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are

automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and

process connection can be selected

43 Accessories within the order code

The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving

process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed

Applicator versions)

Back to top

5 Fluid Properties page

51 General description

Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page

This view supports the following types of fluids

Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under

ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page

The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases

Liquids

Media type Standardprocess

Fluids not 100 water (example 0

Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)

Support points (linear interpolation)

Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97

Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-

Gas (Air) UDG)

Redlich-Kwong

Gases

Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas

engine

Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine

Air Ozone O3

Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)

Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr

Butane Nitric Oxide NO3

Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0

Carbon monoxide

Chlorine

Ethane

Ethylene

Helium

Hydrogen

Hydrogen chloride

Hydrogen sulphide

Krypton

Methane

Neon

Nitrogen

Oxygen

Propane

Xenon

0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User

Defined Gas Mixture 0

Oxygen

The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for

example density or viscosity

The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information

classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of

the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They

are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are

important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new

medium

The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The

parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll

to the group header you see on your screen

When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page

A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details

Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page

52 Parameter groups

521 Fluid information

In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible

Fluid name contains the name of the fluid

Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In

many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available

State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many

purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the

steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account

Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made

522 Fluid Description

The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid

Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian

Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid

Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and

syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or

measurement principle

Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is

flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals

Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive

Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for

conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to

50 microScm and more than 50 microScm

Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to

67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo

Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details

Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid

The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user

defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

523 Basic Fluid Parameters

The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be

created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages

Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid

Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid

Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point

Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid

Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas

The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has

an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also

depend on density and viscosity

In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and

sound velocity

524 Constants

This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas

type selected

Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken

from the Unit Defaults page

Molar mass molecular weight of the gas

Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)

Heating value calorific value of the gas

The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine

For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is

used to calculate the sound velocity

525 Typical Operating Conditions

The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions

Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the

mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of

the typical operating conditions are editable

526 Temperature Viscosity

This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description

The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function

of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve

for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range

527 Temperature Density

This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Density density at the support point

The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of

operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for

fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range

528 Temperature Heat capacity

This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point

The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

529 Temperature Vapor pressure

This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid

Temperature temperature at the support point

Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point

The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

5210 Gas mixture

The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture

Gas name of the gas (first field)

Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture

Unit unit for mass fraction

A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are

given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas

Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report

The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is

displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine

only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100

5211 Fluid properties and results

This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed

differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help

function

Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom

display ldquonardquo

The calculated constants are eg

Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions

Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions

Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions

Heating value the calorific value of the fluid

For liquids

Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data

displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page

AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

For solids

a viscosity coefficient for the gas

n viscosity coefficient for gases

5212 Reference values

This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters

displayed differ according to the fluid selected

Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation

Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780

Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780

Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533

Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533

5213 Measuring task

The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of

the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details

opens a window with more information about the approval

5214 Restriction on flowmeters

This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates

that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details

opens a window with more information about the restrictions

53 Setting reference conditions

Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu

There are two possibilities

SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are

- pressure 10132 bar absolute

- temperature 0deg Celsius

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter

US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are

- pressure 14696 psi absolute

- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter

54 Creating a User Defined Fluid

Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the

world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids

1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field

Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid

at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam

2 Now click on the Properties button

3 When the page has opened click on New

4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate

fields which are now open for editing

When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database

Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system

fluids

If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields

will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General

parameters list and you can start again

If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit

button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close

button exits the page without saving the changes

55 Import and Export of Fluids

In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this

the import and export function of the fluid database can be used

In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information

are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want

to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export

button

Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database

To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file

56 Fluid Properties report

The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing

page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results

and reference values

Back to top

6 Compare size and sensor

61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)

When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose

Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the

ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function

When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The

displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter

The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by

clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the

corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table

will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can

be reapplied

The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you

click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed

as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator

can be reapplied

62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)

The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement

principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are

selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator

versions

Back to top

7 Chart page

71 Introduction

The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case

of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available

The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections

72 General Parameters

In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a

repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on

the sizing page

73 Process data

Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference

74 Curves

The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if

offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter

In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be

automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be

activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner

If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report

75 Flow limits

The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range

and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are

different

76 Chart

The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the

pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using

the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional

information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different

curves within the chart

The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons

The content of the printout depends on the options selected

Back to top

8 Order Code

Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order

information

In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring

principle and flowmeter These are as follows

Feature Description Order codeSizing

Definition of ideal

diameter

Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter

relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure

loss

Diameter (Order code

option)

Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and

installation data

Mounting set (Order code

option)

Determination of

insertion depth

Calculation of insertion depth depending on

the selected accessory (t-mass)

Pipe length (Order code

option)

Selection of Material

(Sensor)

Selection and verification of corrosion

consistency

Sensor material Liner

material (Order code

option)

Selection of Process

connection

Selection and verification of pressure and

temperature curve

Process connection (Order

code option)

Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order

code option)

Pressure equipment

directive (PED)

Definition of PED-category depending on the

application and verification of the offered

process connections

Additional approval (Order

code option)

Custody transfer Verification or specification of application

data definition of measuring range

Custody transfer (Order

code option)

Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow

conditioner)

Accessory enclosed or extra

position (Order code

option)

Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow

splitter

Sensor Options (Order code

option)

Evaluation of

measuring range

Calculation of measuring range Calculation

datachart

Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and

accessory where required

Calculation

datachart

Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation

datachart

Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion

database with relevant data

The Order code page consists of different frames

81 Order code

Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically

by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and

Configurator for the valid order codes

82 Order code options

Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration

options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the

order code

The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection

on the Sizing page

The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page

The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options

Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed

these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still

feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning

message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change

83 Extended order code

831 General

Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen

In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables

for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and

activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the

Extended order code feature is used

With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order

code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the

order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator

832 Device parameter data settings

To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is

not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the

ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator

The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo

84 Button center

The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to

proceed with your Sizing process

Configurator

Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order

code

Print Sizing

Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product can be pasted into a project

Back to top

9 Conversion Calculator

Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity

All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by

selecting one out of the drop down lists

The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another

The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all

common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be

recalculated automatically

Back to top

10 Unit Defaults

Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings

menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored

whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session

Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily

for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button

Back to top

11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)

111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)

Disclaimer

The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from

publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and

assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a

minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion

fatigue life

The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different

process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined

Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check

Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled

The content of the database was sourced from

bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)

bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG

bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta

bull Various Internet Links

bull Various Corrosion data bases

The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application

and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process

temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows

Metal

Class Description depth of corrosion per surface

A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)

B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)

C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)

NR not recommended

U unknown

Plastics

Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength

A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear

B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year

lt=30 loss of tensile strength year

C not resistant lt= 50year

lt=50 loss of tensile strength year

NR not recommended

U unknown

Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used

112 Using Corrosion Check

Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion

information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability

of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not

appear at the top of the page

Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the

corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table

The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid

The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion

database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message

is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning

message

The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project

module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing

Back to top

12 Settings (Sizing Flow)

The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the

button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select

Sizing Flow

The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this

function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings

saved are loaded with the Load Default button

Setting Impact when activated

Basic functions

Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply

Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order

classification PED device check code page and printouts

Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits

The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits

No indication of default start data input of data by user

By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually

Advanced functions

Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)

The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles

Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates

My View

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

DP Flow

Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters

Activates said functions

Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP

flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

Back to top

13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines

131 General

Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation

Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)

Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures

132 Fluid engine

General Information

The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the

fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor

Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both

liquids and for gases

Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data

Liquid Calculation

Calculation of the acentric factor Omega

Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure

Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby

bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC

bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database

bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms

bull

The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs

Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature

bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3

bull Alpha in 1K

bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K

bull Toper in K

bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3

The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs

Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature

bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3

bull AL (Viscosity factor)

bull BL (Viscosity factor)

bull Toper in K

bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt

Gas calculation

The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and

pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and

temperature

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull Zoper (Compressibility)

Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)

Toper in K

bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3

Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull c Kappa

Steam Calculation

Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard

The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard

(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use

The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from

bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and

bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa

This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only

That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms

Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator

133 Gas engine

The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the

fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine

The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of

the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted

process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine

Back to top

14 Print Sizing

The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured

and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page

The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens

bull Page format size margins orientation and format

bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter

bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report

Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed

bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo

bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout

Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered

Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page

Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are

possible Please check the help manual of the Project module

Back to top

15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by

manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002

The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection

options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator

takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable

flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and

Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can

switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator

1 Categorisation of the application

2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests

bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this

option

PED Categories

Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered

during the sizing and ordering process They include

bull All ultrasonic flowmeters

bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo

bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water

bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the

static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure

bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume

The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data

danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)

Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements

have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen

device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and

nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case

a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet

All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout

Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)

Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and

temperature are the main parameters

If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required

data in the min nom and max columns

If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the

necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating

Danger posed by the fluid

The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the

case of gases the stability of the gas is also important

The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo

according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)

All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations

belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is

above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture

bull H200-H205 (explosive)

bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)

bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)

bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)

bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)

bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)

bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)

In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in

Danger Symbols below

In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED

fluid groups

rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids

Order code

If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option

this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page

With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family

nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration

If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center

Danger Symbols

Danger symbol Explanation H-rates

C corrosive H 314

Cl chemical instable

E explosive H200-H205

F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223

F flammable H 225-H228

N environmental

dangerous

O oxidizing H271-H272

T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330

H372

T poisonous

Xi irritating

Xn injurious to health

Back to top

16 Online Update

The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator

Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes

and updated system databases with the latest products

The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator

newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the

Settings menu

Page 12: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use

The fluid operating temperature value is entered in the nominal input field Each fluid has a default value for

the operating temperature (nominal) To view the default operating pressure for a fluid see Fluid Properties

When you choose a new fluid the associated default operating pressure is placed and displayed in the nominal

field for initial calculation provided it is not locked

The default units used depend on the selected unit system and the settings on the Units page See Unit

Defaults

Pressure minmax

If the nominal pressure has already been entered the minimum and maximum values are set identical to it

but they may be different in their particular application The minimum and maximum pressure indicate the

limits of the process application

The limits are used to

check the pressure rating of the process connection check the current fluid phase check for cavitation

Caution The min and max pressures are not related to the min and max flow rates

Temperature minmax

If the nominal temperature is already entered the minimum and maximum values are identical to the nominal

value but they can be different in their particular adaptation

The minimum and maximum temperature indicates the limits of the process application

The limits are used to

Calculate the min and max vapour pressure Check the process connection Check the current fluid phase Check for cavitation Check for permitted device temperature

Caution The min and max temperatures are not related to the min and max flow ratesa

Units

Operating conditions can be displayed in a wide range of units You can check the units with the help of the

Unit page You can also set the default units on the Unit page so that the units that you normally work with

are the ones that are displayed automatically

You can select different units by clicking on the dropdown list (which shows the current units) and selecting a

unit from the list If you select a new unit all numeric values will be converted into the new unit

Calculated Fluid Properties

After the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter the fluid properties are calculated automatically

Applicator Sizing Flow in version 10 or newer contains a fluid engine and a gas engine for calculating the

necessary properties to size a flowmeter A list of supported gases is shown on the Gas Mixture page All other

fluids are calculated by the standard Fluid Engine Check Fluid and gas property engines for details

Density

The density at the operating conditions (min nominal or max) is calculated for the selected fluid but can be

entered manually as well You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves

differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field

For liquids (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the density of the liquid at two reference

temperatures

For gases (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the standard density (dens_Rhozero) ie the

density at 1013 mbar abs and 0degC

For gases (Gas engine) the calculations of density is based on real gas formulas

The values of the reference temperatures and densities or standard density (dens_Rhozero) can be viewed on

the Fluid Properties page (Properties button)

The default density units which are different for liquids and gases are taken from preferences which you have

indicated on the Units page

Please note that for steam (superheated and saturated) there are special formulae which calculate the density

in compliance with the standard IAPWS

Caution other unlocked fields which depend on density (eg flowrate and viscosity) are recalculated when

you change the density value (Recalculations based on temperature or pressure are generally taken for

granted whereas recalculations based on density are often overseen)

Density normal (Gas applications)

The normal density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The

reference conditions are defined on the Units page

When manually entering the normal density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip) Normal

density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the Settings menu

Density standard (Gas applications)

The standard density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The

reference conditions are defined on the Units page

When manually entering the standard density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip)

Standard density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the settings menu

Molar mass

Molar mass is the sum of all atomic masses of all atoms within a molecule The unit is kgkmol (lbkmol)

Z-factor

The Z-factor is only displayed if the selected fluid is a gas It represents the compressibility for real gases The

factor has different impacts on the fluid and gas engine

Fluid Engine

The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes as long as the field is not locked

Changing the Z-Factor causes a recalculation of Density and Viscosity (depending on the unit) if Density and

Viscosity were not locked before

Gas engine

The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes The Z-factor is only an output value

and cannot influence any dimension if it is changed manually

Viscosity

Viscosity at the operating temperature (nominal) is calculated for the selected fluid but it can also be entered

manually You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the

system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct viscosity at the operating temperature in

this input field

The liquid viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is based on the viscosity of a liquid at two reference

temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)

The gas viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is calculated based on the viscosity of the gas at two reference

temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)

The gas viscosity viscosity (Gas engine) is based on real gas formulas

The default viscosity units are taken from the Units page

Vapor pressure

The Vapor pressure field is displayed only if you calculate a liquid It indicates the absolute pressure which is

necessary to transform the liquid into a gas at the minimum nominal and maximum operating temperatures

You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the system fluid

chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field If the selected fluid is a gas

these fields are irrelevant and the compressibility factor Z for operating temperature (nominal) appears

instead

The units used for Vapor Pressure are related to the units selected for pressure Since this is a pressure

difference the concepts of relative gauge pressure do not apply

Sound Velocity

The Sound Velocity is only displayed for flowmeters if this dimension is important especially for calculating the

permitted measuring range of Coriolis mass flowmeters and for calculating the distance between the sensors

of an ultrasonic flowmeter This value can be changed and is recalculated whenever the temperature is

changed as long as the field is not locked You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid

behaves differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this

input field

Caution Please click on the Reset-button on the Sizing page if you have changed fluid properties (eg

density vapor pressure viscosity) before you start a new sizing

How to lock applicator data

When setting the fluid properties it is important to understand the concept of locking Initially all fluid

properties are unlocked and Applicator attempts to make a reasonable guess for the operating conditions

using default values for some conditions and calculating others When you set a value it will be locked

automatically The program uses your value from then on ignoring its defaults and suspending its calculations

All values which you have generated yourself are marked in blue

If you change the determined intermediate values like density viscosity eg or the results they will be printed

in italics so that you can easily recognize them

Data locking examples

Immediately after the selection of a medium and a measuring instrument Applicator starts the calculation of

the meter by using the information about operating conditions entered Usually the user herhimself adjusts

the process conditions ndash eg flow pressure and temperature- to the application The density viscosity sound

velocity vapor pressure and Z-factor are calculated by Applicator

If for example you change the temperature Applicator will recalculate the gas density value if you have not

locked the respective field However if you set the density (thereby locking it) and then change the

temperature the density will not be recalculated The program uses the density value which you have entered

independent of the temperature

Any unlocked field changes automatically if you change other operating conditions upon which it depends

Any locked field remains fixed even if you change other operating conditions Selecting a new fluid unlocks all

operating conditions except requested flow

Caution If you make a new fluid selection and lock it the fluid data will be overwritten with the default fluid

data If you make a new flowmeter selection the locked fluid data and the sensor data remain unchanged

provided this is technically reasonable

23 Sensor Pipe

This section specifies the requirements regarding the pipe into which the flowmeter is to be built

Depending on the flowmeter different inputs are necessary to describe the existing pipe location or the

requested sensor requirements Different possibilities to select the pipe material or sensor pipe material to

input pipe thickness liner thickness sound velocity of material outer diameter circumference or the input of

the inner diameter help to specify the pipe geometry Additionally rectangular ducts which are described

with the inner duct height duct width and duct thickness are available for thermal and differential pressure

flowmeters

After entering the internal diameter Applicator calculates the nearest available meter size according to the

selected connection standard Your specified inner diameter is used for further calculations

Caution Applicator takes the internal diameter and equates it with the meter or pipe size The checkbox for

Pipe size ne meter size offers the possibility of an indication and sizing of products with integrated reducers in

addition to common Prowirl flowmeters

Pipe dimension table for DP-Flow Clamp-On and Insertion meters

There is the possibility to choose between different pipe standards in order to select the correct pipe

dimension which enables a proper sizing There are 36 default values for several pipe standards available

including

bull DIN (EN 10220 24581 2462 2440 etc)

bull ASME (B3610B3619)

bull AWWA Cast Iron Class A- H AWWA Ductile Iron Class 50-56

bull One standard for free input select Applicator default valuesmanual input

After choosing the desired pipe standard the pipe dimension window opens Depending on the preferred pipe

size and pressure rating possible pipe dimensions are offered

Connection standard

Shows all available connection standards for the selected flowmeter (eg ENDIN) By choosing a category the

corresponding process connections will be listed below

Material (sensor)

Depending on the flowmeter Applicator offers different sensor materials The available materials can depend

on the diameter and process connection Material compatibility of the sensor material will be checked against

the integrated corrosion database A warning message will be displayed if compatibility issues exist between

the fluid and sensor material

Process connection

Applicator also selects the required minimum pressure rating according to the operating pressure and

temperature values This field is displayed as a dropdown list which offers all available pressure ratings for the

selected flowmeter and meter size You can change the suggested pressure rating or process connection but

if you select a lower pressure rating than the suggested one a warning will be displayed

Below Process connection you can find the Pressure rating button Clicking on it will open a window which

displays a diagram for the selected process connection the temperature-pressure derating curve of a selected

process connection and also operation points (max pressure at min and max temperature and the nominal

temperaturepressure point)

Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If

additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case

whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will

automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to

make the user aware of the change

24 Meter Operating Range

The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values

If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The

measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range

For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible

For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow

Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is

possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly

differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour

25 Calculated Results

This section shows the calculated results of sizing

Requested flow

Indicates the values used for the calculation

Flow velocity

Flow velocity max

Pressure Loss

An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss

calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This

group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be

marginal and without any influence on your process

Velocity (meas tube)

This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation

refers to the nominal density

Measured Error Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the

flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

Measured Error spec Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding

requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration

Measured Error Mass

These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for

Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the

corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead

of a value

Measured Error spec Mass

Reynolds No

The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further

sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions

Frequency

This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is

proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity

PED results

Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please

note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window

Meter size

This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually

adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have

done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is

locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal

button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This

means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are

saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter

The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters

Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will

also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements

26 Warnings

Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the

green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is

pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or

expanded using the arrow on the right

Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next

Endress+Hauser Sales Centre

27 Button center

A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of

the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process

Print Sizing

Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports

Sizing Energy

Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the

Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow

Configurator

Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code

Add to shop basket

Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This

button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the

Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline

version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when

Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Reset

This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results

Back to top

3 Custody transfer

Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of

among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals

If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection

- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out

According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different

process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature

are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task

page

In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the

approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum

turn down is also checked

Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your

entries

The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval

As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB

7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the

max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated

With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature

The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the

ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit

values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter

measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures

the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the

warning messages

Back to top

4 Accessories

There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories

page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)

In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg

mounting set 41) are executed

41 Accessories page

Example mounting set

Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations

Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)

42 Activating a checkbox

Example Flow conditioner

For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are

automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and

process connection can be selected

43 Accessories within the order code

The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving

process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed

Applicator versions)

Back to top

5 Fluid Properties page

51 General description

Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page

This view supports the following types of fluids

Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under

ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page

The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases

Liquids

Media type Standardprocess

Fluids not 100 water (example 0

Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)

Support points (linear interpolation)

Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97

Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-

Gas (Air) UDG)

Redlich-Kwong

Gases

Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas

engine

Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine

Air Ozone O3

Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)

Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr

Butane Nitric Oxide NO3

Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0

Carbon monoxide

Chlorine

Ethane

Ethylene

Helium

Hydrogen

Hydrogen chloride

Hydrogen sulphide

Krypton

Methane

Neon

Nitrogen

Oxygen

Propane

Xenon

0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User

Defined Gas Mixture 0

Oxygen

The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for

example density or viscosity

The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information

classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of

the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They

are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are

important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new

medium

The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The

parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll

to the group header you see on your screen

When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page

A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details

Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page

52 Parameter groups

521 Fluid information

In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible

Fluid name contains the name of the fluid

Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In

many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available

State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many

purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the

steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account

Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made

522 Fluid Description

The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid

Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian

Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid

Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and

syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or

measurement principle

Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is

flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals

Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive

Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for

conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to

50 microScm and more than 50 microScm

Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to

67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo

Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details

Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid

The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user

defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

523 Basic Fluid Parameters

The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be

created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages

Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid

Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid

Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point

Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid

Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas

The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has

an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also

depend on density and viscosity

In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and

sound velocity

524 Constants

This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas

type selected

Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken

from the Unit Defaults page

Molar mass molecular weight of the gas

Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)

Heating value calorific value of the gas

The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine

For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is

used to calculate the sound velocity

525 Typical Operating Conditions

The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions

Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the

mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of

the typical operating conditions are editable

526 Temperature Viscosity

This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description

The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function

of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve

for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range

527 Temperature Density

This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Density density at the support point

The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of

operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for

fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range

528 Temperature Heat capacity

This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point

The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

529 Temperature Vapor pressure

This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid

Temperature temperature at the support point

Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point

The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

5210 Gas mixture

The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture

Gas name of the gas (first field)

Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture

Unit unit for mass fraction

A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are

given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas

Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report

The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is

displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine

only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100

5211 Fluid properties and results

This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed

differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help

function

Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom

display ldquonardquo

The calculated constants are eg

Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions

Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions

Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions

Heating value the calorific value of the fluid

For liquids

Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data

displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page

AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

For solids

a viscosity coefficient for the gas

n viscosity coefficient for gases

5212 Reference values

This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters

displayed differ according to the fluid selected

Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation

Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780

Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780

Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533

Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533

5213 Measuring task

The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of

the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details

opens a window with more information about the approval

5214 Restriction on flowmeters

This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates

that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details

opens a window with more information about the restrictions

53 Setting reference conditions

Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu

There are two possibilities

SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are

- pressure 10132 bar absolute

- temperature 0deg Celsius

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter

US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are

- pressure 14696 psi absolute

- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter

54 Creating a User Defined Fluid

Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the

world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids

1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field

Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid

at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam

2 Now click on the Properties button

3 When the page has opened click on New

4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate

fields which are now open for editing

When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database

Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system

fluids

If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields

will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General

parameters list and you can start again

If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit

button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close

button exits the page without saving the changes

55 Import and Export of Fluids

In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this

the import and export function of the fluid database can be used

In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information

are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want

to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export

button

Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database

To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file

56 Fluid Properties report

The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing

page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results

and reference values

Back to top

6 Compare size and sensor

61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)

When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose

Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the

ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function

When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The

displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter

The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by

clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the

corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table

will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can

be reapplied

The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you

click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed

as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator

can be reapplied

62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)

The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement

principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are

selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator

versions

Back to top

7 Chart page

71 Introduction

The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case

of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available

The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections

72 General Parameters

In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a

repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on

the sizing page

73 Process data

Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference

74 Curves

The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if

offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter

In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be

automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be

activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner

If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report

75 Flow limits

The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range

and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are

different

76 Chart

The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the

pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using

the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional

information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different

curves within the chart

The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons

The content of the printout depends on the options selected

Back to top

8 Order Code

Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order

information

In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring

principle and flowmeter These are as follows

Feature Description Order codeSizing

Definition of ideal

diameter

Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter

relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure

loss

Diameter (Order code

option)

Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and

installation data

Mounting set (Order code

option)

Determination of

insertion depth

Calculation of insertion depth depending on

the selected accessory (t-mass)

Pipe length (Order code

option)

Selection of Material

(Sensor)

Selection and verification of corrosion

consistency

Sensor material Liner

material (Order code

option)

Selection of Process

connection

Selection and verification of pressure and

temperature curve

Process connection (Order

code option)

Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order

code option)

Pressure equipment

directive (PED)

Definition of PED-category depending on the

application and verification of the offered

process connections

Additional approval (Order

code option)

Custody transfer Verification or specification of application

data definition of measuring range

Custody transfer (Order

code option)

Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow

conditioner)

Accessory enclosed or extra

position (Order code

option)

Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow

splitter

Sensor Options (Order code

option)

Evaluation of

measuring range

Calculation of measuring range Calculation

datachart

Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and

accessory where required

Calculation

datachart

Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation

datachart

Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion

database with relevant data

The Order code page consists of different frames

81 Order code

Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically

by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and

Configurator for the valid order codes

82 Order code options

Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration

options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the

order code

The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection

on the Sizing page

The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page

The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options

Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed

these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still

feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning

message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change

83 Extended order code

831 General

Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen

In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables

for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and

activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the

Extended order code feature is used

With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order

code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the

order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator

832 Device parameter data settings

To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is

not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the

ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator

The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo

84 Button center

The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to

proceed with your Sizing process

Configurator

Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order

code

Print Sizing

Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product can be pasted into a project

Back to top

9 Conversion Calculator

Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity

All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by

selecting one out of the drop down lists

The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another

The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all

common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be

recalculated automatically

Back to top

10 Unit Defaults

Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings

menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored

whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session

Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily

for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button

Back to top

11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)

111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)

Disclaimer

The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from

publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and

assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a

minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion

fatigue life

The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different

process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined

Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check

Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled

The content of the database was sourced from

bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)

bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG

bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta

bull Various Internet Links

bull Various Corrosion data bases

The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application

and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process

temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows

Metal

Class Description depth of corrosion per surface

A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)

B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)

C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)

NR not recommended

U unknown

Plastics

Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength

A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear

B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year

lt=30 loss of tensile strength year

C not resistant lt= 50year

lt=50 loss of tensile strength year

NR not recommended

U unknown

Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used

112 Using Corrosion Check

Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion

information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability

of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not

appear at the top of the page

Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the

corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table

The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid

The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion

database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message

is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning

message

The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project

module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing

Back to top

12 Settings (Sizing Flow)

The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the

button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select

Sizing Flow

The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this

function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings

saved are loaded with the Load Default button

Setting Impact when activated

Basic functions

Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply

Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order

classification PED device check code page and printouts

Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits

The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits

No indication of default start data input of data by user

By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually

Advanced functions

Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)

The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles

Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates

My View

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

DP Flow

Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters

Activates said functions

Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP

flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

Back to top

13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines

131 General

Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation

Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)

Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures

132 Fluid engine

General Information

The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the

fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor

Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both

liquids and for gases

Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data

Liquid Calculation

Calculation of the acentric factor Omega

Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure

Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby

bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC

bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database

bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms

bull

The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs

Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature

bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3

bull Alpha in 1K

bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K

bull Toper in K

bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3

The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs

Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature

bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3

bull AL (Viscosity factor)

bull BL (Viscosity factor)

bull Toper in K

bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt

Gas calculation

The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and

pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and

temperature

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull Zoper (Compressibility)

Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)

Toper in K

bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3

Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull c Kappa

Steam Calculation

Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard

The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard

(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use

The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from

bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and

bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa

This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only

That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms

Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator

133 Gas engine

The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the

fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine

The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of

the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted

process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine

Back to top

14 Print Sizing

The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured

and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page

The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens

bull Page format size margins orientation and format

bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter

bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report

Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed

bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo

bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout

Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered

Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page

Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are

possible Please check the help manual of the Project module

Back to top

15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by

manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002

The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection

options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator

takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable

flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and

Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can

switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator

1 Categorisation of the application

2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests

bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this

option

PED Categories

Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered

during the sizing and ordering process They include

bull All ultrasonic flowmeters

bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo

bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water

bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the

static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure

bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume

The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data

danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)

Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements

have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen

device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and

nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case

a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet

All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout

Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)

Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and

temperature are the main parameters

If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required

data in the min nom and max columns

If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the

necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating

Danger posed by the fluid

The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the

case of gases the stability of the gas is also important

The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo

according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)

All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations

belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is

above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture

bull H200-H205 (explosive)

bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)

bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)

bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)

bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)

bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)

bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)

In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in

Danger Symbols below

In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED

fluid groups

rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids

Order code

If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option

this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page

With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family

nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration

If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center

Danger Symbols

Danger symbol Explanation H-rates

C corrosive H 314

Cl chemical instable

E explosive H200-H205

F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223

F flammable H 225-H228

N environmental

dangerous

O oxidizing H271-H272

T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330

H372

T poisonous

Xi irritating

Xn injurious to health

Back to top

16 Online Update

The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator

Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes

and updated system databases with the latest products

The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator

newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the

Settings menu

Page 13: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use

are the ones that are displayed automatically

You can select different units by clicking on the dropdown list (which shows the current units) and selecting a

unit from the list If you select a new unit all numeric values will be converted into the new unit

Calculated Fluid Properties

After the selection of a fluid and a flowmeter the fluid properties are calculated automatically

Applicator Sizing Flow in version 10 or newer contains a fluid engine and a gas engine for calculating the

necessary properties to size a flowmeter A list of supported gases is shown on the Gas Mixture page All other

fluids are calculated by the standard Fluid Engine Check Fluid and gas property engines for details

Density

The density at the operating conditions (min nominal or max) is calculated for the selected fluid but can be

entered manually as well You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves

differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field

For liquids (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the density of the liquid at two reference

temperatures

For gases (Fluid engine) the calculation of density is based on the standard density (dens_Rhozero) ie the

density at 1013 mbar abs and 0degC

For gases (Gas engine) the calculations of density is based on real gas formulas

The values of the reference temperatures and densities or standard density (dens_Rhozero) can be viewed on

the Fluid Properties page (Properties button)

The default density units which are different for liquids and gases are taken from preferences which you have

indicated on the Units page

Please note that for steam (superheated and saturated) there are special formulae which calculate the density

in compliance with the standard IAPWS

Caution other unlocked fields which depend on density (eg flowrate and viscosity) are recalculated when

you change the density value (Recalculations based on temperature or pressure are generally taken for

granted whereas recalculations based on density are often overseen)

Density normal (Gas applications)

The normal density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The

reference conditions are defined on the Units page

When manually entering the normal density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip) Normal

density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the Settings menu

Density standard (Gas applications)

The standard density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The

reference conditions are defined on the Units page

When manually entering the standard density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip)

Standard density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the settings menu

Molar mass

Molar mass is the sum of all atomic masses of all atoms within a molecule The unit is kgkmol (lbkmol)

Z-factor

The Z-factor is only displayed if the selected fluid is a gas It represents the compressibility for real gases The

factor has different impacts on the fluid and gas engine

Fluid Engine

The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes as long as the field is not locked

Changing the Z-Factor causes a recalculation of Density and Viscosity (depending on the unit) if Density and

Viscosity were not locked before

Gas engine

The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes The Z-factor is only an output value

and cannot influence any dimension if it is changed manually

Viscosity

Viscosity at the operating temperature (nominal) is calculated for the selected fluid but it can also be entered

manually You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the

system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct viscosity at the operating temperature in

this input field

The liquid viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is based on the viscosity of a liquid at two reference

temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)

The gas viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is calculated based on the viscosity of the gas at two reference

temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)

The gas viscosity viscosity (Gas engine) is based on real gas formulas

The default viscosity units are taken from the Units page

Vapor pressure

The Vapor pressure field is displayed only if you calculate a liquid It indicates the absolute pressure which is

necessary to transform the liquid into a gas at the minimum nominal and maximum operating temperatures

You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the system fluid

chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field If the selected fluid is a gas

these fields are irrelevant and the compressibility factor Z for operating temperature (nominal) appears

instead

The units used for Vapor Pressure are related to the units selected for pressure Since this is a pressure

difference the concepts of relative gauge pressure do not apply

Sound Velocity

The Sound Velocity is only displayed for flowmeters if this dimension is important especially for calculating the

permitted measuring range of Coriolis mass flowmeters and for calculating the distance between the sensors

of an ultrasonic flowmeter This value can be changed and is recalculated whenever the temperature is

changed as long as the field is not locked You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid

behaves differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this

input field

Caution Please click on the Reset-button on the Sizing page if you have changed fluid properties (eg

density vapor pressure viscosity) before you start a new sizing

How to lock applicator data

When setting the fluid properties it is important to understand the concept of locking Initially all fluid

properties are unlocked and Applicator attempts to make a reasonable guess for the operating conditions

using default values for some conditions and calculating others When you set a value it will be locked

automatically The program uses your value from then on ignoring its defaults and suspending its calculations

All values which you have generated yourself are marked in blue

If you change the determined intermediate values like density viscosity eg or the results they will be printed

in italics so that you can easily recognize them

Data locking examples

Immediately after the selection of a medium and a measuring instrument Applicator starts the calculation of

the meter by using the information about operating conditions entered Usually the user herhimself adjusts

the process conditions ndash eg flow pressure and temperature- to the application The density viscosity sound

velocity vapor pressure and Z-factor are calculated by Applicator

If for example you change the temperature Applicator will recalculate the gas density value if you have not

locked the respective field However if you set the density (thereby locking it) and then change the

temperature the density will not be recalculated The program uses the density value which you have entered

independent of the temperature

Any unlocked field changes automatically if you change other operating conditions upon which it depends

Any locked field remains fixed even if you change other operating conditions Selecting a new fluid unlocks all

operating conditions except requested flow

Caution If you make a new fluid selection and lock it the fluid data will be overwritten with the default fluid

data If you make a new flowmeter selection the locked fluid data and the sensor data remain unchanged

provided this is technically reasonable

23 Sensor Pipe

This section specifies the requirements regarding the pipe into which the flowmeter is to be built

Depending on the flowmeter different inputs are necessary to describe the existing pipe location or the

requested sensor requirements Different possibilities to select the pipe material or sensor pipe material to

input pipe thickness liner thickness sound velocity of material outer diameter circumference or the input of

the inner diameter help to specify the pipe geometry Additionally rectangular ducts which are described

with the inner duct height duct width and duct thickness are available for thermal and differential pressure

flowmeters

After entering the internal diameter Applicator calculates the nearest available meter size according to the

selected connection standard Your specified inner diameter is used for further calculations

Caution Applicator takes the internal diameter and equates it with the meter or pipe size The checkbox for

Pipe size ne meter size offers the possibility of an indication and sizing of products with integrated reducers in

addition to common Prowirl flowmeters

Pipe dimension table for DP-Flow Clamp-On and Insertion meters

There is the possibility to choose between different pipe standards in order to select the correct pipe

dimension which enables a proper sizing There are 36 default values for several pipe standards available

including

bull DIN (EN 10220 24581 2462 2440 etc)

bull ASME (B3610B3619)

bull AWWA Cast Iron Class A- H AWWA Ductile Iron Class 50-56

bull One standard for free input select Applicator default valuesmanual input

After choosing the desired pipe standard the pipe dimension window opens Depending on the preferred pipe

size and pressure rating possible pipe dimensions are offered

Connection standard

Shows all available connection standards for the selected flowmeter (eg ENDIN) By choosing a category the

corresponding process connections will be listed below

Material (sensor)

Depending on the flowmeter Applicator offers different sensor materials The available materials can depend

on the diameter and process connection Material compatibility of the sensor material will be checked against

the integrated corrosion database A warning message will be displayed if compatibility issues exist between

the fluid and sensor material

Process connection

Applicator also selects the required minimum pressure rating according to the operating pressure and

temperature values This field is displayed as a dropdown list which offers all available pressure ratings for the

selected flowmeter and meter size You can change the suggested pressure rating or process connection but

if you select a lower pressure rating than the suggested one a warning will be displayed

Below Process connection you can find the Pressure rating button Clicking on it will open a window which

displays a diagram for the selected process connection the temperature-pressure derating curve of a selected

process connection and also operation points (max pressure at min and max temperature and the nominal

temperaturepressure point)

Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If

additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case

whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will

automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to

make the user aware of the change

24 Meter Operating Range

The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values

If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The

measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range

For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible

For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow

Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is

possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly

differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour

25 Calculated Results

This section shows the calculated results of sizing

Requested flow

Indicates the values used for the calculation

Flow velocity

Flow velocity max

Pressure Loss

An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss

calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This

group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be

marginal and without any influence on your process

Velocity (meas tube)

This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation

refers to the nominal density

Measured Error Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the

flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

Measured Error spec Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding

requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration

Measured Error Mass

These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for

Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the

corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead

of a value

Measured Error spec Mass

Reynolds No

The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further

sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions

Frequency

This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is

proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity

PED results

Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please

note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window

Meter size

This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually

adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have

done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is

locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal

button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This

means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are

saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter

The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters

Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will

also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements

26 Warnings

Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the

green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is

pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or

expanded using the arrow on the right

Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next

Endress+Hauser Sales Centre

27 Button center

A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of

the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process

Print Sizing

Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports

Sizing Energy

Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the

Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow

Configurator

Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code

Add to shop basket

Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This

button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the

Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline

version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when

Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Reset

This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results

Back to top

3 Custody transfer

Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of

among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals

If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection

- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out

According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different

process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature

are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task

page

In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the

approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum

turn down is also checked

Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your

entries

The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval

As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB

7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the

max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated

With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature

The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the

ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit

values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter

measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures

the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the

warning messages

Back to top

4 Accessories

There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories

page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)

In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg

mounting set 41) are executed

41 Accessories page

Example mounting set

Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations

Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)

42 Activating a checkbox

Example Flow conditioner

For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are

automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and

process connection can be selected

43 Accessories within the order code

The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving

process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed

Applicator versions)

Back to top

5 Fluid Properties page

51 General description

Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page

This view supports the following types of fluids

Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under

ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page

The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases

Liquids

Media type Standardprocess

Fluids not 100 water (example 0

Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)

Support points (linear interpolation)

Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97

Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-

Gas (Air) UDG)

Redlich-Kwong

Gases

Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas

engine

Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine

Air Ozone O3

Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)

Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr

Butane Nitric Oxide NO3

Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0

Carbon monoxide

Chlorine

Ethane

Ethylene

Helium

Hydrogen

Hydrogen chloride

Hydrogen sulphide

Krypton

Methane

Neon

Nitrogen

Oxygen

Propane

Xenon

0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User

Defined Gas Mixture 0

Oxygen

The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for

example density or viscosity

The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information

classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of

the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They

are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are

important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new

medium

The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The

parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll

to the group header you see on your screen

When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page

A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details

Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page

52 Parameter groups

521 Fluid information

In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible

Fluid name contains the name of the fluid

Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In

many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available

State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many

purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the

steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account

Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made

522 Fluid Description

The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid

Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian

Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid

Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and

syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or

measurement principle

Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is

flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals

Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive

Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for

conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to

50 microScm and more than 50 microScm

Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to

67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo

Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details

Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid

The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user

defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

523 Basic Fluid Parameters

The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be

created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages

Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid

Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid

Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point

Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid

Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas

The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has

an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also

depend on density and viscosity

In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and

sound velocity

524 Constants

This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas

type selected

Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken

from the Unit Defaults page

Molar mass molecular weight of the gas

Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)

Heating value calorific value of the gas

The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine

For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is

used to calculate the sound velocity

525 Typical Operating Conditions

The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions

Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the

mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of

the typical operating conditions are editable

526 Temperature Viscosity

This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description

The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function

of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve

for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range

527 Temperature Density

This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Density density at the support point

The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of

operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for

fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range

528 Temperature Heat capacity

This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point

The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

529 Temperature Vapor pressure

This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid

Temperature temperature at the support point

Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point

The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

5210 Gas mixture

The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture

Gas name of the gas (first field)

Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture

Unit unit for mass fraction

A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are

given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas

Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report

The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is

displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine

only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100

5211 Fluid properties and results

This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed

differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help

function

Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom

display ldquonardquo

The calculated constants are eg

Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions

Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions

Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions

Heating value the calorific value of the fluid

For liquids

Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data

displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page

AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

For solids

a viscosity coefficient for the gas

n viscosity coefficient for gases

5212 Reference values

This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters

displayed differ according to the fluid selected

Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation

Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780

Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780

Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533

Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533

5213 Measuring task

The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of

the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details

opens a window with more information about the approval

5214 Restriction on flowmeters

This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates

that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details

opens a window with more information about the restrictions

53 Setting reference conditions

Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu

There are two possibilities

SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are

- pressure 10132 bar absolute

- temperature 0deg Celsius

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter

US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are

- pressure 14696 psi absolute

- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter

54 Creating a User Defined Fluid

Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the

world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids

1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field

Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid

at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam

2 Now click on the Properties button

3 When the page has opened click on New

4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate

fields which are now open for editing

When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database

Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system

fluids

If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields

will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General

parameters list and you can start again

If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit

button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close

button exits the page without saving the changes

55 Import and Export of Fluids

In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this

the import and export function of the fluid database can be used

In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information

are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want

to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export

button

Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database

To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file

56 Fluid Properties report

The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing

page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results

and reference values

Back to top

6 Compare size and sensor

61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)

When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose

Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the

ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function

When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The

displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter

The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by

clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the

corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table

will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can

be reapplied

The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you

click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed

as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator

can be reapplied

62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)

The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement

principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are

selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator

versions

Back to top

7 Chart page

71 Introduction

The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case

of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available

The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections

72 General Parameters

In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a

repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on

the sizing page

73 Process data

Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference

74 Curves

The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if

offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter

In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be

automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be

activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner

If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report

75 Flow limits

The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range

and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are

different

76 Chart

The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the

pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using

the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional

information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different

curves within the chart

The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons

The content of the printout depends on the options selected

Back to top

8 Order Code

Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order

information

In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring

principle and flowmeter These are as follows

Feature Description Order codeSizing

Definition of ideal

diameter

Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter

relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure

loss

Diameter (Order code

option)

Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and

installation data

Mounting set (Order code

option)

Determination of

insertion depth

Calculation of insertion depth depending on

the selected accessory (t-mass)

Pipe length (Order code

option)

Selection of Material

(Sensor)

Selection and verification of corrosion

consistency

Sensor material Liner

material (Order code

option)

Selection of Process

connection

Selection and verification of pressure and

temperature curve

Process connection (Order

code option)

Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order

code option)

Pressure equipment

directive (PED)

Definition of PED-category depending on the

application and verification of the offered

process connections

Additional approval (Order

code option)

Custody transfer Verification or specification of application

data definition of measuring range

Custody transfer (Order

code option)

Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow

conditioner)

Accessory enclosed or extra

position (Order code

option)

Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow

splitter

Sensor Options (Order code

option)

Evaluation of

measuring range

Calculation of measuring range Calculation

datachart

Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and

accessory where required

Calculation

datachart

Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation

datachart

Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion

database with relevant data

The Order code page consists of different frames

81 Order code

Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically

by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and

Configurator for the valid order codes

82 Order code options

Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration

options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the

order code

The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection

on the Sizing page

The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page

The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options

Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed

these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still

feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning

message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change

83 Extended order code

831 General

Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen

In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables

for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and

activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the

Extended order code feature is used

With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order

code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the

order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator

832 Device parameter data settings

To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is

not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the

ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator

The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo

84 Button center

The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to

proceed with your Sizing process

Configurator

Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order

code

Print Sizing

Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product can be pasted into a project

Back to top

9 Conversion Calculator

Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity

All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by

selecting one out of the drop down lists

The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another

The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all

common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be

recalculated automatically

Back to top

10 Unit Defaults

Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings

menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored

whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session

Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily

for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button

Back to top

11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)

111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)

Disclaimer

The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from

publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and

assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a

minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion

fatigue life

The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different

process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined

Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check

Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled

The content of the database was sourced from

bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)

bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG

bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta

bull Various Internet Links

bull Various Corrosion data bases

The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application

and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process

temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows

Metal

Class Description depth of corrosion per surface

A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)

B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)

C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)

NR not recommended

U unknown

Plastics

Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength

A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear

B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year

lt=30 loss of tensile strength year

C not resistant lt= 50year

lt=50 loss of tensile strength year

NR not recommended

U unknown

Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used

112 Using Corrosion Check

Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion

information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability

of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not

appear at the top of the page

Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the

corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table

The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid

The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion

database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message

is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning

message

The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project

module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing

Back to top

12 Settings (Sizing Flow)

The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the

button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select

Sizing Flow

The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this

function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings

saved are loaded with the Load Default button

Setting Impact when activated

Basic functions

Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply

Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order

classification PED device check code page and printouts

Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits

The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits

No indication of default start data input of data by user

By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually

Advanced functions

Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)

The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles

Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates

My View

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

DP Flow

Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters

Activates said functions

Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP

flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

Back to top

13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines

131 General

Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation

Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)

Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures

132 Fluid engine

General Information

The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the

fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor

Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both

liquids and for gases

Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data

Liquid Calculation

Calculation of the acentric factor Omega

Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure

Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby

bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC

bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database

bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms

bull

The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs

Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature

bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3

bull Alpha in 1K

bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K

bull Toper in K

bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3

The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs

Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature

bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3

bull AL (Viscosity factor)

bull BL (Viscosity factor)

bull Toper in K

bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt

Gas calculation

The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and

pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and

temperature

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull Zoper (Compressibility)

Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)

Toper in K

bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3

Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull c Kappa

Steam Calculation

Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard

The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard

(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use

The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from

bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and

bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa

This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only

That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms

Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator

133 Gas engine

The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the

fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine

The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of

the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted

process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine

Back to top

14 Print Sizing

The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured

and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page

The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens

bull Page format size margins orientation and format

bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter

bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report

Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed

bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo

bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout

Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered

Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page

Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are

possible Please check the help manual of the Project module

Back to top

15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by

manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002

The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection

options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator

takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable

flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and

Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can

switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator

1 Categorisation of the application

2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests

bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this

option

PED Categories

Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered

during the sizing and ordering process They include

bull All ultrasonic flowmeters

bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo

bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water

bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the

static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure

bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume

The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data

danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)

Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements

have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen

device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and

nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case

a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet

All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout

Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)

Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and

temperature are the main parameters

If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required

data in the min nom and max columns

If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the

necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating

Danger posed by the fluid

The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the

case of gases the stability of the gas is also important

The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo

according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)

All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations

belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is

above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture

bull H200-H205 (explosive)

bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)

bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)

bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)

bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)

bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)

bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)

In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in

Danger Symbols below

In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED

fluid groups

rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids

Order code

If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option

this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page

With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family

nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration

If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center

Danger Symbols

Danger symbol Explanation H-rates

C corrosive H 314

Cl chemical instable

E explosive H200-H205

F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223

F flammable H 225-H228

N environmental

dangerous

O oxidizing H271-H272

T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330

H372

T poisonous

Xi irritating

Xn injurious to health

Back to top

16 Online Update

The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator

Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes

and updated system databases with the latest products

The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator

newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the

Settings menu

Page 14: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use

Density normal (Gas applications)

The normal density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The

reference conditions are defined on the Units page

When manually entering the normal density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip) Normal

density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the Settings menu

Density standard (Gas applications)

The standard density is a fluid-dependent property calculated using the normal reference conditions The

reference conditions are defined on the Units page

When manually entering the standard density other dependent values change (eg density Z-factorhellip)

Standard density is displayed by selecting ldquoSI - International system of unitsrdquo within the settings menu

Molar mass

Molar mass is the sum of all atomic masses of all atoms within a molecule The unit is kgkmol (lbkmol)

Z-factor

The Z-factor is only displayed if the selected fluid is a gas It represents the compressibility for real gases The

factor has different impacts on the fluid and gas engine

Fluid Engine

The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes as long as the field is not locked

Changing the Z-Factor causes a recalculation of Density and Viscosity (depending on the unit) if Density and

Viscosity were not locked before

Gas engine

The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes The Z-factor is only an output value

and cannot influence any dimension if it is changed manually

Viscosity

Viscosity at the operating temperature (nominal) is calculated for the selected fluid but it can also be entered

manually You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the

system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct viscosity at the operating temperature in

this input field

The liquid viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is based on the viscosity of a liquid at two reference

temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)

The gas viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is calculated based on the viscosity of the gas at two reference

temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)

The gas viscosity viscosity (Gas engine) is based on real gas formulas

The default viscosity units are taken from the Units page

Vapor pressure

The Vapor pressure field is displayed only if you calculate a liquid It indicates the absolute pressure which is

necessary to transform the liquid into a gas at the minimum nominal and maximum operating temperatures

You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the system fluid

chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field If the selected fluid is a gas

these fields are irrelevant and the compressibility factor Z for operating temperature (nominal) appears

instead

The units used for Vapor Pressure are related to the units selected for pressure Since this is a pressure

difference the concepts of relative gauge pressure do not apply

Sound Velocity

The Sound Velocity is only displayed for flowmeters if this dimension is important especially for calculating the

permitted measuring range of Coriolis mass flowmeters and for calculating the distance between the sensors

of an ultrasonic flowmeter This value can be changed and is recalculated whenever the temperature is

changed as long as the field is not locked You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid

behaves differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this

input field

Caution Please click on the Reset-button on the Sizing page if you have changed fluid properties (eg

density vapor pressure viscosity) before you start a new sizing

How to lock applicator data

When setting the fluid properties it is important to understand the concept of locking Initially all fluid

properties are unlocked and Applicator attempts to make a reasonable guess for the operating conditions

using default values for some conditions and calculating others When you set a value it will be locked

automatically The program uses your value from then on ignoring its defaults and suspending its calculations

All values which you have generated yourself are marked in blue

If you change the determined intermediate values like density viscosity eg or the results they will be printed

in italics so that you can easily recognize them

Data locking examples

Immediately after the selection of a medium and a measuring instrument Applicator starts the calculation of

the meter by using the information about operating conditions entered Usually the user herhimself adjusts

the process conditions ndash eg flow pressure and temperature- to the application The density viscosity sound

velocity vapor pressure and Z-factor are calculated by Applicator

If for example you change the temperature Applicator will recalculate the gas density value if you have not

locked the respective field However if you set the density (thereby locking it) and then change the

temperature the density will not be recalculated The program uses the density value which you have entered

independent of the temperature

Any unlocked field changes automatically if you change other operating conditions upon which it depends

Any locked field remains fixed even if you change other operating conditions Selecting a new fluid unlocks all

operating conditions except requested flow

Caution If you make a new fluid selection and lock it the fluid data will be overwritten with the default fluid

data If you make a new flowmeter selection the locked fluid data and the sensor data remain unchanged

provided this is technically reasonable

23 Sensor Pipe

This section specifies the requirements regarding the pipe into which the flowmeter is to be built

Depending on the flowmeter different inputs are necessary to describe the existing pipe location or the

requested sensor requirements Different possibilities to select the pipe material or sensor pipe material to

input pipe thickness liner thickness sound velocity of material outer diameter circumference or the input of

the inner diameter help to specify the pipe geometry Additionally rectangular ducts which are described

with the inner duct height duct width and duct thickness are available for thermal and differential pressure

flowmeters

After entering the internal diameter Applicator calculates the nearest available meter size according to the

selected connection standard Your specified inner diameter is used for further calculations

Caution Applicator takes the internal diameter and equates it with the meter or pipe size The checkbox for

Pipe size ne meter size offers the possibility of an indication and sizing of products with integrated reducers in

addition to common Prowirl flowmeters

Pipe dimension table for DP-Flow Clamp-On and Insertion meters

There is the possibility to choose between different pipe standards in order to select the correct pipe

dimension which enables a proper sizing There are 36 default values for several pipe standards available

including

bull DIN (EN 10220 24581 2462 2440 etc)

bull ASME (B3610B3619)

bull AWWA Cast Iron Class A- H AWWA Ductile Iron Class 50-56

bull One standard for free input select Applicator default valuesmanual input

After choosing the desired pipe standard the pipe dimension window opens Depending on the preferred pipe

size and pressure rating possible pipe dimensions are offered

Connection standard

Shows all available connection standards for the selected flowmeter (eg ENDIN) By choosing a category the

corresponding process connections will be listed below

Material (sensor)

Depending on the flowmeter Applicator offers different sensor materials The available materials can depend

on the diameter and process connection Material compatibility of the sensor material will be checked against

the integrated corrosion database A warning message will be displayed if compatibility issues exist between

the fluid and sensor material

Process connection

Applicator also selects the required minimum pressure rating according to the operating pressure and

temperature values This field is displayed as a dropdown list which offers all available pressure ratings for the

selected flowmeter and meter size You can change the suggested pressure rating or process connection but

if you select a lower pressure rating than the suggested one a warning will be displayed

Below Process connection you can find the Pressure rating button Clicking on it will open a window which

displays a diagram for the selected process connection the temperature-pressure derating curve of a selected

process connection and also operation points (max pressure at min and max temperature and the nominal

temperaturepressure point)

Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If

additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case

whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will

automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to

make the user aware of the change

24 Meter Operating Range

The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values

If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The

measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range

For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible

For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow

Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is

possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly

differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour

25 Calculated Results

This section shows the calculated results of sizing

Requested flow

Indicates the values used for the calculation

Flow velocity

Flow velocity max

Pressure Loss

An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss

calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This

group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be

marginal and without any influence on your process

Velocity (meas tube)

This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation

refers to the nominal density

Measured Error Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the

flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

Measured Error spec Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding

requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration

Measured Error Mass

These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for

Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the

corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead

of a value

Measured Error spec Mass

Reynolds No

The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further

sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions

Frequency

This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is

proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity

PED results

Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please

note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window

Meter size

This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually

adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have

done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is

locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal

button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This

means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are

saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter

The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters

Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will

also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements

26 Warnings

Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the

green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is

pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or

expanded using the arrow on the right

Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next

Endress+Hauser Sales Centre

27 Button center

A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of

the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process

Print Sizing

Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports

Sizing Energy

Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the

Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow

Configurator

Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code

Add to shop basket

Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This

button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the

Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline

version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when

Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Reset

This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results

Back to top

3 Custody transfer

Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of

among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals

If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection

- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out

According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different

process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature

are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task

page

In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the

approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum

turn down is also checked

Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your

entries

The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval

As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB

7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the

max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated

With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature

The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the

ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit

values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter

measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures

the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the

warning messages

Back to top

4 Accessories

There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories

page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)

In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg

mounting set 41) are executed

41 Accessories page

Example mounting set

Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations

Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)

42 Activating a checkbox

Example Flow conditioner

For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are

automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and

process connection can be selected

43 Accessories within the order code

The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving

process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed

Applicator versions)

Back to top

5 Fluid Properties page

51 General description

Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page

This view supports the following types of fluids

Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under

ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page

The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases

Liquids

Media type Standardprocess

Fluids not 100 water (example 0

Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)

Support points (linear interpolation)

Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97

Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-

Gas (Air) UDG)

Redlich-Kwong

Gases

Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas

engine

Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine

Air Ozone O3

Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)

Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr

Butane Nitric Oxide NO3

Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0

Carbon monoxide

Chlorine

Ethane

Ethylene

Helium

Hydrogen

Hydrogen chloride

Hydrogen sulphide

Krypton

Methane

Neon

Nitrogen

Oxygen

Propane

Xenon

0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User

Defined Gas Mixture 0

Oxygen

The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for

example density or viscosity

The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information

classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of

the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They

are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are

important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new

medium

The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The

parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll

to the group header you see on your screen

When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page

A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details

Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page

52 Parameter groups

521 Fluid information

In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible

Fluid name contains the name of the fluid

Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In

many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available

State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many

purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the

steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account

Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made

522 Fluid Description

The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid

Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian

Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid

Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and

syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or

measurement principle

Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is

flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals

Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive

Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for

conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to

50 microScm and more than 50 microScm

Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to

67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo

Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details

Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid

The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user

defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

523 Basic Fluid Parameters

The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be

created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages

Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid

Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid

Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point

Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid

Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas

The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has

an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also

depend on density and viscosity

In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and

sound velocity

524 Constants

This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas

type selected

Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken

from the Unit Defaults page

Molar mass molecular weight of the gas

Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)

Heating value calorific value of the gas

The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine

For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is

used to calculate the sound velocity

525 Typical Operating Conditions

The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions

Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the

mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of

the typical operating conditions are editable

526 Temperature Viscosity

This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description

The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function

of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve

for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range

527 Temperature Density

This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Density density at the support point

The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of

operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for

fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range

528 Temperature Heat capacity

This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point

The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

529 Temperature Vapor pressure

This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid

Temperature temperature at the support point

Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point

The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

5210 Gas mixture

The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture

Gas name of the gas (first field)

Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture

Unit unit for mass fraction

A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are

given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas

Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report

The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is

displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine

only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100

5211 Fluid properties and results

This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed

differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help

function

Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom

display ldquonardquo

The calculated constants are eg

Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions

Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions

Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions

Heating value the calorific value of the fluid

For liquids

Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data

displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page

AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

For solids

a viscosity coefficient for the gas

n viscosity coefficient for gases

5212 Reference values

This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters

displayed differ according to the fluid selected

Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation

Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780

Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780

Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533

Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533

5213 Measuring task

The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of

the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details

opens a window with more information about the approval

5214 Restriction on flowmeters

This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates

that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details

opens a window with more information about the restrictions

53 Setting reference conditions

Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu

There are two possibilities

SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are

- pressure 10132 bar absolute

- temperature 0deg Celsius

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter

US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are

- pressure 14696 psi absolute

- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter

54 Creating a User Defined Fluid

Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the

world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids

1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field

Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid

at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam

2 Now click on the Properties button

3 When the page has opened click on New

4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate

fields which are now open for editing

When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database

Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system

fluids

If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields

will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General

parameters list and you can start again

If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit

button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close

button exits the page without saving the changes

55 Import and Export of Fluids

In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this

the import and export function of the fluid database can be used

In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information

are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want

to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export

button

Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database

To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file

56 Fluid Properties report

The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing

page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results

and reference values

Back to top

6 Compare size and sensor

61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)

When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose

Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the

ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function

When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The

displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter

The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by

clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the

corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table

will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can

be reapplied

The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you

click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed

as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator

can be reapplied

62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)

The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement

principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are

selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator

versions

Back to top

7 Chart page

71 Introduction

The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case

of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available

The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections

72 General Parameters

In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a

repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on

the sizing page

73 Process data

Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference

74 Curves

The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if

offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter

In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be

automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be

activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner

If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report

75 Flow limits

The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range

and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are

different

76 Chart

The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the

pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using

the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional

information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different

curves within the chart

The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons

The content of the printout depends on the options selected

Back to top

8 Order Code

Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order

information

In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring

principle and flowmeter These are as follows

Feature Description Order codeSizing

Definition of ideal

diameter

Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter

relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure

loss

Diameter (Order code

option)

Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and

installation data

Mounting set (Order code

option)

Determination of

insertion depth

Calculation of insertion depth depending on

the selected accessory (t-mass)

Pipe length (Order code

option)

Selection of Material

(Sensor)

Selection and verification of corrosion

consistency

Sensor material Liner

material (Order code

option)

Selection of Process

connection

Selection and verification of pressure and

temperature curve

Process connection (Order

code option)

Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order

code option)

Pressure equipment

directive (PED)

Definition of PED-category depending on the

application and verification of the offered

process connections

Additional approval (Order

code option)

Custody transfer Verification or specification of application

data definition of measuring range

Custody transfer (Order

code option)

Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow

conditioner)

Accessory enclosed or extra

position (Order code

option)

Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow

splitter

Sensor Options (Order code

option)

Evaluation of

measuring range

Calculation of measuring range Calculation

datachart

Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and

accessory where required

Calculation

datachart

Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation

datachart

Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion

database with relevant data

The Order code page consists of different frames

81 Order code

Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically

by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and

Configurator for the valid order codes

82 Order code options

Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration

options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the

order code

The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection

on the Sizing page

The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page

The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options

Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed

these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still

feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning

message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change

83 Extended order code

831 General

Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen

In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables

for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and

activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the

Extended order code feature is used

With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order

code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the

order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator

832 Device parameter data settings

To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is

not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the

ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator

The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo

84 Button center

The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to

proceed with your Sizing process

Configurator

Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order

code

Print Sizing

Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product can be pasted into a project

Back to top

9 Conversion Calculator

Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity

All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by

selecting one out of the drop down lists

The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another

The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all

common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be

recalculated automatically

Back to top

10 Unit Defaults

Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings

menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored

whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session

Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily

for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button

Back to top

11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)

111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)

Disclaimer

The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from

publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and

assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a

minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion

fatigue life

The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different

process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined

Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check

Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled

The content of the database was sourced from

bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)

bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG

bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta

bull Various Internet Links

bull Various Corrosion data bases

The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application

and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process

temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows

Metal

Class Description depth of corrosion per surface

A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)

B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)

C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)

NR not recommended

U unknown

Plastics

Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength

A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear

B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year

lt=30 loss of tensile strength year

C not resistant lt= 50year

lt=50 loss of tensile strength year

NR not recommended

U unknown

Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used

112 Using Corrosion Check

Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion

information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability

of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not

appear at the top of the page

Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the

corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table

The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid

The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion

database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message

is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning

message

The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project

module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing

Back to top

12 Settings (Sizing Flow)

The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the

button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select

Sizing Flow

The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this

function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings

saved are loaded with the Load Default button

Setting Impact when activated

Basic functions

Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply

Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order

classification PED device check code page and printouts

Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits

The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits

No indication of default start data input of data by user

By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually

Advanced functions

Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)

The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles

Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates

My View

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

DP Flow

Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters

Activates said functions

Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP

flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

Back to top

13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines

131 General

Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation

Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)

Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures

132 Fluid engine

General Information

The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the

fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor

Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both

liquids and for gases

Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data

Liquid Calculation

Calculation of the acentric factor Omega

Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure

Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby

bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC

bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database

bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms

bull

The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs

Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature

bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3

bull Alpha in 1K

bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K

bull Toper in K

bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3

The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs

Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature

bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3

bull AL (Viscosity factor)

bull BL (Viscosity factor)

bull Toper in K

bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt

Gas calculation

The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and

pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and

temperature

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull Zoper (Compressibility)

Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)

Toper in K

bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3

Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull c Kappa

Steam Calculation

Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard

The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard

(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use

The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from

bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and

bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa

This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only

That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms

Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator

133 Gas engine

The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the

fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine

The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of

the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted

process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine

Back to top

14 Print Sizing

The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured

and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page

The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens

bull Page format size margins orientation and format

bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter

bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report

Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed

bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo

bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout

Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered

Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page

Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are

possible Please check the help manual of the Project module

Back to top

15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by

manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002

The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection

options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator

takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable

flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and

Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can

switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator

1 Categorisation of the application

2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests

bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this

option

PED Categories

Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered

during the sizing and ordering process They include

bull All ultrasonic flowmeters

bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo

bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water

bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the

static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure

bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume

The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data

danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)

Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements

have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen

device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and

nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case

a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet

All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout

Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)

Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and

temperature are the main parameters

If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required

data in the min nom and max columns

If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the

necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating

Danger posed by the fluid

The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the

case of gases the stability of the gas is also important

The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo

according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)

All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations

belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is

above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture

bull H200-H205 (explosive)

bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)

bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)

bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)

bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)

bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)

bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)

In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in

Danger Symbols below

In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED

fluid groups

rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids

Order code

If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option

this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page

With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family

nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration

If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center

Danger Symbols

Danger symbol Explanation H-rates

C corrosive H 314

Cl chemical instable

E explosive H200-H205

F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223

F flammable H 225-H228

N environmental

dangerous

O oxidizing H271-H272

T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330

H372

T poisonous

Xi irritating

Xn injurious to health

Back to top

16 Online Update

The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator

Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes

and updated system databases with the latest products

The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator

newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the

Settings menu

Page 15: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use

Gas engine

The Z-factor is recalculated when Temperature andor Pressure changes The Z-factor is only an output value

and cannot influence any dimension if it is changed manually

Viscosity

Viscosity at the operating temperature (nominal) is calculated for the selected fluid but it can also be entered

manually You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the

system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct viscosity at the operating temperature in

this input field

The liquid viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is based on the viscosity of a liquid at two reference

temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)

The gas viscosity calculation (Fluid engine) is calculated based on the viscosity of the gas at two reference

temperatures (found in Fluid Properties)

The gas viscosity viscosity (Gas engine) is based on real gas formulas

The default viscosity units are taken from the Units page

Vapor pressure

The Vapor pressure field is displayed only if you calculate a liquid It indicates the absolute pressure which is

necessary to transform the liquid into a gas at the minimum nominal and maximum operating temperatures

You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid behaves differently from the system fluid

chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this input field If the selected fluid is a gas

these fields are irrelevant and the compressibility factor Z for operating temperature (nominal) appears

instead

The units used for Vapor Pressure are related to the units selected for pressure Since this is a pressure

difference the concepts of relative gauge pressure do not apply

Sound Velocity

The Sound Velocity is only displayed for flowmeters if this dimension is important especially for calculating the

permitted measuring range of Coriolis mass flowmeters and for calculating the distance between the sensors

of an ultrasonic flowmeter This value can be changed and is recalculated whenever the temperature is

changed as long as the field is not locked You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid

behaves differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this

input field

Caution Please click on the Reset-button on the Sizing page if you have changed fluid properties (eg

density vapor pressure viscosity) before you start a new sizing

How to lock applicator data

When setting the fluid properties it is important to understand the concept of locking Initially all fluid

properties are unlocked and Applicator attempts to make a reasonable guess for the operating conditions

using default values for some conditions and calculating others When you set a value it will be locked

automatically The program uses your value from then on ignoring its defaults and suspending its calculations

All values which you have generated yourself are marked in blue

If you change the determined intermediate values like density viscosity eg or the results they will be printed

in italics so that you can easily recognize them

Data locking examples

Immediately after the selection of a medium and a measuring instrument Applicator starts the calculation of

the meter by using the information about operating conditions entered Usually the user herhimself adjusts

the process conditions ndash eg flow pressure and temperature- to the application The density viscosity sound

velocity vapor pressure and Z-factor are calculated by Applicator

If for example you change the temperature Applicator will recalculate the gas density value if you have not

locked the respective field However if you set the density (thereby locking it) and then change the

temperature the density will not be recalculated The program uses the density value which you have entered

independent of the temperature

Any unlocked field changes automatically if you change other operating conditions upon which it depends

Any locked field remains fixed even if you change other operating conditions Selecting a new fluid unlocks all

operating conditions except requested flow

Caution If you make a new fluid selection and lock it the fluid data will be overwritten with the default fluid

data If you make a new flowmeter selection the locked fluid data and the sensor data remain unchanged

provided this is technically reasonable

23 Sensor Pipe

This section specifies the requirements regarding the pipe into which the flowmeter is to be built

Depending on the flowmeter different inputs are necessary to describe the existing pipe location or the

requested sensor requirements Different possibilities to select the pipe material or sensor pipe material to

input pipe thickness liner thickness sound velocity of material outer diameter circumference or the input of

the inner diameter help to specify the pipe geometry Additionally rectangular ducts which are described

with the inner duct height duct width and duct thickness are available for thermal and differential pressure

flowmeters

After entering the internal diameter Applicator calculates the nearest available meter size according to the

selected connection standard Your specified inner diameter is used for further calculations

Caution Applicator takes the internal diameter and equates it with the meter or pipe size The checkbox for

Pipe size ne meter size offers the possibility of an indication and sizing of products with integrated reducers in

addition to common Prowirl flowmeters

Pipe dimension table for DP-Flow Clamp-On and Insertion meters

There is the possibility to choose between different pipe standards in order to select the correct pipe

dimension which enables a proper sizing There are 36 default values for several pipe standards available

including

bull DIN (EN 10220 24581 2462 2440 etc)

bull ASME (B3610B3619)

bull AWWA Cast Iron Class A- H AWWA Ductile Iron Class 50-56

bull One standard for free input select Applicator default valuesmanual input

After choosing the desired pipe standard the pipe dimension window opens Depending on the preferred pipe

size and pressure rating possible pipe dimensions are offered

Connection standard

Shows all available connection standards for the selected flowmeter (eg ENDIN) By choosing a category the

corresponding process connections will be listed below

Material (sensor)

Depending on the flowmeter Applicator offers different sensor materials The available materials can depend

on the diameter and process connection Material compatibility of the sensor material will be checked against

the integrated corrosion database A warning message will be displayed if compatibility issues exist between

the fluid and sensor material

Process connection

Applicator also selects the required minimum pressure rating according to the operating pressure and

temperature values This field is displayed as a dropdown list which offers all available pressure ratings for the

selected flowmeter and meter size You can change the suggested pressure rating or process connection but

if you select a lower pressure rating than the suggested one a warning will be displayed

Below Process connection you can find the Pressure rating button Clicking on it will open a window which

displays a diagram for the selected process connection the temperature-pressure derating curve of a selected

process connection and also operation points (max pressure at min and max temperature and the nominal

temperaturepressure point)

Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If

additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case

whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will

automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to

make the user aware of the change

24 Meter Operating Range

The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values

If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The

measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range

For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible

For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow

Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is

possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly

differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour

25 Calculated Results

This section shows the calculated results of sizing

Requested flow

Indicates the values used for the calculation

Flow velocity

Flow velocity max

Pressure Loss

An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss

calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This

group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be

marginal and without any influence on your process

Velocity (meas tube)

This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation

refers to the nominal density

Measured Error Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the

flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

Measured Error spec Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding

requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration

Measured Error Mass

These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for

Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the

corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead

of a value

Measured Error spec Mass

Reynolds No

The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further

sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions

Frequency

This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is

proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity

PED results

Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please

note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window

Meter size

This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually

adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have

done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is

locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal

button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This

means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are

saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter

The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters

Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will

also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements

26 Warnings

Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the

green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is

pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or

expanded using the arrow on the right

Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next

Endress+Hauser Sales Centre

27 Button center

A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of

the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process

Print Sizing

Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports

Sizing Energy

Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the

Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow

Configurator

Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code

Add to shop basket

Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This

button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the

Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline

version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when

Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Reset

This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results

Back to top

3 Custody transfer

Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of

among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals

If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection

- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out

According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different

process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature

are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task

page

In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the

approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum

turn down is also checked

Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your

entries

The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval

As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB

7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the

max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated

With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature

The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the

ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit

values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter

measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures

the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the

warning messages

Back to top

4 Accessories

There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories

page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)

In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg

mounting set 41) are executed

41 Accessories page

Example mounting set

Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations

Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)

42 Activating a checkbox

Example Flow conditioner

For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are

automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and

process connection can be selected

43 Accessories within the order code

The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving

process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed

Applicator versions)

Back to top

5 Fluid Properties page

51 General description

Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page

This view supports the following types of fluids

Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under

ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page

The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases

Liquids

Media type Standardprocess

Fluids not 100 water (example 0

Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)

Support points (linear interpolation)

Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97

Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-

Gas (Air) UDG)

Redlich-Kwong

Gases

Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas

engine

Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine

Air Ozone O3

Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)

Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr

Butane Nitric Oxide NO3

Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0

Carbon monoxide

Chlorine

Ethane

Ethylene

Helium

Hydrogen

Hydrogen chloride

Hydrogen sulphide

Krypton

Methane

Neon

Nitrogen

Oxygen

Propane

Xenon

0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User

Defined Gas Mixture 0

Oxygen

The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for

example density or viscosity

The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information

classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of

the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They

are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are

important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new

medium

The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The

parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll

to the group header you see on your screen

When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page

A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details

Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page

52 Parameter groups

521 Fluid information

In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible

Fluid name contains the name of the fluid

Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In

many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available

State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many

purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the

steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account

Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made

522 Fluid Description

The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid

Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian

Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid

Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and

syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or

measurement principle

Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is

flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals

Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive

Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for

conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to

50 microScm and more than 50 microScm

Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to

67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo

Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details

Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid

The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user

defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

523 Basic Fluid Parameters

The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be

created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages

Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid

Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid

Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point

Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid

Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas

The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has

an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also

depend on density and viscosity

In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and

sound velocity

524 Constants

This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas

type selected

Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken

from the Unit Defaults page

Molar mass molecular weight of the gas

Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)

Heating value calorific value of the gas

The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine

For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is

used to calculate the sound velocity

525 Typical Operating Conditions

The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions

Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the

mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of

the typical operating conditions are editable

526 Temperature Viscosity

This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description

The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function

of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve

for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range

527 Temperature Density

This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Density density at the support point

The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of

operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for

fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range

528 Temperature Heat capacity

This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point

The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

529 Temperature Vapor pressure

This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid

Temperature temperature at the support point

Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point

The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

5210 Gas mixture

The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture

Gas name of the gas (first field)

Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture

Unit unit for mass fraction

A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are

given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas

Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report

The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is

displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine

only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100

5211 Fluid properties and results

This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed

differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help

function

Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom

display ldquonardquo

The calculated constants are eg

Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions

Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions

Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions

Heating value the calorific value of the fluid

For liquids

Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data

displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page

AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

For solids

a viscosity coefficient for the gas

n viscosity coefficient for gases

5212 Reference values

This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters

displayed differ according to the fluid selected

Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation

Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780

Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780

Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533

Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533

5213 Measuring task

The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of

the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details

opens a window with more information about the approval

5214 Restriction on flowmeters

This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates

that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details

opens a window with more information about the restrictions

53 Setting reference conditions

Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu

There are two possibilities

SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are

- pressure 10132 bar absolute

- temperature 0deg Celsius

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter

US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are

- pressure 14696 psi absolute

- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter

54 Creating a User Defined Fluid

Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the

world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids

1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field

Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid

at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam

2 Now click on the Properties button

3 When the page has opened click on New

4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate

fields which are now open for editing

When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database

Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system

fluids

If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields

will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General

parameters list and you can start again

If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit

button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close

button exits the page without saving the changes

55 Import and Export of Fluids

In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this

the import and export function of the fluid database can be used

In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information

are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want

to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export

button

Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database

To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file

56 Fluid Properties report

The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing

page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results

and reference values

Back to top

6 Compare size and sensor

61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)

When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose

Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the

ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function

When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The

displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter

The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by

clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the

corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table

will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can

be reapplied

The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you

click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed

as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator

can be reapplied

62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)

The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement

principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are

selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator

versions

Back to top

7 Chart page

71 Introduction

The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case

of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available

The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections

72 General Parameters

In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a

repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on

the sizing page

73 Process data

Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference

74 Curves

The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if

offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter

In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be

automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be

activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner

If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report

75 Flow limits

The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range

and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are

different

76 Chart

The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the

pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using

the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional

information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different

curves within the chart

The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons

The content of the printout depends on the options selected

Back to top

8 Order Code

Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order

information

In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring

principle and flowmeter These are as follows

Feature Description Order codeSizing

Definition of ideal

diameter

Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter

relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure

loss

Diameter (Order code

option)

Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and

installation data

Mounting set (Order code

option)

Determination of

insertion depth

Calculation of insertion depth depending on

the selected accessory (t-mass)

Pipe length (Order code

option)

Selection of Material

(Sensor)

Selection and verification of corrosion

consistency

Sensor material Liner

material (Order code

option)

Selection of Process

connection

Selection and verification of pressure and

temperature curve

Process connection (Order

code option)

Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order

code option)

Pressure equipment

directive (PED)

Definition of PED-category depending on the

application and verification of the offered

process connections

Additional approval (Order

code option)

Custody transfer Verification or specification of application

data definition of measuring range

Custody transfer (Order

code option)

Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow

conditioner)

Accessory enclosed or extra

position (Order code

option)

Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow

splitter

Sensor Options (Order code

option)

Evaluation of

measuring range

Calculation of measuring range Calculation

datachart

Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and

accessory where required

Calculation

datachart

Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation

datachart

Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion

database with relevant data

The Order code page consists of different frames

81 Order code

Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically

by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and

Configurator for the valid order codes

82 Order code options

Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration

options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the

order code

The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection

on the Sizing page

The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page

The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options

Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed

these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still

feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning

message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change

83 Extended order code

831 General

Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen

In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables

for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and

activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the

Extended order code feature is used

With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order

code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the

order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator

832 Device parameter data settings

To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is

not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the

ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator

The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo

84 Button center

The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to

proceed with your Sizing process

Configurator

Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order

code

Print Sizing

Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product can be pasted into a project

Back to top

9 Conversion Calculator

Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity

All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by

selecting one out of the drop down lists

The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another

The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all

common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be

recalculated automatically

Back to top

10 Unit Defaults

Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings

menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored

whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session

Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily

for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button

Back to top

11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)

111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)

Disclaimer

The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from

publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and

assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a

minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion

fatigue life

The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different

process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined

Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check

Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled

The content of the database was sourced from

bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)

bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG

bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta

bull Various Internet Links

bull Various Corrosion data bases

The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application

and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process

temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows

Metal

Class Description depth of corrosion per surface

A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)

B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)

C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)

NR not recommended

U unknown

Plastics

Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength

A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear

B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year

lt=30 loss of tensile strength year

C not resistant lt= 50year

lt=50 loss of tensile strength year

NR not recommended

U unknown

Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used

112 Using Corrosion Check

Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion

information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability

of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not

appear at the top of the page

Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the

corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table

The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid

The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion

database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message

is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning

message

The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project

module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing

Back to top

12 Settings (Sizing Flow)

The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the

button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select

Sizing Flow

The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this

function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings

saved are loaded with the Load Default button

Setting Impact when activated

Basic functions

Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply

Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order

classification PED device check code page and printouts

Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits

The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits

No indication of default start data input of data by user

By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually

Advanced functions

Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)

The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles

Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates

My View

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

DP Flow

Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters

Activates said functions

Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP

flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

Back to top

13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines

131 General

Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation

Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)

Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures

132 Fluid engine

General Information

The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the

fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor

Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both

liquids and for gases

Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data

Liquid Calculation

Calculation of the acentric factor Omega

Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure

Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby

bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC

bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database

bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms

bull

The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs

Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature

bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3

bull Alpha in 1K

bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K

bull Toper in K

bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3

The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs

Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature

bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3

bull AL (Viscosity factor)

bull BL (Viscosity factor)

bull Toper in K

bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt

Gas calculation

The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and

pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and

temperature

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull Zoper (Compressibility)

Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)

Toper in K

bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3

Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull c Kappa

Steam Calculation

Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard

The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard

(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use

The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from

bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and

bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa

This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only

That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms

Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator

133 Gas engine

The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the

fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine

The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of

the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted

process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine

Back to top

14 Print Sizing

The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured

and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page

The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens

bull Page format size margins orientation and format

bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter

bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report

Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed

bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo

bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout

Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered

Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page

Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are

possible Please check the help manual of the Project module

Back to top

15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by

manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002

The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection

options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator

takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable

flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and

Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can

switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator

1 Categorisation of the application

2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests

bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this

option

PED Categories

Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered

during the sizing and ordering process They include

bull All ultrasonic flowmeters

bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo

bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water

bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the

static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure

bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume

The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data

danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)

Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements

have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen

device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and

nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case

a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet

All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout

Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)

Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and

temperature are the main parameters

If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required

data in the min nom and max columns

If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the

necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating

Danger posed by the fluid

The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the

case of gases the stability of the gas is also important

The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo

according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)

All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations

belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is

above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture

bull H200-H205 (explosive)

bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)

bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)

bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)

bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)

bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)

bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)

In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in

Danger Symbols below

In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED

fluid groups

rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids

Order code

If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option

this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page

With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family

nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration

If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center

Danger Symbols

Danger symbol Explanation H-rates

C corrosive H 314

Cl chemical instable

E explosive H200-H205

F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223

F flammable H 225-H228

N environmental

dangerous

O oxidizing H271-H272

T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330

H372

T poisonous

Xi irritating

Xn injurious to health

Back to top

16 Online Update

The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator

Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes

and updated system databases with the latest products

The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator

newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the

Settings menu

Page 16: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use

The Sound Velocity is only displayed for flowmeters if this dimension is important especially for calculating the

permitted measuring range of Coriolis mass flowmeters and for calculating the distance between the sensors

of an ultrasonic flowmeter This value can be changed and is recalculated whenever the temperature is

changed as long as the field is not locked You should normally not have to change this value but if your fluid

behaves differently from the system fluid chosen you have the opportunity to enter the correct value in this

input field

Caution Please click on the Reset-button on the Sizing page if you have changed fluid properties (eg

density vapor pressure viscosity) before you start a new sizing

How to lock applicator data

When setting the fluid properties it is important to understand the concept of locking Initially all fluid

properties are unlocked and Applicator attempts to make a reasonable guess for the operating conditions

using default values for some conditions and calculating others When you set a value it will be locked

automatically The program uses your value from then on ignoring its defaults and suspending its calculations

All values which you have generated yourself are marked in blue

If you change the determined intermediate values like density viscosity eg or the results they will be printed

in italics so that you can easily recognize them

Data locking examples

Immediately after the selection of a medium and a measuring instrument Applicator starts the calculation of

the meter by using the information about operating conditions entered Usually the user herhimself adjusts

the process conditions ndash eg flow pressure and temperature- to the application The density viscosity sound

velocity vapor pressure and Z-factor are calculated by Applicator

If for example you change the temperature Applicator will recalculate the gas density value if you have not

locked the respective field However if you set the density (thereby locking it) and then change the

temperature the density will not be recalculated The program uses the density value which you have entered

independent of the temperature

Any unlocked field changes automatically if you change other operating conditions upon which it depends

Any locked field remains fixed even if you change other operating conditions Selecting a new fluid unlocks all

operating conditions except requested flow

Caution If you make a new fluid selection and lock it the fluid data will be overwritten with the default fluid

data If you make a new flowmeter selection the locked fluid data and the sensor data remain unchanged

provided this is technically reasonable

23 Sensor Pipe

This section specifies the requirements regarding the pipe into which the flowmeter is to be built

Depending on the flowmeter different inputs are necessary to describe the existing pipe location or the

requested sensor requirements Different possibilities to select the pipe material or sensor pipe material to

input pipe thickness liner thickness sound velocity of material outer diameter circumference or the input of

the inner diameter help to specify the pipe geometry Additionally rectangular ducts which are described

with the inner duct height duct width and duct thickness are available for thermal and differential pressure

flowmeters

After entering the internal diameter Applicator calculates the nearest available meter size according to the

selected connection standard Your specified inner diameter is used for further calculations

Caution Applicator takes the internal diameter and equates it with the meter or pipe size The checkbox for

Pipe size ne meter size offers the possibility of an indication and sizing of products with integrated reducers in

addition to common Prowirl flowmeters

Pipe dimension table for DP-Flow Clamp-On and Insertion meters

There is the possibility to choose between different pipe standards in order to select the correct pipe

dimension which enables a proper sizing There are 36 default values for several pipe standards available

including

bull DIN (EN 10220 24581 2462 2440 etc)

bull ASME (B3610B3619)

bull AWWA Cast Iron Class A- H AWWA Ductile Iron Class 50-56

bull One standard for free input select Applicator default valuesmanual input

After choosing the desired pipe standard the pipe dimension window opens Depending on the preferred pipe

size and pressure rating possible pipe dimensions are offered

Connection standard

Shows all available connection standards for the selected flowmeter (eg ENDIN) By choosing a category the

corresponding process connections will be listed below

Material (sensor)

Depending on the flowmeter Applicator offers different sensor materials The available materials can depend

on the diameter and process connection Material compatibility of the sensor material will be checked against

the integrated corrosion database A warning message will be displayed if compatibility issues exist between

the fluid and sensor material

Process connection

Applicator also selects the required minimum pressure rating according to the operating pressure and

temperature values This field is displayed as a dropdown list which offers all available pressure ratings for the

selected flowmeter and meter size You can change the suggested pressure rating or process connection but

if you select a lower pressure rating than the suggested one a warning will be displayed

Below Process connection you can find the Pressure rating button Clicking on it will open a window which

displays a diagram for the selected process connection the temperature-pressure derating curve of a selected

process connection and also operation points (max pressure at min and max temperature and the nominal

temperaturepressure point)

Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If

additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case

whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will

automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to

make the user aware of the change

24 Meter Operating Range

The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values

If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The

measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range

For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible

For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow

Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is

possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly

differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour

25 Calculated Results

This section shows the calculated results of sizing

Requested flow

Indicates the values used for the calculation

Flow velocity

Flow velocity max

Pressure Loss

An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss

calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This

group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be

marginal and without any influence on your process

Velocity (meas tube)

This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation

refers to the nominal density

Measured Error Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the

flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

Measured Error spec Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding

requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration

Measured Error Mass

These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for

Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the

corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead

of a value

Measured Error spec Mass

Reynolds No

The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further

sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions

Frequency

This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is

proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity

PED results

Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please

note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window

Meter size

This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually

adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have

done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is

locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal

button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This

means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are

saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter

The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters

Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will

also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements

26 Warnings

Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the

green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is

pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or

expanded using the arrow on the right

Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next

Endress+Hauser Sales Centre

27 Button center

A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of

the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process

Print Sizing

Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports

Sizing Energy

Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the

Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow

Configurator

Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code

Add to shop basket

Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This

button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the

Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline

version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when

Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Reset

This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results

Back to top

3 Custody transfer

Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of

among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals

If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection

- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out

According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different

process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature

are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task

page

In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the

approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum

turn down is also checked

Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your

entries

The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval

As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB

7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the

max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated

With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature

The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the

ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit

values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter

measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures

the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the

warning messages

Back to top

4 Accessories

There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories

page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)

In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg

mounting set 41) are executed

41 Accessories page

Example mounting set

Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations

Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)

42 Activating a checkbox

Example Flow conditioner

For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are

automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and

process connection can be selected

43 Accessories within the order code

The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving

process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed

Applicator versions)

Back to top

5 Fluid Properties page

51 General description

Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page

This view supports the following types of fluids

Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under

ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page

The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases

Liquids

Media type Standardprocess

Fluids not 100 water (example 0

Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)

Support points (linear interpolation)

Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97

Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-

Gas (Air) UDG)

Redlich-Kwong

Gases

Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas

engine

Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine

Air Ozone O3

Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)

Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr

Butane Nitric Oxide NO3

Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0

Carbon monoxide

Chlorine

Ethane

Ethylene

Helium

Hydrogen

Hydrogen chloride

Hydrogen sulphide

Krypton

Methane

Neon

Nitrogen

Oxygen

Propane

Xenon

0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User

Defined Gas Mixture 0

Oxygen

The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for

example density or viscosity

The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information

classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of

the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They

are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are

important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new

medium

The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The

parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll

to the group header you see on your screen

When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page

A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details

Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page

52 Parameter groups

521 Fluid information

In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible

Fluid name contains the name of the fluid

Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In

many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available

State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many

purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the

steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account

Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made

522 Fluid Description

The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid

Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian

Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid

Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and

syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or

measurement principle

Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is

flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals

Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive

Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for

conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to

50 microScm and more than 50 microScm

Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to

67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo

Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details

Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid

The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user

defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

523 Basic Fluid Parameters

The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be

created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages

Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid

Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid

Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point

Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid

Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas

The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has

an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also

depend on density and viscosity

In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and

sound velocity

524 Constants

This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas

type selected

Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken

from the Unit Defaults page

Molar mass molecular weight of the gas

Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)

Heating value calorific value of the gas

The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine

For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is

used to calculate the sound velocity

525 Typical Operating Conditions

The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions

Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the

mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of

the typical operating conditions are editable

526 Temperature Viscosity

This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description

The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function

of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve

for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range

527 Temperature Density

This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Density density at the support point

The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of

operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for

fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range

528 Temperature Heat capacity

This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point

The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

529 Temperature Vapor pressure

This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid

Temperature temperature at the support point

Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point

The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

5210 Gas mixture

The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture

Gas name of the gas (first field)

Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture

Unit unit for mass fraction

A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are

given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas

Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report

The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is

displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine

only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100

5211 Fluid properties and results

This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed

differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help

function

Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom

display ldquonardquo

The calculated constants are eg

Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions

Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions

Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions

Heating value the calorific value of the fluid

For liquids

Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data

displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page

AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

For solids

a viscosity coefficient for the gas

n viscosity coefficient for gases

5212 Reference values

This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters

displayed differ according to the fluid selected

Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation

Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780

Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780

Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533

Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533

5213 Measuring task

The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of

the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details

opens a window with more information about the approval

5214 Restriction on flowmeters

This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates

that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details

opens a window with more information about the restrictions

53 Setting reference conditions

Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu

There are two possibilities

SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are

- pressure 10132 bar absolute

- temperature 0deg Celsius

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter

US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are

- pressure 14696 psi absolute

- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter

54 Creating a User Defined Fluid

Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the

world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids

1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field

Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid

at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam

2 Now click on the Properties button

3 When the page has opened click on New

4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate

fields which are now open for editing

When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database

Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system

fluids

If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields

will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General

parameters list and you can start again

If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit

button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close

button exits the page without saving the changes

55 Import and Export of Fluids

In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this

the import and export function of the fluid database can be used

In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information

are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want

to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export

button

Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database

To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file

56 Fluid Properties report

The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing

page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results

and reference values

Back to top

6 Compare size and sensor

61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)

When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose

Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the

ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function

When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The

displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter

The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by

clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the

corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table

will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can

be reapplied

The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you

click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed

as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator

can be reapplied

62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)

The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement

principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are

selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator

versions

Back to top

7 Chart page

71 Introduction

The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case

of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available

The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections

72 General Parameters

In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a

repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on

the sizing page

73 Process data

Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference

74 Curves

The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if

offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter

In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be

automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be

activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner

If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report

75 Flow limits

The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range

and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are

different

76 Chart

The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the

pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using

the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional

information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different

curves within the chart

The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons

The content of the printout depends on the options selected

Back to top

8 Order Code

Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order

information

In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring

principle and flowmeter These are as follows

Feature Description Order codeSizing

Definition of ideal

diameter

Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter

relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure

loss

Diameter (Order code

option)

Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and

installation data

Mounting set (Order code

option)

Determination of

insertion depth

Calculation of insertion depth depending on

the selected accessory (t-mass)

Pipe length (Order code

option)

Selection of Material

(Sensor)

Selection and verification of corrosion

consistency

Sensor material Liner

material (Order code

option)

Selection of Process

connection

Selection and verification of pressure and

temperature curve

Process connection (Order

code option)

Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order

code option)

Pressure equipment

directive (PED)

Definition of PED-category depending on the

application and verification of the offered

process connections

Additional approval (Order

code option)

Custody transfer Verification or specification of application

data definition of measuring range

Custody transfer (Order

code option)

Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow

conditioner)

Accessory enclosed or extra

position (Order code

option)

Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow

splitter

Sensor Options (Order code

option)

Evaluation of

measuring range

Calculation of measuring range Calculation

datachart

Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and

accessory where required

Calculation

datachart

Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation

datachart

Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion

database with relevant data

The Order code page consists of different frames

81 Order code

Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically

by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and

Configurator for the valid order codes

82 Order code options

Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration

options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the

order code

The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection

on the Sizing page

The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page

The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options

Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed

these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still

feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning

message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change

83 Extended order code

831 General

Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen

In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables

for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and

activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the

Extended order code feature is used

With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order

code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the

order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator

832 Device parameter data settings

To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is

not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the

ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator

The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo

84 Button center

The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to

proceed with your Sizing process

Configurator

Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order

code

Print Sizing

Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product can be pasted into a project

Back to top

9 Conversion Calculator

Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity

All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by

selecting one out of the drop down lists

The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another

The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all

common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be

recalculated automatically

Back to top

10 Unit Defaults

Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings

menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored

whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session

Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily

for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button

Back to top

11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)

111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)

Disclaimer

The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from

publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and

assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a

minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion

fatigue life

The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different

process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined

Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check

Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled

The content of the database was sourced from

bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)

bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG

bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta

bull Various Internet Links

bull Various Corrosion data bases

The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application

and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process

temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows

Metal

Class Description depth of corrosion per surface

A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)

B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)

C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)

NR not recommended

U unknown

Plastics

Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength

A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear

B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year

lt=30 loss of tensile strength year

C not resistant lt= 50year

lt=50 loss of tensile strength year

NR not recommended

U unknown

Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used

112 Using Corrosion Check

Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion

information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability

of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not

appear at the top of the page

Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the

corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table

The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid

The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion

database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message

is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning

message

The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project

module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing

Back to top

12 Settings (Sizing Flow)

The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the

button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select

Sizing Flow

The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this

function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings

saved are loaded with the Load Default button

Setting Impact when activated

Basic functions

Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply

Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order

classification PED device check code page and printouts

Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits

The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits

No indication of default start data input of data by user

By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually

Advanced functions

Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)

The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles

Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates

My View

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

DP Flow

Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters

Activates said functions

Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP

flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

Back to top

13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines

131 General

Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation

Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)

Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures

132 Fluid engine

General Information

The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the

fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor

Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both

liquids and for gases

Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data

Liquid Calculation

Calculation of the acentric factor Omega

Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure

Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby

bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC

bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database

bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms

bull

The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs

Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature

bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3

bull Alpha in 1K

bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K

bull Toper in K

bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3

The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs

Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature

bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3

bull AL (Viscosity factor)

bull BL (Viscosity factor)

bull Toper in K

bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt

Gas calculation

The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and

pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and

temperature

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull Zoper (Compressibility)

Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)

Toper in K

bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3

Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull c Kappa

Steam Calculation

Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard

The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard

(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use

The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from

bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and

bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa

This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only

That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms

Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator

133 Gas engine

The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the

fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine

The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of

the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted

process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine

Back to top

14 Print Sizing

The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured

and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page

The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens

bull Page format size margins orientation and format

bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter

bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report

Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed

bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo

bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout

Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered

Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page

Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are

possible Please check the help manual of the Project module

Back to top

15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by

manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002

The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection

options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator

takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable

flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and

Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can

switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator

1 Categorisation of the application

2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests

bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this

option

PED Categories

Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered

during the sizing and ordering process They include

bull All ultrasonic flowmeters

bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo

bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water

bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the

static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure

bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume

The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data

danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)

Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements

have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen

device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and

nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case

a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet

All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout

Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)

Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and

temperature are the main parameters

If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required

data in the min nom and max columns

If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the

necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating

Danger posed by the fluid

The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the

case of gases the stability of the gas is also important

The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo

according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)

All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations

belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is

above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture

bull H200-H205 (explosive)

bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)

bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)

bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)

bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)

bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)

bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)

In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in

Danger Symbols below

In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED

fluid groups

rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids

Order code

If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option

this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page

With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family

nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration

If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center

Danger Symbols

Danger symbol Explanation H-rates

C corrosive H 314

Cl chemical instable

E explosive H200-H205

F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223

F flammable H 225-H228

N environmental

dangerous

O oxidizing H271-H272

T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330

H372

T poisonous

Xi irritating

Xn injurious to health

Back to top

16 Online Update

The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator

Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes

and updated system databases with the latest products

The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator

newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the

Settings menu

Page 17: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use

23 Sensor Pipe

This section specifies the requirements regarding the pipe into which the flowmeter is to be built

Depending on the flowmeter different inputs are necessary to describe the existing pipe location or the

requested sensor requirements Different possibilities to select the pipe material or sensor pipe material to

input pipe thickness liner thickness sound velocity of material outer diameter circumference or the input of

the inner diameter help to specify the pipe geometry Additionally rectangular ducts which are described

with the inner duct height duct width and duct thickness are available for thermal and differential pressure

flowmeters

After entering the internal diameter Applicator calculates the nearest available meter size according to the

selected connection standard Your specified inner diameter is used for further calculations

Caution Applicator takes the internal diameter and equates it with the meter or pipe size The checkbox for

Pipe size ne meter size offers the possibility of an indication and sizing of products with integrated reducers in

addition to common Prowirl flowmeters

Pipe dimension table for DP-Flow Clamp-On and Insertion meters

There is the possibility to choose between different pipe standards in order to select the correct pipe

dimension which enables a proper sizing There are 36 default values for several pipe standards available

including

bull DIN (EN 10220 24581 2462 2440 etc)

bull ASME (B3610B3619)

bull AWWA Cast Iron Class A- H AWWA Ductile Iron Class 50-56

bull One standard for free input select Applicator default valuesmanual input

After choosing the desired pipe standard the pipe dimension window opens Depending on the preferred pipe

size and pressure rating possible pipe dimensions are offered

Connection standard

Shows all available connection standards for the selected flowmeter (eg ENDIN) By choosing a category the

corresponding process connections will be listed below

Material (sensor)

Depending on the flowmeter Applicator offers different sensor materials The available materials can depend

on the diameter and process connection Material compatibility of the sensor material will be checked against

the integrated corrosion database A warning message will be displayed if compatibility issues exist between

the fluid and sensor material

Process connection

Applicator also selects the required minimum pressure rating according to the operating pressure and

temperature values This field is displayed as a dropdown list which offers all available pressure ratings for the

selected flowmeter and meter size You can change the suggested pressure rating or process connection but

if you select a lower pressure rating than the suggested one a warning will be displayed

Below Process connection you can find the Pressure rating button Clicking on it will open a window which

displays a diagram for the selected process connection the temperature-pressure derating curve of a selected

process connection and also operation points (max pressure at min and max temperature and the nominal

temperaturepressure point)

Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If

additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case

whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will

automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to

make the user aware of the change

24 Meter Operating Range

The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values

If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The

measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range

For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible

For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow

Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is

possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly

differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour

25 Calculated Results

This section shows the calculated results of sizing

Requested flow

Indicates the values used for the calculation

Flow velocity

Flow velocity max

Pressure Loss

An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss

calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This

group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be

marginal and without any influence on your process

Velocity (meas tube)

This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation

refers to the nominal density

Measured Error Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the

flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

Measured Error spec Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding

requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration

Measured Error Mass

These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for

Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the

corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead

of a value

Measured Error spec Mass

Reynolds No

The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further

sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions

Frequency

This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is

proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity

PED results

Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please

note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window

Meter size

This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually

adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have

done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is

locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal

button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This

means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are

saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter

The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters

Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will

also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements

26 Warnings

Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the

green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is

pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or

expanded using the arrow on the right

Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next

Endress+Hauser Sales Centre

27 Button center

A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of

the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process

Print Sizing

Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports

Sizing Energy

Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the

Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow

Configurator

Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code

Add to shop basket

Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This

button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the

Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline

version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when

Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Reset

This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results

Back to top

3 Custody transfer

Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of

among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals

If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection

- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out

According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different

process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature

are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task

page

In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the

approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum

turn down is also checked

Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your

entries

The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval

As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB

7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the

max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated

With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature

The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the

ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit

values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter

measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures

the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the

warning messages

Back to top

4 Accessories

There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories

page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)

In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg

mounting set 41) are executed

41 Accessories page

Example mounting set

Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations

Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)

42 Activating a checkbox

Example Flow conditioner

For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are

automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and

process connection can be selected

43 Accessories within the order code

The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving

process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed

Applicator versions)

Back to top

5 Fluid Properties page

51 General description

Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page

This view supports the following types of fluids

Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under

ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page

The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases

Liquids

Media type Standardprocess

Fluids not 100 water (example 0

Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)

Support points (linear interpolation)

Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97

Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-

Gas (Air) UDG)

Redlich-Kwong

Gases

Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas

engine

Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine

Air Ozone O3

Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)

Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr

Butane Nitric Oxide NO3

Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0

Carbon monoxide

Chlorine

Ethane

Ethylene

Helium

Hydrogen

Hydrogen chloride

Hydrogen sulphide

Krypton

Methane

Neon

Nitrogen

Oxygen

Propane

Xenon

0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User

Defined Gas Mixture 0

Oxygen

The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for

example density or viscosity

The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information

classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of

the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They

are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are

important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new

medium

The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The

parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll

to the group header you see on your screen

When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page

A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details

Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page

52 Parameter groups

521 Fluid information

In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible

Fluid name contains the name of the fluid

Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In

many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available

State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many

purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the

steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account

Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made

522 Fluid Description

The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid

Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian

Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid

Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and

syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or

measurement principle

Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is

flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals

Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive

Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for

conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to

50 microScm and more than 50 microScm

Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to

67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo

Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details

Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid

The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user

defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

523 Basic Fluid Parameters

The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be

created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages

Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid

Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid

Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point

Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid

Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas

The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has

an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also

depend on density and viscosity

In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and

sound velocity

524 Constants

This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas

type selected

Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken

from the Unit Defaults page

Molar mass molecular weight of the gas

Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)

Heating value calorific value of the gas

The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine

For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is

used to calculate the sound velocity

525 Typical Operating Conditions

The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions

Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the

mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of

the typical operating conditions are editable

526 Temperature Viscosity

This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description

The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function

of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve

for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range

527 Temperature Density

This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Density density at the support point

The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of

operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for

fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range

528 Temperature Heat capacity

This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point

The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

529 Temperature Vapor pressure

This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid

Temperature temperature at the support point

Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point

The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

5210 Gas mixture

The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture

Gas name of the gas (first field)

Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture

Unit unit for mass fraction

A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are

given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas

Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report

The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is

displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine

only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100

5211 Fluid properties and results

This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed

differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help

function

Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom

display ldquonardquo

The calculated constants are eg

Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions

Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions

Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions

Heating value the calorific value of the fluid

For liquids

Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data

displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page

AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

For solids

a viscosity coefficient for the gas

n viscosity coefficient for gases

5212 Reference values

This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters

displayed differ according to the fluid selected

Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation

Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780

Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780

Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533

Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533

5213 Measuring task

The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of

the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details

opens a window with more information about the approval

5214 Restriction on flowmeters

This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates

that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details

opens a window with more information about the restrictions

53 Setting reference conditions

Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu

There are two possibilities

SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are

- pressure 10132 bar absolute

- temperature 0deg Celsius

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter

US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are

- pressure 14696 psi absolute

- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter

54 Creating a User Defined Fluid

Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the

world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids

1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field

Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid

at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam

2 Now click on the Properties button

3 When the page has opened click on New

4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate

fields which are now open for editing

When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database

Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system

fluids

If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields

will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General

parameters list and you can start again

If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit

button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close

button exits the page without saving the changes

55 Import and Export of Fluids

In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this

the import and export function of the fluid database can be used

In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information

are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want

to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export

button

Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database

To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file

56 Fluid Properties report

The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing

page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results

and reference values

Back to top

6 Compare size and sensor

61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)

When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose

Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the

ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function

When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The

displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter

The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by

clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the

corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table

will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can

be reapplied

The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you

click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed

as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator

can be reapplied

62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)

The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement

principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are

selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator

versions

Back to top

7 Chart page

71 Introduction

The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case

of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available

The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections

72 General Parameters

In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a

repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on

the sizing page

73 Process data

Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference

74 Curves

The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if

offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter

In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be

automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be

activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner

If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report

75 Flow limits

The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range

and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are

different

76 Chart

The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the

pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using

the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional

information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different

curves within the chart

The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons

The content of the printout depends on the options selected

Back to top

8 Order Code

Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order

information

In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring

principle and flowmeter These are as follows

Feature Description Order codeSizing

Definition of ideal

diameter

Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter

relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure

loss

Diameter (Order code

option)

Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and

installation data

Mounting set (Order code

option)

Determination of

insertion depth

Calculation of insertion depth depending on

the selected accessory (t-mass)

Pipe length (Order code

option)

Selection of Material

(Sensor)

Selection and verification of corrosion

consistency

Sensor material Liner

material (Order code

option)

Selection of Process

connection

Selection and verification of pressure and

temperature curve

Process connection (Order

code option)

Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order

code option)

Pressure equipment

directive (PED)

Definition of PED-category depending on the

application and verification of the offered

process connections

Additional approval (Order

code option)

Custody transfer Verification or specification of application

data definition of measuring range

Custody transfer (Order

code option)

Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow

conditioner)

Accessory enclosed or extra

position (Order code

option)

Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow

splitter

Sensor Options (Order code

option)

Evaluation of

measuring range

Calculation of measuring range Calculation

datachart

Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and

accessory where required

Calculation

datachart

Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation

datachart

Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion

database with relevant data

The Order code page consists of different frames

81 Order code

Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically

by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and

Configurator for the valid order codes

82 Order code options

Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration

options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the

order code

The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection

on the Sizing page

The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page

The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options

Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed

these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still

feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning

message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change

83 Extended order code

831 General

Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen

In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables

for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and

activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the

Extended order code feature is used

With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order

code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the

order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator

832 Device parameter data settings

To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is

not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the

ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator

The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo

84 Button center

The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to

proceed with your Sizing process

Configurator

Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order

code

Print Sizing

Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product can be pasted into a project

Back to top

9 Conversion Calculator

Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity

All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by

selecting one out of the drop down lists

The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another

The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all

common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be

recalculated automatically

Back to top

10 Unit Defaults

Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings

menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored

whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session

Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily

for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button

Back to top

11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)

111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)

Disclaimer

The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from

publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and

assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a

minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion

fatigue life

The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different

process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined

Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check

Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled

The content of the database was sourced from

bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)

bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG

bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta

bull Various Internet Links

bull Various Corrosion data bases

The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application

and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process

temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows

Metal

Class Description depth of corrosion per surface

A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)

B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)

C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)

NR not recommended

U unknown

Plastics

Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength

A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear

B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year

lt=30 loss of tensile strength year

C not resistant lt= 50year

lt=50 loss of tensile strength year

NR not recommended

U unknown

Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used

112 Using Corrosion Check

Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion

information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability

of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not

appear at the top of the page

Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the

corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table

The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid

The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion

database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message

is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning

message

The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project

module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing

Back to top

12 Settings (Sizing Flow)

The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the

button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select

Sizing Flow

The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this

function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings

saved are loaded with the Load Default button

Setting Impact when activated

Basic functions

Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply

Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order

classification PED device check code page and printouts

Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits

The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits

No indication of default start data input of data by user

By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually

Advanced functions

Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)

The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles

Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates

My View

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

DP Flow

Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters

Activates said functions

Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP

flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

Back to top

13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines

131 General

Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation

Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)

Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures

132 Fluid engine

General Information

The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the

fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor

Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both

liquids and for gases

Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data

Liquid Calculation

Calculation of the acentric factor Omega

Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure

Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby

bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC

bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database

bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms

bull

The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs

Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature

bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3

bull Alpha in 1K

bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K

bull Toper in K

bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3

The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs

Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature

bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3

bull AL (Viscosity factor)

bull BL (Viscosity factor)

bull Toper in K

bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt

Gas calculation

The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and

pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and

temperature

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull Zoper (Compressibility)

Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)

Toper in K

bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3

Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull c Kappa

Steam Calculation

Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard

The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard

(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use

The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from

bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and

bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa

This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only

That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms

Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator

133 Gas engine

The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the

fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine

The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of

the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted

process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine

Back to top

14 Print Sizing

The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured

and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page

The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens

bull Page format size margins orientation and format

bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter

bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report

Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed

bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo

bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout

Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered

Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page

Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are

possible Please check the help manual of the Project module

Back to top

15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by

manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002

The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection

options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator

takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable

flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and

Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can

switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator

1 Categorisation of the application

2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests

bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this

option

PED Categories

Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered

during the sizing and ordering process They include

bull All ultrasonic flowmeters

bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo

bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water

bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the

static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure

bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume

The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data

danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)

Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements

have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen

device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and

nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case

a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet

All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout

Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)

Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and

temperature are the main parameters

If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required

data in the min nom and max columns

If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the

necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating

Danger posed by the fluid

The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the

case of gases the stability of the gas is also important

The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo

according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)

All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations

belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is

above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture

bull H200-H205 (explosive)

bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)

bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)

bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)

bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)

bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)

bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)

In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in

Danger Symbols below

In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED

fluid groups

rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids

Order code

If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option

this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page

With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family

nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration

If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center

Danger Symbols

Danger symbol Explanation H-rates

C corrosive H 314

Cl chemical instable

E explosive H200-H205

F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223

F flammable H 225-H228

N environmental

dangerous

O oxidizing H271-H272

T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330

H372

T poisonous

Xi irritating

Xn injurious to health

Back to top

16 Online Update

The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator

Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes

and updated system databases with the latest products

The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator

newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the

Settings menu

Page 18: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use

Connection standard

Shows all available connection standards for the selected flowmeter (eg ENDIN) By choosing a category the

corresponding process connections will be listed below

Material (sensor)

Depending on the flowmeter Applicator offers different sensor materials The available materials can depend

on the diameter and process connection Material compatibility of the sensor material will be checked against

the integrated corrosion database A warning message will be displayed if compatibility issues exist between

the fluid and sensor material

Process connection

Applicator also selects the required minimum pressure rating according to the operating pressure and

temperature values This field is displayed as a dropdown list which offers all available pressure ratings for the

selected flowmeter and meter size You can change the suggested pressure rating or process connection but

if you select a lower pressure rating than the suggested one a warning will be displayed

Below Process connection you can find the Pressure rating button Clicking on it will open a window which

displays a diagram for the selected process connection the temperature-pressure derating curve of a selected

process connection and also operation points (max pressure at min and max temperature and the nominal

temperaturepressure point)

Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If

additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case

whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will

automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to

make the user aware of the change

24 Meter Operating Range

The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values

If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The

measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range

For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible

For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow

Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is

possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly

differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour

25 Calculated Results

This section shows the calculated results of sizing

Requested flow

Indicates the values used for the calculation

Flow velocity

Flow velocity max

Pressure Loss

An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss

calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This

group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be

marginal and without any influence on your process

Velocity (meas tube)

This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation

refers to the nominal density

Measured Error Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the

flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

Measured Error spec Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding

requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration

Measured Error Mass

These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for

Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the

corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead

of a value

Measured Error spec Mass

Reynolds No

The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further

sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions

Frequency

This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is

proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity

PED results

Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please

note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window

Meter size

This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually

adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have

done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is

locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal

button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This

means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are

saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter

The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters

Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will

also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements

26 Warnings

Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the

green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is

pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or

expanded using the arrow on the right

Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next

Endress+Hauser Sales Centre

27 Button center

A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of

the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process

Print Sizing

Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports

Sizing Energy

Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the

Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow

Configurator

Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code

Add to shop basket

Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This

button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the

Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline

version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when

Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Reset

This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results

Back to top

3 Custody transfer

Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of

among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals

If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection

- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out

According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different

process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature

are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task

page

In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the

approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum

turn down is also checked

Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your

entries

The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval

As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB

7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the

max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated

With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature

The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the

ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit

values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter

measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures

the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the

warning messages

Back to top

4 Accessories

There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories

page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)

In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg

mounting set 41) are executed

41 Accessories page

Example mounting set

Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations

Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)

42 Activating a checkbox

Example Flow conditioner

For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are

automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and

process connection can be selected

43 Accessories within the order code

The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving

process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed

Applicator versions)

Back to top

5 Fluid Properties page

51 General description

Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page

This view supports the following types of fluids

Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under

ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page

The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases

Liquids

Media type Standardprocess

Fluids not 100 water (example 0

Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)

Support points (linear interpolation)

Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97

Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-

Gas (Air) UDG)

Redlich-Kwong

Gases

Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas

engine

Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine

Air Ozone O3

Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)

Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr

Butane Nitric Oxide NO3

Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0

Carbon monoxide

Chlorine

Ethane

Ethylene

Helium

Hydrogen

Hydrogen chloride

Hydrogen sulphide

Krypton

Methane

Neon

Nitrogen

Oxygen

Propane

Xenon

0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User

Defined Gas Mixture 0

Oxygen

The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for

example density or viscosity

The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information

classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of

the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They

are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are

important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new

medium

The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The

parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll

to the group header you see on your screen

When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page

A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details

Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page

52 Parameter groups

521 Fluid information

In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible

Fluid name contains the name of the fluid

Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In

many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available

State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many

purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the

steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account

Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made

522 Fluid Description

The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid

Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian

Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid

Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and

syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or

measurement principle

Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is

flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals

Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive

Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for

conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to

50 microScm and more than 50 microScm

Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to

67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo

Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details

Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid

The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user

defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

523 Basic Fluid Parameters

The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be

created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages

Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid

Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid

Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point

Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid

Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas

The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has

an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also

depend on density and viscosity

In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and

sound velocity

524 Constants

This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas

type selected

Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken

from the Unit Defaults page

Molar mass molecular weight of the gas

Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)

Heating value calorific value of the gas

The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine

For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is

used to calculate the sound velocity

525 Typical Operating Conditions

The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions

Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the

mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of

the typical operating conditions are editable

526 Temperature Viscosity

This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description

The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function

of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve

for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range

527 Temperature Density

This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Density density at the support point

The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of

operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for

fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range

528 Temperature Heat capacity

This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point

The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

529 Temperature Vapor pressure

This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid

Temperature temperature at the support point

Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point

The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

5210 Gas mixture

The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture

Gas name of the gas (first field)

Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture

Unit unit for mass fraction

A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are

given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas

Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report

The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is

displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine

only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100

5211 Fluid properties and results

This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed

differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help

function

Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom

display ldquonardquo

The calculated constants are eg

Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions

Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions

Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions

Heating value the calorific value of the fluid

For liquids

Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data

displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page

AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

For solids

a viscosity coefficient for the gas

n viscosity coefficient for gases

5212 Reference values

This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters

displayed differ according to the fluid selected

Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation

Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780

Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780

Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533

Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533

5213 Measuring task

The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of

the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details

opens a window with more information about the approval

5214 Restriction on flowmeters

This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates

that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details

opens a window with more information about the restrictions

53 Setting reference conditions

Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu

There are two possibilities

SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are

- pressure 10132 bar absolute

- temperature 0deg Celsius

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter

US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are

- pressure 14696 psi absolute

- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter

54 Creating a User Defined Fluid

Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the

world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids

1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field

Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid

at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam

2 Now click on the Properties button

3 When the page has opened click on New

4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate

fields which are now open for editing

When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database

Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system

fluids

If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields

will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General

parameters list and you can start again

If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit

button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close

button exits the page without saving the changes

55 Import and Export of Fluids

In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this

the import and export function of the fluid database can be used

In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information

are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want

to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export

button

Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database

To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file

56 Fluid Properties report

The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing

page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results

and reference values

Back to top

6 Compare size and sensor

61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)

When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose

Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the

ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function

When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The

displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter

The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by

clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the

corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table

will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can

be reapplied

The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you

click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed

as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator

can be reapplied

62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)

The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement

principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are

selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator

versions

Back to top

7 Chart page

71 Introduction

The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case

of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available

The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections

72 General Parameters

In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a

repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on

the sizing page

73 Process data

Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference

74 Curves

The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if

offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter

In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be

automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be

activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner

If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report

75 Flow limits

The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range

and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are

different

76 Chart

The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the

pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using

the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional

information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different

curves within the chart

The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons

The content of the printout depends on the options selected

Back to top

8 Order Code

Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order

information

In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring

principle and flowmeter These are as follows

Feature Description Order codeSizing

Definition of ideal

diameter

Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter

relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure

loss

Diameter (Order code

option)

Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and

installation data

Mounting set (Order code

option)

Determination of

insertion depth

Calculation of insertion depth depending on

the selected accessory (t-mass)

Pipe length (Order code

option)

Selection of Material

(Sensor)

Selection and verification of corrosion

consistency

Sensor material Liner

material (Order code

option)

Selection of Process

connection

Selection and verification of pressure and

temperature curve

Process connection (Order

code option)

Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order

code option)

Pressure equipment

directive (PED)

Definition of PED-category depending on the

application and verification of the offered

process connections

Additional approval (Order

code option)

Custody transfer Verification or specification of application

data definition of measuring range

Custody transfer (Order

code option)

Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow

conditioner)

Accessory enclosed or extra

position (Order code

option)

Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow

splitter

Sensor Options (Order code

option)

Evaluation of

measuring range

Calculation of measuring range Calculation

datachart

Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and

accessory where required

Calculation

datachart

Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation

datachart

Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion

database with relevant data

The Order code page consists of different frames

81 Order code

Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically

by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and

Configurator for the valid order codes

82 Order code options

Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration

options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the

order code

The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection

on the Sizing page

The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page

The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options

Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed

these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still

feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning

message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change

83 Extended order code

831 General

Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen

In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables

for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and

activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the

Extended order code feature is used

With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order

code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the

order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator

832 Device parameter data settings

To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is

not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the

ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator

The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo

84 Button center

The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to

proceed with your Sizing process

Configurator

Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order

code

Print Sizing

Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product can be pasted into a project

Back to top

9 Conversion Calculator

Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity

All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by

selecting one out of the drop down lists

The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another

The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all

common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be

recalculated automatically

Back to top

10 Unit Defaults

Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings

menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored

whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session

Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily

for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button

Back to top

11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)

111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)

Disclaimer

The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from

publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and

assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a

minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion

fatigue life

The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different

process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined

Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check

Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled

The content of the database was sourced from

bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)

bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG

bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta

bull Various Internet Links

bull Various Corrosion data bases

The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application

and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process

temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows

Metal

Class Description depth of corrosion per surface

A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)

B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)

C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)

NR not recommended

U unknown

Plastics

Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength

A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear

B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year

lt=30 loss of tensile strength year

C not resistant lt= 50year

lt=50 loss of tensile strength year

NR not recommended

U unknown

Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used

112 Using Corrosion Check

Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion

information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability

of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not

appear at the top of the page

Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the

corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table

The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid

The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion

database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message

is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning

message

The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project

module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing

Back to top

12 Settings (Sizing Flow)

The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the

button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select

Sizing Flow

The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this

function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings

saved are loaded with the Load Default button

Setting Impact when activated

Basic functions

Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply

Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order

classification PED device check code page and printouts

Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits

The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits

No indication of default start data input of data by user

By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually

Advanced functions

Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)

The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles

Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates

My View

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

DP Flow

Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters

Activates said functions

Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP

flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

Back to top

13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines

131 General

Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation

Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)

Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures

132 Fluid engine

General Information

The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the

fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor

Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both

liquids and for gases

Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data

Liquid Calculation

Calculation of the acentric factor Omega

Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure

Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby

bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC

bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database

bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms

bull

The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs

Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature

bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3

bull Alpha in 1K

bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K

bull Toper in K

bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3

The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs

Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature

bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3

bull AL (Viscosity factor)

bull BL (Viscosity factor)

bull Toper in K

bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt

Gas calculation

The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and

pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and

temperature

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull Zoper (Compressibility)

Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)

Toper in K

bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3

Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull c Kappa

Steam Calculation

Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard

The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard

(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use

The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from

bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and

bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa

This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only

That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms

Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator

133 Gas engine

The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the

fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine

The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of

the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted

process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine

Back to top

14 Print Sizing

The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured

and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page

The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens

bull Page format size margins orientation and format

bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter

bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report

Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed

bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo

bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout

Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered

Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page

Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are

possible Please check the help manual of the Project module

Back to top

15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by

manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002

The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection

options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator

takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable

flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and

Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can

switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator

1 Categorisation of the application

2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests

bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this

option

PED Categories

Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered

during the sizing and ordering process They include

bull All ultrasonic flowmeters

bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo

bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water

bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the

static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure

bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume

The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data

danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)

Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements

have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen

device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and

nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case

a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet

All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout

Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)

Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and

temperature are the main parameters

If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required

data in the min nom and max columns

If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the

necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating

Danger posed by the fluid

The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the

case of gases the stability of the gas is also important

The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo

according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)

All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations

belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is

above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture

bull H200-H205 (explosive)

bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)

bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)

bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)

bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)

bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)

bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)

In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in

Danger Symbols below

In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED

fluid groups

rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids

Order code

If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option

this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page

With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family

nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration

If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center

Danger Symbols

Danger symbol Explanation H-rates

C corrosive H 314

Cl chemical instable

E explosive H200-H205

F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223

F flammable H 225-H228

N environmental

dangerous

O oxidizing H271-H272

T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330

H372

T poisonous

Xi irritating

Xn injurious to health

Back to top

16 Online Update

The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator

Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes

and updated system databases with the latest products

The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator

newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the

Settings menu

Page 19: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use

Caution By manually selecting the sensor material or process connection the data will be shown in blue If

additional process data is then changed the manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case

whether or not the selection is still feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will

automatically be selected (without any warning message) The new selection is then displayed in black to

make the user aware of the change

24 Meter Operating Range

The operating range of a flowmeter is defined by the minimum and maximum values or calibrated values

If a Vortex meter is selected the linear value is also indicated as a start of the linear measurement range The

measured error is constant from linear to maximum measured range

For Vortex also a default (factory settings) and a maximum sensitivity is visible

For more information please use the Parameter help in Sizing Flow

Caution Meter operating range is indicated based on nominal process data Depending on the units used it is

possible that the maximum flow is higher than operating range max For example using Nm3h and highly

differing pressuretemperature values can lead to this behaviour

25 Calculated Results

This section shows the calculated results of sizing

Requested flow

Indicates the values used for the calculation

Flow velocity

Flow velocity max

Pressure Loss

An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss

calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This

group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be

marginal and without any influence on your process

Velocity (meas tube)

This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation

refers to the nominal density

Measured Error Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the

flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

Measured Error spec Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding

requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration

Measured Error Mass

These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for

Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the

corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead

of a value

Measured Error spec Mass

Reynolds No

The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further

sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions

Frequency

This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is

proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity

PED results

Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please

note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window

Meter size

This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually

adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have

done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is

locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal

button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This

means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are

saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter

The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters

Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will

also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements

26 Warnings

Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the

green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is

pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or

expanded using the arrow on the right

Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next

Endress+Hauser Sales Centre

27 Button center

A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of

the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process

Print Sizing

Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports

Sizing Energy

Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the

Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow

Configurator

Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code

Add to shop basket

Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This

button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the

Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline

version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when

Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Reset

This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results

Back to top

3 Custody transfer

Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of

among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals

If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection

- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out

According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different

process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature

are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task

page

In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the

approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum

turn down is also checked

Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your

entries

The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval

As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB

7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the

max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated

With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature

The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the

ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit

values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter

measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures

the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the

warning messages

Back to top

4 Accessories

There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories

page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)

In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg

mounting set 41) are executed

41 Accessories page

Example mounting set

Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations

Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)

42 Activating a checkbox

Example Flow conditioner

For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are

automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and

process connection can be selected

43 Accessories within the order code

The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving

process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed

Applicator versions)

Back to top

5 Fluid Properties page

51 General description

Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page

This view supports the following types of fluids

Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under

ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page

The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases

Liquids

Media type Standardprocess

Fluids not 100 water (example 0

Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)

Support points (linear interpolation)

Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97

Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-

Gas (Air) UDG)

Redlich-Kwong

Gases

Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas

engine

Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine

Air Ozone O3

Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)

Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr

Butane Nitric Oxide NO3

Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0

Carbon monoxide

Chlorine

Ethane

Ethylene

Helium

Hydrogen

Hydrogen chloride

Hydrogen sulphide

Krypton

Methane

Neon

Nitrogen

Oxygen

Propane

Xenon

0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User

Defined Gas Mixture 0

Oxygen

The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for

example density or viscosity

The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information

classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of

the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They

are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are

important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new

medium

The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The

parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll

to the group header you see on your screen

When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page

A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details

Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page

52 Parameter groups

521 Fluid information

In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible

Fluid name contains the name of the fluid

Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In

many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available

State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many

purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the

steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account

Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made

522 Fluid Description

The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid

Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian

Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid

Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and

syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or

measurement principle

Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is

flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals

Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive

Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for

conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to

50 microScm and more than 50 microScm

Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to

67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo

Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details

Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid

The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user

defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

523 Basic Fluid Parameters

The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be

created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages

Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid

Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid

Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point

Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid

Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas

The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has

an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also

depend on density and viscosity

In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and

sound velocity

524 Constants

This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas

type selected

Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken

from the Unit Defaults page

Molar mass molecular weight of the gas

Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)

Heating value calorific value of the gas

The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine

For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is

used to calculate the sound velocity

525 Typical Operating Conditions

The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions

Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the

mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of

the typical operating conditions are editable

526 Temperature Viscosity

This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description

The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function

of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve

for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range

527 Temperature Density

This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Density density at the support point

The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of

operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for

fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range

528 Temperature Heat capacity

This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point

The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

529 Temperature Vapor pressure

This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid

Temperature temperature at the support point

Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point

The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

5210 Gas mixture

The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture

Gas name of the gas (first field)

Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture

Unit unit for mass fraction

A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are

given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas

Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report

The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is

displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine

only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100

5211 Fluid properties and results

This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed

differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help

function

Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom

display ldquonardquo

The calculated constants are eg

Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions

Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions

Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions

Heating value the calorific value of the fluid

For liquids

Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data

displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page

AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

For solids

a viscosity coefficient for the gas

n viscosity coefficient for gases

5212 Reference values

This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters

displayed differ according to the fluid selected

Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation

Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780

Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780

Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533

Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533

5213 Measuring task

The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of

the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details

opens a window with more information about the approval

5214 Restriction on flowmeters

This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates

that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details

opens a window with more information about the restrictions

53 Setting reference conditions

Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu

There are two possibilities

SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are

- pressure 10132 bar absolute

- temperature 0deg Celsius

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter

US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are

- pressure 14696 psi absolute

- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter

54 Creating a User Defined Fluid

Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the

world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids

1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field

Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid

at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam

2 Now click on the Properties button

3 When the page has opened click on New

4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate

fields which are now open for editing

When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database

Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system

fluids

If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields

will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General

parameters list and you can start again

If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit

button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close

button exits the page without saving the changes

55 Import and Export of Fluids

In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this

the import and export function of the fluid database can be used

In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information

are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want

to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export

button

Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database

To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file

56 Fluid Properties report

The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing

page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results

and reference values

Back to top

6 Compare size and sensor

61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)

When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose

Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the

ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function

When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The

displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter

The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by

clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the

corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table

will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can

be reapplied

The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you

click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed

as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator

can be reapplied

62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)

The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement

principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are

selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator

versions

Back to top

7 Chart page

71 Introduction

The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case

of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available

The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections

72 General Parameters

In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a

repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on

the sizing page

73 Process data

Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference

74 Curves

The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if

offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter

In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be

automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be

activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner

If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report

75 Flow limits

The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range

and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are

different

76 Chart

The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the

pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using

the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional

information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different

curves within the chart

The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons

The content of the printout depends on the options selected

Back to top

8 Order Code

Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order

information

In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring

principle and flowmeter These are as follows

Feature Description Order codeSizing

Definition of ideal

diameter

Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter

relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure

loss

Diameter (Order code

option)

Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and

installation data

Mounting set (Order code

option)

Determination of

insertion depth

Calculation of insertion depth depending on

the selected accessory (t-mass)

Pipe length (Order code

option)

Selection of Material

(Sensor)

Selection and verification of corrosion

consistency

Sensor material Liner

material (Order code

option)

Selection of Process

connection

Selection and verification of pressure and

temperature curve

Process connection (Order

code option)

Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order

code option)

Pressure equipment

directive (PED)

Definition of PED-category depending on the

application and verification of the offered

process connections

Additional approval (Order

code option)

Custody transfer Verification or specification of application

data definition of measuring range

Custody transfer (Order

code option)

Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow

conditioner)

Accessory enclosed or extra

position (Order code

option)

Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow

splitter

Sensor Options (Order code

option)

Evaluation of

measuring range

Calculation of measuring range Calculation

datachart

Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and

accessory where required

Calculation

datachart

Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation

datachart

Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion

database with relevant data

The Order code page consists of different frames

81 Order code

Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically

by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and

Configurator for the valid order codes

82 Order code options

Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration

options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the

order code

The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection

on the Sizing page

The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page

The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options

Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed

these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still

feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning

message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change

83 Extended order code

831 General

Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen

In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables

for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and

activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the

Extended order code feature is used

With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order

code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the

order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator

832 Device parameter data settings

To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is

not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the

ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator

The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo

84 Button center

The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to

proceed with your Sizing process

Configurator

Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order

code

Print Sizing

Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product can be pasted into a project

Back to top

9 Conversion Calculator

Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity

All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by

selecting one out of the drop down lists

The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another

The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all

common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be

recalculated automatically

Back to top

10 Unit Defaults

Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings

menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored

whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session

Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily

for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button

Back to top

11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)

111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)

Disclaimer

The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from

publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and

assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a

minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion

fatigue life

The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different

process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined

Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check

Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled

The content of the database was sourced from

bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)

bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG

bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta

bull Various Internet Links

bull Various Corrosion data bases

The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application

and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process

temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows

Metal

Class Description depth of corrosion per surface

A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)

B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)

C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)

NR not recommended

U unknown

Plastics

Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength

A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear

B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year

lt=30 loss of tensile strength year

C not resistant lt= 50year

lt=50 loss of tensile strength year

NR not recommended

U unknown

Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used

112 Using Corrosion Check

Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion

information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability

of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not

appear at the top of the page

Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the

corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table

The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid

The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion

database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message

is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning

message

The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project

module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing

Back to top

12 Settings (Sizing Flow)

The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the

button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select

Sizing Flow

The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this

function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings

saved are loaded with the Load Default button

Setting Impact when activated

Basic functions

Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply

Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order

classification PED device check code page and printouts

Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits

The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits

No indication of default start data input of data by user

By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually

Advanced functions

Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)

The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles

Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates

My View

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

DP Flow

Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters

Activates said functions

Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP

flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

Back to top

13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines

131 General

Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation

Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)

Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures

132 Fluid engine

General Information

The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the

fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor

Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both

liquids and for gases

Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data

Liquid Calculation

Calculation of the acentric factor Omega

Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure

Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby

bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC

bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database

bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms

bull

The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs

Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature

bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3

bull Alpha in 1K

bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K

bull Toper in K

bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3

The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs

Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature

bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3

bull AL (Viscosity factor)

bull BL (Viscosity factor)

bull Toper in K

bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt

Gas calculation

The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and

pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and

temperature

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull Zoper (Compressibility)

Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)

Toper in K

bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3

Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull c Kappa

Steam Calculation

Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard

The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard

(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use

The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from

bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and

bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa

This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only

That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms

Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator

133 Gas engine

The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the

fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine

The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of

the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted

process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine

Back to top

14 Print Sizing

The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured

and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page

The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens

bull Page format size margins orientation and format

bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter

bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report

Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed

bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo

bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout

Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered

Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page

Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are

possible Please check the help manual of the Project module

Back to top

15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by

manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002

The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection

options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator

takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable

flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and

Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can

switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator

1 Categorisation of the application

2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests

bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this

option

PED Categories

Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered

during the sizing and ordering process They include

bull All ultrasonic flowmeters

bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo

bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water

bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the

static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure

bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume

The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data

danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)

Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements

have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen

device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and

nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case

a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet

All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout

Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)

Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and

temperature are the main parameters

If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required

data in the min nom and max columns

If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the

necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating

Danger posed by the fluid

The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the

case of gases the stability of the gas is also important

The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo

according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)

All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations

belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is

above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture

bull H200-H205 (explosive)

bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)

bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)

bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)

bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)

bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)

bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)

In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in

Danger Symbols below

In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED

fluid groups

rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids

Order code

If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option

this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page

With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family

nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration

If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center

Danger Symbols

Danger symbol Explanation H-rates

C corrosive H 314

Cl chemical instable

E explosive H200-H205

F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223

F flammable H 225-H228

N environmental

dangerous

O oxidizing H271-H272

T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330

H372

T poisonous

Xi irritating

Xn injurious to health

Back to top

16 Online Update

The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator

Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes

and updated system databases with the latest products

The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator

newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the

Settings menu

Page 20: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use

25 Calculated Results

This section shows the calculated results of sizing

Requested flow

Indicates the values used for the calculation

Flow velocity

Flow velocity max

Pressure Loss

An enduring pressure loss in a pipe is caused by the installation of a flowmeter in a pipe For the pressure loss

calculation the corresponding requested flow rates the nominal density and viscosity values are used This

group of fields is not displayed for electro-magnetic and ultrasonic flowmeters because the result would be

marginal and without any influence on your process

Velocity (meas tube)

This group of fields shows the velocity inside the flowmeter itself at the requested flow rates The calculation

refers to the nominal density

Measured Error Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the

flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

Measured Error spec Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding

requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration

Measured Error Mass

These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for

Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the

corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead

of a value

Measured Error spec Mass

Reynolds No

The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further

sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions

Frequency

This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is

proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity

PED results

Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please

note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window

Meter size

This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually

adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have

done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is

locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal

button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This

means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are

saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter

The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters

Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will

also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements

26 Warnings

Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the

green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is

pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or

expanded using the arrow on the right

Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next

Endress+Hauser Sales Centre

27 Button center

A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of

the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process

Print Sizing

Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports

Sizing Energy

Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the

Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow

Configurator

Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code

Add to shop basket

Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This

button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the

Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline

version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when

Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Reset

This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results

Back to top

3 Custody transfer

Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of

among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals

If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection

- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out

According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different

process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature

are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task

page

In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the

approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum

turn down is also checked

Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your

entries

The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval

As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB

7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the

max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated

With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature

The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the

ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit

values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter

measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures

the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the

warning messages

Back to top

4 Accessories

There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories

page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)

In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg

mounting set 41) are executed

41 Accessories page

Example mounting set

Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations

Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)

42 Activating a checkbox

Example Flow conditioner

For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are

automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and

process connection can be selected

43 Accessories within the order code

The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving

process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed

Applicator versions)

Back to top

5 Fluid Properties page

51 General description

Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page

This view supports the following types of fluids

Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under

ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page

The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases

Liquids

Media type Standardprocess

Fluids not 100 water (example 0

Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)

Support points (linear interpolation)

Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97

Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-

Gas (Air) UDG)

Redlich-Kwong

Gases

Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas

engine

Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine

Air Ozone O3

Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)

Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr

Butane Nitric Oxide NO3

Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0

Carbon monoxide

Chlorine

Ethane

Ethylene

Helium

Hydrogen

Hydrogen chloride

Hydrogen sulphide

Krypton

Methane

Neon

Nitrogen

Oxygen

Propane

Xenon

0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User

Defined Gas Mixture 0

Oxygen

The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for

example density or viscosity

The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information

classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of

the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They

are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are

important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new

medium

The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The

parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll

to the group header you see on your screen

When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page

A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details

Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page

52 Parameter groups

521 Fluid information

In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible

Fluid name contains the name of the fluid

Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In

many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available

State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many

purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the

steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account

Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made

522 Fluid Description

The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid

Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian

Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid

Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and

syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or

measurement principle

Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is

flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals

Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive

Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for

conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to

50 microScm and more than 50 microScm

Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to

67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo

Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details

Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid

The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user

defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

523 Basic Fluid Parameters

The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be

created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages

Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid

Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid

Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point

Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid

Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas

The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has

an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also

depend on density and viscosity

In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and

sound velocity

524 Constants

This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas

type selected

Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken

from the Unit Defaults page

Molar mass molecular weight of the gas

Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)

Heating value calorific value of the gas

The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine

For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is

used to calculate the sound velocity

525 Typical Operating Conditions

The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions

Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the

mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of

the typical operating conditions are editable

526 Temperature Viscosity

This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description

The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function

of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve

for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range

527 Temperature Density

This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Density density at the support point

The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of

operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for

fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range

528 Temperature Heat capacity

This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point

The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

529 Temperature Vapor pressure

This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid

Temperature temperature at the support point

Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point

The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

5210 Gas mixture

The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture

Gas name of the gas (first field)

Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture

Unit unit for mass fraction

A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are

given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas

Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report

The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is

displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine

only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100

5211 Fluid properties and results

This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed

differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help

function

Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom

display ldquonardquo

The calculated constants are eg

Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions

Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions

Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions

Heating value the calorific value of the fluid

For liquids

Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data

displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page

AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

For solids

a viscosity coefficient for the gas

n viscosity coefficient for gases

5212 Reference values

This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters

displayed differ according to the fluid selected

Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation

Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780

Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780

Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533

Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533

5213 Measuring task

The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of

the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details

opens a window with more information about the approval

5214 Restriction on flowmeters

This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates

that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details

opens a window with more information about the restrictions

53 Setting reference conditions

Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu

There are two possibilities

SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are

- pressure 10132 bar absolute

- temperature 0deg Celsius

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter

US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are

- pressure 14696 psi absolute

- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter

54 Creating a User Defined Fluid

Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the

world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids

1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field

Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid

at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam

2 Now click on the Properties button

3 When the page has opened click on New

4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate

fields which are now open for editing

When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database

Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system

fluids

If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields

will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General

parameters list and you can start again

If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit

button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close

button exits the page without saving the changes

55 Import and Export of Fluids

In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this

the import and export function of the fluid database can be used

In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information

are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want

to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export

button

Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database

To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file

56 Fluid Properties report

The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing

page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results

and reference values

Back to top

6 Compare size and sensor

61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)

When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose

Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the

ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function

When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The

displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter

The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by

clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the

corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table

will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can

be reapplied

The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you

click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed

as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator

can be reapplied

62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)

The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement

principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are

selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator

versions

Back to top

7 Chart page

71 Introduction

The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case

of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available

The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections

72 General Parameters

In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a

repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on

the sizing page

73 Process data

Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference

74 Curves

The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if

offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter

In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be

automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be

activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner

If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report

75 Flow limits

The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range

and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are

different

76 Chart

The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the

pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using

the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional

information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different

curves within the chart

The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons

The content of the printout depends on the options selected

Back to top

8 Order Code

Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order

information

In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring

principle and flowmeter These are as follows

Feature Description Order codeSizing

Definition of ideal

diameter

Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter

relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure

loss

Diameter (Order code

option)

Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and

installation data

Mounting set (Order code

option)

Determination of

insertion depth

Calculation of insertion depth depending on

the selected accessory (t-mass)

Pipe length (Order code

option)

Selection of Material

(Sensor)

Selection and verification of corrosion

consistency

Sensor material Liner

material (Order code

option)

Selection of Process

connection

Selection and verification of pressure and

temperature curve

Process connection (Order

code option)

Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order

code option)

Pressure equipment

directive (PED)

Definition of PED-category depending on the

application and verification of the offered

process connections

Additional approval (Order

code option)

Custody transfer Verification or specification of application

data definition of measuring range

Custody transfer (Order

code option)

Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow

conditioner)

Accessory enclosed or extra

position (Order code

option)

Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow

splitter

Sensor Options (Order code

option)

Evaluation of

measuring range

Calculation of measuring range Calculation

datachart

Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and

accessory where required

Calculation

datachart

Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation

datachart

Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion

database with relevant data

The Order code page consists of different frames

81 Order code

Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically

by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and

Configurator for the valid order codes

82 Order code options

Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration

options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the

order code

The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection

on the Sizing page

The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page

The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options

Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed

these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still

feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning

message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change

83 Extended order code

831 General

Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen

In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables

for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and

activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the

Extended order code feature is used

With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order

code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the

order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator

832 Device parameter data settings

To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is

not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the

ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator

The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo

84 Button center

The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to

proceed with your Sizing process

Configurator

Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order

code

Print Sizing

Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product can be pasted into a project

Back to top

9 Conversion Calculator

Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity

All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by

selecting one out of the drop down lists

The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another

The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all

common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be

recalculated automatically

Back to top

10 Unit Defaults

Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings

menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored

whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session

Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily

for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button

Back to top

11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)

111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)

Disclaimer

The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from

publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and

assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a

minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion

fatigue life

The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different

process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined

Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check

Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled

The content of the database was sourced from

bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)

bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG

bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta

bull Various Internet Links

bull Various Corrosion data bases

The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application

and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process

temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows

Metal

Class Description depth of corrosion per surface

A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)

B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)

C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)

NR not recommended

U unknown

Plastics

Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength

A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear

B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year

lt=30 loss of tensile strength year

C not resistant lt= 50year

lt=50 loss of tensile strength year

NR not recommended

U unknown

Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used

112 Using Corrosion Check

Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion

information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability

of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not

appear at the top of the page

Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the

corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table

The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid

The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion

database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message

is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning

message

The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project

module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing

Back to top

12 Settings (Sizing Flow)

The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the

button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select

Sizing Flow

The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this

function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings

saved are loaded with the Load Default button

Setting Impact when activated

Basic functions

Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply

Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order

classification PED device check code page and printouts

Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits

The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits

No indication of default start data input of data by user

By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually

Advanced functions

Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)

The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles

Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates

My View

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

DP Flow

Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters

Activates said functions

Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP

flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

Back to top

13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines

131 General

Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation

Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)

Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures

132 Fluid engine

General Information

The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the

fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor

Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both

liquids and for gases

Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data

Liquid Calculation

Calculation of the acentric factor Omega

Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure

Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby

bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC

bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database

bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms

bull

The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs

Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature

bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3

bull Alpha in 1K

bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K

bull Toper in K

bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3

The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs

Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature

bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3

bull AL (Viscosity factor)

bull BL (Viscosity factor)

bull Toper in K

bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt

Gas calculation

The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and

pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and

temperature

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull Zoper (Compressibility)

Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)

Toper in K

bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3

Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull c Kappa

Steam Calculation

Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard

The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard

(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use

The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from

bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and

bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa

This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only

That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms

Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator

133 Gas engine

The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the

fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine

The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of

the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted

process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine

Back to top

14 Print Sizing

The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured

and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page

The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens

bull Page format size margins orientation and format

bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter

bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report

Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed

bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo

bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout

Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered

Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page

Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are

possible Please check the help manual of the Project module

Back to top

15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by

manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002

The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection

options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator

takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable

flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and

Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can

switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator

1 Categorisation of the application

2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests

bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this

option

PED Categories

Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered

during the sizing and ordering process They include

bull All ultrasonic flowmeters

bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo

bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water

bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the

static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure

bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume

The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data

danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)

Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements

have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen

device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and

nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case

a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet

All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout

Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)

Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and

temperature are the main parameters

If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required

data in the min nom and max columns

If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the

necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating

Danger posed by the fluid

The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the

case of gases the stability of the gas is also important

The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo

according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)

All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations

belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is

above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture

bull H200-H205 (explosive)

bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)

bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)

bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)

bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)

bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)

bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)

In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in

Danger Symbols below

In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED

fluid groups

rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids

Order code

If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option

this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page

With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family

nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration

If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center

Danger Symbols

Danger symbol Explanation H-rates

C corrosive H 314

Cl chemical instable

E explosive H200-H205

F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223

F flammable H 225-H228

N environmental

dangerous

O oxidizing H271-H272

T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330

H372

T poisonous

Xi irritating

Xn injurious to health

Back to top

16 Online Update

The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator

Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes

and updated system databases with the latest products

The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator

newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the

Settings menu

Page 21: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use

Measured Error Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter Values are displayed only if the corresponding requested flow rate is within the

flowmeterrsquos operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

Measured Error spec Volume

These fields show the maximum measured error of the volumetric flow measurement as specified for the

selected flowmeter but with higher calibration category Values are displayed only if the corresponding

requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead of a value

To achieve the measured Error spec volume choose a higher quality standard of calibration

Measured Error Mass

These fields show the measured error of a direct or calculated mass flow rate Values are displayed only for

Coriolis mass flowmeters For all other flowmeters na is displayed instead Values are only displayed if the

corresponding requested flow rate is within the flowmeters operating range Otherwise na appears instead

of a value

Measured Error spec Mass

Reynolds No

The calculation of this value is based on nominal values such as flow rate density etc It is used for further

sizing calculations and gives you an idea of the flow conditions

Frequency

This field appears only for Vortex flowmeters and shows the approximate vortex frequency which is

proportional to the volumetric flow or flow velocity

PED results

Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please

note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window

Meter size

This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually

adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have

done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is

locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal

button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This

means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are

saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter

The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters

Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will

also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements

26 Warnings

Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the

green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is

pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or

expanded using the arrow on the right

Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next

Endress+Hauser Sales Centre

27 Button center

A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of

the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process

Print Sizing

Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports

Sizing Energy

Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the

Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow

Configurator

Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code

Add to shop basket

Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This

button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the

Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline

version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when

Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Reset

This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results

Back to top

3 Custody transfer

Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of

among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals

If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection

- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out

According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different

process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature

are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task

page

In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the

approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum

turn down is also checked

Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your

entries

The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval

As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB

7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the

max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated

With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature

The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the

ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit

values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter

measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures

the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the

warning messages

Back to top

4 Accessories

There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories

page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)

In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg

mounting set 41) are executed

41 Accessories page

Example mounting set

Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations

Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)

42 Activating a checkbox

Example Flow conditioner

For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are

automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and

process connection can be selected

43 Accessories within the order code

The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving

process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed

Applicator versions)

Back to top

5 Fluid Properties page

51 General description

Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page

This view supports the following types of fluids

Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under

ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page

The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases

Liquids

Media type Standardprocess

Fluids not 100 water (example 0

Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)

Support points (linear interpolation)

Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97

Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-

Gas (Air) UDG)

Redlich-Kwong

Gases

Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas

engine

Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine

Air Ozone O3

Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)

Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr

Butane Nitric Oxide NO3

Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0

Carbon monoxide

Chlorine

Ethane

Ethylene

Helium

Hydrogen

Hydrogen chloride

Hydrogen sulphide

Krypton

Methane

Neon

Nitrogen

Oxygen

Propane

Xenon

0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User

Defined Gas Mixture 0

Oxygen

The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for

example density or viscosity

The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information

classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of

the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They

are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are

important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new

medium

The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The

parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll

to the group header you see on your screen

When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page

A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details

Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page

52 Parameter groups

521 Fluid information

In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible

Fluid name contains the name of the fluid

Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In

many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available

State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many

purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the

steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account

Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made

522 Fluid Description

The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid

Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian

Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid

Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and

syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or

measurement principle

Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is

flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals

Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive

Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for

conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to

50 microScm and more than 50 microScm

Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to

67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo

Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details

Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid

The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user

defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

523 Basic Fluid Parameters

The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be

created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages

Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid

Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid

Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point

Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid

Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas

The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has

an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also

depend on density and viscosity

In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and

sound velocity

524 Constants

This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas

type selected

Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken

from the Unit Defaults page

Molar mass molecular weight of the gas

Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)

Heating value calorific value of the gas

The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine

For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is

used to calculate the sound velocity

525 Typical Operating Conditions

The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions

Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the

mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of

the typical operating conditions are editable

526 Temperature Viscosity

This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description

The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function

of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve

for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range

527 Temperature Density

This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Density density at the support point

The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of

operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for

fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range

528 Temperature Heat capacity

This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point

The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

529 Temperature Vapor pressure

This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid

Temperature temperature at the support point

Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point

The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

5210 Gas mixture

The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture

Gas name of the gas (first field)

Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture

Unit unit for mass fraction

A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are

given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas

Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report

The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is

displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine

only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100

5211 Fluid properties and results

This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed

differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help

function

Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom

display ldquonardquo

The calculated constants are eg

Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions

Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions

Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions

Heating value the calorific value of the fluid

For liquids

Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data

displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page

AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

For solids

a viscosity coefficient for the gas

n viscosity coefficient for gases

5212 Reference values

This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters

displayed differ according to the fluid selected

Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation

Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780

Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780

Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533

Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533

5213 Measuring task

The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of

the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details

opens a window with more information about the approval

5214 Restriction on flowmeters

This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates

that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details

opens a window with more information about the restrictions

53 Setting reference conditions

Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu

There are two possibilities

SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are

- pressure 10132 bar absolute

- temperature 0deg Celsius

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter

US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are

- pressure 14696 psi absolute

- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter

54 Creating a User Defined Fluid

Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the

world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids

1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field

Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid

at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam

2 Now click on the Properties button

3 When the page has opened click on New

4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate

fields which are now open for editing

When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database

Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system

fluids

If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields

will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General

parameters list and you can start again

If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit

button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close

button exits the page without saving the changes

55 Import and Export of Fluids

In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this

the import and export function of the fluid database can be used

In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information

are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want

to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export

button

Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database

To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file

56 Fluid Properties report

The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing

page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results

and reference values

Back to top

6 Compare size and sensor

61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)

When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose

Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the

ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function

When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The

displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter

The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by

clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the

corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table

will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can

be reapplied

The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you

click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed

as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator

can be reapplied

62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)

The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement

principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are

selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator

versions

Back to top

7 Chart page

71 Introduction

The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case

of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available

The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections

72 General Parameters

In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a

repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on

the sizing page

73 Process data

Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference

74 Curves

The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if

offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter

In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be

automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be

activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner

If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report

75 Flow limits

The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range

and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are

different

76 Chart

The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the

pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using

the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional

information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different

curves within the chart

The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons

The content of the printout depends on the options selected

Back to top

8 Order Code

Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order

information

In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring

principle and flowmeter These are as follows

Feature Description Order codeSizing

Definition of ideal

diameter

Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter

relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure

loss

Diameter (Order code

option)

Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and

installation data

Mounting set (Order code

option)

Determination of

insertion depth

Calculation of insertion depth depending on

the selected accessory (t-mass)

Pipe length (Order code

option)

Selection of Material

(Sensor)

Selection and verification of corrosion

consistency

Sensor material Liner

material (Order code

option)

Selection of Process

connection

Selection and verification of pressure and

temperature curve

Process connection (Order

code option)

Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order

code option)

Pressure equipment

directive (PED)

Definition of PED-category depending on the

application and verification of the offered

process connections

Additional approval (Order

code option)

Custody transfer Verification or specification of application

data definition of measuring range

Custody transfer (Order

code option)

Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow

conditioner)

Accessory enclosed or extra

position (Order code

option)

Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow

splitter

Sensor Options (Order code

option)

Evaluation of

measuring range

Calculation of measuring range Calculation

datachart

Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and

accessory where required

Calculation

datachart

Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation

datachart

Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion

database with relevant data

The Order code page consists of different frames

81 Order code

Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically

by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and

Configurator for the valid order codes

82 Order code options

Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration

options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the

order code

The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection

on the Sizing page

The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page

The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options

Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed

these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still

feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning

message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change

83 Extended order code

831 General

Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen

In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables

for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and

activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the

Extended order code feature is used

With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order

code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the

order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator

832 Device parameter data settings

To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is

not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the

ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator

The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo

84 Button center

The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to

proceed with your Sizing process

Configurator

Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order

code

Print Sizing

Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product can be pasted into a project

Back to top

9 Conversion Calculator

Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity

All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by

selecting one out of the drop down lists

The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another

The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all

common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be

recalculated automatically

Back to top

10 Unit Defaults

Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings

menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored

whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session

Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily

for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button

Back to top

11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)

111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)

Disclaimer

The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from

publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and

assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a

minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion

fatigue life

The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different

process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined

Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check

Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled

The content of the database was sourced from

bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)

bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG

bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta

bull Various Internet Links

bull Various Corrosion data bases

The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application

and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process

temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows

Metal

Class Description depth of corrosion per surface

A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)

B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)

C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)

NR not recommended

U unknown

Plastics

Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength

A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear

B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year

lt=30 loss of tensile strength year

C not resistant lt= 50year

lt=50 loss of tensile strength year

NR not recommended

U unknown

Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used

112 Using Corrosion Check

Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion

information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability

of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not

appear at the top of the page

Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the

corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table

The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid

The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion

database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message

is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning

message

The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project

module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing

Back to top

12 Settings (Sizing Flow)

The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the

button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select

Sizing Flow

The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this

function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings

saved are loaded with the Load Default button

Setting Impact when activated

Basic functions

Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply

Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order

classification PED device check code page and printouts

Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits

The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits

No indication of default start data input of data by user

By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually

Advanced functions

Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)

The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles

Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates

My View

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

DP Flow

Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters

Activates said functions

Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP

flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

Back to top

13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines

131 General

Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation

Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)

Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures

132 Fluid engine

General Information

The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the

fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor

Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both

liquids and for gases

Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data

Liquid Calculation

Calculation of the acentric factor Omega

Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure

Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby

bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC

bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database

bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms

bull

The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs

Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature

bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3

bull Alpha in 1K

bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K

bull Toper in K

bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3

The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs

Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature

bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3

bull AL (Viscosity factor)

bull BL (Viscosity factor)

bull Toper in K

bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt

Gas calculation

The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and

pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and

temperature

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull Zoper (Compressibility)

Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)

Toper in K

bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3

Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull c Kappa

Steam Calculation

Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard

The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard

(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use

The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from

bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and

bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa

This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only

That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms

Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator

133 Gas engine

The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the

fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine

The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of

the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted

process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine

Back to top

14 Print Sizing

The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured

and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page

The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens

bull Page format size margins orientation and format

bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter

bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report

Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed

bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo

bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout

Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered

Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page

Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are

possible Please check the help manual of the Project module

Back to top

15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by

manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002

The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection

options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator

takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable

flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and

Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can

switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator

1 Categorisation of the application

2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests

bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this

option

PED Categories

Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered

during the sizing and ordering process They include

bull All ultrasonic flowmeters

bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo

bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water

bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the

static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure

bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume

The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data

danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)

Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements

have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen

device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and

nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case

a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet

All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout

Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)

Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and

temperature are the main parameters

If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required

data in the min nom and max columns

If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the

necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating

Danger posed by the fluid

The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the

case of gases the stability of the gas is also important

The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo

according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)

All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations

belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is

above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture

bull H200-H205 (explosive)

bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)

bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)

bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)

bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)

bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)

bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)

In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in

Danger Symbols below

In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED

fluid groups

rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids

Order code

If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option

this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page

With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family

nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration

If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center

Danger Symbols

Danger symbol Explanation H-rates

C corrosive H 314

Cl chemical instable

E explosive H200-H205

F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223

F flammable H 225-H228

N environmental

dangerous

O oxidizing H271-H272

T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330

H372

T poisonous

Xi irritating

Xn injurious to health

Back to top

16 Online Update

The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator

Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes

and updated system databases with the latest products

The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator

newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the

Settings menu

Page 22: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use

Applicator indicates the PED (Pressure Equipment Directive) categorisation of your process application Please

note that you have to activate PED as a personal preference within the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The Details button gives more details about the PED Click on OK to return to close the window

Meter size

This field shows the suggested meter size according to the specified connection standard You can manually

adjust the size suggested by Applicator using the two buttons on the left and right of this field If you have

done this once the size will no longer be adjusted by any input in the Operating Conditions frame because it is

locked To let the Applicator suggest a size according to your operating conditions just click on the Proposal

button then the Applicator will suggest an ideal size corresponding to Sound Engineering Practice This

means that the values will not exceed the max flow velocity and max pressure loss These marginal values are

saved in the Applicator database according to fluid and flowmeter

The Compare button allows the selected flowmeter to be compared with up to two other flowmeters

Caution If you define the meter size the available process connections and the minimum pressure rating will

also be affected These can be selected in SensorPipe requirements

26 Warnings

Warnings and messages are displayed for sizing results and operating conditions They can be found in the

green bar between the General parameters and Process data sections As soon as at least one message is

pending the text Message andor Warning appears at the left of the bar The frame can be minimized or

expanded using the arrow on the right

Please pay attention to the warnings and messages In case you have questions please contact your next

Endress+Hauser Sales Centre

27 Button center

A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of

the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process

Print Sizing

Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports

Sizing Energy

Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the

Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow

Configurator

Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code

Add to shop basket

Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This

button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the

Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline

version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when

Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Reset

This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results

Back to top

3 Custody transfer

Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of

among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals

If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection

- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out

According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different

process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature

are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task

page

In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the

approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum

turn down is also checked

Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your

entries

The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval

As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB

7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the

max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated

With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature

The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the

ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit

values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter

measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures

the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the

warning messages

Back to top

4 Accessories

There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories

page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)

In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg

mounting set 41) are executed

41 Accessories page

Example mounting set

Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations

Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)

42 Activating a checkbox

Example Flow conditioner

For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are

automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and

process connection can be selected

43 Accessories within the order code

The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving

process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed

Applicator versions)

Back to top

5 Fluid Properties page

51 General description

Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page

This view supports the following types of fluids

Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under

ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page

The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases

Liquids

Media type Standardprocess

Fluids not 100 water (example 0

Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)

Support points (linear interpolation)

Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97

Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-

Gas (Air) UDG)

Redlich-Kwong

Gases

Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas

engine

Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine

Air Ozone O3

Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)

Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr

Butane Nitric Oxide NO3

Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0

Carbon monoxide

Chlorine

Ethane

Ethylene

Helium

Hydrogen

Hydrogen chloride

Hydrogen sulphide

Krypton

Methane

Neon

Nitrogen

Oxygen

Propane

Xenon

0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User

Defined Gas Mixture 0

Oxygen

The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for

example density or viscosity

The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information

classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of

the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They

are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are

important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new

medium

The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The

parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll

to the group header you see on your screen

When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page

A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details

Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page

52 Parameter groups

521 Fluid information

In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible

Fluid name contains the name of the fluid

Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In

many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available

State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many

purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the

steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account

Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made

522 Fluid Description

The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid

Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian

Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid

Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and

syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or

measurement principle

Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is

flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals

Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive

Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for

conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to

50 microScm and more than 50 microScm

Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to

67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo

Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details

Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid

The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user

defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

523 Basic Fluid Parameters

The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be

created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages

Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid

Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid

Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point

Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid

Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas

The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has

an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also

depend on density and viscosity

In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and

sound velocity

524 Constants

This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas

type selected

Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken

from the Unit Defaults page

Molar mass molecular weight of the gas

Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)

Heating value calorific value of the gas

The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine

For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is

used to calculate the sound velocity

525 Typical Operating Conditions

The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions

Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the

mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of

the typical operating conditions are editable

526 Temperature Viscosity

This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description

The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function

of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve

for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range

527 Temperature Density

This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Density density at the support point

The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of

operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for

fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range

528 Temperature Heat capacity

This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point

The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

529 Temperature Vapor pressure

This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid

Temperature temperature at the support point

Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point

The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

5210 Gas mixture

The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture

Gas name of the gas (first field)

Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture

Unit unit for mass fraction

A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are

given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas

Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report

The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is

displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine

only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100

5211 Fluid properties and results

This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed

differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help

function

Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom

display ldquonardquo

The calculated constants are eg

Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions

Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions

Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions

Heating value the calorific value of the fluid

For liquids

Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data

displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page

AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

For solids

a viscosity coefficient for the gas

n viscosity coefficient for gases

5212 Reference values

This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters

displayed differ according to the fluid selected

Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation

Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780

Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780

Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533

Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533

5213 Measuring task

The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of

the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details

opens a window with more information about the approval

5214 Restriction on flowmeters

This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates

that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details

opens a window with more information about the restrictions

53 Setting reference conditions

Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu

There are two possibilities

SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are

- pressure 10132 bar absolute

- temperature 0deg Celsius

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter

US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are

- pressure 14696 psi absolute

- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter

54 Creating a User Defined Fluid

Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the

world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids

1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field

Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid

at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam

2 Now click on the Properties button

3 When the page has opened click on New

4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate

fields which are now open for editing

When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database

Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system

fluids

If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields

will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General

parameters list and you can start again

If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit

button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close

button exits the page without saving the changes

55 Import and Export of Fluids

In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this

the import and export function of the fluid database can be used

In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information

are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want

to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export

button

Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database

To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file

56 Fluid Properties report

The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing

page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results

and reference values

Back to top

6 Compare size and sensor

61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)

When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose

Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the

ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function

When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The

displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter

The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by

clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the

corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table

will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can

be reapplied

The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you

click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed

as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator

can be reapplied

62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)

The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement

principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are

selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator

versions

Back to top

7 Chart page

71 Introduction

The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case

of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available

The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections

72 General Parameters

In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a

repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on

the sizing page

73 Process data

Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference

74 Curves

The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if

offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter

In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be

automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be

activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner

If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report

75 Flow limits

The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range

and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are

different

76 Chart

The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the

pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using

the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional

information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different

curves within the chart

The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons

The content of the printout depends on the options selected

Back to top

8 Order Code

Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order

information

In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring

principle and flowmeter These are as follows

Feature Description Order codeSizing

Definition of ideal

diameter

Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter

relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure

loss

Diameter (Order code

option)

Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and

installation data

Mounting set (Order code

option)

Determination of

insertion depth

Calculation of insertion depth depending on

the selected accessory (t-mass)

Pipe length (Order code

option)

Selection of Material

(Sensor)

Selection and verification of corrosion

consistency

Sensor material Liner

material (Order code

option)

Selection of Process

connection

Selection and verification of pressure and

temperature curve

Process connection (Order

code option)

Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order

code option)

Pressure equipment

directive (PED)

Definition of PED-category depending on the

application and verification of the offered

process connections

Additional approval (Order

code option)

Custody transfer Verification or specification of application

data definition of measuring range

Custody transfer (Order

code option)

Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow

conditioner)

Accessory enclosed or extra

position (Order code

option)

Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow

splitter

Sensor Options (Order code

option)

Evaluation of

measuring range

Calculation of measuring range Calculation

datachart

Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and

accessory where required

Calculation

datachart

Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation

datachart

Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion

database with relevant data

The Order code page consists of different frames

81 Order code

Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically

by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and

Configurator for the valid order codes

82 Order code options

Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration

options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the

order code

The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection

on the Sizing page

The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page

The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options

Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed

these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still

feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning

message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change

83 Extended order code

831 General

Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen

In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables

for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and

activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the

Extended order code feature is used

With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order

code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the

order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator

832 Device parameter data settings

To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is

not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the

ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator

The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo

84 Button center

The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to

proceed with your Sizing process

Configurator

Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order

code

Print Sizing

Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product can be pasted into a project

Back to top

9 Conversion Calculator

Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity

All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by

selecting one out of the drop down lists

The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another

The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all

common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be

recalculated automatically

Back to top

10 Unit Defaults

Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings

menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored

whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session

Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily

for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button

Back to top

11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)

111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)

Disclaimer

The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from

publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and

assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a

minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion

fatigue life

The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different

process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined

Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check

Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled

The content of the database was sourced from

bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)

bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG

bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta

bull Various Internet Links

bull Various Corrosion data bases

The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application

and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process

temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows

Metal

Class Description depth of corrosion per surface

A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)

B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)

C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)

NR not recommended

U unknown

Plastics

Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength

A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear

B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year

lt=30 loss of tensile strength year

C not resistant lt= 50year

lt=50 loss of tensile strength year

NR not recommended

U unknown

Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used

112 Using Corrosion Check

Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion

information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability

of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not

appear at the top of the page

Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the

corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table

The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid

The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion

database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message

is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning

message

The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project

module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing

Back to top

12 Settings (Sizing Flow)

The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the

button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select

Sizing Flow

The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this

function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings

saved are loaded with the Load Default button

Setting Impact when activated

Basic functions

Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply

Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order

classification PED device check code page and printouts

Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits

The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits

No indication of default start data input of data by user

By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually

Advanced functions

Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)

The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles

Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates

My View

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

DP Flow

Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters

Activates said functions

Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP

flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

Back to top

13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines

131 General

Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation

Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)

Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures

132 Fluid engine

General Information

The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the

fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor

Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both

liquids and for gases

Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data

Liquid Calculation

Calculation of the acentric factor Omega

Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure

Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby

bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC

bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database

bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms

bull

The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs

Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature

bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3

bull Alpha in 1K

bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K

bull Toper in K

bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3

The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs

Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature

bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3

bull AL (Viscosity factor)

bull BL (Viscosity factor)

bull Toper in K

bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt

Gas calculation

The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and

pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and

temperature

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull Zoper (Compressibility)

Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)

Toper in K

bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3

Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull c Kappa

Steam Calculation

Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard

The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard

(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use

The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from

bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and

bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa

This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only

That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms

Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator

133 Gas engine

The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the

fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine

The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of

the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted

process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine

Back to top

14 Print Sizing

The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured

and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page

The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens

bull Page format size margins orientation and format

bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter

bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report

Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed

bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo

bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout

Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered

Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page

Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are

possible Please check the help manual of the Project module

Back to top

15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by

manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002

The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection

options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator

takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable

flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and

Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can

switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator

1 Categorisation of the application

2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests

bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this

option

PED Categories

Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered

during the sizing and ordering process They include

bull All ultrasonic flowmeters

bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo

bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water

bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the

static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure

bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume

The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data

danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)

Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements

have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen

device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and

nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case

a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet

All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout

Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)

Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and

temperature are the main parameters

If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required

data in the min nom and max columns

If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the

necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating

Danger posed by the fluid

The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the

case of gases the stability of the gas is also important

The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo

according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)

All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations

belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is

above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture

bull H200-H205 (explosive)

bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)

bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)

bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)

bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)

bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)

bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)

In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in

Danger Symbols below

In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED

fluid groups

rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids

Order code

If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option

this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page

With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family

nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration

If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center

Danger Symbols

Danger symbol Explanation H-rates

C corrosive H 314

Cl chemical instable

E explosive H200-H205

F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223

F flammable H 225-H228

N environmental

dangerous

O oxidizing H271-H272

T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330

H372

T poisonous

Xi irritating

Xn injurious to health

Back to top

16 Online Update

The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator

Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes

and updated system databases with the latest products

The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator

newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the

Settings menu

Page 23: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use

27 Button center

A navigational bar called the button center can be found at the bottom of each sizing page With the help of

the buttons you can decide how to proceed with your Sizing process

Print Sizing

Opens the print-setting window to start the Sizing reports

Sizing Energy

Shifts from the Sizing flow to the Sizing Energy module The button is only enabled when starting with the

Sizing Energy module and changing from there into Sizing Flow

Configurator

Opens the Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order code

Add to shop basket

Opens the Endress+Hauser webshop with the currently selected product

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the Project administration module to save

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field Tag This field is editable This

button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when Applicator has been called via the

Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product and the sizing results can be pasted into a project This button is only available in the offline

version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when

Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Reset

This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results

Back to top

3 Custody transfer

Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of

among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals

If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection

- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out

According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different

process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature

are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task

page

In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the

approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum

turn down is also checked

Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your

entries

The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval

As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB

7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the

max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated

With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature

The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the

ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit

values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter

measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures

the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the

warning messages

Back to top

4 Accessories

There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories

page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)

In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg

mounting set 41) are executed

41 Accessories page

Example mounting set

Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations

Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)

42 Activating a checkbox

Example Flow conditioner

For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are

automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and

process connection can be selected

43 Accessories within the order code

The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving

process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed

Applicator versions)

Back to top

5 Fluid Properties page

51 General description

Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page

This view supports the following types of fluids

Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under

ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page

The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases

Liquids

Media type Standardprocess

Fluids not 100 water (example 0

Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)

Support points (linear interpolation)

Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97

Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-

Gas (Air) UDG)

Redlich-Kwong

Gases

Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas

engine

Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine

Air Ozone O3

Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)

Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr

Butane Nitric Oxide NO3

Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0

Carbon monoxide

Chlorine

Ethane

Ethylene

Helium

Hydrogen

Hydrogen chloride

Hydrogen sulphide

Krypton

Methane

Neon

Nitrogen

Oxygen

Propane

Xenon

0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User

Defined Gas Mixture 0

Oxygen

The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for

example density or viscosity

The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information

classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of

the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They

are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are

important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new

medium

The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The

parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll

to the group header you see on your screen

When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page

A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details

Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page

52 Parameter groups

521 Fluid information

In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible

Fluid name contains the name of the fluid

Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In

many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available

State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many

purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the

steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account

Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made

522 Fluid Description

The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid

Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian

Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid

Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and

syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or

measurement principle

Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is

flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals

Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive

Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for

conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to

50 microScm and more than 50 microScm

Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to

67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo

Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details

Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid

The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user

defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

523 Basic Fluid Parameters

The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be

created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages

Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid

Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid

Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point

Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid

Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas

The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has

an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also

depend on density and viscosity

In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and

sound velocity

524 Constants

This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas

type selected

Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken

from the Unit Defaults page

Molar mass molecular weight of the gas

Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)

Heating value calorific value of the gas

The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine

For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is

used to calculate the sound velocity

525 Typical Operating Conditions

The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions

Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the

mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of

the typical operating conditions are editable

526 Temperature Viscosity

This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description

The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function

of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve

for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range

527 Temperature Density

This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Density density at the support point

The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of

operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for

fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range

528 Temperature Heat capacity

This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point

The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

529 Temperature Vapor pressure

This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid

Temperature temperature at the support point

Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point

The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

5210 Gas mixture

The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture

Gas name of the gas (first field)

Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture

Unit unit for mass fraction

A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are

given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas

Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report

The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is

displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine

only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100

5211 Fluid properties and results

This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed

differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help

function

Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom

display ldquonardquo

The calculated constants are eg

Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions

Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions

Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions

Heating value the calorific value of the fluid

For liquids

Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data

displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page

AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

For solids

a viscosity coefficient for the gas

n viscosity coefficient for gases

5212 Reference values

This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters

displayed differ according to the fluid selected

Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation

Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780

Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780

Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533

Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533

5213 Measuring task

The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of

the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details

opens a window with more information about the approval

5214 Restriction on flowmeters

This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates

that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details

opens a window with more information about the restrictions

53 Setting reference conditions

Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu

There are two possibilities

SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are

- pressure 10132 bar absolute

- temperature 0deg Celsius

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter

US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are

- pressure 14696 psi absolute

- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter

54 Creating a User Defined Fluid

Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the

world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids

1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field

Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid

at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam

2 Now click on the Properties button

3 When the page has opened click on New

4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate

fields which are now open for editing

When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database

Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system

fluids

If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields

will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General

parameters list and you can start again

If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit

button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close

button exits the page without saving the changes

55 Import and Export of Fluids

In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this

the import and export function of the fluid database can be used

In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information

are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want

to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export

button

Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database

To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file

56 Fluid Properties report

The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing

page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results

and reference values

Back to top

6 Compare size and sensor

61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)

When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose

Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the

ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function

When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The

displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter

The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by

clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the

corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table

will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can

be reapplied

The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you

click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed

as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator

can be reapplied

62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)

The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement

principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are

selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator

versions

Back to top

7 Chart page

71 Introduction

The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case

of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available

The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections

72 General Parameters

In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a

repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on

the sizing page

73 Process data

Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference

74 Curves

The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if

offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter

In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be

automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be

activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner

If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report

75 Flow limits

The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range

and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are

different

76 Chart

The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the

pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using

the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional

information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different

curves within the chart

The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons

The content of the printout depends on the options selected

Back to top

8 Order Code

Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order

information

In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring

principle and flowmeter These are as follows

Feature Description Order codeSizing

Definition of ideal

diameter

Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter

relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure

loss

Diameter (Order code

option)

Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and

installation data

Mounting set (Order code

option)

Determination of

insertion depth

Calculation of insertion depth depending on

the selected accessory (t-mass)

Pipe length (Order code

option)

Selection of Material

(Sensor)

Selection and verification of corrosion

consistency

Sensor material Liner

material (Order code

option)

Selection of Process

connection

Selection and verification of pressure and

temperature curve

Process connection (Order

code option)

Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order

code option)

Pressure equipment

directive (PED)

Definition of PED-category depending on the

application and verification of the offered

process connections

Additional approval (Order

code option)

Custody transfer Verification or specification of application

data definition of measuring range

Custody transfer (Order

code option)

Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow

conditioner)

Accessory enclosed or extra

position (Order code

option)

Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow

splitter

Sensor Options (Order code

option)

Evaluation of

measuring range

Calculation of measuring range Calculation

datachart

Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and

accessory where required

Calculation

datachart

Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation

datachart

Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion

database with relevant data

The Order code page consists of different frames

81 Order code

Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically

by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and

Configurator for the valid order codes

82 Order code options

Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration

options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the

order code

The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection

on the Sizing page

The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page

The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options

Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed

these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still

feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning

message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change

83 Extended order code

831 General

Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen

In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables

for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and

activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the

Extended order code feature is used

With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order

code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the

order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator

832 Device parameter data settings

To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is

not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the

ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator

The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo

84 Button center

The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to

proceed with your Sizing process

Configurator

Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order

code

Print Sizing

Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product can be pasted into a project

Back to top

9 Conversion Calculator

Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity

All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by

selecting one out of the drop down lists

The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another

The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all

common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be

recalculated automatically

Back to top

10 Unit Defaults

Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings

menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored

whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session

Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily

for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button

Back to top

11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)

111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)

Disclaimer

The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from

publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and

assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a

minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion

fatigue life

The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different

process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined

Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check

Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled

The content of the database was sourced from

bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)

bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG

bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta

bull Various Internet Links

bull Various Corrosion data bases

The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application

and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process

temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows

Metal

Class Description depth of corrosion per surface

A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)

B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)

C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)

NR not recommended

U unknown

Plastics

Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength

A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear

B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year

lt=30 loss of tensile strength year

C not resistant lt= 50year

lt=50 loss of tensile strength year

NR not recommended

U unknown

Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used

112 Using Corrosion Check

Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion

information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability

of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not

appear at the top of the page

Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the

corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table

The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid

The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion

database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message

is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning

message

The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project

module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing

Back to top

12 Settings (Sizing Flow)

The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the

button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select

Sizing Flow

The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this

function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings

saved are loaded with the Load Default button

Setting Impact when activated

Basic functions

Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply

Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order

classification PED device check code page and printouts

Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits

The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits

No indication of default start data input of data by user

By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually

Advanced functions

Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)

The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles

Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates

My View

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

DP Flow

Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters

Activates said functions

Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP

flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

Back to top

13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines

131 General

Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation

Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)

Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures

132 Fluid engine

General Information

The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the

fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor

Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both

liquids and for gases

Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data

Liquid Calculation

Calculation of the acentric factor Omega

Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure

Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby

bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC

bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database

bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms

bull

The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs

Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature

bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3

bull Alpha in 1K

bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K

bull Toper in K

bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3

The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs

Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature

bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3

bull AL (Viscosity factor)

bull BL (Viscosity factor)

bull Toper in K

bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt

Gas calculation

The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and

pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and

temperature

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull Zoper (Compressibility)

Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)

Toper in K

bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3

Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull c Kappa

Steam Calculation

Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard

The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard

(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use

The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from

bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and

bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa

This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only

That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms

Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator

133 Gas engine

The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the

fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine

The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of

the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted

process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine

Back to top

14 Print Sizing

The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured

and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page

The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens

bull Page format size margins orientation and format

bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter

bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report

Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed

bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo

bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout

Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered

Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page

Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are

possible Please check the help manual of the Project module

Back to top

15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by

manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002

The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection

options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator

takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable

flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and

Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can

switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator

1 Categorisation of the application

2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests

bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this

option

PED Categories

Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered

during the sizing and ordering process They include

bull All ultrasonic flowmeters

bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo

bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water

bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the

static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure

bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume

The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data

danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)

Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements

have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen

device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and

nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case

a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet

All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout

Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)

Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and

temperature are the main parameters

If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required

data in the min nom and max columns

If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the

necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating

Danger posed by the fluid

The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the

case of gases the stability of the gas is also important

The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo

according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)

All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations

belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is

above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture

bull H200-H205 (explosive)

bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)

bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)

bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)

bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)

bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)

bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)

In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in

Danger Symbols below

In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED

fluid groups

rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids

Order code

If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option

this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page

With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family

nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration

If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center

Danger Symbols

Danger symbol Explanation H-rates

C corrosive H 314

Cl chemical instable

E explosive H200-H205

F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223

F flammable H 225-H228

N environmental

dangerous

O oxidizing H271-H272

T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330

H372

T poisonous

Xi irritating

Xn injurious to health

Back to top

16 Online Update

The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator

Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes

and updated system databases with the latest products

The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator

newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the

Settings menu

Page 24: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use

version This field is editable This button is only available in the local installed version of Applicator or when

Applicator has been called via the Project Engineering Assistant (PEA)

Reset

This button resets the whole Sizing flow page and intermediate Sizing results

Back to top

3 Custody transfer

Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of

among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals

If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection

- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out

According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different

process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature

are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task

page

In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the

approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum

turn down is also checked

Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your

entries

The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval

As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB

7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the

max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated

With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature

The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the

ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit

values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter

measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures

the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the

warning messages

Back to top

4 Accessories

There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories

page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)

In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg

mounting set 41) are executed

41 Accessories page

Example mounting set

Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations

Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)

42 Activating a checkbox

Example Flow conditioner

For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are

automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and

process connection can be selected

43 Accessories within the order code

The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving

process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed

Applicator versions)

Back to top

5 Fluid Properties page

51 General description

Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page

This view supports the following types of fluids

Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under

ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page

The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases

Liquids

Media type Standardprocess

Fluids not 100 water (example 0

Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)

Support points (linear interpolation)

Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97

Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-

Gas (Air) UDG)

Redlich-Kwong

Gases

Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas

engine

Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine

Air Ozone O3

Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)

Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr

Butane Nitric Oxide NO3

Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0

Carbon monoxide

Chlorine

Ethane

Ethylene

Helium

Hydrogen

Hydrogen chloride

Hydrogen sulphide

Krypton

Methane

Neon

Nitrogen

Oxygen

Propane

Xenon

0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User

Defined Gas Mixture 0

Oxygen

The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for

example density or viscosity

The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information

classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of

the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They

are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are

important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new

medium

The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The

parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll

to the group header you see on your screen

When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page

A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details

Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page

52 Parameter groups

521 Fluid information

In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible

Fluid name contains the name of the fluid

Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In

many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available

State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many

purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the

steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account

Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made

522 Fluid Description

The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid

Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian

Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid

Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and

syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or

measurement principle

Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is

flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals

Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive

Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for

conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to

50 microScm and more than 50 microScm

Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to

67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo

Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details

Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid

The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user

defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

523 Basic Fluid Parameters

The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be

created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages

Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid

Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid

Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point

Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid

Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas

The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has

an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also

depend on density and viscosity

In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and

sound velocity

524 Constants

This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas

type selected

Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken

from the Unit Defaults page

Molar mass molecular weight of the gas

Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)

Heating value calorific value of the gas

The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine

For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is

used to calculate the sound velocity

525 Typical Operating Conditions

The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions

Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the

mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of

the typical operating conditions are editable

526 Temperature Viscosity

This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description

The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function

of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve

for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range

527 Temperature Density

This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Density density at the support point

The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of

operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for

fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range

528 Temperature Heat capacity

This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point

The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

529 Temperature Vapor pressure

This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid

Temperature temperature at the support point

Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point

The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

5210 Gas mixture

The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture

Gas name of the gas (first field)

Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture

Unit unit for mass fraction

A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are

given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas

Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report

The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is

displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine

only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100

5211 Fluid properties and results

This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed

differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help

function

Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom

display ldquonardquo

The calculated constants are eg

Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions

Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions

Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions

Heating value the calorific value of the fluid

For liquids

Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data

displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page

AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

For solids

a viscosity coefficient for the gas

n viscosity coefficient for gases

5212 Reference values

This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters

displayed differ according to the fluid selected

Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation

Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780

Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780

Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533

Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533

5213 Measuring task

The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of

the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details

opens a window with more information about the approval

5214 Restriction on flowmeters

This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates

that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details

opens a window with more information about the restrictions

53 Setting reference conditions

Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu

There are two possibilities

SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are

- pressure 10132 bar absolute

- temperature 0deg Celsius

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter

US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are

- pressure 14696 psi absolute

- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter

54 Creating a User Defined Fluid

Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the

world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids

1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field

Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid

at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam

2 Now click on the Properties button

3 When the page has opened click on New

4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate

fields which are now open for editing

When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database

Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system

fluids

If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields

will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General

parameters list and you can start again

If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit

button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close

button exits the page without saving the changes

55 Import and Export of Fluids

In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this

the import and export function of the fluid database can be used

In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information

are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want

to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export

button

Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database

To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file

56 Fluid Properties report

The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing

page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results

and reference values

Back to top

6 Compare size and sensor

61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)

When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose

Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the

ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function

When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The

displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter

The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by

clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the

corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table

will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can

be reapplied

The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you

click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed

as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator

can be reapplied

62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)

The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement

principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are

selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator

versions

Back to top

7 Chart page

71 Introduction

The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case

of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available

The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections

72 General Parameters

In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a

repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on

the sizing page

73 Process data

Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference

74 Curves

The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if

offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter

In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be

automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be

activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner

If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report

75 Flow limits

The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range

and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are

different

76 Chart

The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the

pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using

the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional

information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different

curves within the chart

The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons

The content of the printout depends on the options selected

Back to top

8 Order Code

Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order

information

In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring

principle and flowmeter These are as follows

Feature Description Order codeSizing

Definition of ideal

diameter

Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter

relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure

loss

Diameter (Order code

option)

Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and

installation data

Mounting set (Order code

option)

Determination of

insertion depth

Calculation of insertion depth depending on

the selected accessory (t-mass)

Pipe length (Order code

option)

Selection of Material

(Sensor)

Selection and verification of corrosion

consistency

Sensor material Liner

material (Order code

option)

Selection of Process

connection

Selection and verification of pressure and

temperature curve

Process connection (Order

code option)

Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order

code option)

Pressure equipment

directive (PED)

Definition of PED-category depending on the

application and verification of the offered

process connections

Additional approval (Order

code option)

Custody transfer Verification or specification of application

data definition of measuring range

Custody transfer (Order

code option)

Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow

conditioner)

Accessory enclosed or extra

position (Order code

option)

Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow

splitter

Sensor Options (Order code

option)

Evaluation of

measuring range

Calculation of measuring range Calculation

datachart

Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and

accessory where required

Calculation

datachart

Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation

datachart

Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion

database with relevant data

The Order code page consists of different frames

81 Order code

Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically

by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and

Configurator for the valid order codes

82 Order code options

Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration

options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the

order code

The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection

on the Sizing page

The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page

The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options

Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed

these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still

feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning

message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change

83 Extended order code

831 General

Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen

In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables

for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and

activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the

Extended order code feature is used

With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order

code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the

order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator

832 Device parameter data settings

To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is

not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the

ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator

The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo

84 Button center

The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to

proceed with your Sizing process

Configurator

Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order

code

Print Sizing

Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product can be pasted into a project

Back to top

9 Conversion Calculator

Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity

All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by

selecting one out of the drop down lists

The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another

The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all

common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be

recalculated automatically

Back to top

10 Unit Defaults

Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings

menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored

whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session

Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily

for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button

Back to top

11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)

111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)

Disclaimer

The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from

publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and

assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a

minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion

fatigue life

The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different

process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined

Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check

Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled

The content of the database was sourced from

bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)

bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG

bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta

bull Various Internet Links

bull Various Corrosion data bases

The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application

and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process

temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows

Metal

Class Description depth of corrosion per surface

A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)

B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)

C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)

NR not recommended

U unknown

Plastics

Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength

A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear

B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year

lt=30 loss of tensile strength year

C not resistant lt= 50year

lt=50 loss of tensile strength year

NR not recommended

U unknown

Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used

112 Using Corrosion Check

Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion

information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability

of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not

appear at the top of the page

Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the

corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table

The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid

The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion

database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message

is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning

message

The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project

module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing

Back to top

12 Settings (Sizing Flow)

The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the

button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select

Sizing Flow

The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this

function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings

saved are loaded with the Load Default button

Setting Impact when activated

Basic functions

Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply

Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order

classification PED device check code page and printouts

Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits

The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits

No indication of default start data input of data by user

By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually

Advanced functions

Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)

The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles

Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates

My View

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

DP Flow

Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters

Activates said functions

Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP

flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

Back to top

13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines

131 General

Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation

Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)

Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures

132 Fluid engine

General Information

The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the

fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor

Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both

liquids and for gases

Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data

Liquid Calculation

Calculation of the acentric factor Omega

Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure

Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby

bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC

bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database

bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms

bull

The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs

Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature

bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3

bull Alpha in 1K

bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K

bull Toper in K

bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3

The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs

Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature

bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3

bull AL (Viscosity factor)

bull BL (Viscosity factor)

bull Toper in K

bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt

Gas calculation

The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and

pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and

temperature

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull Zoper (Compressibility)

Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)

Toper in K

bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3

Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull c Kappa

Steam Calculation

Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard

The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard

(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use

The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from

bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and

bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa

This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only

That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms

Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator

133 Gas engine

The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the

fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine

The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of

the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted

process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine

Back to top

14 Print Sizing

The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured

and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page

The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens

bull Page format size margins orientation and format

bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter

bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report

Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed

bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo

bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout

Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered

Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page

Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are

possible Please check the help manual of the Project module

Back to top

15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by

manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002

The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection

options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator

takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable

flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and

Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can

switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator

1 Categorisation of the application

2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests

bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this

option

PED Categories

Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered

during the sizing and ordering process They include

bull All ultrasonic flowmeters

bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo

bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water

bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the

static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure

bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume

The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data

danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)

Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements

have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen

device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and

nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case

a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet

All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout

Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)

Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and

temperature are the main parameters

If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required

data in the min nom and max columns

If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the

necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating

Danger posed by the fluid

The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the

case of gases the stability of the gas is also important

The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo

according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)

All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations

belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is

above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture

bull H200-H205 (explosive)

bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)

bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)

bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)

bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)

bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)

bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)

In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in

Danger Symbols below

In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED

fluid groups

rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids

Order code

If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option

this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page

With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family

nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration

If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center

Danger Symbols

Danger symbol Explanation H-rates

C corrosive H 314

Cl chemical instable

E explosive H200-H205

F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223

F flammable H 225-H228

N environmental

dangerous

O oxidizing H271-H272

T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330

H372

T poisonous

Xi irritating

Xn injurious to health

Back to top

16 Online Update

The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator

Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes

and updated system databases with the latest products

The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator

newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the

Settings menu

Page 25: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use

3 Custody transfer

Approvals for standard custody transfer measuring tasks can be selected on the Sizing page consisting of

among others OIML MID NTEP and PTB approvals

If the necessary approval is not available you can make the following selection

- ldquoLocal Approvalsrdquo - a normal sizing of the flowmeter without approval validation is carried out

According to the selected approval only corresponding fluids and flowmeters can be selected Different

process parameters such as the required minimum and maximum for flow for pressure and for temperature

are very important in the validation process and must therefore be confirmed again on a new measuring task

page

In the right section of the sizing page the maximum possible measuring range is displayed observing the

approval limits as well as the approved measuring range For gas applications conformity with the minimum

turn down is also checked

Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your

entries

The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval

As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB

7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the

max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated

With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature

The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the

ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit

values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter

measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures

the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the

warning messages

Back to top

4 Accessories

There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories

page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)

In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg

mounting set 41) are executed

41 Accessories page

Example mounting set

Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations

Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)

42 Activating a checkbox

Example Flow conditioner

For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are

automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and

process connection can be selected

43 Accessories within the order code

The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving

process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed

Applicator versions)

Back to top

5 Fluid Properties page

51 General description

Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page

This view supports the following types of fluids

Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under

ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page

The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases

Liquids

Media type Standardprocess

Fluids not 100 water (example 0

Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)

Support points (linear interpolation)

Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97

Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-

Gas (Air) UDG)

Redlich-Kwong

Gases

Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas

engine

Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine

Air Ozone O3

Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)

Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr

Butane Nitric Oxide NO3

Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0

Carbon monoxide

Chlorine

Ethane

Ethylene

Helium

Hydrogen

Hydrogen chloride

Hydrogen sulphide

Krypton

Methane

Neon

Nitrogen

Oxygen

Propane

Xenon

0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User

Defined Gas Mixture 0

Oxygen

The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for

example density or viscosity

The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information

classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of

the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They

are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are

important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new

medium

The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The

parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll

to the group header you see on your screen

When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page

A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details

Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page

52 Parameter groups

521 Fluid information

In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible

Fluid name contains the name of the fluid

Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In

many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available

State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many

purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the

steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account

Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made

522 Fluid Description

The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid

Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian

Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid

Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and

syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or

measurement principle

Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is

flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals

Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive

Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for

conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to

50 microScm and more than 50 microScm

Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to

67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo

Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details

Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid

The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user

defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

523 Basic Fluid Parameters

The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be

created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages

Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid

Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid

Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point

Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid

Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas

The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has

an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also

depend on density and viscosity

In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and

sound velocity

524 Constants

This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas

type selected

Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken

from the Unit Defaults page

Molar mass molecular weight of the gas

Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)

Heating value calorific value of the gas

The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine

For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is

used to calculate the sound velocity

525 Typical Operating Conditions

The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions

Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the

mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of

the typical operating conditions are editable

526 Temperature Viscosity

This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description

The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function

of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve

for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range

527 Temperature Density

This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Density density at the support point

The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of

operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for

fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range

528 Temperature Heat capacity

This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point

The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

529 Temperature Vapor pressure

This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid

Temperature temperature at the support point

Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point

The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

5210 Gas mixture

The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture

Gas name of the gas (first field)

Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture

Unit unit for mass fraction

A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are

given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas

Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report

The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is

displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine

only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100

5211 Fluid properties and results

This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed

differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help

function

Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom

display ldquonardquo

The calculated constants are eg

Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions

Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions

Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions

Heating value the calorific value of the fluid

For liquids

Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data

displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page

AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

For solids

a viscosity coefficient for the gas

n viscosity coefficient for gases

5212 Reference values

This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters

displayed differ according to the fluid selected

Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation

Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780

Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780

Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533

Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533

5213 Measuring task

The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of

the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details

opens a window with more information about the approval

5214 Restriction on flowmeters

This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates

that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details

opens a window with more information about the restrictions

53 Setting reference conditions

Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu

There are two possibilities

SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are

- pressure 10132 bar absolute

- temperature 0deg Celsius

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter

US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are

- pressure 14696 psi absolute

- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter

54 Creating a User Defined Fluid

Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the

world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids

1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field

Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid

at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam

2 Now click on the Properties button

3 When the page has opened click on New

4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate

fields which are now open for editing

When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database

Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system

fluids

If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields

will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General

parameters list and you can start again

If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit

button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close

button exits the page without saving the changes

55 Import and Export of Fluids

In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this

the import and export function of the fluid database can be used

In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information

are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want

to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export

button

Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database

To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file

56 Fluid Properties report

The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing

page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results

and reference values

Back to top

6 Compare size and sensor

61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)

When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose

Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the

ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function

When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The

displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter

The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by

clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the

corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table

will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can

be reapplied

The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you

click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed

as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator

can be reapplied

62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)

The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement

principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are

selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator

versions

Back to top

7 Chart page

71 Introduction

The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case

of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available

The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections

72 General Parameters

In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a

repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on

the sizing page

73 Process data

Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference

74 Curves

The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if

offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter

In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be

automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be

activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner

If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report

75 Flow limits

The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range

and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are

different

76 Chart

The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the

pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using

the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional

information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different

curves within the chart

The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons

The content of the printout depends on the options selected

Back to top

8 Order Code

Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order

information

In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring

principle and flowmeter These are as follows

Feature Description Order codeSizing

Definition of ideal

diameter

Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter

relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure

loss

Diameter (Order code

option)

Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and

installation data

Mounting set (Order code

option)

Determination of

insertion depth

Calculation of insertion depth depending on

the selected accessory (t-mass)

Pipe length (Order code

option)

Selection of Material

(Sensor)

Selection and verification of corrosion

consistency

Sensor material Liner

material (Order code

option)

Selection of Process

connection

Selection and verification of pressure and

temperature curve

Process connection (Order

code option)

Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order

code option)

Pressure equipment

directive (PED)

Definition of PED-category depending on the

application and verification of the offered

process connections

Additional approval (Order

code option)

Custody transfer Verification or specification of application

data definition of measuring range

Custody transfer (Order

code option)

Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow

conditioner)

Accessory enclosed or extra

position (Order code

option)

Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow

splitter

Sensor Options (Order code

option)

Evaluation of

measuring range

Calculation of measuring range Calculation

datachart

Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and

accessory where required

Calculation

datachart

Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation

datachart

Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion

database with relevant data

The Order code page consists of different frames

81 Order code

Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically

by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and

Configurator for the valid order codes

82 Order code options

Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration

options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the

order code

The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection

on the Sizing page

The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page

The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options

Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed

these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still

feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning

message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change

83 Extended order code

831 General

Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen

In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables

for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and

activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the

Extended order code feature is used

With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order

code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the

order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator

832 Device parameter data settings

To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is

not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the

ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator

The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo

84 Button center

The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to

proceed with your Sizing process

Configurator

Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order

code

Print Sizing

Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product can be pasted into a project

Back to top

9 Conversion Calculator

Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity

All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by

selecting one out of the drop down lists

The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another

The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all

common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be

recalculated automatically

Back to top

10 Unit Defaults

Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings

menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored

whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session

Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily

for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button

Back to top

11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)

111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)

Disclaimer

The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from

publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and

assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a

minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion

fatigue life

The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different

process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined

Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check

Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled

The content of the database was sourced from

bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)

bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG

bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta

bull Various Internet Links

bull Various Corrosion data bases

The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application

and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process

temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows

Metal

Class Description depth of corrosion per surface

A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)

B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)

C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)

NR not recommended

U unknown

Plastics

Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength

A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear

B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year

lt=30 loss of tensile strength year

C not resistant lt= 50year

lt=50 loss of tensile strength year

NR not recommended

U unknown

Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used

112 Using Corrosion Check

Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion

information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability

of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not

appear at the top of the page

Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the

corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table

The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid

The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion

database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message

is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning

message

The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project

module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing

Back to top

12 Settings (Sizing Flow)

The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the

button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select

Sizing Flow

The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this

function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings

saved are loaded with the Load Default button

Setting Impact when activated

Basic functions

Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply

Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order

classification PED device check code page and printouts

Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits

The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits

No indication of default start data input of data by user

By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually

Advanced functions

Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)

The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles

Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates

My View

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

DP Flow

Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters

Activates said functions

Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP

flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

Back to top

13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines

131 General

Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation

Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)

Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures

132 Fluid engine

General Information

The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the

fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor

Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both

liquids and for gases

Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data

Liquid Calculation

Calculation of the acentric factor Omega

Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure

Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby

bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC

bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database

bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms

bull

The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs

Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature

bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3

bull Alpha in 1K

bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K

bull Toper in K

bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3

The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs

Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature

bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3

bull AL (Viscosity factor)

bull BL (Viscosity factor)

bull Toper in K

bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt

Gas calculation

The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and

pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and

temperature

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull Zoper (Compressibility)

Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)

Toper in K

bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3

Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull c Kappa

Steam Calculation

Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard

The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard

(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use

The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from

bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and

bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa

This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only

That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms

Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator

133 Gas engine

The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the

fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine

The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of

the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted

process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine

Back to top

14 Print Sizing

The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured

and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page

The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens

bull Page format size margins orientation and format

bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter

bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report

Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed

bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo

bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout

Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered

Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page

Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are

possible Please check the help manual of the Project module

Back to top

15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by

manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002

The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection

options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator

takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable

flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and

Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can

switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator

1 Categorisation of the application

2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests

bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this

option

PED Categories

Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered

during the sizing and ordering process They include

bull All ultrasonic flowmeters

bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo

bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water

bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the

static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure

bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume

The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data

danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)

Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements

have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen

device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and

nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case

a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet

All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout

Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)

Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and

temperature are the main parameters

If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required

data in the min nom and max columns

If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the

necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating

Danger posed by the fluid

The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the

case of gases the stability of the gas is also important

The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo

according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)

All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations

belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is

above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture

bull H200-H205 (explosive)

bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)

bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)

bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)

bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)

bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)

bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)

In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in

Danger Symbols below

In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED

fluid groups

rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids

Order code

If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option

this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page

With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family

nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration

If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center

Danger Symbols

Danger symbol Explanation H-rates

C corrosive H 314

Cl chemical instable

E explosive H200-H205

F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223

F flammable H 225-H228

N environmental

dangerous

O oxidizing H271-H272

T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330

H372

T poisonous

Xi irritating

Xn injurious to health

Back to top

16 Online Update

The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator

Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes

and updated system databases with the latest products

The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator

newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the

Settings menu

Page 26: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use

Applicator also issues a specific warning prompt Change to the Custody transfer tab and complete your

entries

The Custody transfer page can vary according to the selected approval

As of Applicator version 1014 an additional function is offered in case you choose the approval MI-002 or PTB

7251 and Coriolis as principle Pressing lsquoOptimize operating rangersquo sets the max possible flow range and the

max possible temperature If necessary a warning about pressure range is indicated

With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature

The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the

ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit

values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter

measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures

the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the

warning messages

Back to top

4 Accessories

There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories

page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)

In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg

mounting set 41) are executed

41 Accessories page

Example mounting set

Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations

Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)

42 Activating a checkbox

Example Flow conditioner

For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are

automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and

process connection can be selected

43 Accessories within the order code

The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving

process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed

Applicator versions)

Back to top

5 Fluid Properties page

51 General description

Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page

This view supports the following types of fluids

Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under

ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page

The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases

Liquids

Media type Standardprocess

Fluids not 100 water (example 0

Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)

Support points (linear interpolation)

Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97

Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-

Gas (Air) UDG)

Redlich-Kwong

Gases

Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas

engine

Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine

Air Ozone O3

Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)

Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr

Butane Nitric Oxide NO3

Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0

Carbon monoxide

Chlorine

Ethane

Ethylene

Helium

Hydrogen

Hydrogen chloride

Hydrogen sulphide

Krypton

Methane

Neon

Nitrogen

Oxygen

Propane

Xenon

0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User

Defined Gas Mixture 0

Oxygen

The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for

example density or viscosity

The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information

classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of

the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They

are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are

important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new

medium

The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The

parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll

to the group header you see on your screen

When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page

A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details

Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page

52 Parameter groups

521 Fluid information

In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible

Fluid name contains the name of the fluid

Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In

many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available

State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many

purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the

steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account

Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made

522 Fluid Description

The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid

Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian

Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid

Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and

syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or

measurement principle

Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is

flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals

Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive

Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for

conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to

50 microScm and more than 50 microScm

Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to

67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo

Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details

Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid

The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user

defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

523 Basic Fluid Parameters

The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be

created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages

Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid

Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid

Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point

Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid

Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas

The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has

an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also

depend on density and viscosity

In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and

sound velocity

524 Constants

This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas

type selected

Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken

from the Unit Defaults page

Molar mass molecular weight of the gas

Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)

Heating value calorific value of the gas

The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine

For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is

used to calculate the sound velocity

525 Typical Operating Conditions

The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions

Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the

mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of

the typical operating conditions are editable

526 Temperature Viscosity

This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description

The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function

of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve

for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range

527 Temperature Density

This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Density density at the support point

The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of

operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for

fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range

528 Temperature Heat capacity

This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point

The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

529 Temperature Vapor pressure

This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid

Temperature temperature at the support point

Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point

The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

5210 Gas mixture

The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture

Gas name of the gas (first field)

Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture

Unit unit for mass fraction

A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are

given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas

Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report

The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is

displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine

only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100

5211 Fluid properties and results

This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed

differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help

function

Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom

display ldquonardquo

The calculated constants are eg

Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions

Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions

Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions

Heating value the calorific value of the fluid

For liquids

Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data

displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page

AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

For solids

a viscosity coefficient for the gas

n viscosity coefficient for gases

5212 Reference values

This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters

displayed differ according to the fluid selected

Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation

Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780

Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780

Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533

Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533

5213 Measuring task

The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of

the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details

opens a window with more information about the approval

5214 Restriction on flowmeters

This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates

that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details

opens a window with more information about the restrictions

53 Setting reference conditions

Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu

There are two possibilities

SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are

- pressure 10132 bar absolute

- temperature 0deg Celsius

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter

US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are

- pressure 14696 psi absolute

- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter

54 Creating a User Defined Fluid

Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the

world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids

1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field

Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid

at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam

2 Now click on the Properties button

3 When the page has opened click on New

4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate

fields which are now open for editing

When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database

Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system

fluids

If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields

will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General

parameters list and you can start again

If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit

button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close

button exits the page without saving the changes

55 Import and Export of Fluids

In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this

the import and export function of the fluid database can be used

In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information

are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want

to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export

button

Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database

To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file

56 Fluid Properties report

The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing

page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results

and reference values

Back to top

6 Compare size and sensor

61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)

When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose

Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the

ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function

When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The

displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter

The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by

clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the

corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table

will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can

be reapplied

The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you

click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed

as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator

can be reapplied

62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)

The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement

principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are

selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator

versions

Back to top

7 Chart page

71 Introduction

The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case

of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available

The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections

72 General Parameters

In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a

repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on

the sizing page

73 Process data

Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference

74 Curves

The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if

offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter

In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be

automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be

activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner

If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report

75 Flow limits

The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range

and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are

different

76 Chart

The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the

pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using

the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional

information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different

curves within the chart

The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons

The content of the printout depends on the options selected

Back to top

8 Order Code

Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order

information

In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring

principle and flowmeter These are as follows

Feature Description Order codeSizing

Definition of ideal

diameter

Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter

relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure

loss

Diameter (Order code

option)

Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and

installation data

Mounting set (Order code

option)

Determination of

insertion depth

Calculation of insertion depth depending on

the selected accessory (t-mass)

Pipe length (Order code

option)

Selection of Material

(Sensor)

Selection and verification of corrosion

consistency

Sensor material Liner

material (Order code

option)

Selection of Process

connection

Selection and verification of pressure and

temperature curve

Process connection (Order

code option)

Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order

code option)

Pressure equipment

directive (PED)

Definition of PED-category depending on the

application and verification of the offered

process connections

Additional approval (Order

code option)

Custody transfer Verification or specification of application

data definition of measuring range

Custody transfer (Order

code option)

Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow

conditioner)

Accessory enclosed or extra

position (Order code

option)

Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow

splitter

Sensor Options (Order code

option)

Evaluation of

measuring range

Calculation of measuring range Calculation

datachart

Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and

accessory where required

Calculation

datachart

Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation

datachart

Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion

database with relevant data

The Order code page consists of different frames

81 Order code

Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically

by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and

Configurator for the valid order codes

82 Order code options

Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration

options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the

order code

The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection

on the Sizing page

The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page

The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options

Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed

these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still

feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning

message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change

83 Extended order code

831 General

Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen

In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables

for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and

activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the

Extended order code feature is used

With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order

code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the

order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator

832 Device parameter data settings

To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is

not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the

ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator

The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo

84 Button center

The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to

proceed with your Sizing process

Configurator

Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order

code

Print Sizing

Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product can be pasted into a project

Back to top

9 Conversion Calculator

Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity

All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by

selecting one out of the drop down lists

The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another

The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all

common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be

recalculated automatically

Back to top

10 Unit Defaults

Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings

menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored

whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session

Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily

for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button

Back to top

11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)

111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)

Disclaimer

The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from

publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and

assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a

minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion

fatigue life

The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different

process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined

Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check

Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled

The content of the database was sourced from

bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)

bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG

bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta

bull Various Internet Links

bull Various Corrosion data bases

The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application

and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process

temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows

Metal

Class Description depth of corrosion per surface

A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)

B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)

C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)

NR not recommended

U unknown

Plastics

Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength

A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear

B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year

lt=30 loss of tensile strength year

C not resistant lt= 50year

lt=50 loss of tensile strength year

NR not recommended

U unknown

Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used

112 Using Corrosion Check

Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion

information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability

of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not

appear at the top of the page

Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the

corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table

The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid

The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion

database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message

is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning

message

The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project

module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing

Back to top

12 Settings (Sizing Flow)

The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the

button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select

Sizing Flow

The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this

function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings

saved are loaded with the Load Default button

Setting Impact when activated

Basic functions

Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply

Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order

classification PED device check code page and printouts

Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits

The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits

No indication of default start data input of data by user

By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually

Advanced functions

Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)

The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles

Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates

My View

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

DP Flow

Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters

Activates said functions

Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP

flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

Back to top

13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines

131 General

Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation

Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)

Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures

132 Fluid engine

General Information

The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the

fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor

Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both

liquids and for gases

Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data

Liquid Calculation

Calculation of the acentric factor Omega

Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure

Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby

bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC

bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database

bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms

bull

The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs

Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature

bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3

bull Alpha in 1K

bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K

bull Toper in K

bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3

The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs

Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature

bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3

bull AL (Viscosity factor)

bull BL (Viscosity factor)

bull Toper in K

bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt

Gas calculation

The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and

pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and

temperature

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull Zoper (Compressibility)

Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)

Toper in K

bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3

Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull c Kappa

Steam Calculation

Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard

The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard

(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use

The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from

bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and

bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa

This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only

That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms

Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator

133 Gas engine

The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the

fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine

The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of

the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted

process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine

Back to top

14 Print Sizing

The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured

and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page

The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens

bull Page format size margins orientation and format

bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter

bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report

Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed

bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo

bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout

Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered

Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page

Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are

possible Please check the help manual of the Project module

Back to top

15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by

manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002

The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection

options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator

takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable

flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and

Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can

switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator

1 Categorisation of the application

2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests

bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this

option

PED Categories

Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered

during the sizing and ordering process They include

bull All ultrasonic flowmeters

bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo

bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water

bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the

static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure

bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume

The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data

danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)

Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements

have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen

device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and

nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case

a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet

All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout

Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)

Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and

temperature are the main parameters

If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required

data in the min nom and max columns

If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the

necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating

Danger posed by the fluid

The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the

case of gases the stability of the gas is also important

The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo

according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)

All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations

belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is

above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture

bull H200-H205 (explosive)

bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)

bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)

bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)

bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)

bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)

bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)

In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in

Danger Symbols below

In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED

fluid groups

rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids

Order code

If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option

this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page

With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family

nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration

If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center

Danger Symbols

Danger symbol Explanation H-rates

C corrosive H 314

Cl chemical instable

E explosive H200-H205

F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223

F flammable H 225-H228

N environmental

dangerous

O oxidizing H271-H272

T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330

H372

T poisonous

Xi irritating

Xn injurious to health

Back to top

16 Online Update

The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator

Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes

and updated system databases with the latest products

The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator

newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the

Settings menu

Page 27: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use

With this you will achieve optimized operating ranges for flow pressure and temperature

The actual sizing process for flowmeters in the ldquoCustody Transferrdquo measuring task differs from the

ldquoMonitoringControlrdquo measuring task only in that it has different sizing rules The sizing rules define the limit

values and specifications relating to the permissible media the pressure and temperature ranges the meter

measuring range and the turn down Applicator monitors whether or not these rules are observed and ensures

the quality of the sizing results An important requirement for this is of course that the user must observe the

warning messages

Back to top

4 Accessories

There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories

page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)

In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg

mounting set 41) are executed

41 Accessories page

Example mounting set

Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations

Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)

42 Activating a checkbox

Example Flow conditioner

For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are

automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and

process connection can be selected

43 Accessories within the order code

The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving

process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed

Applicator versions)

Back to top

5 Fluid Properties page

51 General description

Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page

This view supports the following types of fluids

Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under

ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page

The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases

Liquids

Media type Standardprocess

Fluids not 100 water (example 0

Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)

Support points (linear interpolation)

Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97

Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-

Gas (Air) UDG)

Redlich-Kwong

Gases

Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas

engine

Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine

Air Ozone O3

Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)

Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr

Butane Nitric Oxide NO3

Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0

Carbon monoxide

Chlorine

Ethane

Ethylene

Helium

Hydrogen

Hydrogen chloride

Hydrogen sulphide

Krypton

Methane

Neon

Nitrogen

Oxygen

Propane

Xenon

0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User

Defined Gas Mixture 0

Oxygen

The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for

example density or viscosity

The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information

classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of

the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They

are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are

important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new

medium

The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The

parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll

to the group header you see on your screen

When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page

A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details

Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page

52 Parameter groups

521 Fluid information

In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible

Fluid name contains the name of the fluid

Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In

many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available

State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many

purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the

steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account

Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made

522 Fluid Description

The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid

Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian

Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid

Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and

syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or

measurement principle

Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is

flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals

Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive

Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for

conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to

50 microScm and more than 50 microScm

Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to

67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo

Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details

Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid

The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user

defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

523 Basic Fluid Parameters

The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be

created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages

Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid

Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid

Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point

Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid

Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas

The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has

an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also

depend on density and viscosity

In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and

sound velocity

524 Constants

This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas

type selected

Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken

from the Unit Defaults page

Molar mass molecular weight of the gas

Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)

Heating value calorific value of the gas

The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine

For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is

used to calculate the sound velocity

525 Typical Operating Conditions

The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions

Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the

mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of

the typical operating conditions are editable

526 Temperature Viscosity

This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description

The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function

of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve

for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range

527 Temperature Density

This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Density density at the support point

The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of

operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for

fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range

528 Temperature Heat capacity

This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point

The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

529 Temperature Vapor pressure

This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid

Temperature temperature at the support point

Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point

The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

5210 Gas mixture

The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture

Gas name of the gas (first field)

Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture

Unit unit for mass fraction

A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are

given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas

Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report

The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is

displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine

only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100

5211 Fluid properties and results

This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed

differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help

function

Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom

display ldquonardquo

The calculated constants are eg

Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions

Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions

Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions

Heating value the calorific value of the fluid

For liquids

Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data

displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page

AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

For solids

a viscosity coefficient for the gas

n viscosity coefficient for gases

5212 Reference values

This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters

displayed differ according to the fluid selected

Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation

Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780

Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780

Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533

Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533

5213 Measuring task

The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of

the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details

opens a window with more information about the approval

5214 Restriction on flowmeters

This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates

that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details

opens a window with more information about the restrictions

53 Setting reference conditions

Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu

There are two possibilities

SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are

- pressure 10132 bar absolute

- temperature 0deg Celsius

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter

US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are

- pressure 14696 psi absolute

- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter

54 Creating a User Defined Fluid

Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the

world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids

1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field

Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid

at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam

2 Now click on the Properties button

3 When the page has opened click on New

4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate

fields which are now open for editing

When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database

Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system

fluids

If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields

will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General

parameters list and you can start again

If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit

button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close

button exits the page without saving the changes

55 Import and Export of Fluids

In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this

the import and export function of the fluid database can be used

In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information

are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want

to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export

button

Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database

To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file

56 Fluid Properties report

The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing

page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results

and reference values

Back to top

6 Compare size and sensor

61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)

When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose

Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the

ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function

When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The

displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter

The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by

clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the

corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table

will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can

be reapplied

The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you

click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed

as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator

can be reapplied

62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)

The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement

principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are

selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator

versions

Back to top

7 Chart page

71 Introduction

The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case

of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available

The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections

72 General Parameters

In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a

repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on

the sizing page

73 Process data

Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference

74 Curves

The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if

offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter

In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be

automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be

activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner

If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report

75 Flow limits

The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range

and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are

different

76 Chart

The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the

pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using

the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional

information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different

curves within the chart

The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons

The content of the printout depends on the options selected

Back to top

8 Order Code

Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order

information

In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring

principle and flowmeter These are as follows

Feature Description Order codeSizing

Definition of ideal

diameter

Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter

relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure

loss

Diameter (Order code

option)

Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and

installation data

Mounting set (Order code

option)

Determination of

insertion depth

Calculation of insertion depth depending on

the selected accessory (t-mass)

Pipe length (Order code

option)

Selection of Material

(Sensor)

Selection and verification of corrosion

consistency

Sensor material Liner

material (Order code

option)

Selection of Process

connection

Selection and verification of pressure and

temperature curve

Process connection (Order

code option)

Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order

code option)

Pressure equipment

directive (PED)

Definition of PED-category depending on the

application and verification of the offered

process connections

Additional approval (Order

code option)

Custody transfer Verification or specification of application

data definition of measuring range

Custody transfer (Order

code option)

Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow

conditioner)

Accessory enclosed or extra

position (Order code

option)

Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow

splitter

Sensor Options (Order code

option)

Evaluation of

measuring range

Calculation of measuring range Calculation

datachart

Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and

accessory where required

Calculation

datachart

Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation

datachart

Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion

database with relevant data

The Order code page consists of different frames

81 Order code

Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically

by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and

Configurator for the valid order codes

82 Order code options

Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration

options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the

order code

The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection

on the Sizing page

The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page

The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options

Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed

these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still

feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning

message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change

83 Extended order code

831 General

Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen

In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables

for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and

activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the

Extended order code feature is used

With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order

code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the

order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator

832 Device parameter data settings

To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is

not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the

ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator

The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo

84 Button center

The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to

proceed with your Sizing process

Configurator

Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order

code

Print Sizing

Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product can be pasted into a project

Back to top

9 Conversion Calculator

Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity

All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by

selecting one out of the drop down lists

The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another

The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all

common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be

recalculated automatically

Back to top

10 Unit Defaults

Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings

menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored

whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session

Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily

for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button

Back to top

11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)

111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)

Disclaimer

The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from

publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and

assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a

minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion

fatigue life

The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different

process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined

Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check

Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled

The content of the database was sourced from

bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)

bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG

bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta

bull Various Internet Links

bull Various Corrosion data bases

The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application

and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process

temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows

Metal

Class Description depth of corrosion per surface

A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)

B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)

C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)

NR not recommended

U unknown

Plastics

Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength

A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear

B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year

lt=30 loss of tensile strength year

C not resistant lt= 50year

lt=50 loss of tensile strength year

NR not recommended

U unknown

Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used

112 Using Corrosion Check

Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion

information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability

of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not

appear at the top of the page

Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the

corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table

The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid

The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion

database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message

is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning

message

The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project

module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing

Back to top

12 Settings (Sizing Flow)

The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the

button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select

Sizing Flow

The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this

function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings

saved are loaded with the Load Default button

Setting Impact when activated

Basic functions

Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply

Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order

classification PED device check code page and printouts

Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits

The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits

No indication of default start data input of data by user

By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually

Advanced functions

Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)

The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles

Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates

My View

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

DP Flow

Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters

Activates said functions

Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP

flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

Back to top

13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines

131 General

Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation

Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)

Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures

132 Fluid engine

General Information

The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the

fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor

Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both

liquids and for gases

Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data

Liquid Calculation

Calculation of the acentric factor Omega

Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure

Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby

bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC

bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database

bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms

bull

The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs

Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature

bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3

bull Alpha in 1K

bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K

bull Toper in K

bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3

The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs

Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature

bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3

bull AL (Viscosity factor)

bull BL (Viscosity factor)

bull Toper in K

bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt

Gas calculation

The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and

pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and

temperature

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull Zoper (Compressibility)

Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)

Toper in K

bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3

Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull c Kappa

Steam Calculation

Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard

The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard

(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use

The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from

bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and

bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa

This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only

That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms

Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator

133 Gas engine

The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the

fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine

The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of

the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted

process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine

Back to top

14 Print Sizing

The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured

and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page

The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens

bull Page format size margins orientation and format

bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter

bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report

Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed

bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo

bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout

Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered

Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page

Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are

possible Please check the help manual of the Project module

Back to top

15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by

manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002

The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection

options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator

takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable

flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and

Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can

switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator

1 Categorisation of the application

2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests

bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this

option

PED Categories

Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered

during the sizing and ordering process They include

bull All ultrasonic flowmeters

bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo

bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water

bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the

static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure

bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume

The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data

danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)

Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements

have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen

device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and

nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case

a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet

All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout

Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)

Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and

temperature are the main parameters

If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required

data in the min nom and max columns

If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the

necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating

Danger posed by the fluid

The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the

case of gases the stability of the gas is also important

The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo

according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)

All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations

belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is

above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture

bull H200-H205 (explosive)

bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)

bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)

bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)

bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)

bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)

bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)

In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in

Danger Symbols below

In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED

fluid groups

rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids

Order code

If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option

this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page

With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family

nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration

If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center

Danger Symbols

Danger symbol Explanation H-rates

C corrosive H 314

Cl chemical instable

E explosive H200-H205

F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223

F flammable H 225-H228

N environmental

dangerous

O oxidizing H271-H272

T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330

H372

T poisonous

Xi irritating

Xn injurious to health

Back to top

16 Online Update

The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator

Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes

and updated system databases with the latest products

The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator

newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the

Settings menu

Page 28: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use

4 Accessories

There are two possibilities to access the selection of accessories for flowmeters directly on the Accessories

page (see example 41) or by activating a checkbox (see example flow conditioner 42)

In addition to the selection of accessories and inclusion of their order codes all necessary calculations (eg

mounting set 41) are executed

41 Accessories page

Example mounting set

Accessories can be selected directly on the Accessories page including the corresponding calculations

Example Insertion depth for thermal flowmeters (insertion version)

42 Activating a checkbox

Example Flow conditioner

For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are

automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and

process connection can be selected

43 Accessories within the order code

The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving

process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed

Applicator versions)

Back to top

5 Fluid Properties page

51 General description

Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page

This view supports the following types of fluids

Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under

ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page

The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases

Liquids

Media type Standardprocess

Fluids not 100 water (example 0

Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)

Support points (linear interpolation)

Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97

Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-

Gas (Air) UDG)

Redlich-Kwong

Gases

Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas

engine

Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine

Air Ozone O3

Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)

Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr

Butane Nitric Oxide NO3

Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0

Carbon monoxide

Chlorine

Ethane

Ethylene

Helium

Hydrogen

Hydrogen chloride

Hydrogen sulphide

Krypton

Methane

Neon

Nitrogen

Oxygen

Propane

Xenon

0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User

Defined Gas Mixture 0

Oxygen

The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for

example density or viscosity

The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information

classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of

the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They

are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are

important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new

medium

The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The

parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll

to the group header you see on your screen

When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page

A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details

Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page

52 Parameter groups

521 Fluid information

In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible

Fluid name contains the name of the fluid

Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In

many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available

State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many

purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the

steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account

Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made

522 Fluid Description

The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid

Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian

Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid

Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and

syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or

measurement principle

Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is

flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals

Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive

Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for

conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to

50 microScm and more than 50 microScm

Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to

67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo

Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details

Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid

The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user

defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

523 Basic Fluid Parameters

The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be

created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages

Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid

Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid

Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point

Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid

Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas

The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has

an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also

depend on density and viscosity

In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and

sound velocity

524 Constants

This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas

type selected

Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken

from the Unit Defaults page

Molar mass molecular weight of the gas

Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)

Heating value calorific value of the gas

The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine

For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is

used to calculate the sound velocity

525 Typical Operating Conditions

The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions

Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the

mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of

the typical operating conditions are editable

526 Temperature Viscosity

This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description

The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function

of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve

for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range

527 Temperature Density

This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Density density at the support point

The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of

operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for

fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range

528 Temperature Heat capacity

This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point

The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

529 Temperature Vapor pressure

This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid

Temperature temperature at the support point

Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point

The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

5210 Gas mixture

The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture

Gas name of the gas (first field)

Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture

Unit unit for mass fraction

A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are

given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas

Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report

The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is

displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine

only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100

5211 Fluid properties and results

This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed

differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help

function

Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom

display ldquonardquo

The calculated constants are eg

Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions

Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions

Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions

Heating value the calorific value of the fluid

For liquids

Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data

displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page

AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

For solids

a viscosity coefficient for the gas

n viscosity coefficient for gases

5212 Reference values

This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters

displayed differ according to the fluid selected

Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation

Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780

Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780

Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533

Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533

5213 Measuring task

The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of

the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details

opens a window with more information about the approval

5214 Restriction on flowmeters

This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates

that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details

opens a window with more information about the restrictions

53 Setting reference conditions

Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu

There are two possibilities

SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are

- pressure 10132 bar absolute

- temperature 0deg Celsius

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter

US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are

- pressure 14696 psi absolute

- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter

54 Creating a User Defined Fluid

Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the

world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids

1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field

Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid

at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam

2 Now click on the Properties button

3 When the page has opened click on New

4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate

fields which are now open for editing

When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database

Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system

fluids

If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields

will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General

parameters list and you can start again

If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit

button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close

button exits the page without saving the changes

55 Import and Export of Fluids

In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this

the import and export function of the fluid database can be used

In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information

are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want

to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export

button

Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database

To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file

56 Fluid Properties report

The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing

page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results

and reference values

Back to top

6 Compare size and sensor

61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)

When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose

Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the

ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function

When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The

displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter

The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by

clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the

corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table

will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can

be reapplied

The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you

click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed

as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator

can be reapplied

62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)

The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement

principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are

selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator

versions

Back to top

7 Chart page

71 Introduction

The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case

of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available

The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections

72 General Parameters

In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a

repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on

the sizing page

73 Process data

Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference

74 Curves

The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if

offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter

In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be

automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be

activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner

If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report

75 Flow limits

The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range

and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are

different

76 Chart

The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the

pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using

the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional

information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different

curves within the chart

The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons

The content of the printout depends on the options selected

Back to top

8 Order Code

Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order

information

In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring

principle and flowmeter These are as follows

Feature Description Order codeSizing

Definition of ideal

diameter

Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter

relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure

loss

Diameter (Order code

option)

Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and

installation data

Mounting set (Order code

option)

Determination of

insertion depth

Calculation of insertion depth depending on

the selected accessory (t-mass)

Pipe length (Order code

option)

Selection of Material

(Sensor)

Selection and verification of corrosion

consistency

Sensor material Liner

material (Order code

option)

Selection of Process

connection

Selection and verification of pressure and

temperature curve

Process connection (Order

code option)

Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order

code option)

Pressure equipment

directive (PED)

Definition of PED-category depending on the

application and verification of the offered

process connections

Additional approval (Order

code option)

Custody transfer Verification or specification of application

data definition of measuring range

Custody transfer (Order

code option)

Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow

conditioner)

Accessory enclosed or extra

position (Order code

option)

Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow

splitter

Sensor Options (Order code

option)

Evaluation of

measuring range

Calculation of measuring range Calculation

datachart

Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and

accessory where required

Calculation

datachart

Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation

datachart

Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion

database with relevant data

The Order code page consists of different frames

81 Order code

Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically

by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and

Configurator for the valid order codes

82 Order code options

Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration

options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the

order code

The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection

on the Sizing page

The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page

The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options

Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed

these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still

feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning

message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change

83 Extended order code

831 General

Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen

In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables

for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and

activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the

Extended order code feature is used

With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order

code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the

order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator

832 Device parameter data settings

To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is

not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the

ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator

The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo

84 Button center

The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to

proceed with your Sizing process

Configurator

Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order

code

Print Sizing

Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product can be pasted into a project

Back to top

9 Conversion Calculator

Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity

All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by

selecting one out of the drop down lists

The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another

The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all

common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be

recalculated automatically

Back to top

10 Unit Defaults

Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings

menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored

whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session

Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily

for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button

Back to top

11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)

111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)

Disclaimer

The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from

publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and

assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a

minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion

fatigue life

The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different

process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined

Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check

Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled

The content of the database was sourced from

bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)

bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG

bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta

bull Various Internet Links

bull Various Corrosion data bases

The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application

and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process

temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows

Metal

Class Description depth of corrosion per surface

A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)

B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)

C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)

NR not recommended

U unknown

Plastics

Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength

A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear

B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year

lt=30 loss of tensile strength year

C not resistant lt= 50year

lt=50 loss of tensile strength year

NR not recommended

U unknown

Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used

112 Using Corrosion Check

Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion

information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability

of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not

appear at the top of the page

Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the

corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table

The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid

The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion

database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message

is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning

message

The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project

module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing

Back to top

12 Settings (Sizing Flow)

The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the

button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select

Sizing Flow

The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this

function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings

saved are loaded with the Load Default button

Setting Impact when activated

Basic functions

Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply

Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order

classification PED device check code page and printouts

Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits

The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits

No indication of default start data input of data by user

By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually

Advanced functions

Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)

The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles

Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates

My View

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

DP Flow

Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters

Activates said functions

Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP

flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

Back to top

13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines

131 General

Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation

Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)

Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures

132 Fluid engine

General Information

The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the

fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor

Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both

liquids and for gases

Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data

Liquid Calculation

Calculation of the acentric factor Omega

Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure

Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby

bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC

bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database

bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms

bull

The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs

Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature

bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3

bull Alpha in 1K

bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K

bull Toper in K

bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3

The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs

Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature

bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3

bull AL (Viscosity factor)

bull BL (Viscosity factor)

bull Toper in K

bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt

Gas calculation

The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and

pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and

temperature

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull Zoper (Compressibility)

Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)

Toper in K

bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3

Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull c Kappa

Steam Calculation

Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard

The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard

(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use

The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from

bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and

bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa

This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only

That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms

Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator

133 Gas engine

The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the

fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine

The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of

the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted

process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine

Back to top

14 Print Sizing

The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured

and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page

The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens

bull Page format size margins orientation and format

bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter

bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report

Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed

bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo

bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout

Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered

Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page

Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are

possible Please check the help manual of the Project module

Back to top

15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by

manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002

The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection

options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator

takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable

flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and

Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can

switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator

1 Categorisation of the application

2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests

bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this

option

PED Categories

Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered

during the sizing and ordering process They include

bull All ultrasonic flowmeters

bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo

bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water

bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the

static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure

bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume

The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data

danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)

Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements

have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen

device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and

nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case

a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet

All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout

Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)

Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and

temperature are the main parameters

If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required

data in the min nom and max columns

If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the

necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating

Danger posed by the fluid

The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the

case of gases the stability of the gas is also important

The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo

according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)

All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations

belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is

above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture

bull H200-H205 (explosive)

bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)

bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)

bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)

bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)

bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)

bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)

In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in

Danger Symbols below

In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED

fluid groups

rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids

Order code

If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option

this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page

With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family

nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration

If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center

Danger Symbols

Danger symbol Explanation H-rates

C corrosive H 314

Cl chemical instable

E explosive H200-H205

F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223

F flammable H 225-H228

N environmental

dangerous

O oxidizing H271-H272

T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330

H372

T poisonous

Xi irritating

Xn injurious to health

Back to top

16 Online Update

The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator

Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes

and updated system databases with the latest products

The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator

newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the

Settings menu

Page 29: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use

For the T-mass and Prowirl families flow conditioners are available as accessories The accessories are

automatically selected by activating the checkbox Flow conditioner On the Accessories page material and

process connection can be selected

43 Accessories within the order code

The selected accessories are indicated on the order code page and can be edited if needed During the saving

process data are transferred to the project module (Project module is only available in local installed

Applicator versions)

Back to top

5 Fluid Properties page

51 General description

Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page

This view supports the following types of fluids

Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under

ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page

The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases

Liquids

Media type Standardprocess

Fluids not 100 water (example 0

Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)

Support points (linear interpolation)

Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97

Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-

Gas (Air) UDG)

Redlich-Kwong

Gases

Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas

engine

Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine

Air Ozone O3

Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)

Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr

Butane Nitric Oxide NO3

Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0

Carbon monoxide

Chlorine

Ethane

Ethylene

Helium

Hydrogen

Hydrogen chloride

Hydrogen sulphide

Krypton

Methane

Neon

Nitrogen

Oxygen

Propane

Xenon

0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User

Defined Gas Mixture 0

Oxygen

The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for

example density or viscosity

The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information

classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of

the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They

are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are

important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new

medium

The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The

parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll

to the group header you see on your screen

When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page

A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details

Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page

52 Parameter groups

521 Fluid information

In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible

Fluid name contains the name of the fluid

Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In

many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available

State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many

purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the

steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account

Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made

522 Fluid Description

The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid

Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian

Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid

Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and

syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or

measurement principle

Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is

flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals

Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive

Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for

conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to

50 microScm and more than 50 microScm

Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to

67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo

Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details

Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid

The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user

defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

523 Basic Fluid Parameters

The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be

created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages

Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid

Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid

Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point

Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid

Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas

The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has

an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also

depend on density and viscosity

In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and

sound velocity

524 Constants

This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas

type selected

Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken

from the Unit Defaults page

Molar mass molecular weight of the gas

Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)

Heating value calorific value of the gas

The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine

For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is

used to calculate the sound velocity

525 Typical Operating Conditions

The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions

Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the

mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of

the typical operating conditions are editable

526 Temperature Viscosity

This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description

The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function

of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve

for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range

527 Temperature Density

This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Density density at the support point

The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of

operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for

fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range

528 Temperature Heat capacity

This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point

The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

529 Temperature Vapor pressure

This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid

Temperature temperature at the support point

Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point

The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

5210 Gas mixture

The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture

Gas name of the gas (first field)

Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture

Unit unit for mass fraction

A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are

given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas

Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report

The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is

displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine

only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100

5211 Fluid properties and results

This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed

differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help

function

Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom

display ldquonardquo

The calculated constants are eg

Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions

Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions

Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions

Heating value the calorific value of the fluid

For liquids

Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data

displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page

AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

For solids

a viscosity coefficient for the gas

n viscosity coefficient for gases

5212 Reference values

This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters

displayed differ according to the fluid selected

Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation

Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780

Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780

Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533

Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533

5213 Measuring task

The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of

the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details

opens a window with more information about the approval

5214 Restriction on flowmeters

This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates

that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details

opens a window with more information about the restrictions

53 Setting reference conditions

Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu

There are two possibilities

SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are

- pressure 10132 bar absolute

- temperature 0deg Celsius

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter

US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are

- pressure 14696 psi absolute

- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter

54 Creating a User Defined Fluid

Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the

world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids

1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field

Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid

at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam

2 Now click on the Properties button

3 When the page has opened click on New

4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate

fields which are now open for editing

When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database

Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system

fluids

If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields

will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General

parameters list and you can start again

If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit

button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close

button exits the page without saving the changes

55 Import and Export of Fluids

In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this

the import and export function of the fluid database can be used

In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information

are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want

to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export

button

Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database

To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file

56 Fluid Properties report

The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing

page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results

and reference values

Back to top

6 Compare size and sensor

61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)

When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose

Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the

ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function

When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The

displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter

The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by

clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the

corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table

will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can

be reapplied

The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you

click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed

as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator

can be reapplied

62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)

The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement

principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are

selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator

versions

Back to top

7 Chart page

71 Introduction

The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case

of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available

The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections

72 General Parameters

In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a

repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on

the sizing page

73 Process data

Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference

74 Curves

The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if

offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter

In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be

automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be

activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner

If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report

75 Flow limits

The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range

and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are

different

76 Chart

The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the

pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using

the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional

information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different

curves within the chart

The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons

The content of the printout depends on the options selected

Back to top

8 Order Code

Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order

information

In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring

principle and flowmeter These are as follows

Feature Description Order codeSizing

Definition of ideal

diameter

Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter

relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure

loss

Diameter (Order code

option)

Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and

installation data

Mounting set (Order code

option)

Determination of

insertion depth

Calculation of insertion depth depending on

the selected accessory (t-mass)

Pipe length (Order code

option)

Selection of Material

(Sensor)

Selection and verification of corrosion

consistency

Sensor material Liner

material (Order code

option)

Selection of Process

connection

Selection and verification of pressure and

temperature curve

Process connection (Order

code option)

Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order

code option)

Pressure equipment

directive (PED)

Definition of PED-category depending on the

application and verification of the offered

process connections

Additional approval (Order

code option)

Custody transfer Verification or specification of application

data definition of measuring range

Custody transfer (Order

code option)

Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow

conditioner)

Accessory enclosed or extra

position (Order code

option)

Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow

splitter

Sensor Options (Order code

option)

Evaluation of

measuring range

Calculation of measuring range Calculation

datachart

Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and

accessory where required

Calculation

datachart

Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation

datachart

Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion

database with relevant data

The Order code page consists of different frames

81 Order code

Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically

by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and

Configurator for the valid order codes

82 Order code options

Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration

options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the

order code

The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection

on the Sizing page

The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page

The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options

Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed

these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still

feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning

message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change

83 Extended order code

831 General

Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen

In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables

for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and

activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the

Extended order code feature is used

With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order

code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the

order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator

832 Device parameter data settings

To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is

not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the

ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator

The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo

84 Button center

The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to

proceed with your Sizing process

Configurator

Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order

code

Print Sizing

Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product can be pasted into a project

Back to top

9 Conversion Calculator

Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity

All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by

selecting one out of the drop down lists

The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another

The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all

common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be

recalculated automatically

Back to top

10 Unit Defaults

Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings

menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored

whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session

Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily

for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button

Back to top

11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)

111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)

Disclaimer

The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from

publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and

assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a

minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion

fatigue life

The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different

process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined

Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check

Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled

The content of the database was sourced from

bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)

bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG

bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta

bull Various Internet Links

bull Various Corrosion data bases

The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application

and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process

temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows

Metal

Class Description depth of corrosion per surface

A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)

B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)

C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)

NR not recommended

U unknown

Plastics

Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength

A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear

B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year

lt=30 loss of tensile strength year

C not resistant lt= 50year

lt=50 loss of tensile strength year

NR not recommended

U unknown

Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used

112 Using Corrosion Check

Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion

information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability

of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not

appear at the top of the page

Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the

corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table

The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid

The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion

database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message

is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning

message

The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project

module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing

Back to top

12 Settings (Sizing Flow)

The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the

button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select

Sizing Flow

The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this

function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings

saved are loaded with the Load Default button

Setting Impact when activated

Basic functions

Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply

Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order

classification PED device check code page and printouts

Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits

The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits

No indication of default start data input of data by user

By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually

Advanced functions

Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)

The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles

Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates

My View

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

DP Flow

Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters

Activates said functions

Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP

flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

Back to top

13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines

131 General

Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation

Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)

Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures

132 Fluid engine

General Information

The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the

fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor

Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both

liquids and for gases

Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data

Liquid Calculation

Calculation of the acentric factor Omega

Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure

Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby

bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC

bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database

bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms

bull

The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs

Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature

bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3

bull Alpha in 1K

bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K

bull Toper in K

bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3

The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs

Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature

bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3

bull AL (Viscosity factor)

bull BL (Viscosity factor)

bull Toper in K

bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt

Gas calculation

The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and

pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and

temperature

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull Zoper (Compressibility)

Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)

Toper in K

bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3

Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull c Kappa

Steam Calculation

Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard

The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard

(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use

The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from

bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and

bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa

This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only

That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms

Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator

133 Gas engine

The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the

fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine

The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of

the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted

process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine

Back to top

14 Print Sizing

The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured

and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page

The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens

bull Page format size margins orientation and format

bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter

bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report

Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed

bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo

bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout

Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered

Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page

Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are

possible Please check the help manual of the Project module

Back to top

15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by

manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002

The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection

options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator

takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable

flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and

Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can

switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator

1 Categorisation of the application

2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests

bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this

option

PED Categories

Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered

during the sizing and ordering process They include

bull All ultrasonic flowmeters

bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo

bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water

bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the

static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure

bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume

The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data

danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)

Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements

have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen

device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and

nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case

a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet

All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout

Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)

Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and

temperature are the main parameters

If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required

data in the min nom and max columns

If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the

necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating

Danger posed by the fluid

The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the

case of gases the stability of the gas is also important

The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo

according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)

All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations

belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is

above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture

bull H200-H205 (explosive)

bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)

bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)

bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)

bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)

bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)

bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)

In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in

Danger Symbols below

In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED

fluid groups

rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids

Order code

If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option

this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page

With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family

nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration

If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center

Danger Symbols

Danger symbol Explanation H-rates

C corrosive H 314

Cl chemical instable

E explosive H200-H205

F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223

F flammable H 225-H228

N environmental

dangerous

O oxidizing H271-H272

T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330

H372

T poisonous

Xi irritating

Xn injurious to health

Back to top

16 Online Update

The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator

Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes

and updated system databases with the latest products

The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator

newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the

Settings menu

Page 30: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use

Back to top

5 Fluid Properties page

51 General description

Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page

This view supports the following types of fluids

Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under

ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page

The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases

Liquids

Media type Standardprocess

Fluids not 100 water (example 0

Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)

Support points (linear interpolation)

Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97

Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-

Gas (Air) UDG)

Redlich-Kwong

Gases

Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas

engine

Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine

Air Ozone O3

Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)

Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr

Butane Nitric Oxide NO3

Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0

Carbon monoxide

Chlorine

Ethane

Ethylene

Helium

Hydrogen

Hydrogen chloride

Hydrogen sulphide

Krypton

Methane

Neon

Nitrogen

Oxygen

Propane

Xenon

0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User

Defined Gas Mixture 0

Oxygen

The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for

example density or viscosity

The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information

classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of

the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They

are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are

important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new

medium

The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The

parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll

to the group header you see on your screen

When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page

A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details

Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page

52 Parameter groups

521 Fluid information

In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible

Fluid name contains the name of the fluid

Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In

many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available

State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many

purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the

steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account

Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made

522 Fluid Description

The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid

Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian

Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid

Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and

syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or

measurement principle

Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is

flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals

Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive

Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for

conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to

50 microScm and more than 50 microScm

Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to

67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo

Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details

Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid

The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user

defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

523 Basic Fluid Parameters

The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be

created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages

Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid

Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid

Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point

Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid

Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas

The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has

an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also

depend on density and viscosity

In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and

sound velocity

524 Constants

This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas

type selected

Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken

from the Unit Defaults page

Molar mass molecular weight of the gas

Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)

Heating value calorific value of the gas

The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine

For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is

used to calculate the sound velocity

525 Typical Operating Conditions

The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions

Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the

mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of

the typical operating conditions are editable

526 Temperature Viscosity

This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description

The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function

of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve

for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range

527 Temperature Density

This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Density density at the support point

The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of

operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for

fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range

528 Temperature Heat capacity

This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point

The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

529 Temperature Vapor pressure

This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid

Temperature temperature at the support point

Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point

The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

5210 Gas mixture

The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture

Gas name of the gas (first field)

Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture

Unit unit for mass fraction

A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are

given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas

Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report

The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is

displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine

only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100

5211 Fluid properties and results

This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed

differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help

function

Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom

display ldquonardquo

The calculated constants are eg

Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions

Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions

Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions

Heating value the calorific value of the fluid

For liquids

Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data

displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page

AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

For solids

a viscosity coefficient for the gas

n viscosity coefficient for gases

5212 Reference values

This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters

displayed differ according to the fluid selected

Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation

Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780

Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780

Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533

Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533

5213 Measuring task

The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of

the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details

opens a window with more information about the approval

5214 Restriction on flowmeters

This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates

that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details

opens a window with more information about the restrictions

53 Setting reference conditions

Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu

There are two possibilities

SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are

- pressure 10132 bar absolute

- temperature 0deg Celsius

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter

US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are

- pressure 14696 psi absolute

- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter

54 Creating a User Defined Fluid

Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the

world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids

1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field

Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid

at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam

2 Now click on the Properties button

3 When the page has opened click on New

4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate

fields which are now open for editing

When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database

Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system

fluids

If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields

will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General

parameters list and you can start again

If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit

button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close

button exits the page without saving the changes

55 Import and Export of Fluids

In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this

the import and export function of the fluid database can be used

In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information

are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want

to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export

button

Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database

To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file

56 Fluid Properties report

The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing

page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results

and reference values

Back to top

6 Compare size and sensor

61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)

When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose

Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the

ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function

When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The

displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter

The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by

clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the

corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table

will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can

be reapplied

The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you

click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed

as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator

can be reapplied

62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)

The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement

principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are

selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator

versions

Back to top

7 Chart page

71 Introduction

The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case

of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available

The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections

72 General Parameters

In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a

repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on

the sizing page

73 Process data

Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference

74 Curves

The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if

offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter

In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be

automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be

activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner

If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report

75 Flow limits

The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range

and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are

different

76 Chart

The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the

pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using

the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional

information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different

curves within the chart

The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons

The content of the printout depends on the options selected

Back to top

8 Order Code

Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order

information

In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring

principle and flowmeter These are as follows

Feature Description Order codeSizing

Definition of ideal

diameter

Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter

relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure

loss

Diameter (Order code

option)

Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and

installation data

Mounting set (Order code

option)

Determination of

insertion depth

Calculation of insertion depth depending on

the selected accessory (t-mass)

Pipe length (Order code

option)

Selection of Material

(Sensor)

Selection and verification of corrosion

consistency

Sensor material Liner

material (Order code

option)

Selection of Process

connection

Selection and verification of pressure and

temperature curve

Process connection (Order

code option)

Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order

code option)

Pressure equipment

directive (PED)

Definition of PED-category depending on the

application and verification of the offered

process connections

Additional approval (Order

code option)

Custody transfer Verification or specification of application

data definition of measuring range

Custody transfer (Order

code option)

Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow

conditioner)

Accessory enclosed or extra

position (Order code

option)

Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow

splitter

Sensor Options (Order code

option)

Evaluation of

measuring range

Calculation of measuring range Calculation

datachart

Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and

accessory where required

Calculation

datachart

Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation

datachart

Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion

database with relevant data

The Order code page consists of different frames

81 Order code

Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically

by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and

Configurator for the valid order codes

82 Order code options

Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration

options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the

order code

The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection

on the Sizing page

The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page

The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options

Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed

these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still

feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning

message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change

83 Extended order code

831 General

Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen

In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables

for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and

activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the

Extended order code feature is used

With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order

code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the

order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator

832 Device parameter data settings

To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is

not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the

ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator

The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo

84 Button center

The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to

proceed with your Sizing process

Configurator

Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order

code

Print Sizing

Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product can be pasted into a project

Back to top

9 Conversion Calculator

Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity

All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by

selecting one out of the drop down lists

The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another

The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all

common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be

recalculated automatically

Back to top

10 Unit Defaults

Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings

menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored

whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session

Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily

for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button

Back to top

11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)

111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)

Disclaimer

The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from

publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and

assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a

minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion

fatigue life

The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different

process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined

Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check

Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled

The content of the database was sourced from

bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)

bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG

bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta

bull Various Internet Links

bull Various Corrosion data bases

The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application

and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process

temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows

Metal

Class Description depth of corrosion per surface

A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)

B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)

C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)

NR not recommended

U unknown

Plastics

Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength

A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear

B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year

lt=30 loss of tensile strength year

C not resistant lt= 50year

lt=50 loss of tensile strength year

NR not recommended

U unknown

Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used

112 Using Corrosion Check

Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion

information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability

of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not

appear at the top of the page

Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the

corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table

The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid

The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion

database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message

is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning

message

The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project

module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing

Back to top

12 Settings (Sizing Flow)

The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the

button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select

Sizing Flow

The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this

function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings

saved are loaded with the Load Default button

Setting Impact when activated

Basic functions

Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply

Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order

classification PED device check code page and printouts

Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits

The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits

No indication of default start data input of data by user

By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually

Advanced functions

Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)

The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles

Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates

My View

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

DP Flow

Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters

Activates said functions

Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP

flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

Back to top

13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines

131 General

Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation

Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)

Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures

132 Fluid engine

General Information

The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the

fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor

Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both

liquids and for gases

Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data

Liquid Calculation

Calculation of the acentric factor Omega

Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure

Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby

bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC

bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database

bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms

bull

The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs

Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature

bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3

bull Alpha in 1K

bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K

bull Toper in K

bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3

The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs

Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature

bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3

bull AL (Viscosity factor)

bull BL (Viscosity factor)

bull Toper in K

bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt

Gas calculation

The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and

pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and

temperature

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull Zoper (Compressibility)

Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)

Toper in K

bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3

Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull c Kappa

Steam Calculation

Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard

The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard

(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use

The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from

bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and

bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa

This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only

That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms

Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator

133 Gas engine

The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the

fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine

The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of

the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted

process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine

Back to top

14 Print Sizing

The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured

and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page

The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens

bull Page format size margins orientation and format

bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter

bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report

Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed

bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo

bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout

Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered

Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page

Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are

possible Please check the help manual of the Project module

Back to top

15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by

manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002

The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection

options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator

takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable

flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and

Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can

switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator

1 Categorisation of the application

2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests

bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this

option

PED Categories

Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered

during the sizing and ordering process They include

bull All ultrasonic flowmeters

bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo

bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water

bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the

static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure

bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume

The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data

danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)

Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements

have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen

device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and

nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case

a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet

All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout

Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)

Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and

temperature are the main parameters

If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required

data in the min nom and max columns

If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the

necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating

Danger posed by the fluid

The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the

case of gases the stability of the gas is also important

The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo

according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)

All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations

belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is

above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture

bull H200-H205 (explosive)

bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)

bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)

bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)

bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)

bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)

bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)

In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in

Danger Symbols below

In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED

fluid groups

rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids

Order code

If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option

this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page

With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family

nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration

If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center

Danger Symbols

Danger symbol Explanation H-rates

C corrosive H 314

Cl chemical instable

E explosive H200-H205

F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223

F flammable H 225-H228

N environmental

dangerous

O oxidizing H271-H272

T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330

H372

T poisonous

Xi irritating

Xn injurious to health

Back to top

16 Online Update

The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator

Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes

and updated system databases with the latest products

The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator

newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the

Settings menu

Page 31: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use

5 Fluid Properties page

51 General description

Fluid properties can be accessed via the Properties button on the sizing page

This view supports the following types of fluids

Applicator System fluids (liquids gases steams) User Defined Liquid User Defined Gas Gas Mixtures

Depending on the media type a specific calculation standard or calculation process is carried out that

produces the required media properties The selected standard for medium calculation is displayed under

ldquoStatusStandardrdquo in Applicator and documented on the fluid properties page

The following standardsengines are used for liquids or gases

Liquids

Media type Standardprocess

Fluids not 100 water (example 0

Dummy-Liquid (Water) UDL)

Support points (linear interpolation)

Water (Water Process) IAPWS-97

Gases user-defined (example 0 Dummy-

Gas (Air) UDG)

Redlich-Kwong

Gases

Supported gas by Gas mixture pageGas

engine

Supported gas by Fluid property pageFluid engine

Air Ozone O3

Ammonia Biogaslandfill gas CH4+CO2 (7030)

Argon Hydrobromic acid HBr

Butane Nitric Oxide NO3

Carbon dioxide 0_ Dummy_ Gas (based on Air)_ 0

Carbon monoxide

Chlorine

Ethane

Ethylene

Helium

Hydrogen

Hydrogen chloride

Hydrogen sulphide

Krypton

Methane

Neon

Nitrogen

Oxygen

Propane

Xenon

0 Dummy-Gas mixture (Air+CO2) User

Defined Gas Mixture 0

Oxygen

The ldquoSupport pointsrdquo and ldquoRedlich-Kwongrdquo standards are open for the manual input of medium properties for

example density or viscosity

The Fluid Properties page displays information related to the fluid including descriptive information

classification information and physical constants used in the calculation of fluid behaviour and sizing Some of

the data such as fluid name chemical formula and physical state are only displayed for your information They

are not taken into account by any of the calculations or considerations in the program The other items are

important for calculating the fluid properties and should be completely available if you want to define a new

medium

The parameters displayed for liquids and non-liquids (gas and steam) depend upon the selected fluid The

parameters are grouped in frames with a light blue group header For a description of each parameter scroll

to the group header you see on your screen

When used just to view the fluid properties the OK button closes the window and returns to the Sizing page

A new fluid can be created by clicking on the New button See 54 Creating a User Defined Fluid for details

Reset clears the current fluid properties and returns to the initial sizing page

52 Parameter groups

521 Fluid information

In the header area of the fluid properties window the following parameters may be visible

Fluid name contains the name of the fluid

Chemical formula may contain the chemical formula a description of the fluid or a combination of both In

many cases the ldquoChemical formulardquo field is simply blank meaning that this information is not available

State this field has four possible values Liquid Gas Saturated Steam and Superheated Steam For many

purposes in the program only the distinction between liquid and non-liquid is relevant However each of the

steam types has unique properties which the program takes into account

Standard indicates the standard by which the sizing calculations are made

522 Fluid Description

The parameters that appear in this frame characterize the fluid

Fluid type indicates whether the fluid is newtonian or non-newtonian

Solid content percentage of solids in the fluid

Medium character describes the nature of the fluid eg clean emulsion suspension slurry paste and

syrup Criteria for warning messages are activated depending on the property and selected flowmeter or

measurement principle

Flammability the flammability of a fluid can vary in classification The difference is important if a fluid is

flammable or not flammable This property can be an issue for custody transfer approvals

Abrasiveness indicates how abrasive the fluid is eg not abrasive slightly quite or very abrasive

Conductivity an important criterion for the use of the magnetic-inductive principle The unit used for

conductivity is microScm The range of categories goes from non-conductive 001 to 1 microScm 1 to 5 microScm 5 to

50 microScm and more than 50 microScm

Fluid group (PED) The fluids of the Applicator data base are classified in fluid groups according to

67548EWG Possible values are group 1 (dangerous) group 2 (not dangerous) and ldquonot relevant for PEDrdquo

Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive) for details

Fluid stability indicates the chemical stability of a fluid

The properties Fluid Group (PED) and Fluid stability are important for the PED check if you create a user

defined gas mixture Please see PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

523 Basic Fluid Parameters

The parameters in this frame characterize the fluid and should be known if a User Defined Fluid is to be

created The constants can normally be taken from specific literature and internet pages

Tc (critical temperature) temperature at the critical point of the fluid

Pc (critical pressure) pressure at the critical point of the fluid

Rho_c (Critical density) density of the fluid at the critical point

Tm (melting point) temperature at which the fluid changes from solid to liquid

Tb (boiling point) temperature at which the fluid changes from liquid to gas

The constants Tc Pc Tm and Tb are used for the calculation of the compressibility factor Z The Z-factor has

an influence on fluid properties such as density viscosity and sound velocity The pressure loss can also

depend on density and viscosity

In the case of liquids these constants are used for the calculation of vapor pressure (cavitation check) and

sound velocity

524 Constants

This frame is present for non-liquids only and characterizes the gas constants Its content depends on the gas

type selected

Density (Rhozero) reference density at 1013 bar absolute and zero = 0 degC whereby the density unit is taken

from the Unit Defaults page

Molar mass molecular weight of the gas

Kappa adiabatic index of the gas (cpcv)

Heating value calorific value of the gas

The reference density is necessary for calculating the density of the gas at any temperature in the fluid engine

For a real gas the Z-Factor is also required but is calculated by Applicator using other physical data Kappa is

used to calculate the sound velocity

525 Typical Operating Conditions

The parameters in this frame characterize the operating conditions

Temperature typical temperature of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

Pressure typical pressure of the fluid in the corresponding fluid state

The fields can be edited If for example there is a multi-phase mixture available (eg gaseous liquid) the

mixture cannot be saved until it is changed into a single-phase mixture (gaseous) Therefore the attributes of

the typical operating conditions are editable

526 Temperature Viscosity

This frame is only present for liquids and shows the dependency of viscosity on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Viscosity viscosity at the support point ndash please open the Parameter help for a full description

The data pairs (temperatureviscosity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the viscosity of a fluid as a function

of operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperatureviscosity curve

for fluids which increases the accuracy of the viscosity calculation over the whole temperature range

527 Temperature Density

This frame shows the dependency of density on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Density density at the support point

The data pairs (temperaturedensity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the density of a fluid as a function of

operational temperature Up to 10 support points can be entered to display a temperaturedensity curve for

fluids which increases the accuracy of the density calculation over the whole temperature range

528 Temperature Heat capacity

This frame shows the dependency of heat capacity (thermal capacity) on temperature

Temperature temperature at the support point

Thermal capacity thermal capacity at the support point

The data pairs (temperature thermal capacity) are used to calculate (interpolation) the thermal capacity of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

529 Temperature Vapor pressure

This frame shows the dependency of vapour pressure on temperature for a liquid

Temperature temperature at the support point

Vapor pressure vapour pressure at the support point

The data pairs (temperature vapor pressure) are used to calculate (interpolation) the vapour pressure of a

fluid as a function of operational temperature

5210 Gas mixture

The parameters in this frame characterize a gas mixture

Gas name of the gas (first field)

Fraction mass fraction of the gas in the mixture

Unit unit for mass fraction

A gas mixture may contain a maximum of 8 different components The individual component fractions are

given in either Mole or Mass Whereas the process data are mainly available in Mass Applicatorrsquos Gas

Engine and the t-mass needs Mole Both values are included in the sizing print report

The total sum of fractions is calculated immediately If the total sum is not exactly equal to 100 it is

displayed in red and the user cannot leave the Gas mixture page until a correction is made The gas engine

only starts the calculation of the gas properties when the sum of all components is exactly equal to 100

5211 Fluid properties and results

This frame shows the properties used for calculations and the resulting constants The parameters displayed

differ according to the fluid selected For explanations click on the ldquoirdquo icon to open the Parameter help

function

Note If no Requested flow has been entered in Applicator the field Pressure nom and Temperature nom

display ldquonardquo

The calculated constants are eg

Z-factor nom compressibility factor for a real gas under nominal conditions

Viscosity nom the viscosity under nominal conditions

Sound velocity nom the sound velocity under nominal conditions

Heating value the calorific value of the fluid

For liquids

Alpha thermal expansion coefficient [1K] for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data

displayed elsewhere in the Fluid Properties page

AL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

BL viscosity coefficient for the liquid This constant is derived from the other basic data displayed elsewhere in

the Fluid Properties page

For solids

a viscosity coefficient for the gas

n viscosity coefficient for gases

5212 Reference values

This frame shows reference values used in calculations eg of normalized flow rates The parameters

displayed differ according to the fluid selected

Atmospheric pressure atmospheric pressure at the point of installation

Pressure (Normal conditions SI) normal pressure as per ISO10780

Temperature (Normal conditions SI) normal temperature as per ISO10780

Pressure (Standard conditions US) standard pressure as per ISO 2533

Temperature (Standard conditions US) standard temperature as per ISO 2533

5213 Measuring task

The frame Measuring task shows the approvals for custody transfer available in Applicator The suitability of

the fluid is marked with different colors (Green Permitted Yellow Not checked Red Not permitted) Details

opens a window with more information about the approval

5214 Restriction on flowmeters

This frame shows all meters with restrictions regarding the selected fluid or mixture A green button indicates

that the displayed flow meter is suitable for the selected fluid a red button that it is not suitable Details

opens a window with more information about the restrictions

53 Setting reference conditions

Default reference values for pressure and temperature can be set by using the settings menu

There are two possibilities

SI - International system of units according to ISO 10780 The values are

- pressure 10132 bar absolute

- temperature 0deg Celsius

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Nm3timenormal cubic meter

US units of measure according to ISO 2533 The values are

- pressure 14696 psi absolute

- temperature 59deg Fahrenheit

These reference values apply to referenced flow rates eg unit Sm3timestandard cubic meter

54 Creating a User Defined Fluid

Applicator has an extensive database of pre-defined fluids but cannot cover all fluids which are used in the

world For that reason Applicator offers a very easy way to create your own fluids

1 First enter a dummy gas or liquid in the General properties ldquoFluidrdquo field

Note the state of the fluid cannot be changed so it is important that you select the correct dummy fluid

at this stage (Air or Water) In general it is not possible to create User Defined Fluids based on steam

2 Now click on the Properties button

3 When the page has opened click on New

4 Now enter the name of the fluid in the ldquoFluid namerdquo field and enter your properties in the appropriate

fields which are now open for editing

When all have been entered press Save to store them in your database

Note that you can save your parameters only after they have been given a new name ndash you cannot edit system

fluids

If you are not sure about the data or you want to stop your changes just click on the Reset button All fields

will be restored to their original values and editing will be disabled Applicator returns to an empty General

parameters list and you can start again

If the Fluid properties page of User Defined Fluid is opened the properties can be edited by clicking on the Edit

button or the fluid can be deleted by clicking on the Delete button at the top of the page Clicking on the Close

button exits the page without saving the changes

55 Import and Export of Fluids

In the local installed version of applicator it is possible to share user defined fluids with other users To do this

the import and export function of the fluid database can be used

In this menu the name of a fluid can be edited a fluid can be deleted from the database general information

are displayed and a quick view of the fluid properties can be made via the ldquoMore detailsrdquo button If you want

to share your fluids with other users you can export your fluids to a locally stored database via the export

button

Here you can select which fluids should be included in the database

To add fluids to your own database use the import button and select a database file

56 Fluid Properties report

The data within ldquoFluid propertiesrdquo can also be printed out by clicking on the Print Sizing button on the sizing

page The printable areas are limited to the topics fluid description basic fluid parameters calculated results

and reference values

Back to top

6 Compare size and sensor

61 Meter size comparison (Tri-sizing)

When a flow meter is sized you may be interested in comparing the result for different sizes For this purpose

Applicator offers a compare functionality which is opened by clicking on the Compare button next to the

ldquoMeter sizerdquo field in the Calculated results frame This function used to be called the ldquoTri-sizingrdquo function

When the Compare button is clicked information for three successive sizes is displayed simultaneously The

displayed information varies according to the selected flowmeter

The current size is always in the middle of the table and printed in blue characters The table can be scrolled by

clicking on the lt Next smaller size and gt Next bigger size buttons If no smaller or bigger size is available the

corresponding button is disabled By clicking on the Apply button the values in the centre column of the table

will be applied in Applicator By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator can

be reapplied

The currently selected size also can be changed via the buttons + and ndash next to the ldquoMeter sizerdquo field If you

click on this button the diameter listed will be used on the Sizing page The content of this page can be printed

as well see Printing for details By clicking on the Proposal button the values recommended by Applicator

can be reapplied

62 Compare Sensors (Tri-sensor page)

The Compare button next to the ldquoFlow meterrdquo field in General parameters allows two other measurement

principles andor flowmeter types to be compared to the selected one The objects to be compared are

selected from the two drop-down menus This function was called Tri-sensor page in earlier Applicator

versions

Back to top

7 Chart page

71 Introduction

The Charts page provides enhanced graphical information about measured error pressure loss and in the case

of DP flow differential pressure Depending on the selected instrument not all of the graphs are available

The Chart page has five different frames which are described in the following sections

72 General Parameters

In this section you can find the main information about the fluid flowmeter state and meter size It is mainly a

repetition of the Sizing page This information is view only - changes to the entries here have to be made on

the sizing page

73 Process data

Information about the entered process information is visible here for reference

74 Curves

The curves frame has check boxes for measured error volume measured error mass pressure loss and if

offered differential pressure The check boxes available depend upon the selected flowmeter

In the case of a flowmeter offering several measured errors those checked in the Sizing pages will be

automatically activated and displayed in the chart when the page is opened Other measured errors can be

activated by clicking on their checkbox in Curves frame Charts can be deactivated in the same manner

If a printout is made only those charts activated will appear in the report

75 Flow limits

The checkboxes offered in the Flow limits frame allow the chart to be switched between eg Operating range

and Requested flow A chart for Requested flow is available only when the min nom and max flow rates are

different

76 Chart

The Chart itself has two Y-axes one on the left for the measured error curves and one on the right for the

pressure curves The X-axis has two different scales The most important one is for the flow rate always using

the unit you selected in the operating conditions on the Sizing page The second scale provides additional

information about the Reynolds Number across the flow rate range The Legend frame identifies the different

curves within the chart

The ranges of the Y-axes can be changed by clicking on the + and ndash buttons

The content of the printout depends on the options selected

Back to top

8 Order Code

Applicator is much more than just a selection or sizing tool It also provides application-relevant order

information

In addition to the ideal diameter sizing relevant order codes are verified and defined according to measuring

principle and flowmeter These are as follows

Feature Description Order codeSizing

Definition of ideal

diameter

Automatic sizing of the ideal diameter

relating to ideal flow velocity and pressure

loss

Diameter (Order code

option)

Mounting set - option Determination of suitable mounting sets and

installation data

Mounting set (Order code

option)

Determination of

insertion depth

Calculation of insertion depth depending on

the selected accessory (t-mass)

Pipe length (Order code

option)

Selection of Material

(Sensor)

Selection and verification of corrosion

consistency

Sensor material Liner

material (Order code

option)

Selection of Process

connection

Selection and verification of pressure and

temperature curve

Process connection (Order

code option)

Selection of Calibration Sizing of measurement accuracy Calibration flow (Order

code option)

Pressure equipment

directive (PED)

Definition of PED-category depending on the

application and verification of the offered

process connections

Additional approval (Order

code option)

Custody transfer Verification or specification of application

data definition of measuring range

Custody transfer (Order

code option)

Selection of Accessory Sizing of relevant accessory parts (flow

conditioner)

Accessory enclosed or extra

position (Order code

option)

Sensor Options Reduced pressure loss with optimized flow

splitter

Sensor Options (Order code

option)

Evaluation of

measuring range

Calculation of measuring range Calculation

datachart

Pressure loss Pressure loss due to flowmeter and

accessory where required

Calculation

datachart

Measuring accuracy Calculation of measuring accuracy Calculation

datachart

Verification of corrosion consistency only possible for fluids which are available in the Applicator Corrosion

database with relevant data

The Order code page consists of different frames

81 Order code

Here you can find the partial order code generated by your entries The characters not filled in automatically

by Applicator can be completed by using the Configurator Please refer to the flowmeter documentation and

Configurator for the valid order codes

82 Order code options

Within the frame you can make use of the drop down menus for the process connection PED calibration

options or if selected the corresponding custody transfer approval Any selection has an influence on the

order code

The Process connection field allows the selection of different options for the pre-selected process connection

on the Sizing page

The PED function allows the selection of different options for the determined PED category on the Sizing page

The custody transfer approval option shows the selected approval on the Sizing page as well as its options

Caution Manually selected Order code options will be shown in blue If additional process data is changed

these manual inputs are saved and Applicator will check in each case whether or not the selection is still

feasible If this is not the case the next appropriate option will be automatically selected (without any warning

message) The new selection is then displayed in black to make the user aware of the change

83 Extended order code

831 General

Please note The Order code complementation function must be activated within the Flow Sizing settings menu if all functions described in this section are to be seen

In order to facilitate routine work an extended order code can be included If this function is selected tables

for automatic extension of order codes that do not depend on complex calculation can be completed and

activated on the Extended order code page A default table for level limit and density may be selected if the

Extended order code feature is used

With the help of the order code template pull down list and the AddTemplate button you can access the order

code completion function Here a fixed order code can be entered for a specific product root This way the

order code can be completed with attributes that are not maintained in Applicator

832 Device parameter data settings

To activate this function click on the checkbox in the field header If the checkbox is not active the function is

not available for the flowmeter selected The frame comprises parameters which are requested by the

ldquoRucksackrdquo of the product configurator The non-editable parameters are sourced directly from Applicator

The parameter data sheet can be printed out via ldquoPrint Sizingrdquo

84 Button center

The button tray is located at the end of the result page With the help of the buttons you can decide how to

proceed with your Sizing process

Configurator

Opens the Product-Configurator and transfers the Sizing result (partial order code) to complement the order

code

Print Sizing

Opens the print setting window to start the Sizing reports

Save

This button is only enabled when Sizing was started from a tag in the project administration module and saves

the resized product under the starting tag The tag name is indicated in the field ldquoTagrdquo This field is editable

Save to buffer

Opens the project administration module and puts the sized product in the buffer store From the buffer store

the product can be pasted into a project

Back to top

9 Conversion Calculator

Applicator can distinguish between many different units for flow pressure temperature density and viscosity

All values entered within the operating conditions frame on the Sizing page can be converted in other units by

selecting one out of the drop down lists

The ldquoConversion Calculatorrdquo page can be used as a calculator to convert from one unit into another

The Unit Conversion page is subdivided into five sub pages one for each parameter Within these pages all

common units are listed in a tabular form If you enter a value in one of the fields all other values will be

recalculated automatically

Back to top

10 Unit Defaults

Generally Applicator offers a set of unit defaults which has been defined by the unit system in the Settings

menu On this page you can adjust the activated units to perfectly fit to your needs Changes are stored

whenever you click on the Save as Default button and are applied immediately to your current sizing session

Every time you start a new application these settings are used You can also change those settings temporarily

for the actual sizing session and reload your previous settings by clicking on the Activate Defaults button

Back to top

11 Corrosion Check (CorDB)

111 About Corrosion Check (formerly known as CorDB)

Disclaimer

The content of this corrosion database was compiled by Endress+Hauser according to best knowledge from

publicly available information and field experience Endress+Hauser Flowtec AG can give no guarantees and

assumes no liability regarding corrosion resistance in a given application Please take into account that a

minor variation in temperature concentration or impurity level can have a dramatic effect on corrosion

fatigue life

The Corrosion Data Base links to the Fluid Data Base of basic Applicator and contains more than 350 different

process fluids The various flowmeter families offer more than 20 different flowmeter materials User Defined

Fluids are not supported by Corrosion Check

Caution If no corrosion information is available about a fluid the tab Corrosion Check is disabled

The content of the database was sourced from

bull Corrosion Handbook (Compass Corrosion Guide La Mesa CAUSA)

bull Fluid data sheets and information from dept MSAEndress+Hauser Flowtec AG

bull Corrosion data base of Endress+Hauser Conducta

bull Various Internet Links

bull Various Corrosion data bases

The database distinguishes between three different corrosion classes (ABC) depending on the application

and the wetted flowmeter material The main parameter of the material resistance is the process

temperature The definition of the corrosion classes are structured as follows

Metal

Class Description depth of corrosion per surface

A resistant lt= 005mmyear (lt=0002 inchesyear)

B insufficiently resistant lt= 05mmyear (lt=002 inchesyear)

C not resistant lt= 127mmyear (lt=005 inchesyear)

NR not recommended

U unknown

Plastics

Class Description volumetric swelling and loss of tensile strength

A resistant lt= 15volyear lt=15 loss of tensile strengthyear

B insufficiently resistant lt= 30year

lt=30 loss of tensile strength year

C not resistant lt= 50year

lt=50 loss of tensile strength year

NR not recommended

U unknown

Caution we recommend that only fluid material combinations within corrosion class A are used

112 Using Corrosion Check

Corrosion Check is started in by clicking the tab Corrosion Check The precondition for using the corrosion

information is a selected application on the Sizing page (selection of fluid and flowmeter) and the availability

of information in the Corrosion Check database If no entry for your combination is available the tab does not

appear at the top of the page

Depending on the selected fluid and process temperatures (min nom max) Corrosion Check assigns the

corrosion classes (A B C) to the possible materials of the selected flow principle This is displayed in a table

The table also shows the temperature limits for each corrosion class and material for the selected fluid

The Sensor material on the Sizing page is also checked for resistance as a fluid-wetted material in the corrosion

database If the result of the corrosion check does not correspond to the corrosion class A a warning message

is indicated in the warning field of the sizing page If the class is ldquoUrdquo ie unknown there is no warning

message

The results of Corrosion Check can be printed as a separate report by clicking on Print Sizing In the Project

module it can be printed together with the main documentation of the flowmeter sizing

Back to top

12 Settings (Sizing Flow)

The settings for Applicator in general and for the different sizing modules in particular can be accessed via the

button at the top left-hand corner of the Applicator header Open the Settings drop-down menu and select

Sizing Flow

The settings can be saved with the Save as Default button on the various pages If you want to use this

function you must to accept internet cookies Please adjust your current internet browser The default settings

saved are loaded with the Load Default button

Setting Impact when activated

Basic functions

Donrsquot show products with status ldquoorderstoprdquo Shows only current scope of supply

Activate PED (Pressure Equipement Directive)- PED PED results are displayed on the Sizing page Order

classification PED device check code page and printouts

Activate display of min and max values on Sizing page - input of application limits

The fields for min and max process limits are displayed If you start per ldquodefaultrdquo the min nom and max values are equal You can put in other values to validate the flowmeter operation limits

No indication of default start data input of data by user

By activating this option the start data for sizing can be entered by the user manually

Advanced functions

Activate display for measured error at very low velocity in the measuring tube (lt low flow cut of)

The measured error is displayed on the Sizing page and Chart page for the Coriolis and Electromagnetic principles

Activate order code complementation On the Extended order code page the order code can be complemented with predefined order code templates

My View

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

DP Flow

Activate enhanced functions- ventdrain hole bidirectional flow enhanced gas parameters

Activates said functions

Deactivate parameter entry assistant functions Normally a parameter entry assistant appears in DP

flow sizing Clicking the checkbox deactivates it

Password The password can be provided by your SC-Applicator contact person

Back to top

13 Fluid and Gas Property Engines

131 General

Applicator Sizing Flow contains two engines each containing a list of fluids for the fluid property calculation

Fluid engine rarr Support of all liquids special gases and steam (saturated and superheated)

Gas engine rarr Support of general gases and gas mixtures

132 Fluid engine

General Information

The Fluid engine works independently from the Gas engine The Fluid engines algorithms for calculating the

fluid properties as a function of process conditions are based on the determination of the acentric factor

Omega Omega depends on critical pressure critical temperature and boiling point Omega is used for both

liquids and for gases

Viscosity and density are determined by linear coefficients each coefficient is defined by two pairs of data

Liquid Calculation

Calculation of the acentric factor Omega

Vapor Pressure depends on Omega operation temperature and critical pressure

Sound velocity is based on a fourth degree polynomial whereby

bull TOper in degC Operating temperature indegC

bull K0 K1 K2 K3 K4 Coefficients from database

bull vsound_liquid (Sound velocity) in ms

bull

The linear expansion coefficient Alpha is calculated by the DensityTemperature pairs

Density is dependent on the expansion coefficient and on the process temperature

bull r_1 (Density 1) in kgm3

bull Alpha in 1K

bull T1 (Temperature 1) in K

bull Toper in K

bull r_Oper (Dens op cond) in kgm3

The viscosity factors Al and Bl are calculated by the ViscosityTemperature pairs

Kinematic viscosity is dependent on the density viscosity factors and operation temperature

bull r_oper (Density) in kgm3

bull AL (Viscosity factor)

bull BL (Viscosity factor)

bull Toper in K

bull n_kin (Viscosity) in cSt

Gas calculation

The gas is calculated as a real gas Calculation of the acentric factor Omega The viscosity factors a and n are calculated from the ViscosityTemperature pairs The compressibility factor Z depends on Omega on critical temperature on process temperature and

pressure Density is dependent upon the compressibility factor Z density (rhozero) operation pressure and

temperature

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull Zoper (Compressibility)

Z_zero (Compressibility) zero (27315 K) and PZero (1013 bara)

Toper in K

bull r_Ref (Operating Dens) in kgm3

Sound velocity is dependent on kappa (adiabatic index) process density and process pressure

bull r_zero (Density) in kgm3

bull POper (Operating Press) in bara

bull c Kappa

Steam Calculation

Applicatorrsquos fluid engine calculates the properties of steam according to the IAPWS standard

The IAPWS (International Association for the Properties of Water and Steam) developed a new standard

(IAPWS - IF 97) for calculation of thermodynamic properties of water and steam for industrial use

The equations of IAPWS - IF 97 are valid in a range from

bull Temperatures 27315 ndash107315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 100 MPa and

bull Temperatures 107315 ndash 227315 K for pressures from 0 ndash 10 MPa

This range is divided into 5 regions The following flowcharts describe algorithms for steam calculations only

That means Region 1 (water) is not covered in the following algorithms

Water in Region 1 is handled like a liquid in Applicator

133 Gas engine

The gas engine works independently of the Fluid engine It is used for nearly all gases that are offered in the

fluid list User defined gases are treated by the fluid engine

The gas engine is based on sources which are used also by the t-mass 65 device itself The calculation results of

the gas engine ensure a highly precise determination of gas and gas mixture properties for all permitted

process conditions User defined gas mixtures are treated by the gas engine

Back to top

14 Print Sizing

The sizing results can be printed immediately as a PDF from the Sizing Flow page The printout is configured

and started by clicking on the Print Sizing button at the bottom of the page

The following can be set on the Applicator Print Settings page that opens

bull Page format size margins orientation and format

bull Reports to print checkbox activation of the various reports available for the selected flowmeter

bull Miscellaneous checkbox activation of header and messages in the report

Note If you activate ldquoPrint no warningsmessages (Flow)rdquo the following warning message is printed

bdquoAttention for Flow Device is used in non-ideal application conditionsldquo

bull Header Data fields for entering the data for the header of the printout

Save as Default saves your settings for future use ndash the fields can still be edited Reset clears the entered

Header Data Print starts the printing to PDF Cancel closes the page

Please note If the project module is available (local version) comprehensive print reports of several TAGs are

possible Please check the help manual of the Project module

Back to top

15 PED (European Pressure Equipment Directive)

The European Pressure Equipment Directive (PED) PED 9723EG respectively 201468 must be observed by

manufacturer and distributersusers It came into effect in all EC member countries on May 29th 2002

The pressure equipment directive affects Endress+Hauser flowmeters and influences their choice and selection

options For this reason a help has been implemented in Applicator For all six measuring principles Applicator

takes into account the 9723EC pressure-equipment directive (PED) allowing the choice of a suitable

flowmeter This Applicator functionality facilitates the coordination of the users application and

Endress+Hauser flowmeters with the directives requests If you do not require this PED function you can

switch it off in the settings menu for Sizing Flow

The following PED issues are implemented in Applicator

1 Categorisation of the application

2 Checking the selected flowmeter against PED categorisation requests

bull Check the chosen process connection against requested category bull If a special order code option is necessary due to the PED result the order code is defined with this

option

PED Categories

Some flowmeters and applications are not subject to PED therefore nothing special has to be considered

during the sizing and ordering process They include

bull All ultrasonic flowmeters

bull All devices with nominal diameters up to and including DN 251rdquo

bull Plants to supply distribute or dispose of water

bull Pressure equipment and assemblies with maximum permitted pressure of PS lt=05 bar where PS is the

static pressure and is given by the applied gauge pressure

bull All devices mounted on a vessel or in a pipeline but without their own pressurized volume

The PED categorisation depends on the type of device (nominal diameter) and the application (Process data

danger posed by the medium as well as vapor pressure)

Category I II or III ratings require attention during ordering as approvals and tests meeting PED requirements

have to be met When entering an application Applicator determines the necessary category for the chosen

device Subsequently it is verified whether depending on nominal diameter material process connection and

nominal pressure the chosen measuring device is available in the determined category If this is not the case

a warning is shown on Sizing page and on the sizing sheet

All PED results are shown in detail on the sizing page and the printout

Pre-conditions for Applicator PED categorizing (Very important)

Applicator calculations are based on the userrsquos inputs of nominal conditions on the Sizing pages Pressure and

temperature are the main parameters

If the user wants to find PED category which exactly corresponds to his process he has to fill in the required

data in the min nom and max columns

If the user wants to find PED category corresponding to higher requirements he has to fill in the

necessary data in the max column or select a higher pressure rating

Danger posed by the fluid

The fluids in the Applicator database are divided into Group 1 (dangerous) or Group 2 (not dangerous) In the

case of gases the stability of the gas is also important

The correct assignment to a fluid group can be done with Applicator or with the help of the ldquoH-ratesrdquo

according to EG Nr 12722008 (CLP regulation)

All the following H -designations are listed Fluids or mixtures which are listed with one of these H designations

belong strictly to Fluid Group 1 of PED Fluid Group 1 also covers all materials if the process temperature is

above the flashpoint of the substance or mixture

bull H200-H205 (explosive)

bull H220-H221 (flammable gas)

bull H224-H226 H228 (flammable liquid steam)

bull H240-H242 H250 (can cause a fire or explosion when heated)

bull H260-H261 (flammable in contact with water)

bull H271-H272 (can cause a fire or explosion oxidizing)

bull H300 H310 H330 H372 (acute toxicity)

In addition to the H designation warning symbols are displayed The meaning of the symbols is explained in

Danger Symbols below

In the folder ldquoFluid Propertiesrdquo it is also possible to define customer specific fluids and assign them to the PED

fluid groups

rarr If you want to define your own fluids see Creating User Defined Fluids

Order code

If the categorization shows that the measuring device has to be ordered with a special PED approval option

this will be automatically indicated on the Order code page

With these functions Applicator users receive a full technical sizing of the requested device (product family

nominal diameter and process connection) which takes the Pressure Equipment Directive into consideration

If you need more information about PED then contact your nearest Endress+Hauser Sales Center

Danger Symbols

Danger symbol Explanation H-rates

C corrosive H 314

Cl chemical instable

E explosive H200-H205

F+ extremely flammable H 220-H223

F flammable H 225-H228

N environmental

dangerous

O oxidizing H271-H272

T+ very poisonous H300 H310 H330

H372

T poisonous

Xi irritating

Xn injurious to health

Back to top

16 Online Update

The update process is important and allows every local user to run the latest version of Applicator

Online Applicator users always work with the latest version containing the newest functionalities bug fixes

and updated system databases with the latest products

The latest information about Applicator developments and maintenance can be obtained via the Applicator

newsletter which can be subscribed to during installation and later by clicking the appropriate box in the

Settings menu

Page 32: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 33: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 34: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 35: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 36: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 37: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 38: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 39: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 40: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 41: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 42: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 43: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 44: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 45: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 46: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 47: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 48: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 49: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 50: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 51: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 52: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 53: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 54: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 55: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 56: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 57: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 58: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 59: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 60: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 61: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 62: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 63: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 64: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 65: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 66: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 67: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 68: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 69: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 70: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 71: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 72: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 73: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 74: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use
Page 75: Applicator Help pages of Dimensioning of Flow meters · Sizing Flow is the Applicator module for dimensioning Endress+Hauser instruments. You will be supported in many different use